Event Master Devices

User's Guide

ENABLING BRIGHT OUTCOMES

Barco Inc, Image Processing
3078 Prospect Park Drive, Rancho Cordova, CA , 95670, USA
www.barco.com/en/support
www.barco.com

Registered office: Barco NV

President Kennedypark 35, 8500 Kortrijk, Belgium
www.barco.com/en/support
www.barco.com
Changes
Barco provides this manual 'as is' without warranty of any kind, either expressed or implied, including but not
limited to the implied warranties or merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. Barco may make
improvements and/or changes to the product(s) and/or the program(s) described in this publication at any time
without notice.
This publication could contain technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Changes are periodically made
to the information in this publication; these changes are incorporated in new editions of this publication.
The latest edition of Barco manuals can be downloaded from the Barco web site www.barco.com or from the
secured Barco web site https://www.barco.com/en/signin.

Copyright ©
All rights reserved. No part of this document may be copied, reproduced or translated. It shall not otherwise be
recorded, transmitted or stored in a retrieval system without the prior written consent of Barco.

Guarantee and Compensation

Barco provides a guarantee relating to perfect manufacturing as part of the legally stipulated terms of
guarantee. On receipt, the purchaser must immediately inspect all delivered goods for damage incurred during
transport, as well as for material and manufacturing faults Barco must be informed immediately in writing of
any complaints.
The period of guarantee begins on the date of transfer of risks, in the case of special systems and software on
the date of commissioning, at latest 30 days after the transfer of risks. In the event of justified notice of
complaint, Barco can repair the fault or provide a replacement at its own discretion within an appropriate
period. If this measure proves to be impossible or unsuccessful, the purchaser can demand a reduction in the
purchase price or cancellation of the contract. All other claims, in particular those relating to compensation for
direct or indirect damage, and also damage attributed to the operation of software as well as to other services
provided by Barco, being a component of the system or independent service, will be deemed invalid provided
the damage is not proven to be attributed to the absence of properties guaranteed in writing or due to the
intent or gross negligence or part of Barco.
If the purchaser or a third party carries out modifications or repairs on goods delivered by Barco, or if the
goods are handled incorrectly, in particular if the systems are operated incorrectly or if, after the transfer of
risks, the goods are subject to influences not agreed upon in the contract, all guarantee claims of the
purchaser will be rendered invalid. Not included in the guarantee coverage are system failures which are
attributed to programs or special electronic circuitry provided by the purchaser, e.g. interfaces. Normal wear
as well as normal maintenance are not subject to the guarantee provided by Barco either.
The environmental conditions as well as the servicing and maintenance regulations specified in this manual
must be complied with by the customer.

Trademarks
Brand and product names mentioned in this manual may be trademarks, registered trademarks or copyrights
of their respective holders. All brand and product names mentioned in this manual serve as comments or
examples and are not to be understood as advertising for the products or their manufacturers.

Software License Agreement

You should carefully read the following terms and conditions before using this software. Your use of this
software indicates your acceptance of this license agreement and warranty.
Terms and Conditions:
1. No redistribution of the software is allowed.
2. Reverse-Engineering. You may not reverse engineer, decompile, disassemble or alter this software
product.
Disclaimer of Warranty:
This software and the accompanying files are sold “as is” and without warranties as to performance or
merchantability or any other warranties whether expressed or implied. In no event shall Barco be liable for
damage of any kind, loss of data, loss of profits, business interruption or other pecuniary loss arising directly or
indirectly. Any liability of the seller will be exclusively limited to replacement of the product or refund of
purchase price.
Federal Communications Commission (FCC Statement)
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a class A digital device, pursuant to
Part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful
interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses,
and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction
manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential
area may cause harmful interference, in which case the user will be responsible for correcting any interference
at his own expense
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user's authority to operate the equipment

FCC responsible: Barco Inc.

3059 Premiere Parkway Suite 400
30097 Duluth GA, United States
Tel: +1 678 475 8000

EN55032/CISPR32 Class A Multimedia Equipment

Warning: This equipment is compliant with Class A of CISPR 32. In a residential environment this equipment
may cause radio interference.

Warning statement:
EMC Registration is done on this equipment for business use only. It may cause interference when the product
would be used in home.
• This warning statement applies to a product for business use.

Patent protection
Please refer to www.barco.com/about-barco/legal/patents
 Table of contents

1 Introduction........................................................................................................................................................................................................13
1.1 About this guide .................................................................................................................................................................................14
1.2 Record of changes ...........................................................................................................................................................................14
1.3 Symbols, pictures and fonts........................................................................................................................................................18
1.4 The 4K screen management system.....................................................................................................................................19

2 Safety......................................................................................................................................................................................................................21
2.1 General considerations .................................................................................................................................................................22
2.2 Important safety instructions ......................................................................................................................................................22

3 General ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................25
3.1 Event Master devices overview ................................................................................................................................................26
3.2 Event Master series processors features............................................................................................................................30
3.3 Event Master controllers features............................................................................................................................................36
3.4 Terms and definitions......................................................................................................................................................................38
3.5 Control overview................................................................................................................................................................................41
3.6 Presentation System overview..................................................................................................................................................42
3.7 Installation requirements ..............................................................................................................................................................43
3.8 Initial inspection .................................................................................................................................................................................43
3.9 Rack-Mount Procedure .................................................................................................................................................................47

4 Hardware orientation...................................................................................................................................................................................51
4.1 Front panel............................................................................................................................................................................................52
4.2 Rear panel ............................................................................................................................................................................................53
4.3 SDI Input Card....................................................................................................................................................................................58
4.4 Dual Link DVI Input Card..............................................................................................................................................................60
4.5 HDMI/DisplayPort Input Card.....................................................................................................................................................62
4.6 Quad Channel DisplayPort 1.2 Input Card .........................................................................................................................63
4.7 Quad HDMI 2.0 Input Card..........................................................................................................................................................65
4.8 Tri-Combo Input Card.....................................................................................................................................................................66
4.9 Quad Channel DisplayPort 1.2 Output Card .....................................................................................................................69
4.10 HDMI Output Card............................................................................................................................................................................70
4.11 Quad HDMI 2.0 Output Card......................................................................................................................................................71
4.12 SDI Output Card ................................................................................................................................................................................72
4.13 Tri-Combo Output Card.................................................................................................................................................................73
4.14 Expansion Link card........................................................................................................................................................................76
4.15 VPU card ...............................................................................................................................................................................................77

5 Front Panel Menu orientation................................................................................................................................................................79

5.1 Power-up initialization ....................................................................................................................................................................80
5.2 Front Panel menu tree ...................................................................................................................................................................80

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 5

 5.3 Using menu system .........................................................................................................................................................................81
5.4 About Status menu ..........................................................................................................................................................................84
5.5 About Setup menu............................................................................................................................................................................84
5.6 About the System menu................................................................................................................................................................85
5.7 System menu > Black Invalid.....................................................................................................................................................85
5.8 System menu > USB device (Backup/Restore)...............................................................................................................86
5.9 System menu > Ethernet..............................................................................................................................................................89
5.10 System menu > VFD brightness (display brightness) ..................................................................................................90
5.11 System menu > Diagnostics .......................................................................................................................................................90
5.12 System menu > Lock front panel..............................................................................................................................................94
5.13 Using the Tech Support menu ...................................................................................................................................................94
5.14 Restoring Factory Default Settings.........................................................................................................................................95
5.15 Firmware Upgrade ...........................................................................................................................................................................96
5.16 Save All...................................................................................................................................................................................................96

6 EM GUI orientation........................................................................................................................................................................................97
6.1 General requirements ....................................................................................................................................................................99
6.2 Download of Event Master Toolset Software ....................................................................................................................99
6.3 Software installation ..................................................................................................................................................................... 100
6.4 Starting up.......................................................................................................................................................................................... 100
6.5 Screen layout presentation....................................................................................................................................................... 100
6.6 Controls ............................................................................................................................................................................................... 102
6.7 Configuration Menu ...................................................................................................................................................................... 103
6.8 Configuration Menu > Network resource area .............................................................................................................. 105
6.9 Configuration Menu > System diagram area.................................................................................................................. 106
6.10 Configuration Menu > System modifier area.................................................................................................................. 109
6.11 Configuration Menu > Adjustment area..............................................................................................................................110
6.12 Configuration Menu > Adjustment > Unit Configuration ...........................................................................................111
6.13 Configuration Menu > Adjustment > Input Configuration .........................................................................................113
6.14 Configuration Menu > Adjustment > Background Configuration......................................................................... 123
6.15 Configuration Menu > Adjustment > Output Configuration .................................................................................... 125
6.16 Configuration Menu > Adjustment > Destination Configuration .......................................................................... 132
6.17 Configuration Menu > Adjustment > Destination Configuration > Adjust Panel ......................................... 144
6.18 Configuration Menu > Adjustment > External Devices configuration ............................................................... 157
6.19 Configuration Menu > Linking................................................................................................................................................. 160
6.20 Programming Menu...................................................................................................................................................................... 178
6.21 Programming Menu > Resources area ............................................................................................................................. 179
6.22 Programming Menu > Diagram area .................................................................................................................................. 192
6.23 Programming Menu > Layer Modifier area...................................................................................................................... 195
6.24 Programming Menu > Adjustment area ............................................................................................................................ 198
6.25 Programming Menu > Adjustment area > Layer configuration ............................................................................ 199
6.26 Programming Menu > Adjustment area > Dest Group configuration................................................................ 207
6.27 Programming Menu > Adjustment area > Background configuration .............................................................. 210
6.28 Programming Menu > Adjustment area > User Keys configuration .................................................................. 212
6.29 Programming Menu > Adjustment area > Presets configuration ........................................................................ 215
6.30 Programming Menu > Adjustment area > Source adjustment ............................................................................. 217
6.31 Programming Menu > Adjustment area > Global Transition Rate/Trans/Cut .............................................. 219
6.32 Cue Menu........................................................................................................................................................................................... 220
6.33 Cue Menu > Adjustment area ................................................................................................................................................. 221
6.34 Cue Menu > System modifier area ...................................................................................................................................... 222
6.35 Cue Menu > Network resource area ................................................................................................................................... 224
6.36 Multiviewer (MVR) Menu ........................................................................................................................................................... 225
6.37 Multiviewer Menu > Resource area..................................................................................................................................... 226
6.38 Multiviewer Menu > Multiviewer Layout area ................................................................................................................. 227

6 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 6.39 Multiviewer Menu > Modifier area ........................................................................................................................................ 229
6.40 Multiviewer Menu > Adjustment area ................................................................................................................................. 229
6.41 Multiviewer Menu > Adjustment area > Output Color................................................................................................ 230
6.42 Multiviewer Menu > Adjustment area > Window adjustment ................................................................................ 231
6.43 Controller Menu .............................................................................................................................................................................. 232
6.44 Settings Menu.................................................................................................................................................................................. 233
6.45 Settings Menu > Web App area............................................................................................................................................. 238
6.46 Settings Menu > Web App area > Dashboard............................................................................................................... 239
6.47 Settings Menu > Web App area > Tools............................................................................................................................ 243
6.48 Settings Menu > Web App area > Tools > Manage Software ............................................................................... 244
6.49 Settings Menu > Web App area > Tools > Backup & Restore .............................................................................. 246
6.50 Settings Menu > Web App area > Help ............................................................................................................................. 247
6.51 Settings Menu > Web App area > Contact us................................................................................................................ 248
6.52 Settings Menu > Web App area > Follow us .................................................................................................................. 249

7 System Setup................................................................................................................................................................................................. 251

7.1 Setup Prerequisites ...................................................................................................................................................................... 252
7.2 System setup sequence............................................................................................................................................................. 252
7.3 Power up and Status check ..................................................................................................................................................... 253
7.4 Return to factory default............................................................................................................................................................. 254
7.5 Communication setup ................................................................................................................................................................. 254
7.6 Restoring the system ................................................................................................................................................................... 255
7.7 User preference setup................................................................................................................................................................. 256
7.8 Saving the setup............................................................................................................................................................................. 256
7.9 Backing up the system................................................................................................................................................................ 257
7.10 Configuration Menu > Initial Setup ...................................................................................................................................... 257
7.11 Configuration Menu > Add Background(s) ...................................................................................................................... 258
7.12 Configuration Menu > Add Inputs ......................................................................................................................................... 259
7.13 Configuration Menu > Add Outputs ..................................................................................................................................... 260
7.14 Configuration Menu > Add Screen Destinations & Layers ..................................................................................... 263
7.15 Configuration Menu > Layer optimization ........................................................................................................................ 266
7.16 Configuration Menu > Add Aux Destinations ................................................................................................................. 267
7.17 Configuration Menu > Add MVR Outputs......................................................................................................................... 269
7.18 Programming Menu > Capture Stillstore from Inputs & Backgrounds ............................................................. 270
7.19 Programming Menu > Select Thumbnails for Backgrounds .................................................................................. 271
7.20 Programming Menu > Select Thumbnails for Inputs.................................................................................................. 271
7.21 Programming Menu > Create Sources from Inputs.................................................................................................... 272
7.22 Programming Menu > Drop backgrounds into Screen Destinations................................................................. 273
7.23 Programming Menu > Drop Sources, Layers into Screen Destinations & Sources into
layers...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 273
7.24 Programming Menu > Drop Inputs to Aux Destinations........................................................................................... 275
7.25 Programming Menu > Presets And User Keys ............................................................................................................. 276
7.26 Programming Menu > Destination Transition ................................................................................................................ 277
7.27 Multiviewer Menu > Drop Inputs, Backgrounds and Destinations .................................................................... 277

8 Updating firmware...................................................................................................................................................................................... 279

8.1 Upgrading firmware using the USB port ........................................................................................................................... 280
8.2 Upgrading firmware using the web Upgrade.................................................................................................................. 281

9 General operation example.................................................................................................................................................................. 285

9.1 Event requirements ...................................................................................................................................................................... 286
9.2 Preliminary......................................................................................................................................................................................... 286
9.3 Control Software Operation ..................................................................................................................................................... 287
9.4 Configuration Menu ...................................................................................................................................................................... 289
9.5 Programming Menu...................................................................................................................................................................... 294

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 7

 9.6 Multiviewer (MVR) Menu ........................................................................................................................................................... 305

10 Controller Orientation ............................................................................................................................................................................. 309

10.1 General description ...................................................................................................................................................................... 310
10.2 EC-30 front panel overview...................................................................................................................................................... 312
10.3 EC-30 backside overview.......................................................................................................................................................... 313
10.4 EC-50 front panel overview...................................................................................................................................................... 314
10.5 EC-50 backside overview.......................................................................................................................................................... 315
10.6 EC-200/EC-210 front panel overview................................................................................................................................. 316
10.7 EC-200/EC-210 backside overview .................................................................................................................................... 317
10.8 Use of color ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 318
10.9 Touch screen .................................................................................................................................................................................... 319
10.10 Destinations buttons..................................................................................................................................................................... 319
10.11 Layer buttons.................................................................................................................................................................................... 320
10.12 Assign buttons with contextual displays............................................................................................................................ 321
10.13 T-Bar ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 322
10.14 Transition buttons .......................................................................................................................................................................... 323
10.15 Future Expansion Button Group (EC-200/EC-210 only).......................................................................................... 324
10.16 Direct Selection Button Group and Barco Eye Button (EC-200/EC-210 only) ............................................ 324
10.17 System Function Button Group (EC-200/EC-210 only) ........................................................................................... 326
10.18 Syntax Entry Button Group (EC-200/EC-210 only) .................................................................................................... 327
10.19 Contextual Display Button Group (EC-200/EC-210 only) ....................................................................................... 327
10.20 Num Pad Button Group (EC-200/EC-210 only)............................................................................................................ 328
10.21 Live Function Button Group (EC-200/EC-210 only)................................................................................................... 329
10.22 Trackball (EC-200/EC-210 only) ........................................................................................................................................... 330
10.23 Rotary Encoders (EC-200/EC-210 only) .......................................................................................................................... 331
10.24 Panel Lock button (EC-200/EC-210 only)........................................................................................................................ 332
10.25 Save Button (EC-200/EC-210 only) .................................................................................................................................... 332

11 Controller Configuration........................................................................................................................................................................ 335

11.1 General................................................................................................................................................................................................ 336
11.2 EC-30 controller connection .................................................................................................................................................... 336
11.3 EC-50 controller connection .................................................................................................................................................... 337
11.4 EC-200/EC-210 controller connection ............................................................................................................................... 337
11.5 Touchscreen calibration ............................................................................................................................................................. 338
11.6 Lights .................................................................................................................................................................................................... 339
11.7 Assigning resources to the desk .......................................................................................................................................... 341

12 Controller Operation ................................................................................................................................................................................ 343

12.1 General Overview.......................................................................................................................................................................... 344
12.2 EC-200/EC-210 Firmware Upgrade.................................................................................................................................... 344
12.3 How to power down the EC-200/EC-210 ......................................................................................................................... 344
12.4 How to reboot the EC-200/EC-210 CPU .......................................................................................................................... 345
12.5 How to select destinations ........................................................................................................................................................ 346
12.6 How to use the Layer buttons ................................................................................................................................................. 346
12.7 What are Layer executers? ...................................................................................................................................................... 347
12.8 How to use assign buttons........................................................................................................................................................ 347
12.9 How to use the page arrow buttons ..................................................................................................................................... 348
12.10 How to use transition buttons.................................................................................................................................................. 348
12.11 How to use the T-bar.................................................................................................................................................................... 348
12.12 How to use the Contextual Display Buttons.................................................................................................................... 349
12.13 EC-200/EC-210 Philosophy..................................................................................................................................................... 349
12.14 Function Button For Syntax...................................................................................................................................................... 351
12.15 Additional direct access and functionality ........................................................................................................................ 357

8 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

13 Preventive maintenance actions ..................................................................................................................................................... 363
13.1 E2 maintenance actions............................................................................................................................................................. 364
13.2 S3 maintenance actions............................................................................................................................................................. 364
13.3 EX maintenance actions ............................................................................................................................................................ 365
13.4 EC-30 maintenance actions..................................................................................................................................................... 365
13.5 EC-50 maintenance actions..................................................................................................................................................... 365
13.6 EC-200/EC-210 maintenance actions ............................................................................................................................... 366

14 E2 Maintenance ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 367

14.1 E2 unit Overview ............................................................................................................................................................................ 369
14.2 Process Overview.......................................................................................................................................................................... 370
14.3 Spare Parts Serviceable by All Users ............................................................................................................................... 371
14.4 Rear I/O and Link Cards ............................................................................................................................................................ 372
14.5 Rear I/O, VPU and Link card Heatsink Fan ................................................................................................................... 373
14.6 Tri-Combo Input and Tri-Combo Output Card Disassembly and Assembly ................................................. 375
14.7 Front Cover Assembly................................................................................................................................................................. 380
14.8 Front Brackets ................................................................................................................................................................................. 382
14.9 3RU Fan Tray................................................................................................................................................................................... 383
14.10 1RU Fan Tray................................................................................................................................................................................... 384
14.11 VPU Card(s)...................................................................................................................................................................................... 386
14.12 Front Panel Knob ........................................................................................................................................................................... 387
14.13 Front Panel Mount ........................................................................................................................................................................ 388
14.14 Front Panel Board ........................................................................................................................................................................ 389
14.15 VFD Display Assembly ............................................................................................................................................................... 391
14.16 VFD Display Filter.......................................................................................................................................................................... 392
14.17 Bottom Panel.................................................................................................................................................................................... 392
14.18 Solid-State Memory ..................................................................................................................................................................... 393
14.19 System Battery ............................................................................................................................................................................... 395
14.20 CPU Module .................................................................................................................................................................................... 396
14.21 Power Supply ................................................................................................................................................................................... 397
14.22 System-Power Board ................................................................................................................................................................. 399
14.23 Genlock Assembly ....................................................................................................................................................................... 403
14.24 USB Cable ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 406
14.25 USB Extension Cable ................................................................................................................................................................. 408
14.26 VFD Cable ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 409
14.27 Keyboard Cable ............................................................................................................................................................................. 412
14.28 Genlock Cable ................................................................................................................................................................................ 414
14.29 Ethernet Cable ............................................................................................................................................................................... 415
14.30 3RU Fan Cable .............................................................................................................................................................................. 416
14.31 1RU Fan Cable................................................................................................................................................................................ 419
14.32 Rear Rack Ears ............................................................................................................................................................................. 422
14.33 Front Rack-Ears ............................................................................................................................................................................ 423
14.34 Top Cover ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 424
14.35 Top Card Guide............................................................................................................................................................................... 425
14.36 Motherboard Fan .......................................................................................................................................................................... 426

15 S3 Maintenance ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 429

15.1 S3 unit Overview ............................................................................................................................................................................ 431
15.2 Process Overview.......................................................................................................................................................................... 432
15.3 Spare Parts Serviceable by All Users ............................................................................................................................... 433
15.4 Rear I/O, Link and VPU Cards ............................................................................................................................................... 434
15.5 Rear I/O, VPU and Link card Heatsink Fan .................................................................................................................... 436
15.6 Tri-Combo Input and Tri-Combo Output Card Disassembly and Assembly ................................................. 437
15.7 Front Cover Assembly................................................................................................................................................................. 437

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 9

 15.8 Front Brackets ................................................................................................................................................................................. 439
15.9 3RU Fan Tray................................................................................................................................................................................... 440
15.10 Front Panel Knob ........................................................................................................................................................................... 442
15.11 Front Panel Mount ........................................................................................................................................................................ 443
15.12 Front Panel Board ........................................................................................................................................................................ 444
15.13 VFD Display Assembly ............................................................................................................................................................... 445
15.14 VFD Display Filter.......................................................................................................................................................................... 446
15.15 USB Cable ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 447
15.16 USB Extension Cable ................................................................................................................................................................. 449
15.17 Power Supply ................................................................................................................................................................................... 451
15.18 Genlock Assembly ....................................................................................................................................................................... 452
15.19 Rear Rack Ears ............................................................................................................................................................................. 455
15.20 Front Rack-Ears ............................................................................................................................................................................ 455
15.21 Top Cover ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 456
15.22 Top Card Guide............................................................................................................................................................................... 457
15.23 Motherboard Fan .......................................................................................................................................................................... 458
15.24 Power Interposer Assembly..................................................................................................................................................... 460
15.25 Power Supply Guide .................................................................................................................................................................... 462
15.26 Side support plate.......................................................................................................................................................................... 465
15.27 Link Card Interposer..................................................................................................................................................................... 466
15.28 CPU Module...................................................................................................................................................................................... 467
15.29 Solid-State Memory ..................................................................................................................................................................... 469
15.30 System Battery ............................................................................................................................................................................... 470
15.31 VFD Cable ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 471
15.32 Keyboard Cable ............................................................................................................................................................................. 474
15.33 3RU Fan Cable .............................................................................................................................................................................. 477
15.34 Ethernet Cable ............................................................................................................................................................................... 480
15.35 Genlock Cable ................................................................................................................................................................................ 483

16 EX Maintenance........................................................................................................................................................................................... 487
16.1 EX unit Overview............................................................................................................................................................................ 489
16.2 Process Overview.......................................................................................................................................................................... 490
16.3 Spare Parts Serviceable by All Users ................................................................................................................................ 490
16.4 Event Master Cards...................................................................................................................................................................... 491
16.5 Tri-Combo Input and Tri-Combo Output Card Disassembly and Assembly ................................................. 493
16.6 Top Cover ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 493
16.7 Power Supply ................................................................................................................................................................................... 494
16.8 CPU Module...................................................................................................................................................................................... 496
16.9 System Battery................................................................................................................................................................................ 497
16.10 Motherboard ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 498
16.11 Motherboard Fansink................................................................................................................................................................... 503

17 EC-30 Maintenance ................................................................................................................................................................................... 507

17.1 Servicing ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 508

18 EC-50 Maintenance ................................................................................................................................................................................... 509

18.1 Servicing ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 510

19 EC-200/EC-210 Maintenance .............................................................................................................................................................. 513

19.1 Servicing ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 514

20 Environmental information.................................................................................................................................................................. 517

20.1 Disposal information..................................................................................................................................................................... 518
20.2 RoHS compliance.......................................................................................................................................................................... 518
20.3 Contact information ...................................................................................................................................................................... 519

10 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

A Specifications................................................................................................................................................................................................ 521
A.1 Specifications of E2 ...................................................................................................................................................................... 522
A.2 Specifications of E2 Jr................................................................................................................................................................. 523
A.3 Specifications of S3–4K ............................................................................................................................................................. 524
A.4 Specifications of S3–4K Jr........................................................................................................................................................ 525
A.5 Specifications of EX...................................................................................................................................................................... 527
A.6 Specifications of EC-30 .............................................................................................................................................................. 528
A.7 Specifications of EC-50 .............................................................................................................................................................. 528
A.8 Specifications of EC-200 ........................................................................................................................................................... 529
A.9 Specifications of EC-210 ........................................................................................................................................................... 530
A.10 Specifications of standard connections............................................................................................................................. 531
A.11 Standard connector pinouts..................................................................................................................................................... 532

B Remote Control Protocol....................................................................................................................................................................... 537

B.1 Event Master series processor ASCII remote control ............................................................................................... 538
B.2 Event Master series processor JSON RPC remote control ................................................................................... 539

C Troubleshooting........................................................................................................................................................................................... 553
C.1 Troubleshooting List..................................................................................................................................................................... 554

D Third Party Software Acknowledgements................................................................................................................................. 557

D.1 Third Party Software list ............................................................................................................................................................. 558

E Warranty ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 559

E.1 About Warranty and RMA ......................................................................................................................................................... 560

Index...................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 561

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 11

12 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices
 Introduction 1
Overview
• About this guide
• Record of changes
• Symbols, pictures and fonts
• The 4K screen management system

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 13

 Introduction

1.1 About this guide

This manual
This User's guide describes how to install and operate the Event Master units (E2 and S3 series) and their
controllers (EC-50 and EC-200). The User's Guide is designed to be a reference tool in the everyday work of
the user with the product. It contains a complete description of the hardware components and the control
software. The manual also includes all the necessary instructions on how to upgrade firmware, install spare
parts and perform any hardware upgrades.

Barco provides a 3-year parts and labor warranty for all hardware components. Please refer to the
Appendix B (“Warranty”, page 559) for specific details regarding the warranty terms.

Available System documentation

This guide is part of the documentation set describing the Event Master products.
Guide Article number
User Guide R5905948
E2 Quick Start Guide 26-1205004-00
S3 Quick Start Guide 26-1401004-00
EX Quick Start Guide 26-1502004-00
EC-30 Quick Start Guide 60600356
EC-50 Quick Start Guide 60600332
EC-200 Quick Start Guide 60600333
E2 Safety Guide R5905947
S3 series Safety Guide R5906016
EC series Safety Guide R5906018
EX Safety Guide R5906020
Service Guide R5905949 (Only available to Customer Service
partners)

A printed copy of Safety Guides and Quick Start Guides is included in the shipping box of the Event Master
devices. Please check online for the other documents.

Always check for the latest version of all documents on www.barco.com.

1.2 Record of changes

Overview
Revision Changes
00 Initial version
01 • Changes initiated by:
- New software version (V2.0).
- S3-4K and EC-50 product releases.
• In the entire of the document, the references to E2 have been replaced by reference to
the Event Master processors.
• A record of changes (this section) has been added.
• S3–4K product has been added. Chapters concerned by this new Event Master
processor have been modified:
- Description in General chapter + How to install S3 in a rack.
- Detailed explanations concerning new hardware in the Hardware Orientation
chapter.

14 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 Introduction

Revision Changes
• EC–50 product has been added. Chapters concerned by this new controller have been
modified or added:
- Description in General chapter.
- New chapters dedicated to Controller Orientation, Controller Configuration and
Controller Operation.
• A new version of Event Master Toolset is available (V2.0). The GUI orientation
chapter and the System setup procedure have been updated.
• Two units can be linked. A section in the GUI orientation chapter describes how set
up a linked System.
• A new chapter concerning the maintenance of the S3–4K has been added.
• A new chapter concerning the maintenance of the EC–50 controller has been added.
• Annex:
- New section with S3 specifications.
- Remote command ATRN updated.
- New chapter “THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS” added.
02 • Changes initiated by:
- New software version (V3.0).
- EC-200 product release.
• EC–200 product has been added. Chapters concerned by this new controller have
been modified or added:
- Description in General chapter.
- New chapters dedicated to Controller Orientation, Controller Configuration and
Controller Operation.
• The Front Panel Menu orientation chapter has been updated:
- a modification in the front menu panel of the "Event Master Processor" to take into
account a configuration created offline and transferred via USB device.
• A new version of Event Master Toolset is available (V3.0). The GUI orientation
chapter has been partially updated. A more complete update of this chapter will be
performed at the next version of the document.
- Win 10 has been added in the list of Operating Systems that accepts the "Event
Master Toolset" Software.
- A new section describes the Controller menu.
• A new chapter concerning the maintenance of the EC–200 controller has been added.
• Annex:
- New short section with EC-50 specifications.
03 • Changes initiated by:
• Updated RoHS table, taking into account the March 2016 changes.
04 • Changes initiated by new software version (V4.1).
- “Complete” vs “Relative” Preset configuration, see “Programming Menu >
Adjustment area > Presets configuration”, page 215.
- Destination Groups, see “Programming Menu > Adjustment area > Dest Group
configuration”, page 207.
- Firmware upgrade for EC-200, see “EC-200/EC-210 Firmware Upgrade”, page 344
and “Settings Menu > Web App area > Tools > Manage Software”, page 244.
- Added “Backgrounds as Inputs.” Refer to “Programming Menu > Resources area”,
page 179, and see the “Backgrounds as Inputs” subsection., and see the
“Backgrounds as Inputs” subsection.
- Linking Event Master units, see “Configuration Menu > Linking”, page 160.
- Added MVR slot configuration. Refer to “Configuration Menu > Adjustment > Unit
Configuration”, page 111, and see the Description of the Setup tab..
- Updates to Output configuration and Destination configuration; refer to
“Configuration Menu > Adjustment > Output Configuration”, page 125 and
“Configuration Menu > Adjustment > Destination Configuration”, page 132.

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 15

 Introduction

Revision Changes
- Preset Conflict Mode: Off, see “Configuration Menu > System modifier area”, page
109.
- Descriptions of the subtabs in the Settings Menu, Resources area, see “Settings
Menu”, page 233.
- Soft-Off button in the EC-200 GUI, see “How to power down the EC-200/EC-210”,
page 344.
- Split-Mode configuration, see “Configuration Menu > System diagram area”, page
106.
- Added JSON RPC section to the Remote Control Protocol appendix, see “Event
Master series processor JSON RPC remote control”, page 539.
05 • Changes initiated by:
- EC-30 product release
- New software version (4.2).
◦ EX support for two VPU cards: refer to “Event Master series processors
features”, page 30 and see the Program screens table, and see the
Specifications table in “VPU card”, page 77.
◦ More Configuration Menu > Linking examples: refer to “Configuration Menu >
Linking”, page 160 and see "How to Link an E2 Unit and two S3-4K Units" and
"How to Link an S3-4K Unit and an EX Unit with two VPU cards.
◦ "Basic Mode" and "Expert Mode" for Data-doubling: refer to “Configuration
Menu > Adjustment > Destination Configuration”, page 132 and see "Data-
doubling submenu—Basic Mode" and "Data-doubling submenu—Expert
Mode."
◦ Pick Hue: refer to “Programming Menu > Adjustment area > Layer
configuration”, page 199 and see "Pick Hue."
◦ Updated Complete and Relative Presets: refer to “Programming Menu >
Adjustment area > Presets configuration”, page 215 and see "Presets
configuration menu description" and "Complete vs Relative."
06 • Changes initiated by software updates (versions 4.2 and 5.0):
- Updated the procedure to create and transfer an offline configuration to a live unit:
refer to “System menu > USB device (Backup/Restore)”, page 86 and see How to
create a configuration offline and transfer it to a live unit.
- Added instructions for changing the last slot from Multiviewer (MVR) to Output and
from Output to MVR: refer to “Configuration Menu > Adjustment > Unit
Configuration”, page 111 and see Last slot as MVR or Output in the simulator.
- Updated Input, Background, and Output menu descriptions with new options: refer
to “Configuration Menu > Adjustment > Input Configuration”, page 113,
“Configuration Menu > Adjustment > Background Configuration”, page 123, and
“Configuration Menu > Adjustment > Output Configuration”, page 125 and see the
menu descriptions.
- Added Output rotation icons to the Assign Menu for Destination configuration: refer
to “Configuration Menu > Adjustment > Destination Configuration”, page 132 and
see Assign Menu.
• Changes initiated by new hardware:
- Added description of Tri-Combo Input card: refer to “Tri-Combo Input Card”, page
66.
- Added “EX Maintenance”, page 487.
- Added “EC-30 Maintenance”, page 507.
07 • Changes initiated by software updates (version 5.1):
- Corrected HDCP support for the quad-channel DisplayPort output card; see “Quad
Channel DisplayPort 1.2 Output Card”, page 69.
- Added instructions and descriptions for importing a PNG with alpha channel
(transparency) information preserved for Key Cut + Fill layers: refer to
“Presentation System overview”, page 42, “Programming Menu > Resources
area”, page 179, and “Programming Menu > Drop Sources, Layers into Screen
Destinations & Sources into layers”, page 273.

16 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 Introduction

Revision Changes
- Refer to “Configuration Menu > System diagram area”, page 106: updated the
Diagram area image and color-code description to include the tri-combo input and
output cards and split-mode on the quad-channel DisplayPort output card and the
tri-combo output card.
- Added instructions for creating Super Destinations: refer to “Configuration Menu >
Adjustment > Destination Configuration”, page 132 and also to “Programming
Menu”, page 178 and “Programming Menu > Adjustment area > Dest Group
configuration”, page 207.
- Added several linking examples, covering more than two E2, S3–4K, or EX units
and EX units with VPUs: refer to “Configuration Menu > Linking”, page 160.
- Updated the JSON listPresets API and added the 3dControl API: refer to “Event
Master series processor JSON RPC remote control”, page 539 and see
listPresets and 3dControl.
• Changes initiated by new hardware:
- Added description of Tri-Combo Output card: refer to “Tri-Combo Output Card”,
page 73.
08 • Updated contact information: refer to “Contact information”, page 519.
• Added tri-combo input card and tri-combo output card assembly and disassembly
instructions: refer to “Tri-Combo Input and Tri-Combo Output Card Disassembly and
Assembly”, page 375.
09 • Updated the code examples in the JSON RPC remote control section: refer to “Event
Master series processor JSON RPC remote control”, page 539.

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 17

 Introduction

Revision Changes
10 • Changes initiated by software updates (version 6.0):
- Added Cue functionality, refer to “Cue Menu”, page 220, “Cue Menu > Adjustment
area”, page 221, “Cue Menu > System modifier area”, page 222, and “Cue Menu >
Network resource area”, page 224.
- Added External Device control functionality: refer to “Configuration Menu >
Adjustment > External Devices configuration”, page 157.
- Added “PGM only” canvas mode: refer to “Configuration Menu > System modifier
area”, page 109.
- Updated the JSON RPC remote control section, refer to “Event Master series
processor JSON RPC remote control”, page 539 and see Use JSON from the
web application, activateCue , and listCues.
• Changes initiated by new hardware:
- Added EC-210 content: refer to “Event Master devices overview”, page 26, “Event
Master controllers features”, page 36, “Initial inspection”, page 43, “Controller
Orientation”, page 309, “Controller Configuration”, page 335, “Controller
Operation”, page 343, “EC-200/EC-210 maintenance actions”, page 366, “EC-200/
EC-210 Maintenance”, page 513, and “Specifications of EC-210”, page 530.
- Added description of Quad HDMI 2.0 input card: refer to “Quad HDMI 2.0 Input
Card”, page 65.
11 • Changes initiated by software updates (version 6.2):
- Added Barcolink Ultra (4K) for SDI output on the Tri-Combo output card. Refer to
“Tri-Combo Output Card”, page 73.
- Increased the maximum number of Cues to 120. Refer to “Cue Menu > System
modifier area”, page 222.
- Added instructions for creating, populating, and manipulating Super AUX
destinations. Refer to “Configuration Menu > Adjustment > Destination
Configuration”, page 132 and “Configuration Menu > Adjustment > Destination
Configuration > Adjust Panel”, page 144.
• Changes initiated by new hardware:
- Updated the altitude specifications and maximum ambient operating temperature
for EC-200/EC-210. Refer to “Installation requirements”, page 43.
- Added description of quad-channel DisplayPort 1.2 input card. Refer to “Quad
Channel DisplayPort 1.2 Input Card”, page 63.
- Added description of quad HDMI 2.0 output card. Refer to “Quad HDMI 2.0 Output
Card”, page 71.
- Updated the disassembly and assembly instructions for the Tri-Combo input and
Tri-Combo output cards. Refer to “Tri-Combo Input and Tri-Combo Output Card
Disassembly and Assembly”, page 375.

1.3 Symbols, pictures and fonts

Symbol overview
The following icons are used in the manual :
Caution

Warning

Info, term definition. General info about the term

18 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 Introduction

Note: gives extra information about the described subject

Tip: gives extra advice about the described subject

Picture overview
Images and pictures given in the manual are used as illustration. The content of the images can be slightly
different with the reality, e.g. version numbers, device types, installed modules, form and position of software
windows on screen ...

1.4 The 4K screen management system

The presentation systems E2 and S3–4K
Raising the bar for live screen management, the Event Master screen management system provides superior
image quality, exceptional input and output density, great expandability, and purpose built durability.
Supporting native 4K input and output with up to 60 Hz refresh rates and 4:4:4 color, it is the most modular
system available to manage blended 4K projectors with refresh rates up to 60 Hz and full range color
sampling. Being a truly versatile system, the Event Master offers a large range of scaled AUX outputs and
PGM outputs for full show control with a single box.

Native 4K input and output

With native 4K input and output, the Event master devices provide impressive pixel processing power.
Whether native or scaled inputs, two connectors or four, this HDCP-compliant system manages it all.
With up to 32 inputs and 14 outputs, the E2 system offers full show control, including 32 independent PIP
layers, 12 outputs and a dedicated two channel Multi-viewer. Thanks to its linkable chassis, it can easily
expand beyond the single chassis capacity, without the need for additional external processing and routing to
distribute the signals. And as its inputs and layers can also be extended, the E2 is even capable of managing
a blend of up to 32 4K projectors.

Simple servicing and control

The Event Master devices come with a straightforward cross-platform user interface that provides
touchscreen ergonomics. As the presets are stored on the chassis, it enables easy control via third-party
systems. Multiple users can control a system simultaneously, and the API allows third-party developers to
create custom control programs and interfaces. Thanks to their modular designs, users can simply add a new
input or output card to support future signal interfaces. This modularity also ensures great serviceability, as
users can easily swap a specific input or output card in the case of damage, without needing to ship or replace
the entire box.

Designed for life on the road

Designed for the live event industry, the rugged Event Master devices feature a steel chassis that’s able to
withstand the challenging conditions of life on the road. What’s more, they offer screen control in a compact
form factor of only four rack units (3 RU for the S3), which makes them easy to ship and install. And thanks to
their modular cards and dual redundant power supplies, the Event Master devices are extremely reliable and
easy to service in the field.

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 19

 Introduction

20 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 Safety 2
About this chapter
Please read this chapter carefully. It contains important information to prevent personal injury while installing
and operating Event Master devices. Furthermore, it includes several cautions to prevent damage to the Event
Master devices. Ensure that you understand and follow all safety guidelines, safety instructions and warnings
mentioned in this chapter before you begin installation. After this chapter, additional “warnings” and “cautions”
are given depending on the installation procedure. Read and follow these “warnings” and “cautions” as well.

Overview
• General considerations
• Important safety instructions

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 21

 Safety

2.1 General considerations

General safety instructions
• Before operating these devices please read this manual thoroughly and retain it for future reference.
• All warnings in the documentation manual should be adhered to.
• All instructions for operating and use of these devices must be followed precisely.
• All local installation codes should be adhered to.

Notice on safety
This equipment is built in accordance with the requirements of the international safety standards IEC60950-1,
EN60950-1, UL60950-1 and CAN/CSA C22.2 No.60950-1, which are the safety standards of information
technology equipment including electrical business equipment. These safety standards impose important
requirements on the use of safety critical components, materials and insulation, in order to protect the user or
operator against risk of electric shock and energy hazard and having access to live parts. Safety standards
also impose limits to the internal and external temperature rises, radiation levels, mechanical stability and
strength, enclosure construction and protection against the risk of fire. Simulated single fault condition testing
ensures the safety of the equipment to the user even when the equipment's normal operation fails.

Certificates

Image 2-1: CE mark

These products comply with the essential requirements of Council Directives 2004/108/EC or 2014/30/EU
(EMC), 2006/95/EC or 2014/35/EU (LVD) and 2011/65/EU (RoHS).

Image 2-2: EAC mark

This product complies with the Safety of Low-Voltage Equipment (LVE Technical Regulation 004/2011, CU TR
004/2011) and the Electromagnetic Compatibility of Technical Products (EMC Technical Regulation, CU TR
020/2011).

2.2 Important safety instructions

To prevent risk, personal injury and Event Master devices damages
Please read this chapter carefully. It includes several cautions to prevent damage to Event Master devices.
Ensure that you understand and follow all safety guidelines, safety instructions and warnings mentioned in this
chapter before installing Event Master devices. After this chapter, additional “warnings” and “cautions” are
given depending on the installation procedure. Read and follow these “warnings” and “cautions” as well.
• Read and follow all installation and operation instructions.
• Only trained technicians may install Event Master devices.
• Installation of Event Master devices must be done in a dust free area.
• Only use attachments/accessories specified by the manufacturer.
• CAUTION: Troubleshooting must be performed by a trained technician. To reduce the risk of electrical
shock, do not attempt to service this equipment unless you are qualified to do so.
• Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing is required when the system has been
damaged in any way, such as liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen into the system, or the system
has been exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate normally, or has been dropped.
• FRAGILE: Event Master devices are fragile. Handle these devices with care at all times.
• To prevent injury, minimum 2 persons are required to carry an Event Master series processor or an EC–
200 controller.

22 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 Safety

• Do not remove any covers or panels during normal operation. Removal any of these items will expose
sensitive electronic circuits and the unit may be damaged.
• During maintenance operations, always switch off the device and unplug power cords before removing one
of the covers.
• Always wear a wrist band which is connected to the ground while handling the ESD sensitive parts.
• Wear insulating gloves during the execution of the installation and maintenance actions to avoid short-
circuit.
• Be careful never to drop anything into the device assembly during the service procedures.
• Be careful to always follow the procedures during maintenance operations (spare parts replacement).
• This product is intended to operate from a power source that will not apply more than 230 volts rms
between the supply conductors or between both supply conductor and ground. A protective ground
connection by way of grounding conductor in the power cord is essential for safe operation.
• This product is grounded through the grounding conductor of the power cord. To avoid electrical shock,
plug the power cord into a properly wired receptacle before connecting to the product input or output
terminals. A protective-ground connection by way of the grounding conductor in the power cord is essential
for safe operation. For 110V installations the power supply cord should be rated at 13amps. For 220V
installations the power supply cord should be rated 10amps.
• Use only the power cord and connector specified for your product. Use only a power cord that is in good
condition. Refer cord and connector changes to qualified service personnel.
• Replace spare parts only with the same parts supplied by Barco.
• Save the original shipping carton and packing material. They will come in handy if you ever have to ship
your equipment. For maximum protection, repack your set as it was originally packed at the factory.
• Rated maximum ambient operating temperature, ta= 40°C (104°F).
Note: Rated maximum ambient operating temperature for EC-200/EC-210, ta=35°C (95° F).
• Do not operate this product in an area containing explosive materials.

Safety Data Sheets for Hazardous Chemicals

For safe handling information on chemical products, consult the Safety Data Sheet (SDS). SDSs are available
upon request via [email protected].

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 23

 Safety

24 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 General 3
About this chapter
This chapter is designed to introduce you to the Event Master series products.

Overview
• Event Master devices overview
• Event Master series processors features
• Event Master controllers features
• Terms and definitions
• Control overview
• Presentation System overview
• Installation requirements
• Initial inspection
• Rack-Mount Procedure

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 25

 General

3.1 Event Master devices overview

General
Event Master devices are the most advanced video processing and presentation control systems on the
market today. These systems provide source selection, advanced windowing features, seamless switching,
video effects and integrated control for professional video presentations. Thanks to their modular and scalable
architecture, Event Master devices can support a wide variety of show configurations.
The Event Master series products are the following:
• E2, 4K screen management system (Event Master processor).
• E2 Jr., 4K screen management system (Event Master processor).
• EX, expansion box (Event Master processor).
• S3–4K , compact 4K screen management system (Event Master processor).
• S3–4K Jr., compact 4K screen management system (Event Master processor).
• EC-30, compact Event Master controller.
• EC-50, compact Event Master controller.
• EC-200, large Event Master controller. (EoL 2018.)
• EC-210, large Event Master controller. (This is an internal controller upgrade, with minor connector and
button changes.)

About E2

Image 3-1: E2

E2 is a modular, scalable digital video processor, designed to manage multiple display destinations and large
video walls. The E2 screen management system provides superior image quality and an exceptional input and
output density, within a single 4RU rack mount chassis. Supporting native 4K I/O cards, it is the first and only
screen management system on the market that can manage a 4K projector blend with refresh rates up to
60Hz. A truly versatile system, it offers up to 32 inputs and 14 outputs (up-to eight PGM, four Multiviewer and
four scaled Aux outputs) for full show control. Multiple E2 units can be linked in order to achieve a combination
of Layer, Canvas, Input and Output expansion. The control interface is performed through a GUI application
running Windows, Linux* or Mac platforms. E2 covers multiple markets including Rental & Staging, Corporate
AV, Simulation, Control Rooms and Broadcast.
Thanks to its modular design, users can also simply add a new input or output card to support future signal
interfaces. This modularity also ensures field serviceability, as users can easily swap a specific input or output
card in the case of damage or failures, without needing to ship or replace the entire box.

26 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 General

About E2 Jr.

Image 3-2: E2 Jr.

The E2 Jr. comes with 16 inputs, 8 outputs, and 8 mixers (or 16 single layers) in the same 4-RU form factor as
its bigger brother, E2. It offers the same performance and features as the E2 offers, but it is ideally suited for
applications that require more capacity than the compact S3–4K but do not require the full capacity of the E2.
E2 Jr. can use the same modular cards as E2 uses, and thanks to its modular design, the E2 Jr. can be
upgraded to a fully loaded E2 system at any time.

About EX

Image 3-3: EX

When linked to the Event Master system (E2 or S3– 4K) it acts as an input and/or output expansion box to
increase the capacities available to the system. Via the link cable, a fiber extension can be used to extend the
distance between the EX and the E2 or S3 processor. EX allows the user to place the unit close to a large
concentration of sources or outputs (for example, on a stage with demo computers) and use a single cable to
deliver the signals to and from the main processor. EX helps reduce the cost in terms of equipment and labor
hours required to set up an event.
The Ex can also be used as a stand-alone unit to scale, switch, and convert video signals to multiple displays.
As a stand-alone unit it can be thought of as a 4x4 scaling matrix.
EX can use the same modular cards as E2 uses.

About S3–4K

Image 3-4: S3

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 27

 General

Featuring 12 input channels, 4 PROGRAM outputs, 4 AUX outputs and 2 dedicated Multiviewer outputs, the
S3–4K screen management system is a compact version of the E2. Smaller (only 3RU rack mount chassis),
its operation is similar to that the E2, and it is operated in the same manner.
S3 and E2 use the same modular cards.

About S3–4K Jr.

Image 3-5: S3–4K Jr.

The S3-4K Jr comes with 8 inputs, 4 outputs, and 2 mixers in the same 3 RU form factor as its bigger brother,
the S3-4K. It offers the same performance and features as the S3– 4K offers, but it is ideally suited for
applications that do not require the full capacity of the S3–4K.
S3–4K Jr. can use the same modular cards as E2 uses, and you can upgrade the S3-4K Jr. to a fully loaded
S3-4K system at any time; simply purchase and install additional cards into your system.

About EC-30

Image 3-6: EC-30

The EC-30—the most compact version of the EC-series Event Master controllers—provides instant access to
the most crucial features for everything from a tradeshow booth to a large corporate event, even a music tour.
The EC-30 offers a compact surface, simplified workflow, and fingertip control where budget and space are
the deciding factors. As an extension of the Event Master toolset, the EC-30 gives you essential selections for
sources, presets, layers, and destinations. As a USB peripheral added to your existing Event Master control
computer, the EC-30 is the most cost effective and compact alternative to a full sized controller.

28 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 General

About EC-50

Image 3-7: EC-50

The Event Master EC-50 event controller delivers instant access and great situational awareness for
everything from trade show booths to large corporate events and even music tours. Its small footprint makes it
suitable for most control environments, while simultaneously packing all the power and durability needed for
instant access to crucial functions. As an extension of the Event Master toolset and the EC-200/EC-210, the
EC-50 brings sources, presets, layers, and destination selection at your fingertips, along with another, touch
enabled display.

About EC-200

Image 3-8: EC-200

The Event Master EC-200 event controller is replaced by the EC-210 controller. Most of the operation for the
EC-200 is the same as that for the EC-210.

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 29

 General

About EC-210

Image 3-9: EC-210

The Event Master EC-210 event controller is a dedicated hardware console specifically designed to support
the Event Master Series Processors and devices. Based on an industrial operating system with optimized
hardware, it runs the Event Master Toolset Software. Recommended for small events as well as for stadium
sized shows, it provides the same functionality as its accessory, the EC-50 controller, with additional features
and capabilities delivered in a compact package. The tactile operation style of the EC-210 with buttons and
touch screens gives the operator plenty of programming room in an effective layout. Expandable with its large
choice of connectivity, the controller can support additional external Event Master compatible devices over
network and USB.
EC-210 is the infrastructure that will keep you in control of Barco Event Master series devices, now and in the
future.
In our efforts to support our existing customers and respect the investment we have created an upgrade kit
that takes any EC-200 to the same functionality and capacity as a factory assembled EC-210, with only minor
cosmetic differences.

3.2 Event Master series processors features

Inputs
Model E2 E2 Jr. S3–4K S3–4K Jr. EX
Input cards 8x 4x 3x 2x 2x

Each card accommodates either 4x HD inputs, 2x 2560 x 1600 inputs, or 1x 4K input.

The EX expansion box does not ship with cards; cards must be purchased separately. Each EX expansion
box has two general purpose card slots, each of which may support any E2 input or output card.
Card type Connector Type
HDMI/DisplayPort input card 2x HDMI 1.4 connectors
2x DisplayPort 1.1 connectors
Dual Link DVI input card 2x Dual Link DVI-D connectors

30 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 General

Card type Connector Type

SDI input card 4x BNC connector supporting 6G-SDI
Note: Event Master currently supports up to 3G-SDI
formats. 6G-SDI may be supported in a future
software release.
Genlock input 2x BNC connector (Input and loop output)
Supports black burst* and tri-level analog signals

* All processors support black burst input; EX uses a regenerated genlock output and does not
support black burst output.

Depending on the model, each Event Master processor is shipped with the following input cards:
Model Inputs via input cards
E2 • 28 inputs via 8 Event Master series input cards:
- Up to 8x 4K inputs – each output card supports up to 4K@60p out
- 8x SD/HD/3G SDI (6G ready)
- 8x HDMI 1.4 (297 Mpix/sec max)
- 8x DisplayPort 1.1 (300 Mpix/sec max)
- 4x Dual Link DVI (330 Mpix/sec max)
E2Jr. • 16 inputs via 4 Event Master series input cards:
- Up to 4x 4K inputs – each output card supports up to 4K@60p out
- 4x SD/HD/3G SDI (6G ready)
- 6x HDMI 1.4 (297 Mpix/sec max)
- 6x DisplayPort 1.1 (300 Mpix/sec max)
S3–4K • 12 inputs via 3 Event Master series input cards:
- Up to 3x 4K inputs – each output card supports up to 4K@60p out
- 4x SD/HD/3G SDI (6G ready)
- 4x HDMI 1.4 (297 Mpix/sec max)
- 4x DisplayPort 1.1 (300 Mpix/sec max)
S3–4K Jr. • 8inputs via 2 Event Master series input cards:
- Up to 2x 4K inputs – each output card supports up to 4K@60p out
- 4x SD/HD/3G SDI (6G ready)
- 2x HDMI 1.4 (297 Mpix/sec max)
- 2x DisplayPort 1.1 (300 Mpix/sec max)
EX • Two card slots, each of which may support any E2 input or output card
- Up to 8 inputs via 2 input cards or 8 outputs via 2 output cards (same cards
as E2 Event Master processor)
(4 inputs and 4 outputs, using one card of each type)
- Inputs can be distributed to other processors via the link cable or to a
locally installed output card.

Outputs
Model E2 E2 Jr. S3–4K S3–4K Jr. EX
Output card slots 3x 3x 2x 2x 2x
Multiviewer card slots 1x 1x 1x 1x NA

The last slot on E2 and E2 Jr. (Slot #14) and on S3–4K and S3–4K Jr. (Slot #9) may be designated as either a
Multiviewer (MVR) card slot or as an Output card slot. See“Configuration Menu > Adjustment > Unit
Configuration”, page 111 for more details.
Card type Connector Type
DisplayPort output card 4x DisplayPort 1.2 connectors
HDMI output card 4x HDMI 1.4 connectors

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 31

 General

Card type Connector Type

SDI output card 4x BNC connector supporting 6G-SDI
Note: Event Master currently supports up to 3G-SDI
formats. 6G-SDI may be supported in a future
software release.
HDMI Multi-viewer card 4x HDMI 1.4 connectors

The EX expansion box does not ship with cards; cards must be purchased separately. Each EX expansion
box has two general purpose cards slots, each of which may support any E2 input or output card.
Depending on the model, each Event Master processor is shipped with the following output cards:
Model Outputs via output cards Program outputs
E2 • 14 outputs via 4 output cards: • Twelve (12) program outputs
- Up to 3x 4K outputs – each output configurable as single screens or tiled/
card supports up to 4K@60p out blended widescreens
- 4x SD/HD/3G SDI (6G ready) - Configurable from 8x
2048 × 1200@60 max to 2x
- 8x HDMI 1.4a (297 Mpix/sec max) 4096× 2400@60 max
- 2x HDMI 1.4a for Multiviewer (297
- Independent edge blending/
Mpix/sec max) feathering control for all four sides
- Unused outputs may be used as
scaled auxiliary outputs.
E2 Jr. • 10 outputs via 3 output cards: • Four (4) program outputs configurable as
- Up to 2x 4K outputs – each output single screens or tiled/blended
card supports up to 4K@60p out widescreens
- 4x SD/HD/3G SDI (6G ready) - Configurable from 4x
2048 × 1200@60 max to 1x
- 4x HDMI 1.4a (297 Mpix/sec max) 4096× 2400@60 max
- 2x HDMI 1.4a for Multiviewer (297
- Independent edge blending/
Mpix/sec max) feathering control for all four sides
- Unused outputs may be used as
scaled auxiliary outputs.
S3–4K • 10 outputs via 3 output cards: (same • Four (4) program outputs configurable as
cards as E2 Event Master processor) single screens or tiled/blended
- Up to 2x 4K outputs – each output widescreens
card supports up to 4K@60p out - Configurable from 4x
- 4x SD/HD/3G SDI (6G ready) 2048 × 1200@60 max to 1x
4096× 2400@60 max
- 4x HDMI 1.4a (297 Mpix/sec max)
- Independent edge blending/
- 2x HDMI 1.4a for Multiviewer (297
feathering control for all four sides
Mpix/sec max)
- Unused outputs may be used as
scaled auxiliary outputs.
S3–4K Jr. • 6 outputs via 2 output cards: • Four (4) program outputs configurable as
- Up to 2x 4K outputs – each output single screens or tiled/blended
card supports up to 4K@60p out widescreens
- 4x HDMI 1.4a (297 Mpix/sec max) - Configurable from 4x
2048 × 1200@60 max to 1x
- 2x HDMI 1.4a for Multiviewer (297
4096× 2400@60 max
Mpix/sec max)
- Independent edge blending/
- Up to 1x 4K output
feathering control for all four sides
EX • Two card slots, each of which may • Up to 8 program outputs for destinations
support any E2 input or output card created in a linked E2 or S3-4K
- Up to 8 outputs via the 2 output cards processor.
(same cards as E2 Event Master - Unused outputs may be used as
processor) scaled auxiliary outputs.
- Sources for the outputs can be from
remote systems via the link
connection or from a locally installed
input card.

32 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 General

An EX expansion box supports screen-destination program outputs and auxiliary outputs, up to a maximum
total of eight (8) video links (destinations or inputs) from main processor on a link cable to another expansion
box.

User interface
User interface Details
Event Master Software GUI based configuration and control application
Cross platform (Mac/Windows)

Event Master Console EC-50 and EC-200 Dedicated hardware panels specifically designed to
support Event Master processors

Processing and latency

• 12 bits/color
• 36 bits/pixel
• 1 frame processing latency for progressive sources

PIP layers (per chassis)

Up to 32 PIP or Key overlay layers:
Model PIP layers
E2 • 2K mode: 32x seamless PIP or Key overlay
• DL mode: 16x seamless PIP or Key overlay
• 4K mode: 8x seamless PIP or Key overlay
E2 Jr. • 2K mode: 16x seamless PIP or Key overlay
• DL mode: 8x seamless PIP or Key overlay
• 4K mode: 4x seamless PIP or Key overlay
S3–4K • 2K mode: 8x seamless PIP or Key overlay
• DL mode: 4x seamless PIP or Key overlay
• 4K mode: 2x seamless PIP or Key overlay
S3–4K Jr. • 2K mode: 4x seamless PIP or Key overlay
• DL mode: 2x seamless PIP or Key overlay
• 4K mode: 1x seamless PIP or Key overlay
EX NA

Background mixer
Each PGM screen destination has an unscaled seamless background mixer supporting the full resolution of
the destination
• Any live input type can be a background source
• Matte color generator
• Still store as background

Destinations (single chassis)

Model Destinations
E2 Eight (8) Program Outputs configurable as single screens or tiled/blended
widescreens.
E2 Jr. Four (4) Program Outputs configurable as single screens or tiled/blended
widescreens.
S3–4K Four (4) Program Outputs configurable as single screens or tiled/blended
widescreens.
S3–4K Jr. Four (4) Program Outputs configurable as single screens or tiled/blended
widescreens.
EX NA

Program screens

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 33

 General

Layout Mode
Max. number of 4K outputs Max. number of Dual-Link Max. number of HD (2K)
Model outputs outputs
E2 • 2x single screens • 4x single screens • 8x single screens
• 1x blended (2 outputs) • 2x blended • 4x 2 output blended (2
output per blend) up to 8x 1
output blended
E2 Jr. • 2x single screens • 4x single screens • 8x single screens
• 1x single screen • 2x blended • 2x 2 output blended (2
(Has only one VPU bank; output per blend) up to 4x 1
does not support 4K output blended
blending.)
S3–4K • 1x single screens • 2x single screens • 4x single screens
• 1x blended • 2x 2 output blended (2
output per blend) up to 4x 1
output blended
S3–4K • 1x single screens • 2x single screens • 4x single screens
Jr. • 1x blended • 2x 2 output blended (2
output per blend) up to 4x 1
output blended
EX • 2x single screens • 4x single screens • 8x single screens
• 1x blended (2 outputs) • 2x blended • 4x 2 output blended (2
output per blend) up to 8x 1
output blended

The EX expansion box can have a combination of Input and Output cards, or it can have two VPU cards.
Auxiliary Outputs
Model Auxiliary Outputs
E2 User definable from 12x 2048 x 1200 at 60 Hz to 3x 4K at 60 Hz
E2 Jr. User definable from 8x 2048 x 1200 at 60 Hz to 2x 4K at 60 Hz
S3–4K User definable from 8x 2048 x 1200 at 60 Hz to 2x 4K at 60 Hz
S3–4K Jr. User definable from 4x 2048 x 1200 at 60 Hz to 1x 4K at 60 Hz
EX User definable from 8x 2048 x 1200 at 60 Hz to 2x 4K at 60 Hz
Layer Mode
Max. number of 4K outputs Max. number of Dual-Link Max. number of HD (2K)
Model outputs outputs
E2 • 3x Scaled AUX output • 6x Scaled AUX output • 12x Scaled AUX output
E2 Jr. • 2x Scaled AUX output • 4x Scaled AUX output • 8x Scaled AUX output
S3–4K • 2x Scaled AUX output • 4x Scaled AUX output • 8x Scaled AUX output
S3–4K • 1x Scaled AUX output • 2x Scaled AUX output • 4x Scaled AUX output
Jr.
EX • 2x Scaled AUX output • 4x Scaled AUX output • 8x Scaled AUX output

Multi-viewer
Output Resolution Max. Number of Outputs
HD (2K) output • 2x Multi-viewer output

Still stores
User-assigned still stores
• Live capture
• Loaded via PNG file

Presets
1,000 user definable presets

34 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 General

Expandability
Model Chassis per system
E2 2 chassis per system—2x E2s, E2 & S3–4K, or E2 & 8x EX
E2 Jr. Linking is available as an upgrade option.
S3–4K 2 chassis per system—2x S3–4Ks, S3–4K & E2, or S3–4K & 4x EX
S3–4K Jr. Linking is available as an upgrade option.
EX 2 Ex chassis can be linked for standalone operation, or an EX can be linked to
either an E2 or an S3–4K.
Expansion Program Screens
Max. number of 4K outputs Max. number of Dual-Link Max. number of HD (2K)
Model outputs outputs
E2 4 outputs 8 outputs 16 outputs
E2 Jr. NA1 NA1 NA1
S3–4K 2 outputs 4 outputs 8 outputs
S3–4K NA1 NA1 NA1
Jr.
EX 2 outputs 4 outputs 8 outputs
1 The E2 Jr. and the S3–4K Jr. do not support linking, although linking is available as an upgrade option for
these models.

Chassis
E2 and E2 Jr. S3–4k and S3–4k Jr. EX
• 4RU • 3RU • 1RU
• Dual Redundant PSU • Dual Redundant PSU1 • Rugged steel chassis
• Modular field swappable • Modular field swappable • Modular field swap
processing and I/O cards processing and I/O cards • Variable flow cooling
• Variable flow cooling • Variable flow cooling
• Rugged steel chassis • Rugged steel chassis
1 The S3–4K Jr. comes with a single power supply; the redundant power supply is optional.

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 35

 General

3.3 Event Master controllers features

Connectivity
EC-30 EC-50 EC-200 EC-210
USB connection from USB connection from • 4 USB connectors in • 4 USB connectors in
Event Master Toolset Event Master Toolset, the back can be used the back can be used
host computer (OSX or either from a control for keyboard and for keyboard and
Windows 7 and higher) computer or the EC-200 mouse and other mouse and other
controller supported USB supported USB
devices. devices.
• 1 USB connector in • 1 USB connector in
the middle of the top the middle of the top
of the console is on of the console is on
delivery fitted with a delivery fitted with a
USB memory. USB memory.
NA DVI input for touchscreen 2 connectors DVI-D • 1 HDMI output
monitor (Screen output 1 and 2, connector to show a
internally 3 and 4) third EMTS window
on an external
monitor, supporting
up to 2560 x 1080.
• 1 HDMI input
connector to for video
to be shown on the
left touchscreen.
NA NA 2 Ethernet connectors 2 Ethernet connectors
(outlet 1 to your Event (outlet 1 to your Event
Master Device Network Master Device Network
for static IP address and for static IP address and
outlet 2 for a DHCP outlet 2 for a DHCP
assigned IP address) assigned IP address)

36 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 General

User controls
EC-30 EC-50 EC-200/EC-210
• 24 assignable buttons with • 36 assignable buttons with • 36 assignable buttons with
customizable LCD displays customizable LCD displays customizable LCD displays
• 8 dedicated Layer selection • 8 dedicated Layer selection • 8 dedicated Layer selection
buttons and dedicated buttons and dedicated buttons and dedicated
Background Layer button Background Layer button Background Layer button
• 12 user definable Destination • 12 user-definable Destination • 12 user-definable Destination
buttons with multi-page buttons with multi-page buttons with multi-page
functionality functionality functionality
• 2 User Assignable Contextual • 4 User Assignable Contextual • 4 User Assignable Contextual
Display buttons Display buttons Display buttons
• 1 Cut button • 1 Cut button • 1 Cut button
• 1 All Trans button • 1 All Trans button • 2 All Trans buttons
• High-resolution T-Bar • High-resolution T-Bar • 1 On Screen Keyboard Button
• 1x Internal 15.6-inch wide touch • 1 Console Lock Button
screen • 1 Save All Button
• High-resolution T-Bar with
enable/disable button
• 1 System Function Button
Group
• 1 Direct Selection Button Group
• 1 Syntax Entry Button Group
• 1 Numpad
• 1 Contextual Display Button
Group
• 1 Live Function Button Group
• 1 Arrow Button Group
• 1 Trackball with 4 modifier
buttons
• 2 Barco Eye Buttons
• 5 Rotary Encoders referred to
as wheels with modifier buttons
• 1 Future Expansion Button
Group*
• 2x Internal 15.6-inch wide touch
screen
* The EC-210 has “Play/Pause” and “Stop” buttons in the Future Expansion Button Group.

Dimensions and weight

EC-30 EC-50 EC-200/EC-210
Dimensions 105.4 x 465.6 x 321.0 mm 244.34 x 511.56 x 610.0 mm 244.34 x 901.19 x 575.36 mm
(HxWxD) 4.15 x 18.33 x 12.63 inches 9.62 x 20.14 x 24.0 inches 9.62 x 35.49 x 22.65 inches
Weight 3.18 kg (7 lbs.) 12.33 kg (27.2 lbs.) 20.41kg (45 lbs.)
Screen NA 1x Internal 15.6-inch wide 2x Internal 15.6-inch wide
touch screen with 10 point touch screens with 10 point
multi-touch multi-touch

Other
EC-30 EC-50 EC-200/EC-210
• USB port for connection to host • 1x work light (flexible support) • 2x work lights (flexible support)
computer • 2x flexible ribbon LED (backlight • 2x flexible ribbon LED (backlight
• Status LEDs and color coded in front face and back face) in front face and back face)
LCD displays • Auto-ranging mains input (90- • Auto-ranging mains input (90-
• Auto-ranging 12v, 2.08a power 250 VAC) 250 VAC)
supply (100-250 VAC)

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 37

 General

3.4 Terms and definitions

3G
A 3 Gbit/s serial digital 10-bit or 12-bit video interface (SMPTE 424M and 425M).

AUX (auxiliary Output)

A video output that can show any source and seamlessly cut between them.

Background (BG)
Typically an unscaled source originating from a computer’s multi-head graphics card, or a frame grab from a
scaled source. An Event Master processor can use any input signal and assign it as a Background source,
provided it is at the same resolution as is the destination. The Background appears at the system’s lowest
layer priority and does not use any system scaler resources.

Chroma Key
A type of key where the hole-cutting information is derived from a color rather than from a video level. An
common example on television, is when the weatherman appears to be standing in front of a map. The map
itself is a video signal, and the weatherman is in fact standing in front of a green (or blue) screen. On the
switcher, the Chroma Key process electronically subtracts the color from the foreground image, and replaces
it with video from the background image to form a composite image.

Clip, Gain, Opacity

In switcher terminology, the process of fine-tuning a key of any type (luminance, linear, or chroma). Clipping
sets the threshold for the hole cutting circuitry, while "gain" defines the range and sensitivity of adjustment.
The "opacity" is the transparency or density of the key, as revealed over a background.

Colorspace
All video signals have a colorspace. Versions are RGB, YUV or YrYbYc. They also have a range like 16 -240 =
Reduced or Full 0-254.
There is also a color processing scheme that allow bandwidth saving. Full would be 4:4:4 and versions include
4:2:2 and 4:2:0

Computer Video
A generic term indicating video that originates from a computer platform. A progressive scan signal that
follows VESA (Video Electronics Standards Association) standards, with typical resolutions of 800 x 600, 1920
x 1080, UHD and 4K etc.

Crosspoint
Traditionally the button that selects the input required on a particular switcher bus. But in Event Master device
the actual backbone of the processors who routes the internal video signals.

Cut
Cut is an instantaneous switch from one video source to another.

DA (Distribution Amplifier)
A video device that inputs one video signal, and outputs multiple “identical” signals.

Destination (DST)
A Destination is a location to which you can route the output of an Event Master device. A destination can be
configured as a group of one or more outputs that feed the same screen.
A Destination can be a single, widescreen or multi-screen Mixing Layers are assigned to Destinations.
A Destination can transition Backgrounds and Mixing Layers.

38 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 General

Event Master Control Software (EM GUI)

This user's guide refers to the Event Master control software as the EM GUI. The software consists of several
menus and tabs that enable you to configure your system, setup the input sources and output Destinations,
manage the dedicated Multiviewer and create your presentation’s overall “look.” Refer to the chapter “EM GUI
orientation”, page 97 for more information about the EM GUI.

Event Master Series Processor (EMP)

Any Event Master series processor—E2, E2 Jr., S3–4K, S3–4K Jr., or EX—may be referred to as an EMP.

Event Master Toolset Software (EMTS)

Event Master Toolset Software is an easy to use GUI running on a PC or MAC. It provides all the Event Master
series processors with control and configuration.

Fader
See T-Bar.

GUI (Graphical User Interface)

A term that describes a status display based on graphics and icons, rather than strictly on numbers and
letters.

Input
The actual input connector of a processor.

Key
An electronic (and visual) process whereby one image is electronically superimposed over another source or
background. Keys are typically used for titles, logos, and banners.

Keyframe
In a PIP “move,” a keyframe is a point where an action or change occurs. For example, when a PIP moves
from the upper right corner to full screen, keyframe 1 is the upper right position, and keyframe 2 is the full
screen position of the PIP.

Key Fill
The video which fills the hole cut by the keying circuitry. Typically, switchers provide a variety of choices for the
fill source — internal mattes, external video, or "self" fill are several examples.

Key Mask
A key modification system that protects a portion of the foreground video from being keyed, using the
switcher’s internal pattern system.

Key Signal
Also known as Key Source. The signal that electronically cuts the hole in the background video signal. Key
signals typically originate from external inputs such as character generators or cameras.

Layer
An image display element (such as a PIP, Key or Background) that has an associated visual priority — either
in front (or in back) of another layer.

Linear Key
Linear key is a keying mode in which the edges of anti-aliased key sources (such as character generators) are
reproduced clearly. Typically, two separate signals are required from a linear key source: a cut and a fill.

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 39

 General

Menu
A term used to describe buttons and functions on the high-resolution color LCD touch screen.

Mix
Also known as a Dissolve. A transition between two video sources in which one source fades out as the other
fades in.

Mixer
Circuitry that enables you to transition (and scale) PIPs and Keys over a background.

MVR (Multiviewer)
A video output that previews sources, backgrounds, destinations and Auxiliaries in scaled down windows with
a border and a text.

NTSC
National Television Standards Committee. The oldest standard for color picture broadcasting. NTSC is a
standard definition format that operates at a frequency of 60Hz, with 525 lines, 60 fields and 30 frames per
second.

PAL
Phase Alternating Line. PAL is the NTSC equivalent TV standard in Europe. PAL is a standard definition
format that operates at a frequency of 50Hz, with 625 lines, 50 fields, and 25 frames per second.

PGM (Program)
The switcher's main output signal.

PIP
Picture-in-Picture, an on-screen configuration in which one picture (typically of reduced size) is positioned
over another background image — or another PIP. PIPs can be reduced, enlarged, bordered, shadowed, and
mixed on and off Program. PIPs can overlap each other, depending on their visual priority. In E2, the
multiviewer PIPs are not allowed to overlap.

Preset
Storage register in which you can store (and recall) the entire configuration or “look” of your destination(s).

PVW (Preview)
The video that will appear next on program (main) outputs.

RGB
The red, green and blue color signal components.

Scaler
An electronic circuit that reduces or enlarges source images, thus creating PIPs and Keys that can be
positioned (and transitioned).

SDI (Serial Digital Video)

SD / HD / 3G / 6G-SDI is a digital representation of the video signal that is distributed via a single coaxial cable
with BNC connectors. (SMPTE 259M / 274M/ 296M /424M). Example formats are 480i and 525i.

Source file
The adjusted and saved file that describes the settings for the processor to use.

40 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 General

System
A Event Master system is all processors and devices included in one configuration of the control software.

T-Bar
Also known as a Fader, the T-Bar is the lever on a switcher that manually controls the progress of an effect.
The position of the fader controls the amount of the BG (Background) Bus signal and the PVW (Preview) Bus
signal that contributes to the mix, wipe or key.

Wipe
A Wipe is a transition between two video sources that uses a selected pattern to determine the edge between
the two sources.

Z-order
All layers of a Event Master Processor will have its layers in a z-order. Typically with is BG as the lowest.

3.5 Control overview

General
There are several ways to control Event Master Series Processors.
Settings and Diagnostics:
• Front Panel.
• Web interface running directly from an Event Master series processor.
Operational Set up and Programming:
• Event Master Toolset running on a Windows 7 PC or Apple Mac with OSX.
• EventMaster Controller EC-50 or EC-200/EC-210.
Remote recall and non-Barco device connectivity:
• External ASCII protocol connected devices like PresetManager.
Not all of these do the same thing, below the immediate differences. Several of these all work at the same
time, providing multiple points of control.

Front Panel
The Event Master series processor front panel includes a power switch, a USB port and a dimmable display
that works in conjunction with the ADJUST knob and SEL and ESC buttons. Through the front panel menus
you can perform basic system functions such as factory reset, set network parameters and basic diagnostics.
A front-panel USB port is provided for downloading and restoring logo images and system configurations.
Refer to the chapter “Front panel”, page 52 for more information about the about the Event Master Series
processor front panel menus.

Web interface
Via the local network and a computer the user can access a web page server running on Event Master series
processor. Basic system functions similar to the ones available from the front panel menus are accessible
through the web page server. Refer to the chapter “Settings Menu”, page 233 for more information about the
Event Master Series Web interface.

Event Master Toolset (EMTS)

Event Master Toolset Software is an easy to use GUI running on Windows, MAC, or Linux. It provides all the
Event Master Series of product with control and configuration.
The software consists of several menus and tabs that enable you to configure your system, setup the input
sources and output destinations, manage the dedicated multiviewer and create your presentation’s overall
“look”.

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 41

 General

In addition, since the configuration parameters and presets are stored on the Event Master processor unit,
multiple instances of the GUI can be run simultaneously on different computers expanding the control
possibilities.
Refer to the chapter “EM GUI orientation”, page 97 for more information about the GUI. Subsequently in this
User's Guide, the Event Master Control Software will be referred as the EM GUI.

Event Master Controller

The Event Master Controllers are dedicated hardware consoles specifically designed to support the Event
Master Series Processors, devices and systems created from several of them.
It runs from the same software as the Event Master ToolSet, but EC-200/EC-210 on an industrial operating
system with optimized hardware. All of them include tactile operation style with buttons and touch screen
displays allowing for easy and direct control.
Rudimentary Preset recall protocol for a single Processor is the same as for earlier products like Encore TM
and FSN Production Switching system.
An API based on JSON (JavaScript Object Notation) is available for developers who need to create custom
control programs and interfaces.

3.6 Presentation System overview

Advanced video processing
The Event Master processors are the most advanced video processing and presentation control systems on
the market today. These systems provide source selection, windowing, seamless switching, video effects and
integrated control for professional presentations. The modular and scalable architecture of the Event Master
processors allow support for a wide variety of show configurations.

A word about Layers

A layer is an image display element stacked on top of another or a background. Within the Event Master
processor, each mixer has two layers, A and B, and one Background layer. For complete flexibility, each
layer can be assigned to either PIP or Key functionality.
The Background layer has the lowest priority. Any input or inputs can be used as a background. This layer
visually appears behind all other PIPs and keys. The system can transition between two background sources.
PIP layer appears over backgrounds and under other layers of higher priority. PIP effects include mixes,
smooth moves, resizing, adjustable aspect ratio, borders and drop shadows.
Key layer also appears over backgrounds and under other layers of higher priority. Key effects include
luminance keys, split keys (key alpha or fill), invert keys and chroma keys.

Image 3-10

42 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 General

A word about Destinations

Destination is a location where the user assigns the outputs.
We can consider three destination types:
• Single/Multiple Screen Destination (e.g. one or more projectors)
• AUX Destination (e.g. a monitor dedicated for camera adjustments)
There are several rules that apply when defining an Destination configuration. For details on destination setup
procedures, please refer to the chapter “Configuration Menu > Adjustment > Destination Configuration”, page
132.

3.7 Installation requirements

Environment conditions
Table below summarizes the physical environment in which the Event Master devices and their controllers can
be operated or stored.

Environment Operating Non-Operating

Ambient Temperature 0°C (32°F) to 40°C (104°F) -10°C (14°F) to 60°C (140°F)
(E2, E2 Jr, S3–4K, S3–
4K Jr, EC-30, EC-50)
Ambient Temperature 0°C (32°F) to 35°C (95° F) -10°C (14°F) to 60°C (140°F)
(EC-200/210)
Air cleanliness Clean office environment (equivalent with n.a.
cleanroom standard ISO 14644-1 ISO Class
9)
Humidity 5% to 85% RH Non-condensed 0% to 95% RH Non-Condensed
Altitude (EX) -60 (-197Ft) to 2000m (6561Ft) -60 (-197Ft) to 10000m (32810Ft)
Altitude (E2, E2 Jr, S3– -60 (-197Ft) to 3000m (9843Ft)1 -60 (-197Ft) to 10000m (32810Ft)
4K, S3–4K Jr, EC-30,
EC-50, EC-200/210)

CAUTION: Let the Event Master devices and their controllers acclimate to the ambient temperature
after unpacking. Ensure that the humidity is within the specification. Neglecting this may result in
startup failure of these devices.

Software package
Verify that the Event Master device is loaded with the latest software version available on the Barco
web site (URL:https://www.barco.com/). Refer to the chapter “Updating firmware”, page 279 for
more information about the device upgrading software.

3.8 Initial inspection

General
Before shipment, all the devices were inspected and found to be free of mechanical and electrical defects. As
soon as the devices are unpacked, inspect for any damage that may have occurred in transit. Save all packing
material until the inspection is completed. If damage is found, file claim with carrier immediately. The Barco
Sales and the Service office should be notified as soon as possible.

1: For PRC (People's Republic of China) the certified altitude is specified on the product label.

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 43

 General

Unpacking
At delivery, Event Master devices are packed in a shipping case. Place the shipping case of the device on a
stable (solid), flat and insulated support during all the unpacking. Open the case from the top. Remove the
device that is packaged in an antistatic bag. Check the box content after unpacking.
After unpacking let the device acclimate to the room temperature which must be higher than 0°C
(32°F) and lower than 40°C (104°F) (lower than 35°C (95°F) for EC-200/EC-210). Neglecting this
may result in startup failure of the device.

Save the original shipping case and packing material, these will be necessary if you ever have to
ship your device. For maximum protection, repack your device as it was originally packed at the
factory.

When shipping an E2 in a Barco-supplied case, make sure that the rear connector protectors are
installed to prevent damage.

Box content
After unpacking an Event Master device, it is recommended that it be checked to see if all accessories were
included.
Depending on the product, the following accessories should be included.

Product Contains Accessories included

R9004698 • 4RU rack mount • E2 assembly
(E2) chassis
• 2x 14-9750004-90 • European Power Cord CEE7 (not included with units shipped to
China)
• 2x B1959864 • US Power Cord NEMA 5/15 (not included with units shipped to
China)
• 2x B1959865 • China Power Cord GB 2099 (included only with units shipped to
China)
• 2x B1959860 • CXP Expansion Link Cables
• 2x 09-0106032-91 • Rear Rack Mount Support Plates
• 8x 13-0081012-90 • 8-32 x .38 Pan Head Screws for Rear Rack Mount Support Plates
• 2x 09-0106031-90 • Rear Rack Mount Brackets
• 07-1205500-00 • USB Thumb Drive (Contains Users Guide, System Software and
Control GUI)
• R5905947 • Safety manual
• 26-1205004-00 • Quick Start Guide
R9004777 • 4RU rack mount • E2 Jr. assembly
(E2 Jr.) chassis
• 2x 14-9750004-90 • European Power Cord CEE7 (not included with units shipped to
China)
• 2x B1959864 • US Power Cord NEMA 5/15 (not included with units shipped to
China)
• 2x B1959865 • China Power Cord GB 2099 (included only with units shipped to
China)
• 2x 09-0106032-91 • Rear Rack Mount Support Plates
• 8x 13-0081012-90 • 8-32 x .38 Pan Head Screws for Rear Rack Mount Support Plates
• 2x 09-0106031-90 • Rear Rack Mount Brackets

44 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 General

Product Contains Accessories included

• 07-1205500-00 • USB Thumb Drive (Contains Users Guide, System Software and
Control GUI)
• R5905947 • Safety manual
• 26-1205004-00 • Quick Start Guide
R9004757 • 3RU rack mount • S3 assembly
(S3–4K) chassis
• 2x 14-9750004-90 • European Power Cord CEE7 (not included with units shipped to
China)
• 2x B1959864 • US Power Cord NEMA 5/15 (not included with units shipped to
China)
• 2x B1959865 • China Power Cord GB 2099 (included only with units shipped to
China)
• 1x B1959860 • CXP Expansion Link Cables
• 2x 09-0106032-91 • Rear Rack Mount Support Plates
• 8x 13-0081012-90 • 8-32 x .38 Pan Head Screws for Rear Rack Mount Support Plates
• 2x 09-0106031-90 • Rear Rack Mount Brackets
• 07-1205500-00 • USB Thumb Drive (Contains Users Guide, System Software and
Control GUI)
• R5906016 • Safety manual
• 26-1401004-00 • Quick Start Guide
R9004778 • 3RU rack mount • S3 Jr. assembly
(S3–4K Jr.) chassis
• 1x 14-9750004-90 • European Power Cord CEE7 (not included with units shipped to
China)
• 1x B1959864 • US Power Cord NEMA 5/15 (not included with units shipped to
China)
• 1x B1959865 • China Power Cord GB 2099 (included only with units shipped to
China)
• 2x 09-0106032-91 • Rear Rack Mount Support Plates
• 8x 13-0081012-90 • 8-32 x .38 Pan Head Screws for Rear Rack Mount Support Plates
• 2x 09-0106031-90 • Rear Rack Mount Brackets
• 07-1205500-00 • USB Thumb Drive (Contains Users Guide, System Software and
Control GUI)
• R5906016 • Safety manual
• 26-1401004-00 • Quick Start Guide
R9004776 • 1RU rack mount • EX assembly
(EX) chassis
• 1x 14-9750004-90 • European Power Cord CEE7 (not included with units shipped to
China)
• 1x B1959864 • US Power Cord NEMA 5/15 (not included with units shipped to
China)
• 1x B1959865 • China Power Cord GB 2099 (included only with units shipped to
China)

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 45

 General

Product Contains Accessories included

• 1x R9871179 • Rear Rack Mount Support Kit, includes brackets, side support
plates, screws, and washers
• 2x 09-0904021-90 • Rear Connector Protectors
• 4x 13-0211010-90 • 8-32 x .38 Pan Head Screws for rear connector protectors (x2 per
protector)
• 07-1205500-00 • USB Thumb Drive (Contains Users Guide, System Software and
Control GUI)
• R5906020 • Safety manual
• 26-1502004-00 • Quick Start Guide
R9004783 • EC controller • EC-30 assembly
(EC-30) • 1x 90803038EF • US Power Cord NEMA 5/15 (not included with units shipped to
China)
• 1x 14-9750004-90 • European Power Cord CEE7 (not included with units shipped to
China)
• 1x B1959865 • China Power Cord GB 2099 (included only with units shipped to
China)
• 1x 99070037EF • Power supply (25W, 12V)
• 1x R9080003 • Dust Cover
• 1x 90409546EF • USB Type A to Type B Cable
• 07-1205500-00 • USB Thumb Drive (Contains Users Guide, System Software and
Control GUI)
• R5906018 • Safety manual
• 60600356 • Quick Start Guide
R9004772 • EC controller • EC-50 assembly
(EC-50) • 1x 90803038EF • US Power Cord NEMA 5/15 (not included with units shipped to
China)
• 1x 14-9750004-90 • European Power Cord CEE7 (not included with units shipped to
China)
• 1x B1959865 • China Power Cord GB 2099 (included only with units shipped to
China)
• 1x 61100005 • Desk Light
• 1x R9080001 • Dust Cover
• 1x 90409546EF • USB Type A to Type B Cable
• 1x 90409545EF • DVI-D to DVI-D Cable
• 07-1205500-00 • USB Thumb Drive (Contains Users Guide, System Software and
Control GUI)
• R5906018 • Safety manual
• 60600332 • Quick Start Guide
R9004771 • EC controller • EC-200 assembly
(EC-200) • 1x 90803038EF • US Power Cord NEMA 5/15 (not included with units shipped to
China)
• 1x 14-9750004-90 • European Power Cord CEE7 (not included with units shipped to
China)

46 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 General

Product Contains Accessories included

• 1x B1959865 • China Power Cord GB 2099 (included only with units shipped to
China)
• 2x 61100005 • Desk Light
• 1x R9080002 • Dust Cover
• 07-1205500-00 • USB Thumb Drive (Contains Users Guide, System Software and
Control GUI)
• R5906018 • Safety manual
• 60600333 • Quick Start Guide
R9004790 • EC controller • EC-210 assembly
(EC-210) • 1x 90803038EF • US Power Cord NEMA 5/15 (not included with units shipped to
China)
• 1x 14-9750004-90 • European Power Cord CEE7 (not included with units shipped to
China)
• 1x B1959865 • China Power Cord GB 2099 (included only with units shipped to
China)
• 2x 61100005 • Desk Light
• 1x R9080004 • Dust Cover
• 07-1205500-00 • USB Thumb Drive (Contains Users Guide, System Software and
Control GUI)
• R5906018 • Safety manual
• 26–1701004–00 • Quick Start Guide

Mechanical check
This check should confirm that there are no broken parts and the unit is free of dents or scratches. Your Barco
Sales representative should be notified as soon as possible if this is not the case.

3.9 Rack-Mount Procedure

General
The chassis of the Event master devices (E2, S3 series, and EX) are designed to be rack mounted. The
devices are supplied with front rackmount hardware.
Please note the following important points:
• The E2 is 4RU in height, the S3 is 3RU in height, and the EX is 1RU in height.
• The maximum ambient operating temperature is 40° C.
Note: the maximum ambient operating temperature for EC-200/EC-210 is 35° C.
• Leave sufficient front and rear space to ensure that airflow through the unit is not restricted.
• When installing equipment into a rack, distribute the units evenly to prevent hazardous conditions that may
be created by uneven weight distribution.
• Connect the unit only to a properly rated supply circuit.
• Reliable grounding (earthing) of rack-mounted equipment should be maintained.
• Rack mount the unit from the front rack ears using four rack screws (not supplied). Threads may be metric
or otherwise, depending upon the rack type.

Rack-mount procedure is different depending the Event master device type (E2 or S3).

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 47

 General

CAUTION: At a minimum, an E2 chassis weighs 31 kg (68 lbs) and a S3 chassis weighs 24 kg (53
lbs). To avoid injury, it is recommended that two people rack mount these chassis.

How to install E2 in a rack

Use the following steps to rack mount the E2:
1. The E2 is shipped with side rails included in the shipping case and not installed onto the chassis. These side
rails, when they are properly installed and adjusted, assist with the distribution of chassis (and cable) weight
within your rack. Use the following steps to properly adjust the side rails:
1. Measure and install the two supplied mounting brackets on your rear rack rails.

Image 3-11

2. Measure the distance between the front and rear rack rails. Remove the four mounting screws that secure
each side rail to the E2, and then adjust the spacing of each side rail as necessary.

Image 3-12

1 Chassis rear
2 Side rail
3 Mounting screws
3. Re-install the mounting screws. When properly adjusted, the end of each side rail will protrude through the
slot in the rear mounting bracket, once the chassis is rack mounted.

Image 3-13

To take advantage of this feature, ensure that there is at least 1/2” of clearance above the chassis.

48 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 General

Image 3-14

2. For the E2’s two keyhole slots, measure and install two rack screws in your equipment rack’s front rails. Allow
each screw to protrude approximately 3/4” from the surface of the rails.
3. Lift the chassis, and while supporting it, slide the side rails through the slots in the rear mounting brackets.
4. While continuing to support the chassis, slide the screws (in the front rails) through the two keyholes, and let
the chassis settle up into the keyhole slots.
5. Tighten the two lower screws, then install and tighten the two uppers screws in the rack rail.

How to install S3 or EX in a rack

Use the following steps to rack mount the S3 or the EX:
1. S3 and EX units are shipped with side rails included in the shipping case and not installed onto the chassis.
These side rails, when they are properly installed and adjusted, assist with the distribution of chassis (and
cable) weight within your rack. Use the following steps to properly adjust the side rails:
1. Measure and install the two supplied mounting brackets on your rear rack rails.

Image 3-15

2. Measure the distance between the front and rear rack rails. Remove the mounting screws that secure each
side rail to the chassis, and then adjust the spacing of each side rail as necessary. The S3 uses four
mounting screws on each side rail; the EX uses two mounting screws on each side rail.

Image 3-16: S3–4K series side rail and mounting screws Image 3-17: EX expansion box side rail and mounting screws

1 Chassis rear 1 Chassis rear

2 Side rail 2 Side rail
3 Mounting screws 3 Mounting screws

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 49

 General

3. Re-install the mounting screws. When properly adjusted, the end of each side rail will protrude through the
slot in the rear mounting bracket, once the chassis is rack mounted.
2. Lift the chassis, and while supporting it, slide the side rails through the slots in the rear mounting brackets.
3. While continuing to support the chassis, install and tighten the two lower screws.
4. Finally, install and tighten the two uppers screws in the rack rail.

50 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 Hardware
orientation 4
About this chapter
This chapter explains the Event Master series processors hardware in detail.

Overview
• Front panel
• Rear panel
• SDI Input Card
• Dual Link DVI Input Card
• HDMI/DisplayPort Input Card
• Quad Channel DisplayPort 1.2 Input Card
• Quad HDMI 2.0 Input Card
• Tri-Combo Input Card
• Quad Channel DisplayPort 1.2 Output Card
• HDMI Output Card
• Quad HDMI 2.0 Output Card
• SDI Output Card
• Tri-Combo Output Card
• Expansion Link card
• VPU card

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 51

 Hardware orientation

4.1 Front panel

About front panel
See Image 4-1 for an illustration of the front panel of Event Master E2 (and E2 Jr.) and S3–4K (and S3–4K Jr.)
series processors. See Image 4-2 for an illustration of the front panel of the Event Master EX processor.

Image 4-1: E2 and S3 series front panel

1 Chassis handles 4 Menu navigation buttons

2 Barco logo 5 Power ON/OFF button
3 Display screen 6 USB port

Image 4-2: EX front panel

1 Barco logo
2 USB 2.0 port
3 Power light
4 Recessed reset switch

Chassis Handles
Two Chassis Handles are provided for ease of installation and transportation.

When transporting the chassis by its handles, do not set it down with the rear connectors towards
the ground. If you do, you may damage the rear connectors.

Display screen
The 4-line x 24-character screen shows all Event Master processors menus, sub-menus, and messages. The
display is dimmable.
At system startup, or when no menu buttons are selected, the screen displays the Status Menu. The following
illustration shows a sample Status Menu. For information about the contents of this menu, refer to the chapter
titled “Front Panel Menu orientation”, page 79.

52 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 Hardware orientation

Image 4-3: e.g. E2 display screen.

Menu navigation controls

The navigation in the menus is assumed by three controls:

• Turn the ADJUST knob to scroll through the menu items on the screen.
- Turn the knob counter-clockwise to scroll down.
- Turn the knob clockwise to scroll up.
A navigation cursor (>) to the left of a menu item indicates the position of the scroll bar, as
shown in the following illustration.

Image 4-4

• Press the SEL button to:

- Enter the Setup Menu tree from the Status Menu
- Select the menu item indicated by the navigation cursor
- Change or accept a parameter
- Answer Yes to menu queries
• Press the ESC button to exit a menu without making changes, to cancel an operation, to
answer No to menu queries, or to return to the Status Menu. Each press takes you back
up the menu tree one level.

Power ON/OFF button

This button switches the unit on and off.

USB port
The USB port is provided to support uploading and downloading system configurations and upgrading Event
Master series processors firmware.

4.2 Rear panel

About rear panel
See Image 4-5 for an illustration of the rear panels of the Event Master E2 and S3–4K series processors. See
Image 4-6 for an illustration of the rear panels of the Event Master E2 Jr. and S3–4K Jr. series processors. See
Image 4-7 for an illustration of the rear panel of the Event Master EX processor.

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 53

 Hardware orientation

Image 4-5: E2 and S3–4K series rear panels

1 AC connectors 6 VPU cards

2 RJ-45 connector for 10/100 BaseT Ethernet 7 Input cards (HDMI/DP, SDI, DVI)
communications 8 Outputs cards (DVI, SDI)
3 Genlock Input BNC with passive Loop-through 9 Multiviewer card (HDMI)
4 S3D In and S3D Out
5 Expansion Link cards

54 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 Hardware orientation

Image 4-6: E2 Jr. and S3–4K Jr. series rear panels

1 AC connectors – –
2 RJ-45 connector for 10/100 BaseT Ethernet 7 Input cards (HDMI/DP, SDI, DVI)
communications 8 Outputs cards (DVI, SDI)
3 Genlock Input BNC with passive Loop-through 9 Multiviewer card (HDMI)
4 S3D In and S3D Out
– –

The S3–4K Jr. comes with a single power supply; a redundant power supply is optional.

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 55

 Hardware orientation

Image 4-7: EX rear panel

1 AC connector 7 Input cards (HDMI/DP, SDI, DVI)

2 RJ-45 connector for 10/100 BaseT Ethernet 8 Outputs cards (DVI, SDI)
communications 8 Multiviewer card (HDMI)
3 Genlock BNC Input and Output – –
– – 10 USB 2.0 port
5 Expansion Links
– –
The EX image in Image 4-7 is an example only. The EX expansion box does not ship with cards;
cards must be purchased separately.

Description S3–4K
E2 E2 Jr. S3–4K EX
Jr.
1 AC connectors 2 2 2 1 1
2 RJ-45 connector for 10/100 BaseT 1 1 1 1 1
Ethernet communications
3 Genlock Input BNC with passive Loop- 2 2 2 2 NA1
through
4 S3D In and S3D Out 4 In, 4 In, 4 In, 4 In, NA
2 Out 2 Out 2 Out 2 Out
5 Expansion Link cards 2 NA2 1 NA2 NA3

6 VPU cards NA NA 2 1 NA
7 Input cards (HDMI/DP, SDI, DVI) 8 4 3 2 24

8 Outputs cards (DVI, SDI) 4 3 3 2 24

9 Multiviewer card (HDMI) 1 1 1 1 14
10 USB 2.0 port NA NA NA NA 1

Table 4-1: Comparison of Event Master rear-panel connections

1 The EX expansion box internally generates genlock output.

2 E2 Jr. and S3–4K Jr. do not have expansion Link cards.
3 The EX has two (2) Expansion Links integrated in the chassis.
4 Each EX expansion box has two general purpose card slots, each of which may support any E2
input or output card.

AC connectors
Event Master E2, E2 J., S3– 4K, and S3– 4K Jr. series processors are equipped with two redundant power
supplies. During normal operation the load is shared equally by both supplies. If one supply fails, the second
carries the whole load. Two AC Connector are provided to connect Event Master series processors to your
facility’s AC power source through the supplied power cords.
Input Power Specification: 100-240 VAC, 47-63 Hz

56 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 Hardware orientation

On each power supply there are 3 LED lights that provide status information as follows:
• DC Output Power LED: when Green, the supply is outputting valid DC power.
• Status LED: when amber indicates that an error has occurred.
• AC Input Power LED: when green it indicates that the supply is connected to a valid AC power.
Therefore, during normal operating conditions, the input AC and Output DC LEDs will turn green.
Note that the power supplies are installed upside down in the E2 model, so the silkscreen markings
will also appear upside down. Power supplies in the S3 model are installed in the correct orientation
for reading silkscreen markings.

Ethernet port
One RJ-45 connector is provided for 10/100BaseT Ethernet communications with the Event Master series
processor. The port is used for running the Web Interface and for connection to an external device.
The Ethernet connector is compatible with:
• Standard RJ-45 Ethernet cables
• Neutrik EtherCon® series cables
For pinout details, refer to the section dedicated to the pinout in Appendix A, “Standard connector pinouts”,
page 532.

Genlock Input BNC (with passive Loop-through)

The Genlock input supports analog NTSC and PAL Blackburst, as well as HD tri-level sync signals, per
SMPTE 274M and SMPTE 296M. The passive loop-through connector passes the Genlock signal to another
device downstream of the Event Master series processor. The Loop-through output will continue to function
even when the device is turned off. When the device is genlocked and the lock source is lost, the output of the
unit will automatically switch to “free-run” state without any discernible “glitching” on the output display device.
As the loop-thru is passive a 75Ohm termination is necessary for stable operation.
For Genlock connections details, refer to the Specifications Appendix.

Expansion Link cards

When event requirements exceed the capacity of a single unit in terms of input, output, or number of layers,
multiple Event Master processors can be linked together through the Expansion Link cards. The cards are
connected with Barco-supplied, high-bandwidth, bi-directional Expansion Link cables. These cables are also
commercially available.
Depending on the Event Master processor model, two, one, or no slots are reserved at left side of the rear
panel for Expansion Link cards.
E2 E2 Jr. S3–4K S3–4K Jr. EX
1, 2 NA1 1 NA1 NA2
1 E2 Jr. and S3–4K Jr. do not have Link cards, but these models can be upgraded with Link cards,
which would go into the same slots as the Link cards on the E2 and the S3–4K.
2 The EX has two (2) Expansion Links integrated in the chassis.

For more details on capabilities of expansion, refer to the section “Expansion Link card”, page 76.

VPU cards
VPU (Video Processing Unit) cards are at the heart of the Event Master Series of products. All scaling, layer
effects and image compositing happens within these cards. Each card supports the scaling requirements for
the product line with the award-winning Athena scaling technology at resolutions up to 4K. Due to their
reprogrammability any future video processing capabilities will be implemented in these cards. Current
capabilities include:
• Support for 2K, Dual-Link, and 4K Scaling
• Layer compositing over unscaled Backgrounds
• Layer effects, including Borders and Shadows
• Keying effects

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 57

 Hardware orientation

• Key frame effects

On an E2 and E2 Jr. units, the VPU cards are not accessible through the rear panel. On S3–4K and S3–4K Jr.
units, slots 2 and 3 are reserved for the VPU cards. The EX expansion box has no VPU cards.
For more details on VPU card, refer to the section “VPU card”, page 77.

Input cards
Each input card supports resolutions of up to 4K. The ability of the Event Master processors to support up to
28 inputs (E2) eliminates, in most cases, the need to have upstream routers or scalers.
Each card slot could accommodate either:
• 4x up-to HD/2K inputs
• 2x 2560x1600 inputs
• 1x 4K input
On an E2 (or an E2 Jr.) processor, slots 3 through 10 are reserved for input cards. On an S3–4K (or an S3–4K
Jr.) processor, slots 4 through 6 are reserved for input cards. Both slots of an EX expansion box may hold
input cards, but if the EX has both an input and an output card, the input card should go in slot 1.
The following sections describe each type of card in detail:
• “SDI Input Card”, page 58
• “Dual Link DVI Input Card”, page 60
• “HDMI/DisplayPort Input Card”, page 62

Outputs cards
Event Master series processors support HDMI and SDI output cards. Each output card supports resolutions of
up to 4K.
On an E2 (or an E2 Jr.) processor, slots 11 through 13 are reserved for output cards. On an S3–4K (or an S3–
4K Jr.) processor, slots 7 and 8 are reserved for output cards. Both slots of an EX expansion box may hold
output cards, but if the EX has both an input and an output card, the output card should go in slot 2.
The following sections describe each type of card in detail:
• “HDMI Output Card”, page 70
• “SDI Output Card”, page 72

Multiviewer (MVR) card

The Multiviewer card is physically identical to the HDMI output card, but when it’s plugged in the last slot it
operates as a Multiviewer (MVR), supporting two (2) HD outputs. The Multiviewer card is a dedicated, fully
integrated monitoring solution that allows multiple displays to be shown together on a single display. Up to 63
MVR windows (sources, backgrounds, clock, or destinations) can be displayed across two (2) outputs: 63
windows for Inputs and 63 windows for Outputs.
From the Multiviewer menu in the EM GUI the user can select from predefined layouts, or create customized
layouts, texts, backgrounds, borders, or colors for the monitors. The MVR includes several alarms such as
Frozen and Loss-of-Signal indicators. For more details on Multiviewer features, refer to the section
“Multiviewer (MVR) Menu”, page 225.

4.3 SDI Input Card

General
This card provides 4 BNC connectors supporting Single Link SD, HD, and 3G-SD inputs, as well as Ultra HD
(UHD) formats as Quad Link HD and 3G-SDI input.
The figure below illustrates the SDI Input card's rear panel connectors:

58 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 Hardware orientation

Image 4-8: SDI Input Card Rear Panel

1 BNC connector — SDI 1 with an LED that turns on green when a valid sync has been detected
2 BNC connector — SDI 2 with an LED that turns on green when a valid sync has been detected
3 BNC connector — SDI 3 with an LED that turns on green when a valid sync has been detected
4 BNC connector — SDI 4 with an LED that turns on green when a valid sync has been detected

Features
• Provides up to 4 independent signals
• Automatic SD, HD, and 3G SDI Switching
• Single Link SD/ HD/ 3G SDI Input
• Quad Link UHD input as 4x HD/ 3G-SDI Input
• Each input channel includes an LED that turns green when a valid sync is detected.

Specifications
• Supported format:
Signal Min. BNC Max Standard Examples
type connector channels
number per card
SD 1 4 SMPTE 259M-C 480i, 576i (NTSC/PAL)
HD 1 4 SMPTE 292M 1920x1080 @ 59.94i/50i
1920x1080psf @ 23.98/24/25/29.97/30
720x480 @ 60p/50p
3G 1 4 SMPTE 424M 1920x1080 @ 60p/50p
Barcolink 1920x1200 @ 60p/50p

4K / UHD 4 1 SMPTE 292M Image mapping: Quadrants

SMPTE 2048-2 3840x2160 @ 23.98/24/25/29.97/30 as 4x HD-
SDI
4096x2160 @ 23.98/24/25/29.97/30 as 4x HD-
SDI

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 59

 Hardware orientation

4K / UHD 4 1 SMPTE 424M Image mapping: Quadrants

SMPTE 2048-2 3840x2160 @ 50/59.94/60 as 4x 3G-SDI
4096x2160 @ 50/59.94/60 60 as 4x 3G-SDI
Level A and B supported

4K / UHD 4 1 SMPTE ST 425-5 Image mapping: 2 Sample Interleave

Subdivision (2SI)
3840x2160 @ 23.98/24/25/29.97/30 as 4x HD-
SDI
4096x2160 @ 23.98/24/25/29.97/30 as 4x HD-
SDI

3840x2160 @ 50/59.94/60 as 4x 3G-SDI

4096x2160 @ 50/59.94/60 60 as 4x 3G-SDI
Level A and B supported

SDI
Serial Digital Interface (SDI) is a serial link standardized by the Society of Motion Picture and
Television Engineers (SMPTE). SDI transmits uncompressed digital video over 75-ohm coaxial
cable within studios, and is seen on most professional video infrastructure equipment.

4.4 Dual Link DVI Input Card

General
The dual link DVI input card includes two DVI-I dual-link connectors that can support a single or dual-link DVI
video signal.
Although the DVI-I connectors includes pins that support analog signals, the DVI card doesn't
support analog signals. If you need to connect an analog signal to the unit, you need to employ an
external A/D converter.

The figure below illustrates the dual link DVI input card's rear panel connectors:

60 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 Hardware orientation

Image 4-9: Dual Link DVI Input Card Rear Panel

1 DVI-I dual-link connector — DVI 1 with an LED that turns on green when a valid sync has been
detected
2 DVI-I dual-link connector — DVI 2 with an LED that turns on green when a valid sync has been
detected

Features
• Process up to 2 signals independently
• 2x DVI-I dual-link connector
• Support for single or dual-link DVI video signal
• Each input channel includes an LED that turns green when a valid sync is detected.

Specifications
• DVI 1.0 Specification
• Maximum H Active: 4,096, Maximum V Active: 3,072
• Supported format:
- All single link DVI formats up to 165 MHz
- All dual link DVI formats up to 330 MHz
- 4K/UHD Supported:
◦ 3,840x2,160/ 23.98/24/25/29.97/30 input via 1x DVIDL, 2x DVISL (L and R half) or 4x DVISL
(quadrants)
◦ 3,840x2,160/ 50/59.94/60 input via 2x DVIDL (L and R half) or 4x DVISL (quadrants)
◦ 4,096x2,160/ 23.98/24/25/29.97/30 input via 2x DVISL (L and R half) or 4x DVISL (quadrants)
◦ 4,096x2,160/ 50/59.94/60 input via 2x DVIDL (L and R half) or 4x DVISL (quadrants)
◦ 4,096x2,400/ 23.98/24/25/29.97/30 input via 2x DVISL (L and R half) or 4x DVISL (quadrants)
◦ 4,096x2,400/ 50/59.94/60 input via 2x DVIDL (L & R half) or 4x DVISL (quadrants)
- EDID version 1.3 compatible
- HDCP version 1.4 compatible

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 61

 Hardware orientation

DVI
Digital Visual Interface is a display interface developed in response to the proliferation of digital flat
panel displays. The digital video connectivity standard that was developed by DDWG (Digital
Display Work Group). This connection standard offers two different connectors: one with 24 pins
that handles digital video signals only, and one with 29 pins that handles both digital and analog
video. This standard uses TMDS (Transition Minimized Differential Signal) from Silicon Image and
DDC (Display Data Channel) from VESA (Video Electronics Standards Association). DVI can be
single or dual link.

4.5 HDMI/DisplayPort Input Card

General
The HDMI/DisplayPort input card has two 19-pin HDMI connectors which can support an HDMI video signal,
and two 20-pin DisplayPort connectors supporting DisplayPort video signal.
The figure below illustrates the HDMI/DisplayPort input card's rear panel connectors:

Image 4-10: HDMI/DisplayPort Input Card Rear Panel

1 Displayport connector — Displayport 1 with an LED that turns on green when a valid sync has been
detected
2 Displayport connector — Displayport 2 with an LED that turns on green when a valid sync has been
detected
3 HDMI connector — HDMI 1 with an LED that turns on green when a valid sync has been detected
4 HDMI connector — HDMI 2 with an LED that turns on green when a valid sync has been detected

Features
• Process up to 4 signals independently
• 2x 19–pin HDMI connector (Type A)
• 2x 20–pin Displayport connector
• Each input channel includes an LED that turns green when a valid sync is detected.

HDMI specifications
• HDMI per 1.4a specifications

62 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 Hardware orientation

• Supported format:
- formats up to 2,560x1,600@60 and 3,840x1,200@60 (30 bits)
- 4K/UHD Supported:
◦ 3,840x2,160/ 23.98/24/25/29.97/30 input via 1x HDMI, 2x HDMI (L and R half) or 4x HDMI
(quadrants)
◦ 3,840x2,160/ 50/59.94/60 input via 2x HDMI (L and R half) or 4x HDMI (quadrants)
◦ 4,096x2,160/ 23.98/24/25/29.97/30 input via 1x HDMI, 2x HDMI (L and R half) or 4x HDMI
(quadrants)
◦ 4,096x2,160/ 50/59.94/60 input via 2x HDMI (L and R half) or 4x HDMI (quadrants)
• EDID version 1.3 compatible
• HDCP version 1.4 compatible

DisplayPort specifications
• DisplayPort per 1.1a specifications
• Supported format:
- formats up to 2,560x1,600@60 and 3,840x1,200@60 (30 bits)
- 4K/UHD Supported:
◦ 3,840x2,160/ 23.98/24/25/29.97/30 via 1x DP, 2x DP (L and R half) or 4x DP (quadrants)
◦ 3,840x2,160/ 50/59.94/60 via 2x DP (L and R half) or 4x DP (quadrants)
◦ 4,096x2,160/ 23.98/24/25/29.97/30 via 2x DP (L and R half) or 4x DP (quadrants)
◦ 4,096x2,160/ 50/59.94/60 via 2x DP (L and R half) or 4x DP (quadrants)
• EDID version 1.3 compatible
• HDCP version 1.3 compatible
HDMI
HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is a compact audio/video interface for transferring
uncompressed video data and compressed/uncompressed digital audio data from a HDMI-
compliant device ("the source device") to a compatible computer monitor, video projector, digital
television, or digital audio device. HDMI is a digital replacement for existing analog video standards.

DisplayPort
Digital display interface developed by the Video Electronics Standards Association (VESA). This
royalty-free interface is primarily used to connect a video source to a display device such as a
computer monitor, though it can also be used to transmit audio, USB, and other forms of data.
VESA designed it to replace VGA, DVI, and FPD-Link. Backward compatibility to VGA and DVI by
using active adapter dongles enables users to use DisplayPort fitted video sources without
replacing existing display devices.

4.6 Quad Channel DisplayPort 1.2 Input Card

General
The quad channel DisplayPort 1.2 input card has four 20-pin DisplayPort connectors that can accept a
DisplayPort signal.

Upgrade the E2/S3/EX software version to 6.2 or higher before using the quad-channel DisplayPort
1.2 input card.

The figure below illustrates the DisplayPort 1.2 input card’s rear panel connectors:

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 63

 Hardware orientation

Image 4-11: Quad Channel DisplayPort 1.2 Input Card Rear Panel

1 DP connector — DP 1 with an LED

2 DP connector — DP 2 with an LED
3 DP connector — DP 3 with an LED
4 DP connector — DP 4 with an LED

Features
• Four channels of DisplayPort video input, each on a full-size DisplayPort external connector
• Allows up to four (4) independent signals
• Each input channel includes an LED that turns green when a valid sync is detected.

Specifications
• DisplayPort per 1.2 specification
• Pixel clock up to 620 MHz
- Max pixel clock at 24 bits/pixel = 620 Mpix/sec
- Max pixel clock at 30 bits/pixel = 576 Mpix/sec
- Max pixel clock at 36 bits/pixel = 480 Mpix/sec
• Supported formats:
- formats up to 4,096x2,160@60 (30 bits)
- 4K/UHD Supported:
◦ 3,840x2,160/ 23.98/24/25/29.97/30 via 1x DP, 2x DP (L and R half) or 4x DP (quadrants)
◦ 3,840x2,160/ 50/59.94/60 via 1x DP, 2x DP (L and R half) or 4x DP (quadrants, or columns)
◦ 4,096x2,160/ 23.98/24/25/29.97/30 via 1x DP, 2x DP (L and R half) or 4x DP (quadrants)
◦ 4,096x2,160/ 50/59.94/60 via 1x DP, 2x DP (L and R half) or 4x DP (quadrants or columns)
• Multi-Stream Transport (MST)—not supported
• EDID version 1.4 compatible
• HDCP version 1.3 supported on all input connectors

64 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 Hardware orientation

DisplayPort
Digital display interface developed by the Video Electronics Standards Association (VESA). This
royalty-free interface is primarily used to connect a video source to a display device such as a
computer monitor, though it can also be used to transmit audio, USB, and other forms of data.
VESA designed it to replace VGA, DVI, and FPD-Link. Backward compatibility to VGA and DVI by
using active adapter dongles enables users to use DisplayPort fitted video sources without
replacing existing display devices.

4.7 Quad HDMI 2.0 Input Card

General
The Quad HDMI 2.0 input card has four 19-pin HDMI connectors, which can support a HDMI video signal.
The figure below illustrates the Quad HDMI 2.0 input card’s rear panel connectors:

Image 4-12: Quad HDMI 2.0 Input Card Rear Panel

1 HDMI 2.0 connector —HDMI 1 with an LED and standoff screw

2 HDMI 2.0 connector —HDMI 2 with an LED and standoff screw
3 HDMI 2.0 connector —HDMI 3 with an LED and standoff screw
4 HDMI 2.0 connector —HDMI 4 with an LED and standoff screw

Features
• Accepts up to 4 signals independently
• 4x 19–pin HDMI connector (Type A)
• Each input channel includes an LED that turns green when a valid sync is detected.

Specifications
• HDMI per 2.0 specifications
• Supported format:
- up to UHD@60p 4:2:2 12 bit
- 4 high-speed (Dual Link Type) inputs or 2 UHD@60p inputs per card

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 65

 Hardware orientation

- 4K/UHD Supported:
◦ 3,840x2,160/ 23.98/24/25/29.97/30 input via 1x HDMI, 2x HDMI (L and R half) or 4x HDMI
(quadrants)
◦ 3,840x2,160/ 50/59.94/60 input via 2x HDMI (L and R half) or 4x HDMI (quadrants)
◦ 4,096x2,160/ 23.98/24/25/29.97/30 input via 1x HDMI, 2x HDMI (L and R half) or 4x HDMI
(quadrants)
◦ 4,096x2,160/ 50/59.94/60 input via 2x HDMI (L and R half) or 4x HDMI (quadrants)
• Custom EDID
- User selectable bit depth and color space
• HDCP 1.x or HDCP 2.2 when an HDCP 2.2 compliant signal chain is present
- User-selectable HDCP modes
◦ Auto acquire and configure
◦ Custom settings for color adjustments and gamma
HDMI
HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is a compact audio/video interface for transferring
uncompressed video data and compressed/uncompressed digital audio data from a HDMI-
compliant device ("the source device") to a compatible computer monitor, video projector, digital
television, or digital audio device. HDMI is a digital replacement for existing analog video standards.

4.8 Tri-Combo Input Card

General
This card provides one 20-pin DisplayPort connector, supporting DisplayPort video signal; one 19-pin HDMI
connector, supporting an HDMI video signal; and 4 BNC connectors, supporting Single Link, Dual Link, and
Quad Link signals, in SD, HD, 3G, 6G, and 12G SDI formats.
The figure below illustrates the tri-combo input card’s rear panel connectors:

Image 4-13: Tri-Combo Input Card Rear Panel

1 DP connector — with an LED that turns on green when a valid sync has been detected
2 HDMI connector — with an LED that turns on green when a valid sync has been detected
3 BNC connector — SDI 1 with an LED that turns on green when a valid sync has been detected
4 BNC connector — SDI 2 with an LED that turns on green when a valid sync has been detected

66 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 Hardware orientation

5 BNC connector — SDI 3 with an LED that turns on green when a valid sync has been detected
6 BNC connector — SDI 4 with an LED that turns on green when a valid sync has been detected

Features
• Provides up to six (6) independent signals
• One channel of DisplayPort video on a full-size DisplayPort connector.
• One channel of HDMI video on a Type A connector.
• Process up to four independent SDI signals with support for SD, HD, 3G, 6G and 12G in Single Link, Dual
Link (1.5G) or Quad Link (3G)
• Each input channel includes an LED that turns green when a valid sync is detected.

Specifications
DisplayPort
• DisplayPort per 1.2 specification
• Pixel clock up to 620 MHz
- Max pixel clock at 24 bits/pixel = 620 Mpix/sec
- Max pixel clock at 30 bits/pixel = 576 Mpix/sec
- Max pixel clock at 36 bits/pixel = 480 Mpix/sec
• Supported formats
- formats up to 4096x2160@60 (30 bits)
- 4K/UHD Supported:
◦ 3840x2,400/ 50/59.94/60 via 1x DP
◦ 4096x2,160/ 50/59.94/60 via 1x DP
◦ 3840x2,160/ 50/59.94/60 via 1x DP
• Supply up to 500 mA @ 3.3V on pin 20
- Allows the DP connector to power an external device
- Overcurrent protection provided by means of a re-settable fuse
• Multi-Stream Transport (MST)—not supported
• EDID version 1.3 compatible
• HDCP version 1.3 compatible
HDMI
• HDMI per 2.0 specification
• Pixel clock up to 600 MHz
- Max pixel clock at 24 bits/pixel = 600 Mpix/sec
- Max pixel clock at 30 bits/pixel = 480 Mpix/sec
- Max pixel clock at 36 bits/pixel = 400 Mpix/sec
• Supported formats
- formats up to 2560x1600@60 and 3840x1200@60 (30 bits)
- 4K/UHD Supported:
◦ 3840x2400/ 50/59.94/60 input via 1x HDMI
◦ 4096x2160/ 50/59.94/60 input via 1x HDMI
◦ 3840x2160/ 50/59.94/60 input via 1x HDMI
• EDID version 1.3 compatible
• HDCP version 1.4 and version 2.2 compatible
SDI
• Supported formats:
Signal Min. BNC Max Standard Examples
type connector channels
number per card
SD 1 4 SMPTE 259M-C 480i, 576i (NTSC/PAL)
HD 1 4 SMPTE 292M 1920x1080 @ 59.94i/50i
1920x1080psf @ 23.98/24/25/29.97/30

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 67

 Hardware orientation

720x480 @ 60p/50p
3G 1 4 SMPTE 424M 1920x1080 @ 60p/50p
Barcolink 1920x1200 @ 60p/50p

6G 1 1 SMPTE 2081-10 3840x2160 @ 23.98/24/25/29.97/30

4096x2160 @ 23.98/24/25/29.97/30
12G 1 1 SMPTE 2082-10 3840x2160 @ 50/59.94/60
4096x2160 @ 50/59.94/60
4K / UHD 4 1 SMPTE 292M Image mapping: Quadrants
SMPTE 2048-2 3840x2160 @ 23.98/24/25/29.97/30 as 4x HD-
SDI
4096x2160 @ 23.98/24/25/29.97/30 as 4x HD-
SDI

4K / UHD 4 1 SMPTE 424M Image mapping: Quadrants

SMPTE 2048-2 3840x2160 @ 50/59.94/60 as 4x 3G-SDI
4096x2160 @ 50/59.94/60 60 as 4x 3G-SDI
Level A and B supported

4K / UHD 4 1 SMPTE ST 425-5 Image mapping: 2 Sample Interleave

Subdivision (2SI)
3840x2160 @ 23.98/24/25/29.97/30 as 4x HD-
SDI
4096x2160 @ 23.98/24/25/29.97/30 as 4x HD-
SDI

3840x2160 @ 50/59.94/60 as 4x 3G-SDI

4096x2160 @ 50/59.94/60 60 as 4x 3G-SDI
Level A and B supported

DisplayPort
Digital display interface developed by the Video Electronics Standards Association (VESA). This
royalty-free interface is primarily used to connect a video source to a display device such as a
computer monitor, though it can also be used to transmit audio, USB, and other forms of data.
VESA designed it to replace VGA, DVI, and FPD-Link. Backward compatibility to VGA and DVI by
using active adapter dongles enables users to use DisplayPort fitted video sources without
replacing existing display devices.

HDMI
HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is a compact audio/video interface for transferring
uncompressed video data and compressed/uncompressed digital audio data from a HDMI-
compliant device ("the source device") to a compatible computer monitor, video projector, digital
television, or digital audio device. HDMI is a digital replacement for existing analog video standards.

SDI
Serial Digital Interface (SDI) is a serial link standardized by the Society of Motion Picture and
Television Engineers (SMPTE). SDI transmits uncompressed digital video over 75-ohm coaxial
cable within studios, and is seen on most professional video infrastructure equipment.

68 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 Hardware orientation

4.9 Quad Channel DisplayPort 1.2 Output Card

General
The quad channel DisplayPort 1.2 output card has four 20-pin DisplayPort connectors that can provide a
DisplayPort signal.
The figure below illustrates the DisplayPort 1.2 output card’s rear panel connectors:

Image 4-14: Quad Channel DisplayPort 1.2 Output Card Rear Panel

1 DP connector — DP 1
2 DP connector — DP 2
3 DP connector — DP 3
4 DP connector — DP 4

Features
• Four channels of DisplayPort video output, each on a full-size DisplayPort external connector
• Provides up to four (4) independent signals

Specifications
• DisplayPort per 1.2 specification
• Pixel clock up to 620 MHz
- Max pixel clock at 24 bits/pixel = 620 Mpix/sec
- Max pixel clock at 30 bits/pixel = 576 Mpix/sec
- Max pixel clock at 36 bits/pixel = 480 Mpix/sec
• Supported formats:
- formats up to 4,096x2,160@60 (30 bits)
- 4K/UHD Supported:
◦ 3,840x2,160/ 23.98/24/25/29.97/30 via 1x DP, 2x DP (L and R half) or 4x DP (quadrants)
◦ 3,840x2,160/ 50/59.94/60 via 1x DP, 2x DP (L and R half) or 4x DP (quadrants, or columns)
◦ 4,096x2,160/ 23.98/24/25/29.97/30 via 1x DP, 2x DP (L and R half) or 4x DP (quadrants)
◦ 4,096x2,160/ 50/59.94/60 via 1x DP, 2x DP (L and R half) or 4x DP (quadrants or columns)
• Supply up to 500 mA @ 3.3V on pin 20
- Allows the DP connector to power an external device

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 69

 Hardware orientation

• Multi-Stream Transport (MST)—not supported

• EDID version 1.4 compatible
• HDCP version 1.3 supported on connectors 1 and 2
DisplayPort
Digital display interface developed by the Video Electronics Standards Association (VESA). This
royalty-free interface is primarily used to connect a video source to a display device such as a
computer monitor, though it can also be used to transmit audio, USB, and other forms of data.
VESA designed it to replace VGA, DVI, and FPD-Link. Backward compatibility to VGA and DVI by
using active adapter dongles enables users to use DisplayPort fitted video sources without
replacing existing display devices.

4.10 HDMI Output Card

General
The HDMI output card has four 19-pin HDMI connectors which can provide a HDMI video signal.
The figure below illustrates the HDMI output card's rear panel connectors:

Image 4-15: HDMI Output Card Rear Panel

1 HDMI connector — HDMI 1

2 HDMI connector — HDMI 2
3 HDMI connector — HDMI 3
4 HDMI connector — HDMI 4

Features
• Default slot(s): 11, 12, 14
• Provide up to 4 independent signals
• 4x 19–pin HDMI connector (Type A)
• The two connectors support single link signals up-to 300 MHz.

Specifications
• HDMI per 1.4a Specification

70 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 Hardware orientation

• Supported format:
- formats up to 2,560x1,600@60 and 3,840x1,200@60 (30 bits)
- 4K/UHD Supported:
◦ 3,840x2,160/ 23.98/24/25/29.97/30 input via 1x HDMI, 2x HDMI (L and R half) or 4x HDMI
(quadrants)
◦ 3,840x2,160/ 50/59.94/60 input via 2x HDMI (L and R half) or 4x HDMI (quadrants)
◦ 4,096x2,160/ 23.98/24/25/29.97/30 input via 1x HDMI, 2x HDMI (L and R half) or 4x HDMI
(quadrants)
◦ 4,096x2,160/ 50/59.94/60 input via 2x HDMI (L and R half) or 4x HDMI (quadrants)
- EDID version 1.3 compatible
- HDCP version 1.4 compatible

4.11 Quad HDMI 2.0 Output Card

General
The Quad HDMI 2.0 output card has four 19-pin HDMI connectors, which can support a HDMI video signal.

Upgrade the E2/S3/EX software version to 6.2 or higher before using the quad HDMI 2.0 output
card.

The figure below illustrates the Quad HDMI 2.0 output card’s rear panel connectors:

Image 4-16: Quad HDMI 2.0 Output Card Rear Panel

1 HDMI 2.0 connector —HDMI 1

2 HDMI 2.0 connector —HDMI 2
3 HDMI 2.0 connector —HDMI 3
4 HDMI 2.0 connector —HDMI 4

Features
• Process up to 4 signals independently
• 4x 19–pin HDMI connector (Type A)

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 71

 Hardware orientation

Specifications
• HDMI per 2.0 specifications
• Supported format:
- up to UHD@60p 4:2:2 12 bit
- 4 high-speed (Dual Link Type) inputs or 2 UHD@60p inputs per card
- 4K/UHD Supported:
◦ 3840x2160/ 23.98/24/25/29.97/30 input via 1x HDMI, 2x HDMI (L and R half) or 4x HDMI
(quadrants)
◦ 3840x2160/ 50/59.94/60 input via 2x HDMI (L and R half) or 4x HDMI (quadrants)
◦ 4096x2160/ 23.98/24/25/29.97/30 input via 1x HDMI, 2x HDMI (L and R half) or 4x HDMI
(quadrants)
◦ 4096x2160/ 50/59.94/60 input via 2x HDMI (L and R half) or 4x HDMI (quadrants)
• Custom EDID
- User selectable bit depth and color space
• HDCP 1.x or HDCP 2.2 when an HDCP 2.2 compliant signal chain is present
- User-selectable HDCP modes
◦ Auto acquire and configure
◦ Custom settings for color adjustments and gamma
HDMI
HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is a compact audio/video interface for transferring
uncompressed video data and compressed/uncompressed digital audio data from a HDMI-
compliant device ("the source device") to a compatible computer monitor, video projector, digital
television, or digital audio device. HDMI is a digital replacement for existing analog video standards.

4.12 SDI Output Card

General
Process up to four independent SDI signals with support for SD, HD, 3G, 6G and 12G in Single Link, Dual Link
(1.5G) or Quad Link (3G).
The figure below illustrates the SDI Output Card's rear panel connectors:

Image 4-17: SDI output Card Rear Panel

1 BNC connector — SDI 1

2 BNC connector — SDI 2
3 BNC connector — SDI 3
4 BNC connector — SDI 4

72 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 Hardware orientation

Features
• Provides up to 4 independent signals
• Automatic SD, HD, and 3G SDI Switching
• Single Link SD/ HD/ 3G SDI Output
• Quad Link UHD input as 4x HD/ 3G-SDI Output

Specifications
• Supported format:
Signal Min. BNC Max Standard Examples
type connector channels
number per card
SD 1 4 SMPTE 259M-C 480i, 576i (NTSC/PAL)
HD 1 4 SMPTE 292M 1920x1080 @ 59.94i/50i
1920x1080psf @ 23.98/24/25/29.97/30
720x480 @ 60p/50p
3G 1 4 SMPTE 424M 1920x1080 @ 60p/50p
Barcolink 1920x1200 @ 60p/50p

4K / UHD 4 1 SMPTE 292M Image mapping: Quadrants

SMPTE 2048-2 3840x2160 @ 23.98/24/25/29.97/30 as 4x HD-
SDI
4096x2160 @ 23.98/24/25/29.97/30 as 4x HD-
SDI

4K / UHD 4 1 SMPTE 424M Image mapping: Quadrants

SMPTE 2048-2 3840x2160 @ 50/59.94/60 as 4x 3G-SDI
4096x2160 @ 50/59.94/60 60 as 4x 3G-SDI
Level A and B supported

4K / UHD 4 1 SMPTE ST 425-5 Image mapping: 2 Sample Interleave

Subdivision (2SI)
3840x2160 @ 23.98/24/25/29.97/30 as 4x HD-
SDI
4096x2160 @ 23.98/24/25/29.97/30 as 4x HD-
SDI

3840x2160 @ 50/59.94/60 as 4x 3G-SDI

4096x2160 @ 50/59.94/60 60 as 4x 3G-SDI
Level A and B supported

SDI
Serial Digital Interface (SDI) is a serial link standardized by the Society of Motion Picture and
Television Engineers (SMPTE). SDI transmits uncompressed digital video over 75-ohm coaxial
cable within studios, and is seen on most professional video infrastructure equipment.

4.13 Tri-Combo Output Card

General
This card provides one 20-pin DisplayPort connector, supporting DisplayPort video signal; one 19-pin HDMI
connector, supporting an HDMI video signal; and 4 BNC connectors, supporting Single Link, Dual Link, and
Quad Link signals, in SD, HD, 3G, 6G, and 12G SDI formats.

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 73

 Hardware orientation

The figure below illustrates the tri-combo output card’s rear panel connectors:

Image 4-18: Tri-Combo Output Card Rear Panel

1 DP connector
2 HDMI connector
3 BNC connector — SDI 1
4 BNC connector — SDI 2
5 BNC connector — SDI 3
6 BNC connector — SDI 4

Features
• Provides up to six (6) independent signals
• One channel of DisplayPort video on a full-size DisplayPort connector.
• One channel of HDMI video on a Type A connector.
• Process up to four independent SDI signals with support for SD, HD, 3G, 6G, and 12G in Single Link, Dual
Link (1.5G) or Quad Link (3G)

Specifications
DisplayPort
• DisplayPort per 1.2 specification
• Pixel clock up to 620 MHz
- Max pixel clock at 24 bits/pixel = 620 Mpix/sec
- Max pixel clock at 30 bits/pixel = 576 Mpix/sec
- Max pixel clock at 36 bits/pixel = 480 Mpix/sec
• Supported formats
- formats up to 4096x2160@60 (30 bits)
- 4K/UHD Supported:
◦ 3840x2,400/ 50/59.94/60 via 1x DP
◦ 4096x2,160/ 50/59.94/60 via 1x DP
◦ 3840x2,160/ 50/59.94/60 via 1x DP
• Supply up to 500 mA @ 3.3V on pin 20
- Allows the DP connector to power an external device
- Overcurrent protection provided by means of a re-settable fuse

74 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 Hardware orientation

• Multi-Stream Transport (MST)—not supported

• EDID version 1.3 compatible
• HDCP version 1.3 compatible
HDMI
• HDMI per 2.0 specification
• Pixel clock up to 600 MHz
- Max pixel clock at 24 bits/pixel = 600 Mpix/sec
- Max pixel clock at 30 bits/pixel = 480 Mpix/sec
- Max pixel clock at 36 bits/pixel = 400 Mpix/sec
• Supported formats
- formats up to 2560x1600@60 and 3840x1200@60 (30 bits)
- 4K/UHD Supported:
◦ 3840x2400/ 50/59.94/60 input via 1x HDMI
◦ 4096x2160/ 50/59.94/60 input via 1x HDMI
◦ 3840x2160/ 50/59.94/60 input via 1x HDMI
• EDID version 1.3 compatible
• HDCP version 1.4 and version 2.2 compatible
SDI
• Supported formats:
Signal Min. BNC Max Standard Examples
type connector channels
number per card
SD 1 4 SMPTE 259M-C 480i, 576i (NTSC/PAL)
HD 1 4 SMPTE 292M 1920x1080 @ 59.94i/50i
1920x1080psf @ 23.98/24/25/29.97/30
720x480 @ 60p/50p
3G 1 4 SMPTE 424M 1920x1080 @ 60p/50p
Barcolink 1920x1200 @ 60p/50p

6G 1 1 SMPTE 2081-10 3840x2160 @ 23.98/24/25/29.97/30

4096x2160 @ 23.98/24/25/29.97/30
12G 1 1 SMPTE 2082-10 3840x2160 @ 50/59.94/60
4096x2160 @ 50/59.94/60
Barcolink Ultra (4K) 3840x2400 @ 50/59.94/60
4K / UHD 4 1 SMPTE 292M Image mapping: Quadrants
SMPTE 2048-2 3840x2160 @ 23.98/24/25/29.97/30 as 4x HD-
SDI
4096x2160 @ 23.98/24/25/29.97/30 as 4x HD-
SDI

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 75

 Hardware orientation

4K / UHD 4 1 SMPTE 424M Image mapping: Quadrants

SMPTE 2048-2 3840x2160 @ 50/59.94/60 as 4x 3G-SDI
4096x2160 @ 50/59.94/60 60 as 4x 3G-SDI
Level A and B supported

4K / UHD 4 1 SMPTE ST 425-5 Image mapping: 2 Sample Interleave

Subdivision (2SI)
3840x2160 @ 23.98/24/25/29.97/30 as 4x HD-
SDI
4096x2160 @ 23.98/24/25/29.97/30 as 4x HD-
SDI

3840x2160 @ 50/59.94/60 as 4x 3G-SDI

4096x2160 @ 50/59.94/60 60 as 4x 3G-SDI
Level A and B supported

DisplayPort
Digital display interface developed by the Video Electronics Standards Association (VESA). This
royalty-free interface is primarily used to connect a video source to a display device such as a
computer monitor, though it can also be used to transmit audio, USB, and other forms of data.
VESA designed it to replace VGA, DVI, and FPD-Link. Backward compatibility to VGA and DVI by
using active adapter dongles enables users to use DisplayPort fitted video sources without
replacing existing display devices.

HDMI
HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is a compact audio/video interface for transferring
uncompressed video data and compressed/uncompressed digital audio data from a HDMI-
compliant device ("the source device") to a compatible computer monitor, video projector, digital
television, or digital audio device. HDMI is a digital replacement for existing analog video standards.

SDI
Serial Digital Interface (SDI) is a serial link standardized by the Society of Motion Picture and
Television Engineers (SMPTE). SDI transmits uncompressed digital video over 75-ohm coaxial
cable within studios, and is seen on most professional video infrastructure equipment.

4.14 Expansion Link card

About Expansion link
When event requirements exceed the capacity of a single unit in terms of input, output, or number of layers,
multiple Event Master processors can be linked together through the Expansion Link cards.
CXP
CXP is a copper connector system specified by the InfiniBand Trade Association. It provides twelve
10 Gbit/s links suitable for single 100 Gigabit Ethernet, three 40 Gigabit Ethernet channels, or
twelve 10 Gigabit Ethernet channels or a single Infiniband 12× QDR link. The connector has 4 rows,
each of 21 pin, total 84 pins.[Note 1]: The C is the Roman numeral for 100.

General
The Link card has 2 CXP connectors which can support up to 12 10-Gbit channels.
The figure below illustrates the Link card's rear panel connectors:

76 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 Hardware orientation

Image 4-19

1 CXP connector — CXP 1

2 CXP connector — CXP 2

Features
• Provide up to 12 10-Gbit channels
• Depending on the Event Master processor model, two, one, or no slots are reserved at left side of the rear
panel for Expansion Link cards.

E2 E2 Jr. S3–4K S3–4K Jr. EX

1, 2 NA1 1 NA1 NA2
1 E2 Jr. and S3–4K Jr. do not have Link cards, but these models can be upgraded with Link cards,
which would go into the same slots as the Link cards on the E2 and the S3–4K.
2 The EX has two (2) Expansion Links, but they are not on a swappable card.

Specifications
• CXP Specification

4.15 VPU card

General
VPU (Video Processing Unit) cards perform the various scaling, layer effects, and image compositing
operations within the Event Master series of products. The internal cross point routes all video signals to and
from the VPU cards. The VPU cards have no external connections.

Features
• Support for 2K, Dual Link, and 4K video processing
• Layer compositing over unscaled Backgrounds
• Layer effects, including Borders and Shadows
• Keying effects
• Keyframe effects

Specifications
Each VPU card is a 4K scalar capable of acting as a 4K scalar, or as two (2) Dual Link scalars, or as four (4)
2K HD scalars

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 77

 Hardware orientation

Maximum number of Single Layers/Mixing Layers

Mixing Layer Type
E2 E2 Jr. S3–4K S3–4K Jr. EX
2K HD 32/16 16/8 8/4 4/2 Up to 16/8
Dual Link 16/8 8/4 4/2 2/1 Up to 8/4
4K 8/4 4/2 2/1 NA Up to 4/2

The VPU cards are not accessible from the rear panel on E2 and E2 Jr. units. Even though they have no
external connections, slots 2 and 3 are reserved for VPU cards on S3– 4K and S3– 4K Jr. units. The EX
expansion box can have a combination of Input and Output cards, or it can have two VPU cards.

78 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 Front Panel Menu
orientation 5
About this chapter
This chapter describes the front panel menus of the Event Master units (E2 and S3 series), including how they
are accessed and the functions or parameters that are available. The menu trees are presented in block
diagram format throughout the chapter.

Overview
• Power-up initialization
• Front Panel menu tree
• Using menu system
• About Status menu
• About Setup menu
• About the System menu
• System menu > Black Invalid
• System menu > USB device (Backup/Restore)
• System menu > Ethernet
• System menu > VFD brightness (display brightness)
• System menu > Diagnostics
• System menu > Lock front panel
• Using the Tech Support menu
• Restoring Factory Default Settings
• Firmware Upgrade
• Save All

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 79

 Front Panel Menu orientation

5.1 Power-up initialization

Initialization
Ensure that your system is properly installed and cabled. Make sure the two AC Connector are properly
connected to your facility’s AC power source through the two supplied power cords. Locate the power button
on the front panel and turn power On. While the system is initializing, the front-panel buttons light up one at a
time, and the following message is displayed.

Image 5-1: System Initialization Message

After system initialization is complete, the Status menu appears.

If under some rare circumstance the system does not fully boot correctly, press and hold the SEL
and ESC keys while applying power to the unit. Release these keys when a menu appears asking
to Factory Reset the unit. Perform the Factory Reset and the unit will boot normally.

5.2 Front Panel menu tree

About this section
The diagram below illustrates the Front Panel menu tree of the Event master devices. Please use this diagram
for reference as you learn how to operate the system.

80 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 Front Panel Menu orientation

Menu tree

Image 5-2

5.3 Using menu system

General
This section describes the conventions for using the menu system of the Event Master devices. For reference,
the following illustration shows the System Menu.

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 81

 Front Panel Menu orientation

Image 5-3: System menu

The unit’s display screen is four lines high. Throughout this chapter, entire menus are shown for
ease of reference, unless otherwise noted.

Please note the following important menu rules and conventions:

• The top line names the current menu, in upper-case letters.
• Subsequent lines typically display two fields:
- For a function, the left-hand field names the function. The right-hand field shows the function’s current
parameter (or value). In the preceding illustration, Black Invalid is a function and On is its current
value.
- For a submenu, the left-hand field names the submenu that you can access. The right-hand field
displays a double arrow (>>), indicating that a submenu is available. In the preceding illustration, USB
Backup/Restore and Ethernet are two of the available submenus. To use a submenu, scroll to it and
press SEL. Then scroll through the list that appears.
- The navigation cursor (>) in the left-hand column indicates the current line on which you can take
action. This arrow moves as you rotate the ADJUST knob on the front panel. When you reach an
editable field and press SEL, the navigation cursor changes to an edit cursor (#).

Making a menu selection

To select a menu item, use the ADJUST knob to scroll to the item, then press the SEL button on the front
panel:
• To scroll through a menu:
- Turn the ADJUST knob counter-clockwise to scroll down.
- Turn the ADJUST knob clockwise to scroll up.
• To open a submenu, scroll to the submenu line and press SEL.
•
• To change a parameter, scroll to the desired line and press SEL. The navigation cursor changes to the edit
cursor. Use the ADJUST knob to modify the value:
- Turn the ADJUST knob clockwise to increase a value.
- Turn the ADJUST knob counter-clockwise to decrease a value.
Then press SEL to accept a parameter or value. The edit cursor changes back to the navigation cursor.

You must press SEL to accept the value.

Throughout this user’s guide, the term “select” is used as an abbreviation for “scroll to a menu line
and press SEL.”
Example: Select the Ethernet menu to begin configuring network settings.

Exiting a menu
• In the edit mode (i.e., the edit cursor is visible), press ESC to exit a menu without changing the original
parameter.
• To navigate back up the menu structure, press ESC again. Each press takes you back up the menu tree by
one level.

82 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 Front Panel Menu orientation

Answering a menu query

The SEL button is used to answer Yes to certain menu queries. The ESC button is used to answer No to
menu queries. Sometimes the two buttons are appropriate for answer to a menu queries. The following
illustration shows an example of a menu query.

Image 5-4: Validation error message

Edit name
Sometimes, it is necessary to edit name, like the name of a configuration file, for example. To modify name
use the following procedure:
1. Navigate to submenu (For example, the following illustration shows the USB Backup Config submenu).

Image 5-5: USB Backup Config submenu

The navigator cursor (>) is at the field targeted.

2. Press SEL
The navigation cursor changes to the edit cursor. A blank field for the first character becomes available and
this field is marked by an underscore.
3. Use the ADJUST knob to scroll to the first character you want to use for the format name.
Turning the ADJUST knob clockwise once moves to the next letter of the alphabet. If you start with an
upper-case letter, as shown in the preceding illustration, then the next letter is also a capital letter. If you
start with a lower-case letter, the next letter is a lower-case letter:
• F –> G
• f –> g
If you start with a number, the next character is a number.
Continuing to turn the ADJUST knob clockwise at the end of the upper-case alphabet displays a series of
punctuation marks you can use in the format name.
Continuing to turn the knob clockwise at the end of the punctuation marks displays the lower-case
alphabet in order.
When you reach the end of the lower-case alphabet, turn the ADJUST knob counter-clockwise to scroll
back through the options in order.

4. Press SEL. The cursor moves to the next character field, which is now blank with an underscore.
5. Repeat the previous steps as many times as needed, pressing SEL for each character selection.
6. When you have selected all the characters, press SEL again to save the name.

A file name can consist of up to 19 alpha-numeric characters.

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 83

 Front Panel Menu orientation

5.4 About Status menu

General
The Status Menu is the Event Master series processor’s top-level menu, which appears by default at system
startup. This menu provides system name, Unit ID, Genlock status and unit IP address. The following figure
illustrates a sample Status Menu. Press the ESC button when the Setup menu is displayed allows to return in
the Status menu.

Image 5-6: e.g. E2 Status menu

System name
Human readable name of the current system. Particularly useful in the user interface when multiple Event
Master system are connected in the same network.
System1 is the default value. This name can be changed in the configuration page of the GUI. For more
details please refer to the section dedicated to the system configuration in the chapter “Configuration Menu”,
page 103.

Unit ID
ID required to identify different units are acting as a single system in order to expand for Inputs, Outputs or
Layers.
This ID can be changed in the configuration page of the GUI. For more details please refer to the section
dedicated to the System configuration in the chapter “Configuration Menu”, page 103.

Genlock
This line gives information about the Genlock connection situated at the back of the Event Master unit. For
more detail on this connection please refer to the section dedicated to the Genlock Input BNC in the
chapter“Rear panel”, page 53.
The user could turn Genlock OFF or ON in the configuration page of the GUI. The Event Master unit will
determine what kind of Genlock is connected and will update the Status field. The status field can say
“Locked”, “Lost Lock” or “Free Run”. For more details please refer to the section dedicated to the Event Master
unit configuration in the chapter “System Setup”, page 251.

IP address
IP address of the Event Master unit in the local network.
If there is no internet connection, or if a DHCP server has not been found, the IP address is 000.000.000.000.
The IP address is needed for running the Web Interface and for connection to an external device. For more
details please refer to the section dedicated to the setting of Ethernet options in the chapter “About the System
menu”, page 85

5.5 About Setup menu

General
The Setup menu, shown in the following illustration, is the menu from which you access all operational
menus. To display the Setup menu, press the SEL button on the front panel when the Status menu is
displayed, or press the ESC button to go back from a submenu (one level for each time you press the button).

84 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 Front Panel Menu orientation

Image 5-7: Setup menu

From the Setup menu, you can configure certain system settings for the Event Master unit, display Technical
Support contact information, restore factory default settings, and check for available firmware updates. And
finally, you can save all the recent changes to the system.
The following sections describe each Setup Menu option in detail, except for the Code Upgrade feature. For
details about that option, refer to the chapter “Updating firmware”, page 279:
• “About the System menu”, page 85
• “Using the Tech Support menu”, page 94
• “Restoring Factory Default Settings”, page 95
• “Updating firmware”, page 279
• “Save All”, page 96

5.6 About the System menu

General
The System Menu, shown in the following illustration, allows you to view and change settings such as HDCP
status and Ethernet options. In this menu you can also backup or restore Event Master unit configuration,
obtain diagnostic information, adjust the intensity or lock the display screen.

Image 5-8: System menu

The following sections describe each Setup Menu option in detail:

• “System menu > Black Invalid”, page 85
• “System menu > USB device (Backup/Restore)”, page 86
• “System menu > Ethernet”, page 89
• “System menu > VFD brightness (display brightness)”, page 90
• “System menu > Diagnostics”, page 90
• “System menu > Lock front panel”, page 94

5.7 System menu > Black Invalid

General
The Black Invalid system setting determines whether the output is black when connected to a signal it cannot
process. Black Invalid is either On or Off. The default setting is On. This is a global setting, applicable to all
outputs.

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 85

 Front Panel Menu orientation

5.8 System menu > USB device (Backup/Restore)

General
The unit's front panel contains a USB port that you can use to connect a flash drive to the Event Master unit.
The flash drive must be formatted to use the FAT32 file system. For formatting instructions, refer to
section Formatting the flash drive in the chapter “Upgrading firmware using the USB port”, page
280.

The following illustration shows the USB Backup/Restore submenu, which you access from the System
menu.

Image 5-9: USB submenu

Using this menu, you can:

• Detect the presence of a USB device.
• Backup and restore the Event Master unit configuration files. When you connect a flash drive to the unit,
the system creates a directory titled E2Backup on the drive. All configuration files are saved to this
directory.
• Import an configuration created offline, via an XML file on the USB device.

How to back up a configuration file to a flash drive

1. Insert a formatted flash drive in the unit’s front-panel USB port.
2. From the System menu, scroll to the USB Backup/Restore submenu. Select Backup Config.
The USB Backup Config submenu appears, as shown in the following illustration. The navigation cursor
appears at the default name for the first backup file.

Image 5-10: USB Backup Config submenu

3. If you wish to change the default name of the backup configuration, press SEL. Use the ADJUST knob to
change the name, as described in section “Using menu system”, page 81. Press SEL again when you
complete the name change.
4. Scroll to Backup Config and press SEL.
A confirmation message appears when the backup is complete.
If the backup operation fails, the message shown in the following illustration appears. Check that the flash
drive is properly formatted and installed, and try again.

86 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 Front Panel Menu orientation

Image 5-11

How to restore a system configuration file that is stored on a flash drive

1. Insert a formatted flash drive in the unit’s front-panel USB port.
2. From the System menu, scroll to the USB Backup/Restore submenu. Select Restore Config.
The USB Restore Config submenu appears, as shown in the following illustration.

Image 5-12

3. Press SEL and scroll through the list of configuration files. When you locate the file you want, press SEL
again.
4. Scroll to Restore Config and press SEL.
A message confirms the restore operation and instructs you to reboot the Event Master unit.

You must reboot the Event Master unit to use the restored configuration file.

How to create a configuration offline and transfer it to a live unit

When working in the Event Master Toolset Software with a simulator, it is now possible to create a
configuration offline and then transfer it to a live unit.
1. System creation:
1. Create your system offline using the simulator. This includes system configuration, presets, MVR, etc ...
2. Save the simulated configuration.
Press the Save icon (the floppy disk icon in the lower left-hand corner of the screen).
2. Copy the XML file to the USB device:
1. Open Windows File Explorer.
2. Locate and select the Barco folder on your C: drive.

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 87

 Front Panel Menu orientation

Image 5-13

3. Locate in the Barco folder and select the Event Master Toolset folder that corresponds to the current
version you are using.

Image 5-14

4. Select the wvp_9876 subfolder.

Image 5-15

5. Open the xml folder.

Image 5-16

The xml folder contains subfolders for presets, stills, and userkeys, and it contains the configuration
settings file for your simulated system.
6. Create a folder on your desktop called EM, and create a subfolder inside it called Backup.
7. Copy and paste the xml folder from the wvp_9876 folder into the EM\Backup folder.

88 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 Front Panel Menu orientation

8. Open the xml folder in the EM\Backup folder.

9. Rename the settings.xml file to settings_backup.xml.
Make sure that you do not change the file extension.
10. Copy and paste the entire EM folder from your desktop to the root directory of a FAT32-formatted USB
drive.
3. Import the simulated configuration created offline to the live system:
1. Insert the USB drive into the USB port on the front of a live Event Master processor.
The live processor must be the same type as the simulated processor. If your simulated processor was an
E2, the live processor must be an E2; if your simulated processor was an S3–4K, your live processor must
be an S3–4K. The card setup on the simulated system must match the card setup on the live system,
otherwise Inputs might not match, or Destinations might be created on nonexistent Outputs. Those
Destinations will be grayed out, and you’ll have to recreate them.
2. Navigate on the front-panel display screen to the System menu, then to USB Backup/Restore, and then
to Restore XML, and then hit Select.
The system uploads the backup xml folder. When finished, the display screen reads “Restore successful.”
3. Select Yes (<SEL>), when the system asks “Reset unit now?”
The unit begins to reset. This takes about two minutes.
4. Remove the USB drive.
Once the system resets, all the Inputs, Outputs, Destinations Presets, etc. from the simulated unit will have
been transferred to the live unit.
The icons from the simulated unit do not transfer to the live unit and must be recreated.
If the Multiviewer configurations are not transferred, they must be recreated.

5.9 System menu > Ethernet

General
The Ethernet submenu allows the user to view and change certain Ethernet settings.

Image 5-17

Using this menu, you can:

• Query the DHCP server for a valid IP address, or turn off this feature.
• Set a static IP address for the Event Master unit, along with a subnet mask and gateway. This feature is
available only if DHCP is turned Off.
• View the unit’s IP address.
If there is no internet connection, or if a DHCP server has not been found, the IP address is
000.000.000.000. In this case, the system ignores the Ethernet port.
• View the Media Access Control (MAC) address of the unit’s Ethernet port.

Query the DHCP server

In the Ethernet submenu, the default setting for DHCP is On. When DHCP is turned on, the system
automatically queries the DHCP server for a valid IP address. If the unit receives an IP address, that address
is displayed in the Ethernet submenu.

It can take several seconds to obtain an address from the server. During this time, the SEL button
remains lit.

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 89

 Front Panel Menu orientation

When DHCP is off, you can manually enter a static IP address, along with a subnet mask and gateway, in the
Set Static IP submenu. Consult your network administrator for a valid IP address, subnet mask and gateway.

Setting a static IP Address

When a DHCP server is not available, you can set the Event Master unit’s IP address, using the Set IP
submenu shown in the following illustration.

Image 5-18: Set IP Submenu (sample)

How to set a static IP address?

1. Ensure that the DHCP setting is Off.
2. From your network administrator, obtain a valid IP address, including subnet and gateway.
3. On the Ethernet submenu, select Set Static IP.
4. On the Set IP submenu, select SUB(net). The last character in the first field becomes available, as indicated
by the empty field and an underscore.

Note: You must change the SUB parameter before editing either of the other parameters.

5. Turn the ADJUST knob to change the first value. As you continue turning the knob, you can change all three
values in this field. Values range from 000 to 255 in all four fields.
6. Press SEL to accept your change in the first field. The last character in the next field becomes available.
7. Continue until you have created the subnet value you want. Press SEL.
8. Make similar changes in the GW and IP fields.
9. Press SEL to accept your final change.

If you press ESC at any time before accepting your final change, all your edits will be removed, and
the original values restored.

5.10 System menu > VFD brightness (display

brightness)
General
The VFD Brightness submenu adjust the intensity of the front panel vacuum fluorescent display (VFD)
screen. The adjustment range is +0 to +6, with +6 being the brightest. The default setting is +3.

5.11 System menu > Diagnostics

General
The following illustration shows the Diagnostics submenu, which you access from the System menu.

90 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 Front Panel Menu orientation

Image 5-19

The Diagnostics options allow a user to check if the Event Master unit is functioning normally. Front panel and
card operations can be checked. Various system temperatures can be monitored and backup log files can be
saved for customer service troubleshooting.

Front Panel
When Front Panel is selected to be tested, the VFD display will initially be blanked. Then the 24 x 4 character
grid will start to show from the dimmest setting to the brightest setting. At this point a user can determine if any
of the pixels or if a character segment is bad in the display.
After several seconds of showing all pixels on at the brightest setting, the system will automatically advance to
the ENCODER/BUTTON TEST menu (the next menu).

Directly select “Encoder/Button” from the Diagnostic menu will allow the user to test the keys and
knob without the need to see the VFD being tested.

Encoder/Button

Image 5-20

The ENCODER/BUTTON TEST menu allow the user to test the keys and knob.
When the knob on the front panel is rotated, a number will be displayed on the encoder line. The larger the
number, the faster the knob was rotated. The number will show as positive or negative depending on the
direction the knob was turned.
Pressing any key on the front panel will show the Button Code for the key.
Button Code
ESC 0
PWR 7
SEL 14

Hold ESC to exit and return to the DIAGNOSTIC menu.

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 91

 Front Panel Menu orientation

Cards

Image 5-21

The Card Slot test will perform a variety of diagnostics for an individual card or for all cards. This is a quick way
to determine if a given card is having a problem. After selecting a Slot number or choosing All cards to be
tested, the following message will be displayed.

Image 5-22

Pressing SEL to continue will start the diagnostic testing. The following message will be displayed.

Image 5-23

If only one slot was selected for testing, a simply PASS/FAIL result will be shown for that slot.

Image 5-24

If all slots were selected for testing, the PASS/FAIL result will be shown for all slots.

Image 5-25

92 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 Front Panel Menu orientation

If a slot is not populated with a card, the result will show EMPTY.

To see more detailed results of diagnostic testing, run diagnostics from the Event Master Toolset
Software. For details on this function, please refer to chapter “Settings Menu > Web App area >
Dashboard”, page 239

Temperature

Image 5-26

The DIAGNOSTIC TEMPERATURE menu will show real time measurements for the System, Motherboard
and all card slots. All temperatures are shown in degrees Celsius.

FPGA temperatures may reach as high as 85°C under normal operating conditions. Temperatures
above 85°C may affect processing performance.

Backup Log Files

Backup log files can be saved for customer service troubleshooting.

In the event the log files of the Event Master unit need to be backed up, first install a USB stick in
the unit's front panel.

When Backup Log Files is selected, the system will immediately write its log files to the USB stick. The
following menus will be shown during this process and the Event Master unit will automatically return to the
DIAGNOSTIC menu once this process is complete.

Image 5-27

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 93

 Front Panel Menu orientation

Image 5-28

The file name will be “E2LogFiles.tar.gz”, and it can be found on the USB stick under the “E2
\backup” directory.

5.12 System menu > Lock front panel

General
When the Event Master unit’s front panel is locked, button presses have no effect. In the locked mode:
• All button presses (including Power ON/OFF button) and all turns of the ADJUST knob are ignored.
• All Ethernet communications commands function normally.

How to enable and disable the front-panel lock?

1. On the System menu, scroll to Lock Front Panel and press SEL. The front panel is locked, and the following
message appears:

Image 5-29: Front Panel Locked Message

2. To disable the front panel lock, press and hold the SEL and ESC buttons simultaneously for 3 seconds. When
the panel is unlocked, the display screen displays the Status menu.

5.13 Using the Tech Support menu

General
The Tech Support Menu, shown in the following illustration, provides quick access to Customer Support
contact information, and also shows you the software version for your Event Master unit.

Image 5-30: Tech Support Menu

This menu displays:

• The software version of your Event Master unit . For more details on software upgrade instructions please
refer to section “Updating firmware”, page 279.

94 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 Front Panel Menu orientation

• The US Customer Support telephone number. This number is accessible from 6 a.m. to 10 p.m. (PST), 7
days per week. The European customer support number is: 0800-90-0410. In China call: 40088-22726. All
other regions, call your local Barco support.
• The Customer Support web site address for all regions.

5.14 Restoring Factory Default Settings

General
As shown in the following illustration, two options in the Setup Menu allow you to restore the Event Master unit
to its factory default condition.

Image 5-31

The following attributes constitute a factory default condition:

• The Status Menu is shown in the display screen.
• All custom configurations are deleted.
The Factory Reset Menu provides two options for restoring factory default settings:
• Factory Reset — If you use this option, all of your system configuration are deleted. Settings will be
restored to the original factory defaults.
• Factory Reset, Save IP — This option performs a factory reset, but retains the IP address of the unit.

It is advisable to clear all saved configurations when you use the Event Master unit for the first time,
or when returning an unit from an event.

Restoring all factory settings

To restore all default settings to the Event Master unit, use the following procedure:
1. Select Factory Reset from the Setup Menu.
The Factory Reset Menu appears.
2. Select Factory Reset.
A prompt appears, asking if you want to clear all configurations.
3. Press SEL.
The system turns off, then reboots.
If you press ESC to cancel the operation instead, your custom settings remain in place and you are returned to
the Factory Reset Menu.

Retaining the IP address when restoring factory settings

To restore default settings to the Event Master unit but retain the unit’s IP address, use the following
procedure:
1. Select Factory Reset from the Setup Menu.
The Factory Reset Menu appears.
2. Select Factory Reset, Save IP.
A prompt appears, asking if you want to clear all configurations.
3. Press SEL to reset the system but save the IP address.
The system turns off, then reboots.

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 95

 Front Panel Menu orientation

If you press ESC to cancel the operation instead, your custom settings remain in place and you are returned to
the Factory Reset Menu.

5.15 Firmware Upgrade

General
The Event Master unit provides two options for upgrading firmware:
• Using the USB port on the front panel.
• Using the Web Interface.
Please refer to the chapter “Settings Menu”, page 233 for the instructions on how to perform firmware
upgrades through the USB memory or the web interface.

5.16 Save All

General
Save All on the Setup menu saves your custom configuration parameters in non-volatile memory.
If you save the system state, these parameters are restored the next time you power up the Event Master unit.
If you do not use this function, your custom settings are not restored during the next system power up
sequence.

Saving all modified settings

1. Select Save All from the Setup menu.
The following message appears:

Image 5-32: “Saving all” message

2. Wait few seconds ...

Parameters are saved in non-volatile memory and you are returned to the Setup menu.

96 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 EM GUI orientation 6
About this chapter
This chapter provides a detailed description of each section of EM GUI.

About EM GUI
The Event Master (EM) GUI is a UI program that enables users to interface with an Event Master device from
a PC or Mac via an Ethernet connection. The program provides a step-by-step approach to configure,
program, setup the dedicated Multiviewer and manage system functions.

Some screenshots and descriptions provided in this chapter may not accurately reflect the released
software. Barco will update the documentation in a timely manner to mirror the released software

Overview
• General requirements
• Download of Event Master Toolset Software
• Software installation
• Starting up
• Screen layout presentation
• Controls
• Configuration Menu
• Configuration Menu > Network resource area
• Configuration Menu > System diagram area
• Configuration Menu > System modifier area
• Configuration Menu > Adjustment area
• Configuration Menu > Adjustment > Unit Configuration
• Configuration Menu > Adjustment > Input Configuration
• Configuration Menu > Adjustment > Background Configuration
• Configuration Menu > Adjustment > Output Configuration
• Configuration Menu > Adjustment > Destination Configuration
• Configuration Menu > Adjustment > Destination Configuration > Adjust Panel
• Configuration Menu > Adjustment > External Devices configuration
• Configuration Menu > Linking
• Programming Menu
• Programming Menu > Resources area
• Programming Menu > Diagram area
• Programming Menu > Layer Modifier area

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 97

 EM GUI orientation

• Programming Menu > Adjustment area

• Programming Menu > Adjustment area > Layer configuration
• Programming Menu > Adjustment area > Dest Group configuration
• Programming Menu > Adjustment area > Background configuration
• Programming Menu > Adjustment area > User Keys configuration
• Programming Menu > Adjustment area > Presets configuration
• Programming Menu > Adjustment area > Source adjustment
• Programming Menu > Adjustment area > Global Transition Rate/Trans/Cut
• Cue Menu
• Cue Menu > Adjustment area
• Cue Menu > System modifier area
• Cue Menu > Network resource area
• Multiviewer (MVR) Menu
• Multiviewer Menu > Resource area
• Multiviewer Menu > Multiviewer Layout area
• Multiviewer Menu > Modifier area
• Multiviewer Menu > Adjustment area
• Multiviewer Menu > Adjustment area > Output Color
• Multiviewer Menu > Adjustment area > Window adjustment
• Controller Menu
• Settings Menu
• Settings Menu > Web App area
• Settings Menu > Web App area > Dashboard
• Settings Menu > Web App area > Tools
• Settings Menu > Web App area > Tools > Manage Software
• Settings Menu > Web App area > Tools > Backup & Restore
• Settings Menu > Web App area > Help
• Settings Menu > Web App area > Contact us
• Settings Menu > Web App area > Follow us

98 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 EM GUI orientation

6.1 General requirements

System requirements for Microsoft Windows
Minimum hardware specifications :
• Intel I5, 2 core
• 4 GB of RAM
• Free hard disk space: 600 MB
• WSXGA resolution (1280 x 1024)
• Fixed Ethernet connection
Software
• Windows 7, Windows 10
Recommended hardware specifications :
• Intel I7, 4 Core or more
• 8GB of RAM
• Free hard disk space: 600 MB
• AMD or Nvidia GPU
• Full HD Resolution
• Touchscreen
• Fixed Ethernet connection 1Gb

System requirements for Apple Mac

Minimum hardware specifications :
• 2.6GHz
2.6GHz dual-core Intel Core i5 (Turbo Boost up to 3.1GHz) with 3MB on-chip shared L3 cache
• 4GB RAM
• Free hard disk space: 600 MB
• WSXGA resolution (1280 x 1024)
• Fixed Ethernet connection
Software
• OSX 10.10 and above
Recommended hardware specifications :
• Intel I7, 4core or more
• 8 GB of RAM
• Free hard disk space: 600 MB
• Full HD Resolution
• Touchscreen
• Fixed Ethernet connection 1Gb

6.2 Download of Event Master Toolset Software

Overview
The Event Master Toolset Software can be downloaded for free from Barco’s website, (URL:
http://www. barco. com). The software is also available on myBarco and login to get access to secured
information. Registration is necessary.
If you are not yet registered, click on New to myBarco and follow the instructions.
It is not necessary to install any other software.

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 99

 EM GUI orientation

6.3 Software installation

Currently the EM GUI is available for PCs with Microsoft Win7 or Microsoft Win10, and Apple MACs
with OS X. The software will run on other Microsoft and Mac operating systems, but currently Barco
only supports software installations with Win7 (or Win10) and OS X computers. Linux version of the
software will be available in a future release.

To install on Microsoft Windows

The process of installing your software involves the following steps
1. Browse to the directory where the install program is downloaded.
2. Run the install program and follow the instructions.

Software updates
For a new version of the software, download the zip file and follow the instructions as in the first installation.
The new version will be installed on the same location and the previous version will be overwritten.

6.4 Starting up
How to start up
1. Double click on the Event Master Toolset Software icon on your desktop
or
click Start → All programs → Barco Folsom → Event Master Toolset Rev x.x (Build xxxxx)
The software starts up with the same look and feel as when it was closed before.

The connection is automatically restored with the Event Master unit if it is still available.

6.5 Screen layout presentation

General
The user interface is organized around a Menu Navigation bar at the left of the screen and a Working area
in the rest of the screen. The layout of the screens is similar throughout the GUI.
In order to explain the layout, we will examine the start-up screen of the Configuration Menu and describe
the different components. The screens for the other menus follow the same structure and flow.

100 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 EM GUI orientation

Image 6-1: EM GUI: Configuration Menu

1 Menu navigation bar

2 Title bar

3 Selection area
4 Diagram area
5 Modifier area
6 Configuration area

Menu navigation bar

On the far left hand side of the screen is the Menu Navigation bar that allows users to navigate between the
different screens and save or restore system configurations. This area of the screen is always visible and
remains unchanged. The available buttons on the Menu Navigation bar are:
• System Configuration: allows access to System Configuration Menu.
• Programming: allows access to Programming Menu.
• Multiviewer: allows access to Multiviewer Menu.
• Controller: allows access to Event Controllers setting.
• E2 built-in web page.
• System Save and Restore.

Title bar
On the top of the working area a title bar indicates the name of the selected page (e.g. System configuration).

Selection area
The selection area allows the users to select the System, Device or inputs that will be used.

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 101

 EM GUI orientation

Diagram area
In the middle, is the Diagram area where the system, Screens and Multiviewer are represented graphically.

Configuration area
On the right hand side, is the configuration area where users perform all needed adjustments.

6.6 Controls
General

Edit box
Edit box is used to edit the values or names.

Image 6-2

Properties:
• By double clicking, the background changes to a dark blue color indicating that modifications can be made.
• The cursor is placed on the last character.
• The eraser button allows deletion of all the characters in the edit box.

Slider box
The slider allows modification of the value with slider.

Image 6-3

Properties:
• Slide the cursor to modify the value.
• The value can also modified by clicking the + or – symbols.

Drop-down menu
A drop-down menu allows the user to choose one value from a list.

Image 6-4: Inactive drop-down

The active drop-down menu, shown in Image 6-5, shows the available choices.

102 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 EM GUI orientation

Image 6-5: Active drop-down

Properties:
• When clicking on the + symbol, a drop-down menu appears with the available choices.
• By typing in the space next to the magnifying glass all of the available numbers that match the typed text
appear, simplifying the search effort.

6.7 Configuration Menu

General
The Configuration menu is the module used to edit the Presentation Systems (creation, modification,
deletion). This page is the first page that appears when you launch the EM GUI software.
The user will use this page to add or remove devices to the selected system. The user also could modify the
parameters of these devices like inputs, backgrounds, outputs and destinations.

Description
The System configuration Menu is divided in 4 parts:

Image 6-6: System Configuration Menu

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 103

 EM GUI orientation

1 Network resource area Available resources on the network are listed in

this area. There are 3 tabs in this section:
• Devices in use in the selected system.
• Discovered devices on the local network.
• Simulated devices.
2 System diagram area The workspace has two different views, Detail
and System.
The selected systems details are graphically
represented in this area. To view a different
system you select the corresponding tab from
the top.
When the System is selected an overview of all
devices connected to one system is shown.

3 System modifier area System information is displayed in this area. To

view a different system you select the
corresponding tab from the top. This area also
includes Workspace related tools.
4 Adjustment area There are several panels in this area:
Adjustment, Input/Background, Output/MVR and
Destinations. Each panel displays the list of
items currently defined in the system. The user
can also add or delete and define more items.
The adjust tab allows the user to adjust variables
in each panel.
Panels can be dragged up or down to allow
faster manipulation.
5 Bottom bar The right side of the bottom bar has control for
windows and maximizing the screen. The
number indicates if this is window 1 or 2, two is
the maximum.

Add a window by clicking the + Window button.

The second window can be used on a separate
screen.
The out and in arrow button maximizes the
interface to the screen, allowing an “OS free”
look.

The following sections describe each part of the System Configuration Menu in detail:
• “Configuration Menu > Network resource area”, page 105
• “Configuration Menu > System diagram area”, page 106
• “Configuration Menu > System modifier area”, page 109
• “Configuration Menu > Adjustment area”, page 110

104 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 EM GUI orientation

6.8 Configuration Menu > Network resource area

General
This part of the System configuration page allows listing devices available on the local network and identifying
them.

Description
The panel in this area has three tabs:
• Discovered: Lists all of the devices discovered on
the local network, regardless of the selected
System.
• In use: Lists the devices in the selected System.
• Comm Setup: If the EM GUI is running on an EC-
200 controller, this tab detects and shows if an EC-
50 is connected to the larger controller.
Note: When the Discovered tab is selected, the Event
Master ToolSet Software will continuously send a UDP
broadcast over the network to locate devices (every 5
seconds).
Next to the device name an LED indicates the status of
the unit:
• Yellow : Found in network but not assigned
• Green: Assigned and currently has an open or
active communication port
• Red: Assigned but currently has errors trying to
communicate (heart beat communication failure,
TCP connection dropped, etc. )
• Orange: There is a configuration error with the unit:
- Input / Output cards not right justified. Refer to
the corresponding section below of the card
placement rules and error color code.
- Input / Output configuration mismatch with the
actual unit. Refer to the corresponding
configuration section of the card placement
rules and error color code.
The small arrow in each device opens a detail menu for
the device, stating most notably the ID of the unit who
is used when units are linked.
In the most of the case, devices are automatically detected and the user just need to add the new device via
drag and drop into the system diagram (see How to add a device into the selected system below). But,
under certain circumstances in Network communication the normal UDP based auto detection of Event Master
Compatible Devices might not work. A firewall or a tightly configured switch are examples. In that case a
Manual direct TCP/IP request can be sent to a specific IP Address (see How to manually add a device into
the selected system below).

How to add a device into the selected system

1. Left click on the device to be assigned to the selected system.
2. Drag it to the System diagram area.

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 105

 EM GUI orientation

Image 6-7

How to manually add a device into the selected system

To manually add a device, use the “Manual Add” section.
1. Enter the IP address.
2. Press the “Add” button.

Image 6-8

Unit is added and retrieves the available configuration in the Device.

6.9 Configuration Menu > System diagram area

General
The system is represented graphically in this part of the System configuration page. It is here that the user can
select a system (or create a new one), or select a system element ( inputs, outputs, destinations …)

Description
The diagram area graphically represents the devices and destinations that compose the system.

106 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 EM GUI orientation

Image 6-9: Diagram area

In this area, the rear panel of the selected system is represented graphically with the cards, and the
connectors are color coded to indicate their status.
The color code is:
• White = Connector available to add and configure.
• Gray = Connector capacity set to NONE and is unavailable to add and configure.
• Purple = Connector capacity set to SPLIT; connector 3 mirrors connector 1 (and connector 4 mirrors
connector 2), and connector is unavailable to add and configure.
Split-mode may be used with the DisplayPort connectors on the quad channel DisplayPort output card and
the SDI connectors on the tri-combo output card.
• Red = Signal unavailable and connector configured into system.
• Yellow = Signal available.
• Green = Signal available and connector configured into system.
On the right hand side of the devices is a list of the created destinations (Screen and Auxiliary).
The tabs on the top allow access to the different systems connected to the EM GUI. The last tab allows the
users to create a new system.
A set of zoom buttons allows the user to reduce or enlarge the view size. This functionality is very useful when
the system is composed of more than one device.

How to create a new system

1. Click on the Add New System tab on the top.
A new empty tab is created.
2. Drop a device on this system. Refer to the procedure to add a device in the section “Configuration Menu >
Network resource area”, page 105.
3. Change the system name to avoid confusion when you control more than one system on the same Event
Master Toolset Software.
Double click on the tab, the tab background changes to a dark blue color indicating that modifications to the
name can be made.

How to remove system

1. Click on the “X” button on the system tab.

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 107

 EM GUI orientation

Image 6-10

A confirmation window appears.

2. Click on OK.
The tab is removed.

How to select device in the system

1. Click on the area situated below the Event Master series processor graphic representation.

Image 6-11: Device selected

The device is selected. The device is highlighted in blue.

How to select destination (Screen, Aux)

1. Click on a destination (e.g. Aux).

108 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 EM GUI orientation

Image 6-12: Destination selected

The destination is selected. The destination is highlighted in blue.

Selecting a device or a destination in the Diagram allows the Adjustment area to display to display
the parameters corresponding to the device or destination. See Adjust Tab in the section
“Configuration Menu > Adjustment area”, page 110.

6.10 Configuration Menu > System modifier area

General
General parameters concerning the selected system are accessible in this area. The user can select the
system’s preset conflict mode, the native rate, and genlock mode.

Description

Image 6-13: Configuration Menu: System modifier area

• Canvas Mode: Canvas mode allows the user to choose between “PGM and PVW” canvas mode (the
default setting) and “PGM only” canvas mode.
- PGM and PVW—(Default) The unit reserves up to 20 megapixels of canvas for Preview (PVW) and for
Program (PGM) whenever a Screen Destination is created.
The preview canvas allows the user to preview changes before those changes are output to a Screen
Destination.
- PGM only—”PGM only” mode doubles the amount of PGM canvas to 40 megapixels, because the unit
no longer reserves canvas for PVW.
◦ Because the system no longer maintains a preview canvas, Backgrounds will cut to the program
canvas (PGM).
◦ The Chroma key feature is not available in “PGM only” mode. (The Luma key feature is available in
“PGM only” mode.)
After updating the canvas mode, save the configuration by pressing the "Save All" button at the bottom
of the Menu navigation bar (on the left-hand edge of the screen), and then soft reset / power cycle the
unit for the system to reconfigure the VPU cards.
Note: The maximum number of links available for the Multiviewer is eight for the E2, and four for the
S3.

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 109

 EM GUI orientation

• Preset Conflict: Mode—When using single layers conflicts can arise when a Preset Recall modifies a
source layer that is currently on Program. You may choose from three Preset Conflict Modes to resolve
these conflicts.
- Auto—The system performs the necessary actions to gracefully recall the Preset to Program.
- Force Recall—The system recalls the Preset directly to Program. Program is not protected.
- User Confirm—The system presents the user with a pop-up asking what to do when a conflict is
detected.
User Confirm options:
◦ Resolve – All Trans or Cut: Perform the necessary actions to resolve the conflict and perform an
All Trans or Cut to bring the Preset to Program.
◦ Resolve – Wait: Perform the necessary actions to resolve the conflict and wait for the user to press
the All Trans or Cut manually.
◦ Cancel: Cancels the entire Preset recall operation.
- Off—The system alerts the user with an error message about any Preset recall conflict, but it does not
present a pop-up menu for resolving the issue.
• Preset Conflict: Time(frame) is the amount of time the system uses when automatically performing an All
Trans.
• System Native Rate (Hz): System native rate in Hz (Cycles in second). Available selections:
23.98 30 59.94
24 47.95 60
25 48
29.97 50

The native system rate needs to match the general frame rate in the event where the unit is used.
• System Backup: IP address of the backup system.
Enter the IP address of the backup unit, and press the "Sync" button to push the settings from the active
system to the backup system.
• Genlock: Selects the system genlock mode from the options Freerun, Lock to External, or Lock to Unit
ID.
• Genlock Status: Reports the system’s genlock mode status: Locked or not Locked.
• H Offset: The H sync can be offset to match a Genlock situation. Adjustment in ms.
• V Offset: The V sync can be offset to match a Genlock situation. Adjustment in ms.
• Master VP: Reports the units IP address in the local network.
• Unit ID: Reports the units ID number. ID required to identify different units are acting as a single or linked
system in order to expand for Inputs, Outputs or Layers.

6.11 Configuration Menu > Adjustment area

General
Situated on the right hand side of the screen is the Adjustment area. In this area the user can define and
adjust unit specific parameters, inputs, backgrounds, outputs, multiviewer outputs and destination affected to
the selected system.

110 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 EM GUI orientation

Description
There are 4 tabs in this area:
• Input: this tab provides a list of all the created
inputs. Here the user can create new entries by
associating them with input connectors. It is also in
this tab that the user can delete unused or
obsolete inputs.
• Background: provides a list of backgrounds of the
selected system. Similarly to inputs, the user can
add and remove Backgrounds from the system.
• Output/MVR: the user can add or remove
program, auxiliary and multiviewer outputs in this
list.
• Destination: a destination is a location where the
user can route the output of Event Master series
processor (screens, widescreens, monitors etc.).
The user could assign the outputs that are created
in the previous tab to destinations, and deleted
unused or obsolete destinations
Always on top:
• Adjustment: in this tab the user performs
adjustments available for the selected item
(device, input, background, output, destination).
The content of this tab varies depending on the
selected item. Access to this area is achieved from
the System diagram area (click on device or on a
destination) or in one of the tabs of the
Adjustment area (input, background, output,
destination) .

The following sections describe how to perform the configuration of each part of the system in detail:
• “Configuration Menu > Adjustment > Unit Configuration”, page 111
• “Configuration Menu > Adjustment > Input Configuration”, page 113
• “Configuration Menu > Adjustment > Background Configuration”, page 123
• “Configuration Menu > Adjustment > Output Configuration”, page 125
• “Configuration Menu > Adjustment > Destination Configuration”, page 132

6.12 Configuration Menu > Adjustment > Unit

Configuration
General
In the unit configuration adjustments panel, the user can define and adjust unit (device) specific parameters.

How to access the unit configuration adjustments panel

1. Select the device (unit) that you want to configure. Refer to “Configuration Menu > System diagram area”,
page 106 and see the subsection “How to select device.”
The device is selected. The device is highlighted in blue in the System diagram area and the name of device
is indicated in the Adjustment tab in the Adjustment area.
2. Click on the Adjustment tab in the Adjustment area.
The adjustment panel dedicated to the unit is displayed.

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 111

 EM GUI orientation

Description
Settings tab:
• Name: The name of the unit can be edited here.
• Contact info: User information for contact person
responsible for the unit.
• SW Version: Unit’s Firmware version.
• OS Version: Unit’s OS version.
Note: The EM GUI has its Software version shown
in the Settings Page.
• Resets: (If the user selects one of the reset
options, a confirmation pop up appears.)
- Soft: Resets the unit without erasing any stored
settings, similar to a Power Off / On.
- Factory (Save IP & EDID & ID): Full factory
reset with the exception of keeping the Ethernet
setup (IP), the Input EDID settings, and the Unit
ID settings.
- Shut down: Powers down the unit.
- Factory (Full): Full factory reset erases all
stored settings.
- Factory (Save IP): Full factory reset with the
exception of keeping the Ethernet setup.
- Factory (Save IP & EDID): Factory reset, but
keep IP and Input EDID settings.
• Ethernet communication setup area.
IP Mode:
Each EMP model has a standard static IP Address.
• E2 (and E2 Jr.) = 192.168.0.175
• S3–4K (and S3–4K Jr.) = 192.168.0.176
• EX = 192.168.0.185
If a DHCP IP address is required, the unit can be set to
accommodate that too.
The unit can also have a specific IP Address assigned
by the user to match a specific network environment.
The IP Address is changed by double-clicking on the
STATIC setting and assigning an allowed
configuration. For details on Network configurations
we refer to industry standard.

112 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 EM GUI orientation

Setup tab:
• Unit ID: Unique unit identification number.
• Front Panel: Locks or unlocks the front panel.
• Front Panel VFD Brightness: Updates the
brightness of the front panel VFD.
• Black on invalid video: If checked, when the input
timing on the video does not match what was
previously acquired on the input connector the
video will be set to black.
• Last slot as MVR: Allows the operator to use the
last slot as an Output or as a Multiviewer (MVR).
1. Check or uncheck the ‘Last Slot as MVR’
checkbox.
2. Save the configuration.
3. Power cycle or soft reset the unit for the change
to ‘Last Slot as MVR’ to take effect.
- To soft reset the unit, go to the Reset section
of the Adjust > Settings panel and select
‘Soft.’
Note: 'Last slot as MVR' is the default setting.

Last slot as MVR or Output in the simulator

To toggle between using the last slot on the simulator as an Output or as an MVR...
1. Check the "Last slot as MVR" checkbox in the Setup panel, and press “Save All” to save the settings.
2. Shut down the simulator.
3. Edit the simhw.xml file.
(You may use any XML editor. You may also us Notepad.)
4. Change the card type of the MVR slot to be either a normal HDMI output card (card type = 22) or an MVR
card ((card type = 40).
Last slot as MVR: <card id="CardID15" type="40" slot="13">CardType_Output_
Multiviewer</card>
Last slot as Output: <card id="CardID15" type="21" slot="12">CardType_Output_4_SDI</
card>

6.13 Configuration Menu > Adjustment > Input

Configuration
General
In the Input configuration menu users can assign input connectors to inputs and adjust parameters to match
the incoming signal format and timing parameters.

Input Card arrangement

On the E2 model, the input cards occupy slots 3 through 10 and are right justified to slot 10.
On the S3–4K model, the input cards occupy slots 4 through 6 and are right justified to slot 6.

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 113

 EM GUI orientation

If there is an empty input slot between two input slots, all input cards to the left of the empty slot are marked
with red. Red indicates that although the cards will operate properly, inputs from these cards will not be
available at the Multiviewer.

Image 6-14: E.g. E2 with an empty input-card slot

If the card in the slot is wrong type (e.g. output card in input slot, or vice versa) then the slot in the diagram will
be greyed out.

Input Connector Grouping

The reason for connector grouping is that in order to accommodate higher resolutions with no loss of quality
bandwidth has to be added to the signalpath. By combining connectors a higher resolution all the way up to
4K@60Hz with progressive scan can be added with its full color space 4:4:4.
There several rules that applies when defining an input configuration:
1. Every Input connector can only be assigned to one input.
2. Input types in the same configuration must be of the same type and in the same slot or in adjacent slots.
For example, cannot have a HDMI connector and an SDI connector in the same input configuration.
Exception to this is the HDMI and DVI connectors.
3. An input can be defined from one, two or four connectors.
4. A grouped connector is still ONE input.
5. Once an input connector is assigned to an input that already contains another one.
6. Maximum of 4 connectors can be assigned to a layer, Input.
7. Maximum of 8 connectors can be assigned to a background, Background.
8. Maximum of 128 input configurations can be assigned.
Examples of 4K Valid Inputs:

114 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 EM GUI orientation

Image 6-15

Examples of valid 3D* Inputs:

Image 6-16

(*) S3D inputs will be supported in a future software release.

Input connector colors

Not assigned and no input signal is detected

Not assigned to any Source or an input, but a signal has been detected

Assigned to a source or an input and an input signal is detected

Assigned to a source or an input, but an input signal is not detected

Input configuration menu description

Input configuration menu is accessed by clicking on the Input tab.

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 115

 EM GUI orientation

This menu provides:

• Auto Add all Input(s): A button to
automatically allocate all unassigned input
connectors to an input.
• Auto add live Input(s): A button to
automatically allocate all LIVE input
connectors (GREEN) to an input.
• + Add Single Input: A button to manually
allocate connectors to an Input configuration.
• + Add Multiple Input(s): A button to manually
allocate more than one connector to an Input
configuration.
• Delete Inputs: A button to delete unused or
obsolete inputs.
• A list of all the Inputs already created on the
system (e.g. Cam 1, Input2).

116 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 EM GUI orientation

Note: Users can now link more than two E2s, or more than
two S3–4Ks in a single system. In this configuration, only
input expansion is supported. Users can select up to 48 SL
inputs for linked E2 systems and 24 SL inputs for linked
S3–4K systems to be marked it as a "Global Input."
Global Input checkboxes are available in the Configuration
page, under the Input and Background tabs for inputs.

How to Auto add all Inputs

The “Auto add all Inputs” button automatically allocates all unassigned input connectors to an input. At this
moment the incoming signal is acquired and a source file is saved. Input connectors that are already assigned
to an input will not be affected. If the button is pressed, 28 input configurations will be automatically assigned.
The software by default names inputs as “Input 1, 2, 3….”. Input configuration names can be renamed by
double-clicking on the name and turning the box blue.

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 117

 EM GUI orientation

How to Auto add live Inputs

The “Auto add live Inputs” button automatically allocates all live input connectors to an input. Input connectors
that are already assigned to an input will not be affected. If the button is pressed in the beginning, before any
sources has been connected, no inputs will be automatically assigned. The software by default names inputs
as “Input 1, 2, 3….”. Input configuration names can be renamed by double-clicking on the name and turning
the box blue.

Image 6-17: Configuration menu, Adjustment area, Input

The auto add feature adds only up to 2K resolution inputs. Any special input like S3D and 4K Inputs need to
be assigned manually. See How to add Input section below.

How to add Input

Inputs configurations can be added manually to un-assigned connectors.
1. Click on the Add Input button.
The Add Input button is replaced by the Done Adding button (highlighted in blue).
2. In the System diagram area, click on the connector(s) that need to be assigned.

Note: If the input signal is 4K provided by the 4 SDI connectors, 4 SDI connectors need to be selected.

Connector(s) is immediately highlighted in blue.

3. The selection is completed by clicking the Done Adding button that is highlighted in blue.
A new Input is added in the input list.

To stop the add procedure without add new input, just click on the Done Adding button without
selecting an input.

How to delete Input

1. Click on the Delete Input(s) button
The Delete Input(s) button is replaced by the Delete Selected button (highlighted in red).
2. Click on the corresponding connector in the graphical area.
or
click in the “x” on the right hand side in the input configuration list.
Connector(s) is immediately highlighted in blue.

118 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 EM GUI orientation

3. The deletion is completed by clicking the Delete Selected button.

Multiple connector configurations can be selected to be deleted together.

How to access to the Input configuration adjustments

Adjustments to inputs are performed in the “Adjust” panel:
1. Select the input from the configuration list
or
clicking on the connector graphic.
An input is selected.
2. Click on the Adjust tab that is on the top of the Adjustment area.

Image 6-18: Accessing the Input Adjust panel

The input adjustment panel is displayed.

Input adjustment panel description

The input adjustment panel is divided in four sections.
• Main page
• Format & Timing
• Color Adjustment
• Contact Information

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 119

 EM GUI orientation

Input adjustment panel > Main page

This menu is available in two versions according to the input type:
• DVI, HDMI and DisplayPort input types
• Name: Edits the name of the input configuration.
• Sync Status: Detects a good video sync.
• Video Status: Indicates if the Layer capacity is in
par with the input resolution.
• Format: The detected video format is shown here.
If Auto Acquire is unchecked below, the Wanted
video format is selected here from the drop-down
menu.
• Auto Acquire: Enables the auto acquire mode.
During acquisition, the system detects and
acquires the input type and resolution. Refer below
for details regarding this feature. Default is On
• Colorspace: The detected colorspace is shown
here. In the event of a non-VESA standard source
the colorspace can be unmatched to the
processing. In this case a different colorspace can
be selected to accommodate the signal. Available
are:
- RGB, Full Range
- RGB, Reduced Range
- SMPTE, Full Range
- SMPTE, Reduced Range
• Connector Capacity: Each connector has the
option to accommodate different bandwidth
standards over its interface. This is referred to as:
- NONE The connector is turned off and cannot
accept any video, bandwidth of this connector
is freed up to be used by another connector.
Connector is grayed out in the graphic
representation. Connectors need to be
selected to NONE before DL or 4K can be
selected on others.
- SL Single Link The connector can
accommodate a resolution up to 2048 x
1200@60Hz.
- DL Dual Link The connector can accommodate
a resolution up to 2560 x 1600@60Hz.
Note: A dual link connector can also
accommodate a 3840 x 1080 or 2048 x 2160
signal, that is also available in the EDID list
once DL is selected for that input.
- 4K The connector can accommodate a
resolution up to 4K@30P.
Note: In order to accommodate a 4K@60
signal 2 or 4 connectors need to be used.
• Auto Acquire: Inputs auto acquire incoming video
as standard. If the setting is unchecked, only the
set or previously acquired signal will be valid
video.

120 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 EM GUI orientation

• EDID
All inputs can have an EDID (Extended Display Identification Data) set according to its connector capacity.
The currently set EDID is visible in the Current box.
Format: The drop-down menu with its search function provide a way to select any of the available VESA or
SMPTE standard EDIDs as well as a frame rate. Once selected the Apply Button needs to be pressed in
order to program the inputs.
• EDID Timing
The EDID timing can be edited into a non standard, or Custom EDID by double clicking on each timing box
and inserting a value. A EDID timing needs to follow the VESA rules, and typically a VESA calculator
needs to be used.
Once a value is inserted ENTER needs to be pressed.
Selected EDID or Custom EDID can be applied to all inputs of the same type at once by selecting the
checkbox towards the end of the panel.
• HDCP
Enables the HDCP setting for the selected input.
The default for DisplayPort, DVI, and HDMI inputs is Off. To turn On the HDCP Mode, click on the empty
checkbox. When the checkbox displays a check mark, HDCP Mode is On. HDCP Mode is not applicable to
SDI inputs.
• SDI input type
The SDI input configuration menu is similar to the DVI/HMDI/DP menu but without the EDID and HDCP
sections. In addition the SDI menu includes an addition selection regarding the SDI type.
• Colorspace: The detected colorspace is shown
here. In the event of a non-VESA standard source
the colorspace can be unmatched to the
processing. In this case a different colorspace can
be selected to accommodate the signal. Available
are:
- RGB, Full Range
- RGB, Reduced Range
- SMPTE, Full Range
- SMPTE, Reduced Range
• SDI type (available with SDI connector type) :
allows a choice between HD (1.5Gb), 3G (3Gb)
Level A, Level B, Level A 2SI, or Level B 2SI.
The SDI Type options vary, depending on the
format of the Outputs. For example, for:
- NTSC/PAL—the SDI Type can be only SD.
- 1080i or 1080p, with a refresh rate less than or
equal to 30 Hz—the SDI Type can be only HD.
- 1080p, with a refresh rate greater than 30 Hz—
the SDI Type can be:
◦ Level A (default)
◦ Level B
◦ Level A 2SI
◦ Level B 2SI
The 2SI options are available only if the Input/
Output configuration has 4 SDI connectors
from the same card, and the Output format is
either 1920 x 1080 or 2048 x 1080.
Auto Acquire Feature discussion:
When the Auto Acquire is On, the system performs a full sync acquisition on the input signal whenever:
• You select an input
• The input type changes
• The sync rate of the input signal changes
During acquisition, the system detects and acquires the input type and resolution When In Auto Acquire is off,
the system uses the last known configuration, when possible. If the input signal is incompatible with the saved
configuration, a good input lock may not be possible. In this case, the format name field in the Status Menu
displays the Invalid Signal message.

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 121

 EM GUI orientation

Please note the following important points regarding In Auto Acquire:

• It is recommended that you turn Off Auto Acquire in applications where you have already configured and
saved the system’s input setup.
• If Auto Acquire is On and a valid input is selected that does not have a saved input associated with it, the
system attempts to detect and acquire the source. This process may take a few moments.
• If Auto Acquire is Off, the system uses the last-known configuration for each input, to the extent possible,
comparing the input’s timing to the configurations in the system’s library. These configurations can be
custom files or system default configurations.
• Most users can leave In Auto Acquire on. Advanced users who know the input video timing parameters
may choose to turn In Auto Acquire off and select the parameters manually.

Input adjustment panel > Format & Timing

This is a status and informational menus. No adjustments can be done on this Format and Timing panel.
• Format: Video format of the input
• H Total: Total pixel count per line
• H Front Porch: The offset between the end of the
active area and the beginning of H sync
• H Active: The horizontal size in pixels of the active
area
• H Sync: H sync width in pixels
• H Polarity: Polarity (active High or Low) of the
horizontal sync pulse (N/A in SDI)
• V Total: Total line count per frame
• V Front Porch: The offset in lines between the end
of the output active area and the beginning of V
sync
• V Active: The vertical size of the output active area
• V Sync: V sync width in lines
• V Polarity: Polarity (active High or Low) of the
vertical sync pulse (N/A in SDI)

Input adjustment panel > Color Adjustment

This menu allows for color adjustments for each input.
• The RGB Contrast and Brightness settings are
adjustable.
- The Overall adjustment has a range of 50 to
150.
- The individual Red/Green/Blue adjustments
have a range of 25 to 150.
- The default setting for all of these properties is
100.
• Gamma is adjustable within a range of 0.31 to
3.29. The default setting is 1.0.
• Hue is adjustable within a range of –90 to +90
degrees. The default setting is 0 degrees.
• Saturation is adjustable within a range of 0 to 150.
The default setting is 100.
• Reset All changes all values to their default
settings.

122 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 EM GUI orientation

Input adjustment panel > Contact Information

This menu allows for the user to enter contact information for easy identification.

6.14 Configuration Menu > Adjustment >

Background Configuration
General
Assigning input connectors to backgrounds is very similar to creating Inputs as it was discussed in the
previous section. Therefore, the menus are also very similar and for the sake of simplicity the same menus are
not going to be presented in this section.
This menu provides:
• + Add Single Background: A button to manually
allocate Input connectors to a Background
configuration.
• + Add Multiple Background(s): A button to
manually allocate more than one Input connector
to Background configuration.
• Delete Backgrounds: A button to delete unused
or obsolete Backgrounds.
• A list of all the Backgrounds already created on the
system (e.g. Background1 and Background2).

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 123

 EM GUI orientation

Note: Users can now link more than two E2s, or more
than two S3–4Ks in a single system. In this
configuration, only input expansion is supported.
Users can select up to 48 SL inputs for linked E2
systems and 24 SL inputs for linked S3–4K systems to
be marked it as a "Global Input." Global Input
checkboxes are available in the Configuration page,
under the Input and Background tabs for inputs.
Backgrounds can also be designated as “Global
Inputs” by checking the "Global" checkbox on the
Adjust panel for the Background.

One of the differences between Inputs and backgrounds is in the number of connectors that can be assigned
to each one. As it was presented in the previous section, an input can be defined from 1, 2 or 4 connectors. A
background channel, however, can be defined by any number of connectors between 1 and 8. The same rules
apply as in the Input definition: The connectors need be on the same or adjacent card and be of the same type
with the exception of DVI and HDMI that can be defined in the same background.
Backgrounds can be created from all inputs, and as many as you can fit.
Backgrounds can also be inserted through Dual Link capacity, forming a background of one or several
3840x1080 or similar resolutions.

Background Adjustment panel description

If the selected background is composed by more than one input connector, the adjustment menu will include a
diagram of the configuration.
The diagram defaults to a horizontal configuration. If a vertical configuration is desired, the user clicks in the
circle next to the “V” and then the Apply button.
The Grid (early) or the X by X (later) dialog is used for a background matching a two or more inputs in
Horizontal.
Backgrounds must match the output of the Destination they are created for. Future software will allow for re-
use of Backgrounds for destination not matching the destinations resolution.

124 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 EM GUI orientation

Please note that connector assignments for the backgrounds cannot change from what is shown in
the diagram. The system wiring needs to reflect the same order

6.15 Configuration Menu > Adjustment > Output

Configuration
General
In the Output menu users can assign output connectors to configurations and adjust signal parameters to
match the display devices connected to the unit.

Output Card arrangement

On the E2 model, the output cards occupy slots 11 through 13 and right justified to slot 13.
On the S3–4K model, the output cards occupy slots 7 through 8 and right justified to slot 8.
If there is an empty output slot, all output cards to the left of that empty slot will be red. Red indicates that
although the cards will operate properly, outputs from these cards will not be available at the Multiviewer.

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 125

 EM GUI orientation

Image 6-19: E.g. E2 with an empty output-card slot

If the card with the connectors that are part of an output configuration is missing, the card in the unit graphic
and the output configuration in the configuration list will be grayed out.
Also, if there is an existing output configuration but the card in the slot is of different type, then again the
configuration will be greyed out.

Output Connector Grouping

The connectors can also be grouped together to define a 3D* , 4K or Videowall configuration. For example, a
projector that requires 2 DVI connectors to pass 3D Left and Right eye signals. Also 4 SDI connectors can be
configured as a 4K output in order to connect to a 4K projector.
There are several rules that apply when defining an output configuration:
1. Each Output connector can only be assigned to one output configuration.
2. Outputs in an output configuration must be of the same type AND in the same slot or in adjacent slots. For
example, there cannot be a HDMI connector and an SDI connector in the same output configuration.
3. Max connectors for an output configuration = 4.
4. Once output connectors are assigned to the same output configuration, all settings for the output
connectors will be synchronized.
• If an output connector is not assigned to an output configuration,
• Output settings cannot be adjusted on that connector.
• The connector cannot be assigned to a destination
Examples of 4K Valid Outputs:

Image 6-20

• 4 x SDI 1920x1080
• 4 x HDMI 1920x1080 or 2048x1080 on 1 card
• 4 x HDMI 1920x1080 or 2048x1080 two cards

126 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 EM GUI orientation

• The top 2 x HDMI at 1920 x 2160 or 2048 x 2160 at max 60P

• One of the top HDMI at 3840 x 2160 or 4096 x 2160 at max 30P
Examples of valid 3D Outputs *:

Image 6-21

(*) Future software release

Output connector colors

Not added to system as grouped connector or single
connector

Not assigned to any output configuration

Assigned to an output configuration

Output configuration menu description

Output configuration menu is accessed by clicking on the Output tab.
This menu provides:
• Auto add all Output(s): A button to automatically
allocate all unassigned output connectors to an
Output configuration.
• + Add Single Output: A button to manually
allocate output connector(s) to an Output
configuration.
• + Add Multiple Output(s):A button to manually
allocate more than one connector to an Output
configuration.
• Delete Outputs: A button to delete unused or
obsolete Output(s).
• A list of all the Outputs already created on the
system (e.g. Output1 and Output2).

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 127

 EM GUI orientation

How to Auto add Outputs

The “Auto add all Output(s)” button allows all 2K outputs that are not assigned to an output configuration to
automatically assign to an output configurations. Output connectors that are already assigned to output
configurations will not be affected. The picture below shows what occurs when the button is pressed. Since
there are 12 output connectors not assigned, all 12 Output configurations are automatically assigned.

Image 6-22: Configuration menu, Adjustment area, Output

Since the software assigns automatically only 2K outputs, Dual link or 4K outputs need to be configured
manually. See How to add output section below.
The unit will query the connected device on its output for a preferred EDID and try to assign that as the output
resolution and frame rate. If no devices are connected, a standard HD resolution with the native rate of the
EMP is assigned as frame rate.
Next to the configuration name is the name of the Destination where the output is assigned. If the Output is not
assigned to any Destination, then the name will be “N/A”.

The software by default names outputs as “Output 1, 2, 3...” The user can rename each output by
double clicking on the name and type in the new name in the blue box.

How to add Output

Outputs configurations can be added manually to unassigned connectors.
1. Click on the Add Output button.
The Add Output button is replaced by the Done Adding button (highlighted in blue).
2. In the System diagram area, click on the connector(s) that need to be assigned.

Note: If the output is 4K provided by the 4 SDI connectors, the 4 SDI connectors need to be selected.

Connector(s) is immediately highlighted in blue.

3. The selection is completed by clicking the Done Adding button that is highlighted in blue.
A new Output is added in the output list.

How to delete Output

1. Click on the Delete Output(s) button
The Delete Output(s) button is replaced by the Delete Selected button (highlighted in red).

128 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 EM GUI orientation

2. Click on the corresponding connector in the graphical area.

or
click in the “x” on the right hand side in the output configuration list.
Connector(s) is immediately highlighted in blue.
3. The deletion is completed by clicking the Delete Selected button.

Multiple connector configurations can be selected to be deleted together.

You can only delete Output Configurations that are not assigned in Destinations.

How to access to the output configuration adjustments

Adjustments to outputs are performed in the “Adjust” panel:
1. Select the output from the configuration list
or
clicking on the connector graphic.
An output is selected.
2. Click on the Adjust tab that is on the top of the Adjustment area.

Image 6-23: Accessing the Output Adjust panel

The output adjustment panel is displayed.

Output adjustment panel description

The output adjustment panel is divided in three sections
• Main page
• Format & Timing
• Connector

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 129

 EM GUI orientation

Output adjustment panel > Main page

• Auto Configure Output format: Selects the output
format will be set to match the format contained in
the EDID of the display device connected to the
corresponding output(s).
• Name: The name of the output configuration can
be edited in this field.
• Format: Selects the video format of the output
configuration from the drop-down menu. The
available formats are in compliance with the output
configuration type. For example, if the
configuration is 4K, only 4K formats will be
presented in the drop-down menu.
• Test pattern: Turns the Test Patterns ON and
select the desired type. The default setting is OFF.
Test pattern types :
- Horizontal Ramp - Horizontal steps
- Vertical Ramp - Vertical steps
- 100% Color Bars - White
- 16x16 Grid - Black
- 32x32 Grid - SMPTE Bars
- Burst - H Alignment
- 75% Colorbars - V Alignment
- 50% Gray - H V Alignment
- - Circle Alignment

• Raster box: Turns ON or OFF on a raster around

the default active area. This raster box is a white,
single-pixel-wide broken line.
• Diagonal Motion: Turns the Diagonal Motion ON or
OFF for select patterns
- The motion is a bottom-right to top-left diagonal
for 16x16, 32x32 grid
- The motion is right to left for 100% Color Bars.
- There is no motion in Horizontal and vertical
Ramps and other patterns
• Area of Interest (AOI): A raster box that can be
positioned and sized within the outputs active
area, it effectively makes the AOI the new active
area.
This raster box is a green, single-pixel-wide
broken line that helps you adjust the AOI within the
output’s active area
The handles for the AOI menu are:
- H Size and V size : Adjusts the horizontal and
vertical positions respectively
- H Pos and V pos: Adjusts the horizontal and
vertical positions respectively
- Note a lock button to allow user to lock the
aspect ratio of the size.
• Reset button: resets the AOI to default which is the
full output area.
Note: The AOI of AUX outputs works as above while
Program outputs will be implemented during 2015.

130 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 EM GUI orientation

Output adjustment panel > Timing Menu

• Format: Selects the video format of the output
configuration from the drop menu. This is the same
adjustment as in the previous menu.
• H Total: Adjusts (in pixels) the total pixel count per
line for the selected output.
• H Front Porch: Adjusts (in pixels) the offset
between the end of the output active area and the
beginning of H sync.
• H Active: Adjusts (in pixels) the horizontal size of
the output active area.
• H Sync: Adjusts (in pixels) the H sync width.
• H Polarity: Adjusts the polarity (active High or Low)
of the horizontal sync pulse (N/A in SDI).
• V Total: Adjusts (in lines) the total line count per
frame.
• V Front Porch: Adjusts (in lines) the offset between
the end of the output active area and the beginning
of V sync.
• V Active: Adjusts (in lines) the vertical size of the
output active area.
• V Sync: Adjusts (in lines) the V sync width.
• V Polarity: Adjusts the polarity (active High or Low)
of the vertical sync pulse (N/A in SDI).
• V Rate: Adjusts the frame rate in seconds polarity
(active High or Low) of the vertical sync pulse (N/A
in SDI).
Note: Changing these values can make the video
signal undetectable for other devices. Always use a
VESA timing calculator for best results.

Output adjustment panel > Connector Menu

• Color/Sample/Bit: Adjusts the color space (RGB or
YCbCr), sampling rate (4:4:4) and bit depth (8, 10,
or 12) of the output signal.
• Color Range: Adjusts the color range (RGB or
SMPTE, Full or Reduced).
• Connector Capacity: If the connector is not
assigned to a Destination as above, the capacity
can be changed. Once included in a Destination
configuration this needs to be managed thru the
Adjust pane of the Destination.

Connector Menu: Output Adjustment—DP

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 131

 EM GUI orientation

• Color/Sample/Bit: Adjusts the color space (RGB or

YCbCr), sampling rate (4:4:4 or 4:2:2) and bit
depth (8, 10, or 12) of the output signal.
Depending on the EDID of the connected device
the drop-down list would populate with compatible
settings.
• Color Range: Adjusts the color range (RGB or
SMPTE, Full or Reduced).
• Connector Capacity: If the connector is not
assigned to a Destination as above, the capacity
can be changed. Once included in a Destination
configuration this needs to be managed through
the Adjust pane of the Destination.
• HDCP Mode: HDCP Mode enables the HDCP
setting for the selected output. The default for
Connector Menu: Output Adjustment—HDMI HDMI outputs is Off. To turn On the HDCP Mode,
click on the empty checkbox. When the checkbox
displays a check mark, HDCP Mode is On. HDCP
Mode is not applicable to SDI outputs.

• SDI type (available with SDI connector type) :

allows a choice between HD (1.5Gb), 3G (3Gb)
Level A, Level B, Level A 2SI, or Level B 2SI.
• The SDI Type options vary, depending on the
format of the Outputs. For example, for:
- NTSC/PAL—the SDI Type can be only SD.
- 1080i or 1080p, with a refresh rate less than or
equal to 30 Hz—the SDI Type can be only HD.
- 1080p, with a refresh rate greater than 30 Hz—
the SDI Type can be:
◦ Level A (default)
◦ Level B
◦ Level A 2SI
◦ Level B 2SI
The 2SI options are available only if the Input/
Connector Menu: Output Adjustment—SDI Output configuration has 4 SDI connectors
from the same card, and the Output format is
either 1920 x 1080 or 2048 x 1080.
• Color/Sample/Bit: Adjusts the color space
(YCbCr), sampling rate (4:2:2) and bit depth (10)
of the output signal.
• Connector Capacity: If the connector is not
assigned to a destination as above the capacity
can be changed. Once included in a Destination
configuration this needs to be managed thru the
Adjust pane of the Destination.

The selection of HD (1080i) or 3G SDI (1080P) actually happens when the format type is selected in
the main tab.

6.16 Configuration Menu > Adjustment >

Destination Configuration
General
Output configurations that are created in the previous menus are assigned to destination in the Destination
Panel.

132 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 EM GUI orientation

Description
Destination configuration menu is accessed by clicking on the Destination tab.
This menu provides:
• A list of all the destinations (Screen, Aux) already created on
the system (e.g. ScreenDest1)
• A button to add Screen Destinations.
• A button to add AUX Destinations.
• A button to add Super Destinations.
• A button to add Super AUX destinations.
• A button to delete unused or obsolete Destination(s).

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 133

 EM GUI orientation

Note: Users can now link more than two

E2s, or more than two S3–4Ks in a single
system. In this configuration, only input
expansion is supported. Users can select
up to 48 SL inputs for linked E2 systems
and 24 SL inputs for linked S3–4K
systems to be marked it as a "Global
Input." Global Input checkboxes are
available in the Configuration page, under
the Input and Background tabs for inputs.
Because Screen Destinations can be
inputs to Layers and AUX Destinations,
Screen Destinations can also be
designated as "Global Inputs." The
Destination tab in the Configuration page
tracks the number of available global
links. To designate a Screen Destination
as a global input, check the "Global"
checkbox on the Adjust panel for the
Screen Destination.

134 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 EM GUI orientation

The user can assign Outputs to Output configurations—manually or automatically—and delete Outputs from
Output configurations.

Destination formats
A few words about destination formats:
• For Screen Destinations: The format of any Output configuration added to a Screen Destination is
updated to match the format of the Screen Destination. If the first Output configuration in a Screen
Destination is deleted and a new Output configuration is added, then the format of the new Output
configuration becomes the format of the Screen Destination.
• For AUX Destinations: An AUX destination always assumes the format of the Output configuration that is
assigned to it.
• For Super Destinations: Super Destinations do not have an output format. As Screen Destinations are
added to a Super Destination, the pixels from the Screen Destinations are added together to create the
canvas size of the Super Destination.
Screen Destinations of different resolutions can be combined into a Super destination.
The placement of the individual Screen Destinations need not be edge-to-edge. Screen Destinations can
be placed in arbitrary positions, creating a new pixel coordination system and allowing manipulation of
Super Layers within that new system.
• For Super AUX Destinations: Super AUX Destinations work with AUX Destinations as AUX Destinations
work with Output configurations. Create a Super AUX, and drag and drop the desired AUX Destinations
into it. Use the H/V Offset edit boxes to adjust the layout relationship of the AUX destinations that are
assigned to the Super AUX.
- Super AUX Destinations work only with AUX Destinations.
- Super AUX is not available as a destination in the MVR, although the user can still add the individual
AUX Destinations to the MVR.
- Arming any AUX Destination that is a member of a Super Aux arms the Super AUX Destination, which
arms all the other AUX destinations that are grouped in the Super AUX.

Rules
The following rules apply when defining a Screen / AUX Destination configuration:
1. Destinations accept only the same Output connector types.
SDI and HDMI connectors cannot be mixed in the same destination.
2. Destinations accept Output configurations only with the same number of Output connectors.
Output configurations with a different number of connectors cannot be combined. For example if the first
Output configuration added is an HDMI output configuration with two (2) connectors (grouped connector),
an HDMI output configuration with one (1) connector cannot be added to the same destination.
3. One cannot add an output configuration to a destination if it is not capable of using the Output format
selected. For example: An Output configuration has a total connector capacity of DL; it cannot be assigned
to a 4K destination.
4. Each card can support up to four (4) screen destinations (program outputs), or up to four (4) AUX Outputs,
or two (2) AUX and two (2) Screen Outputs.
5. ALL outputs can be AUX Destinations, and all Outputs can be assigned to Screen Destinations.
6. Screen Destination sizes are determined by the available amount of pixel canvas, not by the number of
Outputs assigned to a Screen Destination.

Color codes
Super Destinations, Screen Destinations, and AUX Destinations are represented graphically in the Diagram
area.

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 135

 EM GUI orientation

Blue: The destination has been assigned to a super

destination.

Green: Output(s) have been assigned to the destination

Yellow: Output(s) have not been assigned to the destination.

It is possible that after the unit is turned on, the hardware configuration can be altered making certain
Destinations to have invalid Output configurations.
In this case the Destination in the System Diagram becomes grey and adjustment are disabled. In this case
the destination needs to be deleted and new one created to reflect the existing output configuration.

More about Super Destinations

As Screen Destinations can be understood as groups of outputs, Super Destinations can be understood as
groups of Screen Destinations. Once a Super Destination and more than one Screen Destinations have been
created, the Screen Destinations can be assigned to a Super Destination by dragging and dropping them on
the Super Destination in the Diagram area of the Configuration menu. Local Layers added to a Screen
Destination are added only to that Screen Destination, while Super Layers added to a Super Destination are
also added to each Screen Destination in the Super Destination.

Image 6-24: Super Destinations on the Configuration Menu

1 Network resource area

2 System diagram area
3 Adjustment area

136 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 EM GUI orientation

4 Add and delete Destination buttons

• Add Screen Destination
• Add Aux Destination
• Add Super Destination
• Delete Destination(s)
5 SuperDest1
6 Screen Destinations
• ScreenDest1
• ScreenDest2
7 AuxDest1
8 Drag and drop ScreenDest1 and ScreenDest2 into SuperDest1.

Creating a Super Destination and assigning Screen Destinations

1. Add Screen Destinations, Super Destination, and AUX Destination, using the add Destination buttons.
2. Assign Outputs to the Destinations.
3. (Optional) Add Super Layers to Super Destinations and Local Layers to Screen Destinations and Local
Layers to Screen Destinations.
Layers may be added to the Destinations after the Screen Destinations are assigned to the Super
Destination.
4. Drag and drop the Screen Destinations into the Super Destination.
In Image 6-25 Screen Destinations 1 and 2 have been assigned to Super Destination 1. (Layers have also
been assigned to the Destinations.) Note that the colors of the Destinations in the System diagram area and
the colors of the LEDs in the Adjustment area have changed to indicate that the Screen Destinations have
been assigned to the Super Destination and that Layers have been assigned to the Destinations.

Image 6-25: Super Destination with Screen Destinations Assigned

Manipulating Super and Screen Destinations in the Programming Menu

Use the Programming menu to manipulate Super and Screen Destinations.

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 137

 EM GUI orientation

Image 6-26: Super Destinations on the Programming Menu

1 AOI Markers “Off”

2 SuperDest1
3 ScreenDest1
4 ScreenDest2
5 Resources area
6 System-wide functions
7 Adjustment area

1. Set the AOI Markers to “Off.”

Turning on the AOI Markers "On" or "Off" affects how the system-wide functions (the Layer alignment
buttons, including Fill H, Fill V and Fill H/V) work. With the AOI Markers set to "On," the Layer alignment
buttons align the Layer into the Screen Destination in which the center of the Layer is located. With the AOI
Markers set to "Off," the Layer alignment buttons align the Layer in the entire Super Destination.
2. Drag and drop Inputs from the Resources area to desired Destinations.
• Adding an Input as a Super Layer to a Super Destination adds that Input to one or all of the Screen
Destinations assigned to the Super Destination, depending on the placement of the Super Layer in the
Super Destination.
• Adding an Input as a Local Layer to a Screen Destination adds that Input only to the Screen
Destination. Super Layers are marked with blue text to differentiate them from Local Layers.
3. Apply system-wide functions, User Keys, or Presets to Layers in the Super Destination or in the Screen
Destinations.
• Super Layers must be selected and effects applied in the Super Destination. The EMTS displays the
result of the applied effects in the Super Destination and the in the Screen Destinations, but the Super
Layers must be selected and effects applied in the Super Destination.
• Local Layers must be selected and effects applied in the appropriate Screen Destination. The EMTS
displays the result of the applied effects in the Screen Destination and the in the Super Destination, but
the Local Layers must be selected and effects applied in the appropriate Screen Destination.
The Adjustment area lists Super Layers added to a Super Destination and Screen Layers added to
a Screen Destination in white, and it lists Super Layers added to a Screen Destination through a
Super Destination in blue.

138 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 EM GUI orientation

More about AUX Destinations

Based on the Aux Capacity, the user can create AUX Destination on an output card. The AUX capacity defines
the Input capacity and scaler size of the AUX.
All output cards can be Auxes while only any 2 output cards with a total of 8 outputs can be Program outputs
Aux Capacity Number of Outputs Max output Resolution
2K (Single 4 SDI 2048x1080 / HDMI 2048 x 1200
Link)
Dual Link 2 SDI 2048x1080 / HDMI 2560 x 1600
4K 1 SDI 2048x1080 / HDMI UHD / 4K

For DL resolutions and above only the two top connectors of each HDMI card work.

Widescreen destinations can be downscaled by the Aux and based on the capacity it can
accommodate up to eight (8) outputs worth of widescreen.

More about Super AUX Destinations

As Super Destinations can be understood as groups of Screen Destinations, Super AUX Destinations can be
understood as groups of AUX Destinations. Once a Super AUX Destination and more than one AUX
Destinations have been created, the AUX Destinations can be assigned to a Super AUX Destination by
dragging and dropping them on the Super AUX Destination in the Diagram area of the Configuration menu.
AUX and Super AUX Destinations do not have Layers.

Aux Scaling mode for Super AUX Destinations is fixed in All mode.

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 139

 EM GUI orientation

Super AUX Destinations on the Configuration Menu

Image 6-27: Super AUX Destinations on the Configuration Menu

1 Network resource area 6 Super AUX Destinations

2 System diagram area • ScreenAux1
3 Adjustment area
7 Super Destinations
4 Add and delete Destination buttons
• ScreenDest1
• Add Screen Destination
• ScreenDest2
• Add Aux Destination
• Add Super Destination 8 Aux Destinations
• Add Super AUX • AuxDest1
• Delete Destination(s) • AuxDest2
5 Super Designations 9 Drag and drop AuxDest1 and AuxDest2 into
SuperAux1.

Creating a Super AUX Destination and assigning AUX Destinations

1. Add Super Destinations, Super AUX Destinations, Screen Destinations, and AUX Destinations, using the
add Destination buttons.
2. Assign Outputs to the Destinations.
3. Drag and drop the AUX Destinations onto the Super AUX Destinations.

140 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 EM GUI orientation

Image 6-28: AUX and Screen Destinations assigned to Super AUX and Super Screen Destinations

Manipulating Super AUX and AUX Destinations in the Programming Menu

Use the Programming menu to manipulate Super AUX and AUX Destinations.
The following examples use a Super AUX Destination that contains nine AUX Destinations, arranged in a 3 x 3
matrix.
To view the Super AUX…
1. Select the Programming menu.

Image 6-29: Programming menu, showing AUXes and Super AUX

1 SuperAux1 tab
2. Select the SuperAux1 tab to view the Super AUX.

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 141

 EM GUI orientation

Image 6-30: Programming menu, showing Super AUX

To tile an AUX over the entire Super AUX…

1. Double-click an AUX within the Super AUX.

Image 6-31: Super AUX matrix

For example, double-clicking on any AUX that displays the Barco logo tiles the Barco logo across the
entire Super AUX.

Image 6-32: Super AUX tile

2. Double-click on the tiled AUX to return the AUX to its original size.
To tile an AUX within the Super AUX…
1. Select an AUX within the Super AUX.

142 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 EM GUI orientation

Image 6-33: AUX selected

2. Drag the inner box of the selection box over the AUXes to be covered.
For example, drag the selection box over the other AUXes in the lower, left-hand quadrant.

Image 6-34: AUX selection box resized

3. Release the selection box.

The selected AUX covers the four AUXes of the lower, left-hand quadrant.

Image 6-35: AUX tiled over quadrant

4. Double-click on the tiled AUX to return the AUX to its original size.
To scale an AUX within the Super AUX…
1. Select an AUX within the Super AUX.

Image 6-36: AUX selected

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 143

 EM GUI orientation

2. Drag the inner box of the selection box over the AUXes to be covered.
For example, drag the selection box over the other AUXes in the same row or column.

Image 6-37: AUX horizontal selection

3. Release the selection box.

The selected AUX covers the other AUXes in the same row or column.

Image 6-38: AUX horizontally scaled

4. Double-click on the scaled AUX to return the AUX to its original size.
In the same manner an AUX can be vertically scaled in the Super AUX.

Image 6-39: AUX vertically scaled

6.17 Configuration Menu > Adjustment >

Destination Configuration > Adjust Panel
General
Add, delete, and adjust Destinations with the Destination and Destination Adjust panels.

How to add Destination(s)

To assign an output configuration to a destination...
1. Select the output configuration (Output tab).

144 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 EM GUI orientation

2. Click on the Add Screen Destination, or the Add Aux Destination, or the Add Super Destination, or the
Add Super AUX button (Destination tab).
These buttons are highlighted in blue.

Image 6-40: Add destination buttons

If the Add destination button is pressed without selecting an output configuration, the software will
automatically assign the first unassigned output configuration (from left most output card) to a destination. The
output configuration format is copied to the destination output format.
New Screen, Aux, Super, or Super Aux destinations can be added as long as there are unassigned output
configurations to destinations.
Alternatively, you assign outputs to destinations by dragging them into the Destination block. In the example
below, the output 1 was assigned to ScreenDest1 and the destination format was set to 1920x1080 reflecting
the format of output1.
When output 2 is dragged into the same destination, then the format changes to 3840x1080 reflecting a 2x1
setup. When outputs are dragged into a destination in this manner, the software assumes it is a horizontal
setup with 0 pixel overlap. The overlap can be modified in the Wide menu. If a vertical or grid setup is desired,
then the output configuration needs to be setup as such in the output configuration menus.

Image 6-41: Add Output to Destination

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 145

 EM GUI orientation

How to delete Destination

1. Click on the Delete Destination(s) button The Delete Destination(s) button is replaced by the Delete Selected
button (highlighted in red) and the unit diagram is greyed out, except the area dedicated to destinations
(Screen and Aux).
2. Click on destination in the graphical area.
or
Click on the “x” on the right hand side in the destination configuration list.
Destination(s) is immediately outlined in red.

Image 6-42: Delete selected Destination(s)

3. The deletion is completed by clicking the Delete Selected button.

Note: Any output can be deleted from a destination at any time. For example, if the output that is
automatically assigned to a destination is not the desired one, then it can be deleted.

Note: All destinations can be deleted the same time by clicking the “Select All” button.

How to access to the Destination configuration adjustments

Adjustments to Destinations are performed in the “Adjust” panel:
1. Select the destination from the configuration list.
or
Click on the graphic representation the destination in the Diagram area.
A Destination is selected.
2. Click on the Adjust tab that is on the top of the Adjustment area.

146 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 EM GUI orientation

Image 6-43: Destination Adjust tab

The Destination adjustment panel is displayed.

Destination adjustment panel description

The Destination adjustment panel is divided in three sections:
• Assign
• Output
• Wide

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 147

 EM GUI orientation

Assign Menu
• Name: Adjusts the name of the Destination.
• Destination type: Reports the type of destination
Screen or Aux. Can convert from Screen to Aux if
it meets requirements.
• Number of output(s): Reports the number of output
configurations in the destination.
• Dimension: Adjust the output configuration layout .
• Auto configure Output format: Reads the EDID
information of the connected device to acquire its
format. If more than one device is connected to the
destination, it reads the format of the first output.
This feature is not available for SDI outputs.
• Output(s) format: Adjusts the output format of the
destination. This is applied to all outputs that are
added into this destination.
If you cannot find the output format in the list, it is
possible that the connector capacity for the
connector is too small. Remove the outputs from
the Destination; update the connector capacity;
and check again. (Refer to “Configuration Menu >
Adjustment > Output Configuration”, page 125,
and see the subsections "How to delete Output"
and "Output adjustment panel > Connector
Menu.")
• Output rotation icons: Adjust the counterclockwise
rotation of the Output of a Screen or an AUX
Destination. The rotation can be 0°, 90°, 180°, or
270°. The default rotation is 0°.
- When a Destination is rotated, the Output AOI
setting is reset to full, and new min and max
values are applied. For example, when an AOI
with a rotation of 0° is 1920x1080, then that
same AOI with 90° rotation is 1080x1920.
- When a Destination is rotated, the Destination
cannot be in minimum delay.
Rotation adds an extra frame of delay;

148 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 EM GUI orientation

◦ Minimum delay capable Screen

Destinations that are rotated have 1 frame
of delay.
◦ Non-minimum delay capable Screen
Destinations that are rotated have 2 frames
of delay.
◦ AUX Destinations have 1 frame of delay.
◦ Rotated AUX Destinations have 2 frames of
delay.
- When a Destination is rotated, the canvas is
accordingly resized.
- When a Destination is rotated, the Screen
Destination as a source to a Layer is not
rotated.
Note: The Output rotation icons are available only
for Output from the Quad DisplayPort 1.2 Output
card and from the Tri-Combo Output card.
• Outputs: Provides a list of the output
configurations assigned to the Destination.
For Aux destinations, only 1 Output configuration
is shown or is allowed to be defined. From this
menu outputs can be deleted or added as in the
output configuration menu.
• Layer (only applicable when Destination is a
Screen). You can assign a size to the Layer: SL
(2K Single Link), DL (Dual Link), or 4K. You can
also make the Layer either a Mixing Layer or a
Single Layer.
The list shows the Layers assigned to this
Destination.

A word about layers

Adding to the general description above about layers, mores specifically a EMP´s Screen Destination has 1
fixed Mixing layer, its BG. Then there are a number of mixing layers available in the system.
The E2 has 2 Banks of 8 Mixing Layers for a total of 16 Mixing Layers or 32 Single Layers (32L). These 16
Mixing Layers can be assigned to Destinations, using up to 4 Outputs (1 Bank). If a Destination uses Outputs
from both Banks, the Mixing Layer count is reduced to 8. An E2 Jr. has a single Bank of 8 Mixing Layers for a
total of 8 Mixing Layers or 16 Single Layers (16L).
An S3–4k has 1 bank of 4 Mixing Layers for a total of 4 Mixing Layers or 8 Single Layers (8L). These 8 Mixing
Layers can be assigned to Destinations, using up to 4 Outputs (1 Bank). An S3–4k Jr. has a single Bank of 2
Mixing Layers for a total of 2 Mixing Layers or 4 Single Layers (4L).
Processor Banks Mixing Layers Single Layers
E2 2 16 32
E2 Jr. 1 8 16
S3–4K 1 4 8
S3–4K Jr. 1 2 4
EX NA NA NA

The layer system has been optimized in E2 to allow the maximum available layer count at all times and can
therefore be a bit confusing.
Based on the Layer mode (set in the System Modifier Panel), the number of “Assign Layer to Destination”
varies. The table below shows the maximum number of single layers for each layer mode.
Maximum number of Single Layers
Mixing Layer Type
E2 E2 Jr. S3–4K S3–4K Jr. EX
2K HD 32 16 8 4 NA
Dual Link 16 8 4 2 NA
4K 8 4 2 1 NA

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 149

 EM GUI orientation

Layers need to be assigned to destinations before sources can be added to the destination.

Output menu
The Output Menu contains four sub-menus: Main, Color, Timing and Connector properties. Adjustments to
the Main, Timing, and Connector properties are identical with the adjustments to the Main, Timing, and
Connector properties in the output configuration menu. In this destination configuration menu, however,
adjustments can be performed on all or on selected outputs that make up the destination. Individual outputs
can be selected by clicking on the corresponding screen. When a screen is selected its outline turns blue. All
outputs can also be selected by clicking on the Select All button.

Image 6-44: Configuration Menu: Destination Adjust—Output (Top of panel)

1 Main
2 Color
3 Timing
4 Connector properties

150 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 EM GUI orientation

Output menu – Main submenu

Operate similarly to the Output adjustment panel >
Main menu.
• Test pattern: Turns the Test Patterns ON and
select the desired type. The default setting is OFF.
Test pattern types:
– Horizontal Ramp – Horizontal steps
– Vertical Ramp – Vertical steps
– 100% Color Bars – White
– 16x16 Grid – Black
– 32x32 Grid – SMPTE Bars
– Burst – H Alignment
- –75% Color Bars – V Alignment
– 50% Gray – H V Alignment
– Circle Alignment

• Raster box: Turns ON or OFF on a raster around

the default active area. This raster box is a white,
single-pixel-wide broken line.
• Diagonal Motion: Turns the Diagonal Motion ON
or OFF for select patterns:
- The motion is a bottom-right to top-left diagonal
for 16x16, 32x32 grid.
- The motion is right to left for 100% Color Bars.
- There is no motion in Horizontal and vertical
Ramps and other patterns.
• Area of Interest (AOI): A raster box that can be
positioned and sized within the outputs active
area, it effectively makes the AOI the new active
area.
This raster box is a green, single-pixel-wide
broken line that helps you adjust the AOI within the
output’s active area The handles for the AOI menu
are:
- H Size and V size: Adjusts the horizontal and
vertical positions respectively.
- H Pos and V pos: Adjusts the horizontal and
vertical positions respectively.
- Note a lock button allows user to lock the
aspect ratio of the size.
• Reset button: resets the AOI to default which is
the full output area.

Operate similar as the Output adjustment panel > Main page. See above.

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 151

 EM GUI orientation

Output menu – Color submenu

The Output Effects Submenu adjusts color variable of the output image, such as contrast and brightness,
saturation, hue and gamma corrections.
• The RGB Contrast and Brightness settings are
adjustable.
- The Overall adjustment has a range of 50 to
150.
- The individual Red/Green/Blue adjustments
have a range of 25 to 150.
- The default setting for all of these properties is
100.
• Saturation is adjustable within a range of 0 to 150.
The default setting is 100.
• Hue is adjustable within a range of –90 to +90
degrees. The default setting is 0 degrees.
• Gamma is adjustable within a range of 0.31 to
3.29. The default setting is 1.0.
• Reset All changes all values to their default
settings.

152 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 EM GUI orientation

Output menu – Timing submenu

Operate similarly to the Output adjustment panel >
Timing menu.
• Format: Selects the video format of the output
configuration from the drop menu. This is the same
adjustment as in the previous menu.
• H Total: Adjusts (in pixels) the total pixel count per
line for the selected output.
• H Front Porch: Adjusts (in pixels) the offset
between the end of the output active area and the
beginning of H sync.
• H Active: Adjusts (in pixels) the horizontal size of
the output active area.
• H Sync: Adjusts (in pixels) the H sync width.
• H Polarity: Adjusts the polarity (active High or
Low) of the horizontal sync pulse (N/A in SDI).
• V Total: Adjusts (in lines) the total line count per
frame.
• V Front Porch: Adjusts (in lines) the offset
between the end of the output active area and the
beginning of V sync.
• V Active: Adjusts (in lines) the vertical size of the
output active area.
• V Sync: Adjusts (in lines) the V sync width.
• V Polarity: Adjusts the polarity (active High or
Low) of the vertical sync pulse (N/A in SDI).
• V Rate: Adjusts the frame rate in seconds polarity
(active High or Low) of the vertical sync pulse (N/A
in SDI).
Note: Changing these values can make the video
signal undetectable for other devices. Always use a
VESA timing calculator for best results.

Output menu – Connector submenu

Operate similarly to the Output adjustment panel > Connector menus.
DisplayPort Connector submenu
• Color/Sample/Bit: Adjusts the color space (RGB
or YCbCr), sampling rate (4:4:4) and bit depth (8,
10, or 12) of the output signal.
• Color Range: Adjusts the color range (RGB or
SMPTE, Full or Reduced).
• Connector Capacity: If the connector is not
assigned to a destination as above the capacity
can be changed. Once included in a Destination
configuration this needs to be managed thru the
Adjust pane of the Destination.

DisplayPort Connector submenu

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 153

 EM GUI orientation

HDMI Connector submenu

• Color/Sample/Bit: Choices are:
– RGB/4:4:4/8 – YCbCr/4:4:4/8
– RGB/4:4:4/10 – YCbCr/4:4:4/10
– RGB/4:4:4/12 – YCbCr/4:4:4/12
– YCbCr/4:2:2/12

• Color Range: Choices are:

- RGB, Reduced Range (Values 16–235,
television and movies)
- RGB, Full Range (Values 0–255, computer
monitors)
- SMPTE, Full Range
- SMPTE, Reduced Range
• HDCP Mode: HDCP Mode enables the HDCP
setting for the selected output. The default for
HDMI outputs is Off. To turn On the HDCP Mode,
HDMI Connector submenu click on the empty checkbox. When the checkbox
displays a check mark, HDCP Mode is On. HDCP
Mode is not applicable to SDI outputs.
• Connector Capacity: If the connector is not
assigned to a destination as above the capacity
can be changed. Once included in a Destination
configuration this needs to be managed thru the
Adjust pane of the Destination.
SDI Connector submenu
• SDI Type (available with SDI connector type):
allows a choice between HD (1.5Gb), 3G (3Gb),
Level A, Level B, Level A 2SI, or Level B 2SI.
The SDI Type options vary, depending on the
format of the Outputs. For example, for:
- NTSC/PAL—the SDI Type can be only SD.
- 1080i or 1080p, with a refresh rate less than or
equal to 30 Hz—the SDI Type can be only HD.
- 1080p, with a refresh rate greater than 30 Hz—
the SDI Type can be:
◦ Level A (default)
◦ Level B
◦ Level A 2SI
◦ Level B 2SI
The 2SI options are available only if the Input/
Output configuration has 4 SDI connectors
from the same card, and the Output format is
SDI Connector submenu either 1920 x 1080 or 2048 x 1080.
• Color/Sample/Bit: Adjusts the color space
(YCbCr), sampling rate (4:2:2) and bit depth (10)
of the output signal.
• Connector Capacity: If the connector is not
assigned to a destination as above the capacity
can be changed. Once included in a Destination
configuration this needs to be managed thru the
Adjust pane of the Destination.

Wide (screen) menu

In this menu, the user can adjust the data-doubling and feathering parameters necessary to setup a wide
blended screen. These actions can be performed simultaneously on all screens by clicking the “Select All”
button. The data-doubling parameters can be adjusted in either Basic Mode or Expert Mode.

154 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 EM GUI orientation

Data-doubling submenu—Basic Mode

• Canvas H: This is the horizontal size of the
canvas, measured in pixels. The edit box allows
the user to adjust this size.
• Canvas V: This is the vertical size of the canvas,
measured in pixels. The edit box allows the user to
adjust this size.
• Viewable Canvas: Viewable Canvas displays the
horizontal and vertical size of the viewable canvas
in pixels. This is the area that the Outputs cover in
the canvas.
• Canvas Size: The options are “Follow Output” and
“Use Background.”
- “Follow Output” matches the canvas size to H/
V Dimension edit boxes in the Assign tab and
the Output Config format.
- “Use Background,” matches the canvas size to
that of a selected Background.
• Background: If the Canvas Size is set to “Use
Background,” this drop-down box lets the user
select from the available backgrounds.
• Apply as Canvas Size: When switching between
“Follow Output” and “Use Background,” the user
must click on this button to choose the new canvas
size.
• Data Doubling H or V Overlap width: The
adjustment can be made by moving the slider,
entering the value manually in the box, or clicking
on the plus and minus.
Note: The Overlap sliders are disabled, until at
least one overlapping area is selected. Gray
overlaps are unselected; blue overlaps are
selected. Individual overlaps can be selected by
clicking on the desired overlap in the output image.
All overlaps can be selected by clicking on the
Select All button.
• Once an overlap is created, H and V offset can be
adjusted for Left, Right, or Center justification over
the Background.
• The icons above the sliders are shortcuts for the
offset.

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 155

 EM GUI orientation

Data-doubling submenu—Expert Mode

The top part of the panel is the same in Expert Mode
as it is in Basic Mode. Expert Mode, however, offers
greater control over horizontal and vertical Offset and
Size. Expert Mode also allows the user to add Outputs
without increasing the canvas size and to place those
Outputs anywhere within the canvas.
• Data Doubling H or V Overlap width: The
adjustment can be made by moving the slider,
entering the value manually in the box, or clicking
on the plus and minus.
Note: The Overlap sliders are disabled, until at
least one overlapping area is selected. Gray
overlaps are unselected; blue overlaps are
selected. Individual overlaps can be selected by
clicking on the desired overlap in the output image.
All overlaps can be selected by clicking on the
Select All button.
• Once an overlap is created, H and V offset can be
adjusted for Left, Right, or Center justification over
the Background.
• The Area of Interest (including H Size and V Size)
is duplicated here from the Output tab, so that the
user can adjust the AOI and the X/Y Offset
together.
• The icons above the sliders are shortcuts for the
offset.

156 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 EM GUI orientation

Feathering submenu
• Canvas shows the actual pixel ratio for the full
blend.
• Select the region where feathering will be
performed. All edges can be separately selected
and have a different value of Feather and Gamma.
The adjustment can be made my moving the
slider, entering the value manually in the box or
click on the plus and minus.
Note: The Feathering and Gamma sliders are
disabled, until at least one edge that can be
feathered is selected. Gray edges are unselected;
blue edges are selected.
• Activate or deactivate the feather for the selected
edge by checking the Feathering checkbox.
• Adjust the Feathering Gamma (shape of the curve)
and the width of the feathering region.
• The icons above are shortcuts for edge selection.
• The Arrow icon allows the small windows
representation of the blend to be copied to the
workspace for ease of edge selection.

6.18 Configuration Menu > Adjustment > External

Devices configuration
General
In the External Devices configuration menu users can add external devices to a configuration and assign
commands to those external devices.

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 157

 EM GUI orientation

External devices tab

This menu provides:
• A + Add External Device button to manually add,
one at a time, up to 12 external devices.
• A Delete External Device(s) button to delete
selected external devices.
• A list of all of the external devices that have been
added to the configuration.
The system provides a syntax number to the left of
each added external device. The names of the
external devices can be changed, as the names of
inputs, outputs, destinations, etc. can be changed.

To adjust the attributes of an external device, select the device from the list and click on the adjustment tab.
For example, select ExtDevice1.00 and click on the Adjust: ExtDevice1.00 tab.

158 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 EM GUI orientation

External Devices Adjust tab

This menu provides:
• Number: A number assigned to the external
device.
• Name: The name of the external device.
• IP Address: The IP address of the external
device.
The IP address may be entered manually.
• Port: The port assigned to the external device.
• Number of command(s): The number of
commands assigned to the external device.
• Protocol: The Internet protocol: TCP
(Transmission Control Protocol) or UDP (User
Datagram Protocol).
• Test Selected Command: A button that tests the
selected command.
Until a Command is selected, the system displays
the message,”Invalid IP address or Command not
selected.”
• Test Result: The Test Result reads:
- Failure: before the command is tested and if
the command fails the test.
- In Progress: while the command is being
tested.
- Success: if the command passes the test.
• Store: Stores the tested command to the selected
external device.
• + Add new Command to Device: A button that
adds commands to the external device.
• Delete Command(s): A button that deletes
selected commands from the external device.
• Commands: A list of commands assigned to an
external device.

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 159

 EM GUI orientation

Add, Test, and Store commands

On the External Devices Adjust tab the user may add,
test, and store commands for external devices.
1. Click on the +Add new Command to Device
button to add a command to the selected external
device.
2. Enter the command in the command window.
The user may type or copy and paste a command
into the empty window.
3. Click on the Test Selected Command button.
The Test Result reads:
• Failure: before the command is tested and if
the command fails the test.
• In Progress: while the command is being
tested.
• Success: if the command passes the test.
4. Correct the command if it fails the test.
5. Click on the Store button, once the command has
passed the test, to store the command to the
selected external device.
Once a command has been added, tested, and
stored, the text of the command appears under the
command in the Commands list.

6.19 Configuration Menu > Linking

General
This part of the System configuration page lists devices available on the local network and allows adding them
to a Linked System Set up.

160 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 EM GUI orientation

The Link cards allow for linking multiple Event Master units. Depending on the linking configuration, linked
units share inputs, and they expand the number of layers and outputs. For example, with code release 1.5, 2
E2 units can be linked.
Just as in section“Configuration Menu > Network resource area”, page 105, the unit that is supposed to be
added is available in the network resource tab. Any second unit can be added, it only needs to have a
separate Unit ID. Change the Unit ID of each system to be different. The default Unit ID is 0 on all Event
Master presentation switchers—E2, S3-4K, and EX. On one of the E2s change the Unit ID to 1 from the front
panel, or by temporarily adding them as separate systems.
A second E2 or S3– 4K unit adds fully double capacity from one unit. There are very few limitations to the
capacity and operation is all in all the same as for one unit.
After linking chassis, a few menus provide the option of changing between which unit controls you
are viewing.
From the Menu bar at the top of all pages, you can select which processor’s details you are viewing,
by selecting that processor from the pull down menu.

There is no relationship between Unit ID and Master or Slave selection. Either unit can be Master or
Slave in a linked configuration. The only real significance—but totally transparent to users—is the
Event Master Toolset communicates only with the Master unit. The Master unit establishes its own
connection and handles all communications with the Slave.

Certain configuration setups are not allowed. These include spanning input or output configurations
between an E2 and an S3–4K. If your setup requires this kind of configuration, then you must link
together two E2 units or two S3–4K units.

How to Link Two E2 Units

Each E2 comes equipped with two Link cards, always located in slots 1 and 2. Link cards are identified by a
yellow stripe at the top. Make sure to use the locking mechanism and then push each cable until it locks in
place.
Connect the Link cables provided with each E2 between the Link connectors as follows:
• VP ID 0, Link Card slot 1, Link 1 >> VP ID 1, Link Card slot 1, Link 2 [1]
• VP ID 0, Link Card slot 1, Link 2 >> VP ID 1, Link Card slot 1, Link 1 [2]
• VP ID 0, Link Card slot 2, Link 1 >> VP ID 1, Link Card slot 2, Link 2 [3]
• VP ID 0, Link Card slot 2, Link 2 >> VP ID 1, Link Card slot 2, Link 1 [4]
See Image 6-45 for an example of the cabling between two E2 units.

Image 6-45: Cabling between two E2 units

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 161

 EM GUI orientation

Event Master Configuration for Two E2s

1. Start the Event Master Toolset version 1.5 or higher.
2. Make sure that the two E2s are discovered on the network and that they have different Unit IDs.
3. Drop one the two E2s in the GUI.
4. Then drop the second E2.
You will be presented the option to add as a new system, add as a master, or add as a slave.
5. Select either add as a master or add as a slave.
6. (Optional) At this point it is suggested that you select and name appropriately each E2 so that you can identify
it in your setup.

How to Link Three E2 Units

Each E2 comes equipped with two Link cards, always located in slots 1 and 2. Link cards are identified by a
yellow stripe at the top. Make sure to use the locking mechanism and then push each cable until it locks in
place.
Connect the Link cables provided with each E2 between the Link connectors as follows:
• VP ID 0, Link Card slot 1, Link 1 >> VP ID 2, Link Card slot 1, Link 2 [1]
• VP ID 0, Link Card slot 2, Link 1 >> VP ID 2, Link Card slot 2, Link 2 [2]
• VP ID 0, Link Card slot 1, Link 2 >> VP ID 1, Link Card slot 1, Link 1 [3]
• VP ID 0, Link Card slot 2, Link 2 >> VP ID 1, Link Card slot 2, Link 1 [4]
• VP ID 1, Link Card slot 1, Link 2 >> VP ID 2, Link Card slot 1, Link 1 [5]
• VP ID 1, Link Card slot 2, Link 2 >> VP ID 2, Link Card slot 2, Link 1 [6]
See Image 6-46 for an example of the cabling between three E2 units.

162 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 EM GUI orientation

Image 6-46: Cabling between three E2 units

Event Master Configuration for Three E2s

1. Start the Event Master Toolset version 5.1 or higher.
2. Make sure that the three E2s are discovered on the network and that they have different Unit IDs.
3. Drop one of the E2s in the GUI.
4. Drop the second E2.
You will be presented the option to add as a new system, add as a master, or add as a slave.
5. Select either add as a master or add as a slave.
6. Drop the third E2.
You will be presented the option to add as a new system, add as a master, or add as a slave.
7. Select either add as a master or add as a slave.
8. (Optional) At this point it is suggested that you select and name appropriately each E2 so that you can identify
it in your setup.

How to Link an E2 Unit to an EX Unit or to Two Daisy-Chained EX Units

Each E2 comes equipped with two Link cards, always located in slots 1 and 2. Link cards are identified by a
yellow stripe at the top. Each EX has two Link sockets. Make sure to use the locking mechanism and then
push each cable until it locks in place.
To link an E2 to an EX, connect the Link cables provided with each unit between the Link connectors as
follows:
• E2 VP ID 0, Link Card slot 1, Link 1 >> EX VP ID 1, Link 2

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 163

 EM GUI orientation

• EX VP ID 1, Link 1 >> EX VP ID 2, Link 2

See Image 6-47 for an example of the cabling between an E2 unit and two EX units.

Image 6-47: Cabling between an E2 unit and two daisy-chained EX units

Event Master Configuration for an E2 and an EX

1. Start the Event Master Toolset version 4.0 or higher.
2. Make sure that both the E2 and the EX are discovered on the network and that they have different Unit IDs.
3. Drop the E2 in the GUI.
If the E2 unit is cabled to an EX unit or a pair of daisy-chained EX units, the EX unit appears as a grayed-out
box below the E2 unit in the Diagram area. In the grayed-out EX box a blue button allows you to add the EX to
the system as a slave.
4. Click the blue add button to add the EX unit.
If you are adding two daisy-chained EX units, you must add the first EX in the chain before the second EX in
the chain is displayed, then repeat to add the second EX in the chain.
5. (Optional) At this point it is suggested that you select and name appropriately each unit so that you can
identify it in your setup.

Each of the four Links on an E2 can be connected to two daisy-chained EX units.

An S3-4K can be linked to two daisy-chained EX units. The procedure is the same as the procedure
for linking an E2 to two daisy-chained EX units.

A daisy chain of two EX units cannot have more than two input cards or more than two output cards.
Each EX in the chain can have both input cards, both output cards, or an input card and an output
card.

How to Link an E2 Unit to an EX Unit with Two VPU Cards

To add up to eight Single or four Mixing Layers to a system, an E2 unit can be linked to an EX unit with two
VPU cards. This adds two VPUs. Each E2 comes equipped with two Link cards, always located in slots 1 and
2. Link cards are identified by a yellow stripe at the top. Each EX has two Link sockets. Make sure to use the
locking mechanism and then push each cable until it locks in place.

164 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 EM GUI orientation

To link an E2 to an EX, connect the Link cables provided with each unit between the Link connectors as
follows:
• E2 VP ID 0, Link Card slot 1, Link 1 >> EX VP ID 1, Link 2 [1]
• E2 VP ID 0, Link Card slot 1, Link 2 >> EX VP ID 1, Link 1 [2]
See Image 6-48 for an example of the cabling between an E2 unit and an EX unit with two VPU cards.

Image 6-48: Cabling between an E2 unit and an EX unit with two VPU cards

How to Link an E2 Unit to an EX Unit with a Mixed I/O/VPU Configuration

To add up to four Single Layers or two Mixing Layers to a system, an E2 unit can be linked to an EX unit with a
single VPU card. This adds a single VPU. The VPU can be in either slot 1 or slot 2 on the EX unit, and the
other slot may contain either an Event Master Input card or an Event Master Output card. Each E2 comes
equipped with two Link cards, always located in slots 1 and 2. Link cards are identified by a yellow stripe at the
top. Each EX has two Link sockets. Make sure to use the locking mechanism and then push each cable until it
locks in place.
To link an E2 to an EX, connect the Link cables provided with each unit between the Link connectors as
follows:
• E2 VP ID 0, Link Card slot 1, Link 1 >> EX VP ID 1, Link 2 [1]
• E2 VP ID 0, Link Card slot 1, Link 2 >> EX VP ID 1, Link 1 [2]
See Image 6-49 for an example of the cabling between an E2 unit and an EX unit with a VPU card and either
an Event Master Input card or an Event Master Output card.

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 165

 EM GUI orientation

Image 6-49: Cabling between an E2 unit and an EX unit with a VPU card

When an EX unit has VPU cards rather than a combination of Input and Output cards, and it is
connected to an E2 processor or to an S3–4K processor, the EX unit an no longer be daisy-chained
to another EX unit; both Link connectors on the EX unit must be connected to the E2 or S3–4K
Master unit.

Event Master Configuration for Linking an E2 Unit to an EX Unit with VPU Cards
1. Start the Event Master Toolset version 5.1 or higher.
2. Make sure that both the E2 and the EX are discovered on the network and that they have different Unit IDs.
3. Drop the E2 in the GUI.
If the E2 unit is cabled to an EX unit, the EX unit appears as a grayed-out box below the E2 unit in the Diagram
area. In the grayed-out EX box a blue button allows you to add the EX to the system as a slave.
4. Click the blue add button to add the EX unit.
5. (Optional) At this point it is suggested that you select and name appropriately each unit so that you can
identify it in your setup.

How to Link an E2 Unit to Two EX Units, Each with Two VPU Cards
To add up to 16 Single or eight Mixing Layers to a system, an E2 unit can be linked to two EX units, each with
two VPU cards. This adds a total of four VPUs. Each E2 comes equipped with two Link cards, always located
in slots 1 and 2. Link cards are identified by a yellow stripe at the top. Each EX has two Link sockets. Make
sure to use the locking mechanism and then push each cable until it locks in place.
To link an E2 to two EX units, connect the Link cables provided with each unit between the Link connectors as
follows:
• E2 VP ID 0, Link Card slot 1, Link 1 >> EX VP ID 1, Link 2 [1]
• E2 VP ID 0, Link Card slot 1, Link 2 >> EX VP ID 1, Link 1 [2]
• E2 VP ID 0, Link Card slot 2, Link 1 >> EX VP ID 2, Link 2 [3]
• E2 VP ID 0, Link Card slot 2, Link 2 >> EX VP ID 2, Link 1 [4]
See Image 6-50 for an example of the cabling between an E2 unit and an EX unit with two VPU cards.

166 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 EM GUI orientation

Image 6-50: Cabling between an E2 unit and two EX units

When an EX unit has VPU cards rather than a combination of Input and Output cards, and it is
connected to an E2 processor or to an S3–4K processor, the EX unit an no longer be daisy-chained
to another EX unit; both Link connectors on the EX unit must be connected to the E2 or S3–4K
Master unit.

How to Link an E2 Unit to Two EX Units, Each with a Mixed I/O/VPU Configuration
To add up to eight Single Layers or four Mixing Layers to a system, an E2 unit can be linked to two EX units,
each with a single VPU card. This adds two VPUs. The VPU can be in either slot 1 or slot 2 on the EX unit,
and the other slot may contain either an Event Master Input card or an Event Master Output card. Each E2
comes equipped with two Link cards, always located in slots 1 and 2. Link cards are identified by a yellow
stripe at the top. Each EX has two Link sockets. Make sure to use the locking mechanism and then push each
cable until it locks in place.
To link an E2 to two EX units, connect the Link cables provided with each unit between the Link connectors as
follows:
• E2 VP ID 0, Link Card slot 1, Link 1 >> EX VP ID 1, Link 2 [1]
• E2 VP ID 0, Link Card slot 1, Link 2 >> EX VP ID 1, Link 1 [2]
• E2 VP ID 0, Link Card slot 2, Link 1 >> EX VP ID 2, Link 2 [3]
• E2 VP ID 0, Link Card slot 2, Link 2 >> EX VP ID 2, Link 1 [4]
See Image 6-51 for an example of the cabling between an E2 unit and an EX unit with a VPU card and either
an Event Master Input card or an Event Master Output card.

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 167

 EM GUI orientation

Image 6-51: Cabling between an E2 unit and two EX units, each with a VPU card

When an EX unit has VPU cards rather than a combination of Input and Output cards, and it is
connected to an E2 processor or to an S3–4K processor, the EX unit an no longer be daisy-chained
to another EX unit; both Link connectors on the EX unit must be connected to the E2 or S3–4K
Master unit.

Event Master Configuration for Linking an E2 Unit to Two EX Units with VPU Cards
1. Start the Event Master Toolset version 5.1 or higher.
2. Make sure that both the E2 and the EX are discovered on the network and that they have different Unit IDs.
3. Drop the E2 in the GUI.
If the E2 unit is cabled to an EX unit, the EX unit appears as a grayed-out box below the E2 unit in the Diagram
area. In the grayed-out EX box a blue button allows you to add the EX to the system as a slave.
4. Click the blue add button to add the EX unit.
5. (Optional) At this point it is suggested that you select and name appropriately each unit so that you can
identify it in your setup.

How to Link an E2 Unit and an S3–4K Unit

Each E2 comes equipped with two Link cards, always located in slots 1 and 2. Each S3–4K has a single Link
card in slot 1. Link cards are identified by a yellow stripe at the top. Make sure to use the locking mechanism
and then push each cable until it locks in place.
Connect the Link cables provided with each unit between the Link connectors as follows:
• E2 VP ID 0, Link Card slot 1, Link 1 >> S3–4K VP ID 1, Link Card slot 1, Link 2 [1]
• E2 VP ID 0, Link Card slot 1, Link 2 >> S3–4K VP ID 1, Link Card slot 1, Link 1 [2]
See Image 6-52 for an example of the cabling between an E2 unit and an S3–4K unit.

168 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 EM GUI orientation

Image 6-52: Cabling between an E2 unit and an S3-4K unit

Event Master Configuration for Linking an E2 and an S3–4K

1. Start the Event Master Toolset version 3.2 or higher.
2. Make sure that both the E2 and the S3–4K are discovered on the network and that they have different Unit
IDs.
3. Drop the E2 in the GUI.
4. Then drop the S3–4K in the GUI.
You will be presented the option to add as a new system, add as a master, or add as a slave. An S3–4K can
be added as a Master or Slave to an E2.
5. Select either add as a master or add as a slave.
6. (Optional) At this point it is suggested that you select and name appropriately each unit so that you can
identify it in your setup.

How to Link an E2 Unit and two S3-4K Units

Each E2 comes equipped with two Link cards, always located in slots 1 and 2. Each S3–4K has a single Link
card in slot 1. Link cards are identified by a yellow stripe at the top. Make sure to use the locking mechanism
and then push each cable until it locks in place.
Connect the Link cables provided with each unit between the Link connectors as follows:
• E2 VP ID 0, Link Card slot 2, Link 1 >> S3 VP ID 1, Link Card slot 1, Link 2 [1]
• E2 VP ID 0, Link Card slot 2, Link 2 >> S3 VP ID 1, Link Card slot 1, Link 1 [2]
• E2 VP ID 0, Link Card slot 1, Link 1 >> S3 VP ID 2, Link Card slot 1, Link 2 [3]
• E2 VP ID 0, Link Card slot 1, Link 2 >> S3 VP ID 2, Link Card slot 1, Link 1 [4]
See Image 6-53 for an example of the cabling between an E2 unit and two S3-4K units.

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 169

 EM GUI orientation

Image 6-53: Cabling between an E2 unit and two S3–4K units

Event Master Configuration for Linking an E2 Unit and Two S3-4Ks

1. Start the Event Master Toolset version 4.2 or higher.
2. Make sure that the E2 and the S3–4K units are discovered on the network and that they have different Unit
IDs.
3. Drop the E2 in the GUI.
4. Drop the S3–4K #1 in the GUI.
You will be presented the option to add as a new system, add as a master, or add as a slave. An S3–4K can
be added as a Master or Slave to an E2.
5. Select either add as a master or add as a slave.
6. Drop the S3–4K #2 in the GUI.
You will be presented the option to add as a new system, add as a master, or add as a slave. An S3–4K can
be added as a Master or Slave to an E2.
7. Select either add as a master or add as a slave.
8. (Optional) At this point it is suggested that you select and name appropriately each unit so that you can
identify it in your setup.

How to Link an E2 Unit, an S3-4K Unit, and four EX Units

Each E2 comes equipped with two Link cards, always located in slots 1 and 2. Each S3–4K has a single Link
card in slot 1. Link cards are identified by a yellow stripe at the top. Each EX has two Link sockets. Make sure
to use the locking mechanism and then push each cable until it locks in place.

170 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 EM GUI orientation

Connect the Link cables provided with each unit between the Link connectors as follows:
• E2 VP ID 0, Link Card slot 1, Link 1 >> S3 VP ID 1, Link Card slot 1, Link 2 [1]
• E2 VP ID 0, Link Card slot 1, Link 2 >> S3 VP ID 1, Link Card slot 1, Link 1 [2]
• E2 VP ID 0, Link Card slot 2, Link 1 >> EX VP ID 2, Link 2 [3A]
• EX VP ID 2, Link 1 >> EX VP ID 3, Link 2 [3B]
• E2 VP ID 0, Link Card slot 2, Link 2 >> EX VP ID 4, Link 2 [4A]
• EX VP ID 4, Link 1 >> EX VP ID 5, Link 2 [4B]
See Image 6-54 for an example of the cabling between an E2 unit, an S3-4K unit, and four EX units.

Image 6-54: Cabling between an E2 unit, an S3–4K unit, and four EX units

Event Master Configuration for Linking an E2, an S3-4K, and four EX Units
1. Start the Event Master Toolset version 4.1 or higher.
2. Make sure that the E2, the S3–4K, and the EX are discovered on the network and that they have different Unit
IDs.
3. Drop the E2 in the GUI.
If the E2 unit is cabled to an EX unit or a pair of daisy-chained EX units, the EX unit appears as a grayed-out
box below the E2 unit in the Diagram area. In the grayed-out EX box a blue button allows you to add the EX to
the system as a slave.

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 171

 EM GUI orientation

4. Drop the S3–4K in the GUI.

You will be presented the option to add as a new system, add as a master, or add as a slave. An S3–4K can
be added as a Master or Slave to an E2.
5. Add the S3–4K as a slave.
6. (Optional) At this point it is suggested that you select and name appropriately each unit so that you can
identify it in your setup.
7. Click the blue add button to add the first EX unit.
If the EX is daisy-chained to another EX unit, you must add the first EX in the chain before the second EX in
the chain is displayed, then repeat to add the second EX in the chain.
8. Click the blue add button to add the second EX unit.
If the EX is daisy-chained to another EX unit, you must add the first EX in the chain before the second EX in
the chain is displayed, then repeat to add the second EX in the chain.

How to Link Three S3–4K Units

Each S3– 4K has a single Link card in slot 1, identified by a yellow stripe at the top. Make sure to use the
locking mechanism and then push each cable until it locks in place.
Connect the Link cables provided with each S3–4k between the Link connectors as follows:
• VP ID 0, Link Card slot 1, Link 1 >> VP ID 2, Link Card slot 1, Link 2 [1]
• VP ID 0, Link Card slot 1, Link 2 >> VP ID 1, Link Card slot 1, Link 1 [2]
• VP ID 1, Link Card slot 1, Link 2 >> VP ID 2, Link Card slot 1, Link 1 [3]
See image 6-39 for an example of the cabling between three S3–4K units.

Image 6-55: Cabling between three S3–4K units

172 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 EM GUI orientation

Event Master Configuration for Linking Three S3–4Ks

1. Start the Event Master Toolset version 5.1 or higher.
2. Make sure that the three S3–4Ks are discovered on the network and that they have different Unit IDs.
3. Drop one of the S3–4Ks in the GUI.
4. Drop the second S3–4K.
You will be presented the option to add as a new system, add as a master, or add as a slave.
5. Select either add as a master or add as a slave.
6. Drop the third S3–4K.
You will be presented the option to add as a new system, add as a master, or add as a slave.
7. Select either add as a master or add as a slave.
8. (Optional) At this point it is suggested that you select and name appropriately each S3–4K so that you can
identify it in your setup.

How to Link an S3-4K Unit and an EX Unit with Two VPU Cards
To add up to eight Single or four Mixing Layers to a system, an S3-4K Unit can be linked to an EX Unit with two
VPU cards. This adds two VPUs. Each S3–4K has a single Link card in slot 1, identified by a yellow stripe at
the top. Each EX has two Link sockets. Make sure to use the locking mechanism and then push each cable
until it locks in place.
Connect the Link cables provided with each unit between the Link connectors as follows:
• S3 VP ID 0, Link Card slot 1, Link 1 >> EX VP ID 1, Link 2 [1]
• S3 VP ID 0, Link Card slot 1, Link 2 >> EX VP ID 1, Link 1 [2]
See Image 6-56 for an example of the cabling between an S3-4K unit and an EX unit with two VPU cards.

Image 6-56: Cabling between an S3–4K unit and an EX unit with two VPN cards

When an EX unit has VPU cards rather than a combination of Input and Output cards, and it is
connected to an S3–4K processor, the EX unit an no longer be daisy-chained to another EX unit;
both Link connectors on the EX unit must be connected to the S3–4K Master unit.

How to Link an S3-4K Unit and an EX Unit with a Mixed I/O/VPU Configuration
To add up to four Single or two Mixing Layers to a system, an S3-4K Unit can be linked to an EX Unit with a
single VPU card. This adds a single VPU. The VPU can be in either slot 1 or slot 2 on the EX unit, and the
other slot may contain either an Event Master Input card or an Event Master Output card. Each S3–4K has a
single Link card in slot 1, identified by a yellow stripe at the top. Each EX has two Link sockets. Make sure to
use the locking mechanism and then push each cable until it locks in place.

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 173

 EM GUI orientation

Connect the Link cables provided with each unit between the Link connectors as follows:
• S3 VP ID 0, Link Card slot 1, Link 1 >> EX VP ID 1, Link 2 [1]
• S3 VP ID 0, Link Card slot 1, Link 2 >> EX VP ID 1, Link 1 [2]
See Image 6-57 for an example of the cabling between an S3-4K unit and an EX unit with two VPU cards.

Image 6-57: Cabling between an S3–4K unit and an EX unit with a single VPN card

When an EX unit has VPU cards rather than a combination of Input and Output cards, and it is
connected to an S3–4K processor, the EX unit an no longer be daisy-chained to another EX unit;
both Link connectors on the EX unit must be connected to the S3–4K Master unit.

Event Master Configuration for Linking an S3-4K Unit and an EX Unit with VPU Cards
1. Start the Event Master Toolset version 5.1 or higher.
2. Make sure that both the S3–4K and the EX units are discovered on the network and that they have different
Unit IDs.
3. Drop the S3–4K in the GUI.
If the S3–4K unit is cabled to the EX unit, the EX unit appears as a grayed-out box below the S3–4K unit in the
Diagram area. In the grayed-out EX box a blue button allows you to add the EX to the system as a slave.
4. Click the blue add button to add the EX unit.
5. (Optional) At this point it is suggested that you select and name appropriately each unit so that you can
identify it in your setup.

How to Link Two EX Units with VPU Cards

To create a system comprising two VPU cards, an Input card, and an Output card, two EX units can be lined
together. The system must have two VPU cards; both VPU cards can be on one EX unit, or each EX unit can
have a single VPU card and either an Input card or an Output card. Such a system provides four Inputs, four
Outputs, four Mixing Layers, and no MVR outputs. Each EX has two Link sockets. Make sure to use the
locking mechanism and then push each cable until it locks in place.
Connect the Link cables provided with each unit between the Link connectors as follows:
• EX VP ID 0, Link 1 >> EX VP ID 1, Link 2 [1]
• EX VP ID 0, Link 2 >> EX VP ID 1, Link 1 [2]
See Image 6-58 and Image 6-59 for examples of the cabling between two EX units with VPU cards.

174 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 EM GUI orientation

Image 6-58: Cabling between an EX unit with Input and Output cards and an EX unit
with a two VPU cards

Image 6-59: Cabling between an EX unit with an Input and a VPU card and an EX
unit with a VPU and an Output card

Event Master Configuration for Linking Two EX Units with VPU Cards
1. Start the Event Master Toolset version 5.1 or higher.
2. Make sure that both the EX units are discovered on the network and that they have different Unit IDs.
3. Drop the first EX in the GUI.
If the EX unit is cabled to a second EX unit, the second EX unit appears as a grayed-out box below the first EX
unit in the Diagram area. In the grayed-out EX box a blue button allows you to add the EX to the system as a
slave.
4. Click the blue add button to add the second EX unit.
5. (Optional) At this point it is suggested that you select and name appropriately each unit so that you can
identify it in your setup.

Other Linking Configurations: E2 Jr. and S3–4K Jr.

E2 Jr. and the S3– 4K Jr. units do not ship with Link cards, but they do not support linking as an upgrade
option. To support linking with an E2 Jr. or an S3–4K Jr. unit, you may purchase an Event Master Link card (P/
N R9004746) and install it in Slot #1 of the unit. You may also need to purchase additional Event Master Link
cables (P/N R9004750).
When linking two E2 Jr. units, the user must buy two Link cards per unit and link the two E2 Jr. units
as two E2 units would be linked. A single Link card per unit is required to link an E2 Jr. with an S3–
4K Jr. or to link an S3–4K Jr. to another S3–4K Jr.

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 175

 EM GUI orientation

To link an E2 Jr. unit to another E2 Jr. unit, connect Link cables between the Link connectors as follows:
• VP ID 0, Link Card slot 1, Link 1 >> VP ID 1, Link Card slot 1, Link 2 [1]
• VP ID 0, Link Card slot 1, Link 2 >> VP ID 1, Link Card slot 1, Link 1 [2]
• VP ID 0, Link Card slot 2, Link 1 >> VP ID 1, Link Card slot 2, Link 2 [3]
• VP ID 0, Link Card slot 2, Link 2 >> VP ID 1, Link Card slot 2, Link 1 [4]
See Image 6-60 for an example of the cabling between two E2 Jr. units.

Image 6-60: Cabling between two E2 Jr. units

To link an S3– 4K Jr. unit to another S3– 4K Jr. unit, connect Link cables between the Link connectors as
follows:
• VP ID 0, Link Card slot 1, Link 1 >> VP ID 1, Link Card slot 1, Link 2 [1]
• VP ID 0, Link Card slot 1, Link 2 >> VP ID 1, Link Card slot 1, Link 1 [2]
See Image 6-61 for an example of the cabling between two S3–4K Jr. units.

Image 6-61: Cabling between two S3–4K Jr. units

To link an E2 Jr. unit to an S3–4K Jr. unit, connect Link cables between the Link connectors as follows:
• VP ID 0, Link Card slot 1, Link 1 >> VP ID 1, Link Card slot 1, Link 2 [1]
• VP ID 0, Link Card slot 1, Link 2 >> VP ID 1, Link Card slot 1, Link 1 [2]
See Image 6-62 for an example of the cabling between an E2 Jr. unit and an S3–4K unit.

176 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 EM GUI orientation

Image 6-62: Cabling between an E2 Jr. unit and an S3–4K Jr. unit

Event Master Configuration

1. Start the Event Master Toolset version 4.1 or higher.
2. Make sure that both units are discovered on the network and that they have different Unit IDs.
3. Drop the first in the GUI.
4. Drop the second unit in the GUI.
You will be presented the option to add as a new system, add as a master, or add as a slave. An S3–4K can
be added as a Master or Slave to an E2.
5. Add the second unit as a slave.
6. (Optional) At this point it is suggested that you select and name appropriately each unit so that you can
identify it in your setup.

Connection Control
From the configuration page switch from the detail view to the System view and ensure that the status of all
connections is good – Green. If any connections are shown red please check that the cables were connected
as described in step b and they were fully seated.

Programming
Referring to section “System Setup”, page 251, you may now proceed with the configuration and programming
of the E2 linked system having full access to all resources from both E2s; a total of 56 inputs, 16 screen
outputs, 8 Aux outputs, 4 multiviewer outputs and up to 32 mixer layers.

Auto Creation
If you choose to auto create your inputs, outputs and MVR outputs they will be created from Unit ID 0 first and
then followed by the ones from Unit ID 1.

Configuration Order
You may proceed with defining your destinations, auxes and assign your layers. It is recommended that you
setup all screen destinations and make layer assignment before you setup the Multiviewer.

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 177

 EM GUI orientation

The Multiviewer and Web App sections of the Event Master Toolset have an additional selection.
You may select whether you are viewing the Master or Slave E2 Multiviewer windows or the Master
or Slave E2 Web App. The selection names correspond to the way you named the units in steps
above.

Backup and Restore

When backing up and restoring your system you only need to backup and restore from the Master Unit.

Genlock
When genlocking your system to an external sync you only need to bring the signal into the Master unit and
select lock to External from the Event Master Toolset.

A note about Multiviewer and Linked Systems

In an E2 linked setup as you create destinations and assign layers the Event Master Toolset determines the
best resource allocation for your configuration.
In order to make optimal use of expansion links, screens in linked E2 systems must be viewed on the
Multiviewer in the E2 where the Event Master Toolset has allocated it.
Optimal allocation may cause a screen allocation to move from one E2 to another as screen resources are
changed.
This may result in a screen already placed in a Multiviewer to not be operative. The Event Master Toolset will
change the UMD text to “Screen not viewable on this MVR”.
All you need to do is delete the screen from the Multiviewer displaying this message and place it on the other
Multiviewer.

A note about Backgrounds

Background sources bigger than one unit should still come in to one of the units, not split between unit as in
earlier systems.

More information
For more information on how to prevent cable and connector damage on the Link Cards for E2 and S3–4K,
see “InfoT-1294: Cable and Connector Damage on the Link Cards for E2 Series and S3– 4K Series
Presentation Switchers” on the Technical Downloads tab on the E2 Full-sized Event Master processor web
page (URL:
https://www. barco. com/en/Products/Image-processing/Presentation-switchers/Full-sized-Event-Master-
processor.aspx?#!downloads).
For more information on Event Master Link-Cable solutions, see “InfoT-1301: Event Master Link-Cable
Solutions for E2, S3– 4K, and EX” on the Technical Downloads tab on the E2 Full-sized Event Master
processor web page (URL:
https://www. barco. com/en/Products/Image-processing/Presentation-switchers/Full-sized-Event-Master-
processor.aspx?#!downloads).

Always check for updated information that may have come out since this manual was published and
for the latest version of all documents on www.barco.com.

6.20 Programming Menu

General
The programming page is where the event is set up and everything comes together. Users can define sources
from inputs, assign layers and backgrounds into screens and create User keys and presets and more. Once
programmed and defined this is where the show is played back as well.

178 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 EM GUI orientation

Description

Image 6-63: Programming Menu Overview

1 Resources area This area contains the available resources for

programming and playback, as inputs and
sources. Also in this area the still store (logo)
images are shown.
2 Workspace / Programming Diagram area For each destination, super destination, or
destination group, the Program and Preview
screens can be viewed individually by selecting
the corresponding tab. All Program and
Previews screens can be viewed simultaneously
by selecting the “View All” button.
The space between Program and Preview has
Layouts, a function where a certain group of
destinations can be laid out in the workspace
3 Workspace / System wide function Layer Alignment adjustments and controls to
manage the Preview/Program screens.
4 Adjustment area The menus in this area provide control of
parameters for selected layer and source. These
can be modified and managed. This is where
creation of User Keys and presets is done

The following sections describe each part of the Programming page in detail:
• “Programming Menu > Resources area”, page 179
• “Programming Menu > Diagram area”, page 192
• “Programming Menu > Layer Modifier area”, page 195
• “Programming Menu > Adjustment area”, page 198

6.21 Programming Menu > Resources area

General
This part of the Programming page allows users to manage the available input resources. Sources are
created and defined from the available Inputs that were defined on the System Configuration page.
From Release 1.5 there is Still Stores for Sources, Still Stores for Backgrounds and Destinations for re-entry.

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 179

 EM GUI orientation

About Sources and Inputs

Source are defined from input signals. Multiple sources can be defined from the same input. After a source is
defined, then several attributes can be modified. These attributes are: color adjustments, crop, sharpness and
mask. By default, a source is automatically created for each Input. Up to 256 sources can be created form the
same input. As with inputs, sources can be defined from multiple connectors, ex: 4K or DL DVI and as a single
link or dual link.

The multiviewer displays input signals not sources.

Few words about Inputs, Sources and Layers

Input
• Definition: Any video signal connected to the Event Master series processor.
• Features:
- An input signal can be 2K (Single Link), Dual-Link or 4K (Ultra-HD) format.
- Depending on the resolution and type of the input signal, multiple connectors may be required to
connect an input signal to the Event Master series processor. The number of connectors required is
listed in the table below.
2K Dual Link 4K (Ultra HD)
Resolutions up to Resolutions up to Resolutions up to
2048x1200@60 3840x1200@60 4096x2160@60
SDI 1 2 4
DVI 1 1 2
HDMI 1.4a 1 1 2
DisplayPort 1.1a 1 1 2

• Adjustments:
- Name, Colorspace, Connector capacity, Auto Acquire, EDID, Contrast, Brightness, Gamma.
- Adjustments to an input signal have an effect on all sources that are derived from the input signal
Source
• Definition: A video signal created when an input is manipulated to create a desired look.
• Features:
- When an input is created, a source is automatically created with the same attributes as the input.
- Multiple sources can be generated from the same input signal.
- Any source can be dropped into any layer and any destination.
- The same source can be used in multiple layers and multiple destinations.
- It should be noted that if a source is used in multiple layers and a source is modified in one of the
layers, it will not be automatically updated in the other layers. To update the source in the other layers, it
needs to be deleted from these layers and re-inserted from the sources list.
• Adjustments:
- Name, Bind to User Key, Layer Aspect Ratio, Size, Position, Contrast, Brightness and Hue.
Layer
• Definition: A layer is one image stacked on top of another or a background.
• Features:
- Each mixer layer has two layers, Preview and Program. For complete flexibility, each layer can be
assigned to either PIP or Key functionality.

180 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 EM GUI orientation

Image 6-64

- The mixing Background layer (BG) has the lowest priority. Any input or inputs can be used as a
background. This layer visually appears behind all other PIPs and keys. The system can transition
between any defined background sources.
- On any mixing layer, a PIP layer appears over backgrounds and under other layers of higher priority.
- PIP effects include mixes, smooth moves, resizing, adjustable aspect ratio, borders, mask and drop
shadows.
- On any mixer, a Key layer also appears over backgrounds and under other layers of higher priority. Key
effects include luminance keys, split keys (cut and fill), and chroma keys.
The Cut + Fill Key can use PNGs with transparency. The system detects the transparency as the "Cut"
signal and the non-transparent portion of the PNG as the "Fill" input. Any Still that has transparency is
marked with a "T" indicator beside the name of the Still.
• Adjustments:
- Border, Shadow, Layer Size & Position, Source Size & Position and Mask.
• Layer Effects
- Strobe, Flip, Freeze, Layer Color Effects, Monochrome and Invert.

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 181

 EM GUI orientation

Input, Sources and layer example

Image 6-65

Source Area description

In this menu, Sources defined in the Configuration menu are assigned to destinations via drag and drop
procedure. Each input has minimum one Source file, several can be created via copy original (Plus Icon) or
copy file (Double Page Icon).
There are 2 tabs in this section:
• Source: Lists Inputs and Sources available in the system. Sources are listed after the input and can be
view by clicking on the arrow next to the Input name. Stills and Destinations can also be used as sources.
• Background: Lists backgrounds and background still stores available for destinations.
For each of these lists two display modes are available. Toggle the view by clicking on appropriate icon:
List View

Thumbnail View

182 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 EM GUI orientation

Inputs (List view)

Inputs (List view)
• Resolution: This is the resolution of the Input
signal.
• The LED color indicates the status of the input:
- Red: Sync is missing or invalid format.
- Green: Sync is valid.
• Refreshes the Input thumbnail (in Thumbnail
View) from the Input source.
• Freezes the Input.
• Allows a snapshot to be taken and stored as a
Still.
• Adds Sources based on the inputs. A total of 256
are allowed per input.
• Copies the Source into a new Source and adds
it in the list.

Inputs (Thumbnail view)

Thumbnails are added manually and in the future added from the Event Master series processor to the GUI.
From Release 1.5 this works for Stillstores.

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 183

 EM GUI orientation

Inputs (Thumbnail view)

• Behavior is similar to the List View mode (see
above).

By clicking in thumbnail area images can be imported using the file picker menu. The picker can select
pictures with the BMP, JPG or PNG format.

184 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 EM GUI orientation

Stills (List view)

Stills (List view)
• Stills can be added from external source of the
GUI computer in the PNG format.
A PNG with a transparency is marked in the Stills
list with a (T).
• Name that can be changed by double click action
and then the resolution of the Stillstore.
• [Disk Icon] indicate the memory required for the
Stillstore. A total of 100 HD Stillstores are possible.
Higher resolution images use more memory per
image, resulting in fewer still images being
available on the system.

Stills (Thumbnail view)

The system automatically adds thumbnails once the live capture or file import has been processed.
Stills (Thumbnail view)
• Behavior is similar to the List View mode (see
above).

By clicking in thumbnail area images can be imported using the file picker menu. The picker can select
pictures with the BMP, JPG or PNG format.

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 185

 EM GUI orientation

Destination
Destination (List view)

Destination (Thumbnail view)

The Destinations can be used as a source in Layers provided they have the capacity to fit. Up to 2K
resolutions on SL, up to 4096 x 1200 / 2560 x 1600 for DL and 4K / 8192 x 1200 for 4K Scaler Mode.

How to delete sources

The delete process is similar for all lists with more than one entry. To delete Sources the user need:
1. Click on the Delete Source(s) button.

186 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 EM GUI orientation

The Delete Source (s) button turns in red and the delete icon (“x”) appears next to the copy icon on each
element of the source list.

Image 6-66: Delete Selected Input sources

2. Select the sources that you desire to delete and click the Delete Source(s) button.
The selected sources are removed.

How to hide Inputs

As the inputs are usually named after its physical names while the sources are named after the Show Usage
we allow to hide the inputs from the list:
1. Check the Hide Inputs box.
Sources are displayed without their associated Inputs.

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 187

 EM GUI orientation

Image 6-67: Hide Input(s) checkbox

Background
In this menu, Backgrounds defined in the Configuration menu are assigned to destinations via drag and drop
procedure.
Backgrounds and Destinations need to have the same resolution without the Destinations eventual blend
overlap. For example, if a background is defined as an input with 3840 x 1080, then the destination must also
have the total resolution of 3840 x 1080.

188 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 EM GUI orientation

Background (List view)

• Name: This is the Name of the Input as created in
the Configuration of the system.
• Resolution: This is the resolution of the Input
signal.
• The LED color indicates the status of the input:
- Red: Sync is missing or invalid format.
- Green: Sync is valid.
• [Snowflake Icon] Will freeze the input.
• [Camera Icon] Allows for a snapshot to be taken
and store it as Still.

Thumbnails are added manually and in the future added from the Event Master series processor to the GUI.
From Release 1.5 this works for Stillstores.
Background (Thumbnail view)
• Behavior is similar to the List View mode (see
above).

By clicking in thumbnail area images can be imported using the file picker menu. The picker can select
pictures with the BMP, JPG or PNG format.

Background Stills
In this menu, Background Stills captured in the Background Source menu are assigned to destinations via
drag and drop procedure.

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 189

 EM GUI orientation

Background Stills and Destinations need to have the same resolution including the Destinations eventual
blend overlap. For example, if a background Stillstore is captured as 3500 x 1080, then the destination must
also have the blend resolution of 3500 x 1080.
Background Stills (List view)
• Name: This is the Name of the Stillstore as created
in Background menu. Name can be changed by
double click action.
• Resolution: This is the resolution of the Stillstore.
• [Disk Icon] Indicates the memory required for the
Stillstore. A total of 100 HD Stillstores are possible.
For higher resolutions the corresponding increase
of memory is used.

Thumbnails are added manually and in the future added from the Event Master series processor to the GUI.
From Release 1.5 this works for Stillstores.
Background Stills (Thumbnail view)
• Behavior is similar to the List View mode (see
above).

By clicking in thumbnail area images can be imported using the file picker menu. The picker can select
pictures with the BMP, JPG or PNG format.

190 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 EM GUI orientation

Input > Backgrounds

The Input tab has a Backgrounds subtab. This Input > Backgrounds subtab is similar to the Background >
Background subtab, and it has both a List view and a Thumbnail view.
Input > Backgrounds (List view)
• Name: This is the Name of the Input as created in
the configuration of the system.
• Resolution: This is the resolution of the Input
signal.
• The LED color indicates the status of the input:
- Red: Sync is missing or invalid format.
- Green: Sync is valid.
• [Snowflake Icon] Freezes the input.
• [Camera icon] Allows for a snapshot to be taken
and stored as a Still.

Input > Backgrounds (Thumbnail view)

• Behavior is similar to the List view mode (see
above).

Backgrounds as Inputs
The Input > Backgrounds subtab allows the Event Master series processor to use Backgrounds as Inputs.
This subtab can be used on any Event Master processor, but it is especially useful on a limited-resource

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 191

 EM GUI orientation

processor, such as an S3– 4K Jr. processor. An Input defined as a Background can now be used as a
Background, or as a source on an AUX Destination or Screen Destination layer.
To use a Background as an Input, follow this procedure.
1. Go to the Programming menu.
2. Go to the Input tab of the Resources area, and then go to the Backgrounds subtab of the Input tab.
3. Drag a Background from the list on the Backgrounds subtab and drop it on any Screen or AUX Destination
in the Programming Diagram area that has at least one source layer assigned to it.
If no source layer is assigned to the Destination, you will have to go to the Background tab and drag and
drop the Background from the Background subtab.

Using a Background as an Input incurs an extra frame of delay. Use normal Inputs if this delay is
unacceptable.

Sources dropped into a Layer must be dropped from the Input tab, while sources dropped into a
Background must be dropped from the Background tab.

6.22 Programming Menu > Diagram area

General
The middle of the Programming Page is the Programming diagram area where the Program, Preview and
AUX screens are composed.

Description
Each Program/Preview screen can be viewed individually or all of the screens can be shown simultaneously
by selecting the corresponding tab on the top of the Program window.
On the top left corner has a label that shows the name of the destination.

Image 6-68

1 Lock icon indicates whether the PGM destination is locked. When locked, the Program screen can
only change after a Mix or Cut transition. When the program screen is unlocked, the user can click
on a layer that is on PGM and move or resize it. The user can also assign a different Source into that
layer or adjust the background.
2 Preview screen where the program is composed before is transitioned to program.

192 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 EM GUI orientation

3 Users can zoom in / out of the diagram area, in from 25% to 150%, in 25% increments.
4 BG Input tab. This is the menu where users drop the assigned Background inputs preview screens.
5 Selected sources are dropped in the layers defined in the preview screen. A layer can be placed
outside or partially in the preview area.
6 The Destination tab can be clicked to arm the Destination and become part of the next transition.
7 A small arrow on the left hand side of Destination name expands or collapses the Destination view.
8 Users can manually control the transition by clicking on the bar or by sliding the mouse.
9 Select all Destinations allow to quickly select or unselect all Destinations for Transition.
10 Layouts allow for custom layouts of destinations in the programming page.

Layer and Source into the previous screen

Users can drag layers to the preview screen as long as the layer is not on program. In the example below,
since no source has been assigned to the layer, the layer will be black and default to a square shape.

Image 6-69

Next a source from the Input panel on the left hand side can be dragged into the layer.

Image 6-70

Alternatively, an Input or a source can be dragged into the Preview screen directly as long as there are
available layers.

Image 6-71

If the available layer is already in Preview, then the source will immediately be assigned to that layer. The layer
will be resized automatically to match the source aspect ratio.
If a layer is available but it hasn’t been placed into the preview screen, then the software will automatically
place the layer in the position where the Source was dropped and allocate the lowest unassigned layer to the
source. The source and layer must also comply with the sizing rule that is explained next.
Rules for assigning Sources into layers

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 193

 EM GUI orientation

The size of the layer scaler mode has to be greater or equal to the size of the source. For example, if the
source is a 2K input, the layer scaler mode needs to be 2K or more. If the source is a 4K and the layer is only a
2K layer, then the source can’t be placed into the Layer. If the Source is a 2K input and the layer is a 4K layer,
the source can be placed into the Layer.
Scaler mode for layers are set in the Configuration Page, towards the bottom.

Z-Order
The layer priority (z-order) is based by the order they are added in destination menu. The layers that are
added first have the lowest priority. For example; layer1 is lower priority than layer2. Layer2 is lower priority
than layer3.

Freeze
A layer can be individually frozen by selection and freeze button in the bottom of the workspace menu.
Note: When a layer is frozen, the outline and the text
become blue and an icon of a snow flake appears in
the bottom right hand corner. Also note that a frozen
source will not show the same indication.

Layer adjustments in the Preview Screen

Users can also left click on a layer to move it around inside the Preview screen. A layer can also be moved
with the keyboard’s arrow keys.
Size adjustments can be performed by selecting and right clicking the vertical, horizontal or any corner of the
layer. Any size adjustment maintains the aspect ratio.
These operations can also be performed on multiple layers. Activate Multiple Select to “Multiple Select On”
below the workspace to the right. Now each layer can be selected or unselected with a Left click or touch
input.
Selected layers are highlighted with a blue border.

AUX Destination Canvas

Assigning inputs/sources to AUX destination works the same way as in the screen destinations within the
constraints of the AUX destinations. Only one input can be assigned to each destination and it is always at full
screen. Assigning a new input to the destination, overrides the previous input.
Scaler mode for Auxes are set in the Configuration Page, towards the bottom

Image 6-72

194 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 EM GUI orientation

6.23 Programming Menu > Layer Modifier area

General
This area is specifically for layer adjustments.

Description
The area is broken up into several sub areas. The left side is for alignment, priority, size and position of the
layer. Middle is for layer transition. The right is for misc. operations.

Image 6-73

Buttons in this area operate on selected layers in the preview destinations. If no layers are selected, all
buttons in this panel is disabled, except for the “Select All” button. “Select All” selects all the layers in preview
for the Destinations in the current view, regardless whether the Destination is armed or not. The area is
divided into several sections. Detail description of each section is provided below.

Alignment

Image 6-74

1 Align Left to align the left edges of all selected PIPs.

2 Align Top to align the top edges of all selected PIPs.

3 Align Right to align the right edges of all selected PIPs.

4 Align Bottom to align the bottom edges of all selected PIPs.

5 Align Centers Horizontally to align the horizontal axes of all selected PIPs.
6 Align Centers Vertically to align the vertical axes of all selected PIPs.

7 Space horizontally & uniformly -reference is the horizontal size of the screen.
8 Space vertically & uniformly - reference is the vertical size of the screen.

9 Align all selected PIPs along the destination’s left edge.

10 Align all selected PIPs along the destination’s top edge.

11 Center Horizontally to center all selected PIPs horizontally, along the destination’s vertical axis. PIPs do not chang
position.
12 Center Vertically to center all selected PIPs vertically, along the destination’s horizontal axis. PIPs do not change h
position.
13 Center to center all selected PIPs vertically and horizontally, along the destination’s horizontal and vertical axes.

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 195

 EM GUI orientation

14 Align all selected PIPs along the destination’s bottom edge.

15 Align all selected PIPs along the destination’s right edge.

Priority

Image 6-75

1 Moves the selected layer up in priority and swaps with the layer previously above.
2 Moves the selected layer to the top of the priority and swaps it with the layer previously on top.

3 Moves down in priority and swaps the z-order of the selected layer with the layer previously below.
4 Moves the selected layer to the bottom of the priority and swaps it with the layer previously at the bottom.

Example:

Image 6-76

Only the visual priority (on Preview) of the two layers changes. The layers remain at their current
locations — only the priority changes.

Size and Position

Image 6-77

196 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 EM GUI orientation

1 Full Screen Vertical takes the selected PIP(s) to full screen, using the source’s height as the guide. If borders are
be taken into account so that they are visible.
2 Full Screen Horizontal takes the selected PIP(s) to full screen, using the source’s width as the guide. If borders a
will be taken into account.
3 Fill H/V will stretch the selected layer over the whole destination size not respecting the aspect of the source.

Resize example:

Image 6-78

Match example:

Image 6-79

Transition

Image 6-80

Trans
Preview transitions to Program according at the rate indicated in the rate box following the s-curve pattern.
The layer on Program does NOT fade in preview at the same time. The layer on Program appears in Preview
when the transition is completed.
Cut
Instantly transitions the Preview to Program
Move
Enables moves for selected that have one or more keyframes. Move rate is determined in the layer
adjustment panel.
S-curve
Four transition types are available: Linear, S-Curve, Logarithmic and Exponential

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 197

 EM GUI orientation

Image 6-81

Miscellaneous operations

Image 6-82

Freeze
Freezes the image that is displayed in the layer. The layer can still be positioned and sized within the
destination. The text of a frozen layer turns blue and a “freeze” icon (snowflake) appears on the bottom right
corner.
Reset
Positions the layer in the center of the destination. Vertical size is set to 500 pixels and horizontal size is set to
maintain the layer’s aspect ratio.
Clear
Removes the selected layer from preview. If the selected layer is on program, this button is disabled unless
the Program is unlocked.
Toggle
Enables the sources to toggle back and forth with each transition.
• ‘Toggle on:’ After a transition is performed, a different source can be selected for preview. Once the first
source transitions off Program, it “flip-flops” to Preview. Subsequent transitions alternate between sources.
Another new source can also be selected in Preview, and as long as Toggle is on, the last two selected
sources will alternate.
• ‘Toggle off: ’The source selected in Preview stays in Preview, once the transition is complete. Here,
sources must be changed manually. If the PIP in Preview has a different source than the PIP in Program,
the moment Toggle is turned off, the PIP in Preview automatically changes its source to match Program.
Match PGM
Match PGM button forces the selected layer on Preview to be in the same location as the layer in Program.
Select All / Unselect All
• ‘Select All:’Selects all Layers in Preview. It is equivalent to left clicking on all unselected layers on Preview
one at a time while Multiple Select is On.
• ‘Unselect All: ’Unselects all Layers in Preview. It is equivalent left clicking on all selected layers on Preview
one at a time while Multiple Select is On.
Selection of anything allows the selected objects on Destinations to be armed.

6.24 Programming Menu > Adjustment area

General
Situated on the right hand side of the screen is the Adjustment area. In this area users can configure Layers
and Sources and create User keys and Presets.

198 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 EM GUI orientation

Description
There are several tabs in this area:
• Layers : Provides a list of the destinations. Under each destination a list of assigned layers and the
background is provided.
• User Keys : Provides a list of user keys. User keys contains all (or a portion) of the current layer’s
attributes (such as border color, size, effects, etc.). User Keys are not applicable for AUX Destination.
• Presets : List of Presets. Presets contains a group of Destination worth of information.
Note: Not all settings composing a layer is a layer setting, but a Source File setting. Be aware that for
desired result a USER KEY might have to be bound to a preset.
• Adjustment : Based on what is selected in the Preview or Program canvas area, this is the panel where
we are adjusting what is selected. For example if we select Layer1, we will be adjusting Layer1 settings.
• Source Adjustment: This panel is shown on the Adjust panel when a layer with a valid Source is selected.
At the bottom of the area, there is a set of buttons allowing execute transition actions on selected Destinations.
The following sections describe each panel of this area in detail:
• “Programming Menu > Adjustment area > Layer configuration”, page 199
• “Programming Menu > Adjustment area > Background configuration”, page 210
• “Programming Menu > Adjustment area > User Keys configuration”, page 212
• “Programming Menu > Adjustment area > Presets configuration”, page 215
• “Programming Menu > Adjustment area > Source adjustment”, page 217
• “Programming Menu > Adjustment area > Global Transition Rate/Trans/Cut”, page 219

6.25 Programming Menu > Adjustment area >

Layer configuration
General
In the Layer menu, users can manage the layer in the selected destination and update its attributes.

Layer configuration menu description

Layer configuration menu is accessed by clicking on the Layer tab.
This menu provide:
• A list of the available destinations and the layers
associated with that destination.
• Swap Z order button that allows for layers that are
in the same Destination and of the same type to be
swapped.

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 199

 EM GUI orientation

List of destination:
• ‘Destinations:’ Provides list of all destinations that are available in the Programming page. Each destination
can be expanded to reveal the Background and the layers assigned to them. The “eye” icon replaces or
removes the layers from the Preview destination. This button works in a toggle mode.
• ‘BG and ScreenDest: ’Backgrounds and Destinations layers can be further expanded to reveal the A and B
sources that are used in the transitions.
• ‘LEDs:’ The LEDs provide an indication of the “A” and “B” backgrounds or sources.
Note that there is no A or B side of the scaler, only A and B usage, all layers are independent of each other
in respect to Z-order.

Image 6-83

Swap Z order rules

There are several rules that apply when changing Z order:
1. Can only swap Z order on layers in the same Destination.
2. Can only swap Z order on layers that are of the same type (2K / DL / 4K).

How to swap Z order

1. Click on Swap Z order button to enter in the Swap Z order mode.
2. Click on 1 layer at a time and move it to a different location.

How to access the layer adjustments

Adjustments to layers are performed in the “Adjust” panel:
1. Select the layer from the list
or
Select the layer from the preview canvas.
The layer is selected.

Image 6-84

When the layer is selected and is visible on the canvas, it will have a blue highlight around the layer.
2. Click on the Adjust tab that is on the top of the adjustment area.
The layer adjustment panel is displayed.

It is possible to select multiple layers by clicking on the each targeted layer once Multiple Select is
set to ON.

Layer adjustment panel description

The Layer adjustment panel allows access to general layer adjustments and takes effect only if a layer is
selected.
Layer adjustments are performed on individual layers. When multiple layers are selected, the
adjustments are disabled.

200 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 EM GUI orientation

The upper part of the panel is always visible:

This part includes:
• Layer type: Layer can be a PIP or a Key. The
available adjustments depend on the selected
mode.
• Keyframes: There are 2 KeyFrames per layer.

The lower part of the panel provides menus for layer sizing and color adjustments
• Main adjustment : Border and Shadows
• Layer Window adjustment: Size, Position, Mask
• Layer Color Effects adjustment: Brightness,
Contrast, Gamma, Hue, Saturation, Monochrome,
Invert

PIP / KEY selection

The first selection is the choice for the layer type: PIP or a Key. Depending on the selection, the rest of the
menu will adapt.

Keyframes
In a PIP “move,” Keyframe is a point where an action or a change occurs. For example, a PIP movement is
described by two keyframes. The first keyframe is the state of the PIP at the initial point of the movement. The
second keyframe is the point where the PIP moves to. The size and color attributes can also change during
the move.
By default, the initial position and state of the layer is keyframe 1. The user can change the size, and change
the border and shadow parameters before defining Keyframe2. After changes are done to Keyframe1, the
second keyframe can be added by pressing the “Add KF” button. A new position and size can be defined and
adjustments to the border and shadow parameters to define the second Keyframe.

Image 6-85

Once the two keyframes are defined, the PIP can move between the two positions by pressing the green
arrow buttons. The rate for the movement is adjusted by changing the number in the corresponding box.
Any of the two keyframes can be deleted when the keyframe is highlighted and by pressing the “Delete KF”
button.
The red LED in the keyframe button indicates the current position of the PIP.

Layer adjustment panel > Main adjustment

The Main adjustment panel is variable according the Layer type.
Layer type = PIP (Border Tab):
This menu allows users to adjust the PIP borders.

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 201

 EM GUI orientation

• Borders are enabled by selecting the type of to

apply. Six types are available:
- Hard
- Soft
- Halo
- Halo-in
- Halo-out
• Border width and color are selected by adjusting
the corresponding sliders or entering a figure in
the adjacent edit boxes. The border width can be
entered either in Percentage of the vertical size or
in pixels.
• The selected color is shown in the Current Color
bar. The color can also be stored by clicking in one
of the square boxes at the bottom of the menu
next to the Learn button. These boxes are quick
shortcuts to select that color for the Border.
• Another way to specify a color is to click on the
Color wheel. The slider values will change
accordingly as the mouse moves around the color
wheel.
• Learn: The “Learn” button in the bottom is a way
to store custom colors to be used for later. The
way to use this area is to:
1. Pick a color to save, using color wheel or the
R/G/B adjustments.
2. Click Learn button.
3. Click any one of the buttons on the right.
4. The color that was picked is now stored in this
button.
Layer type = PIP (Shadow Tab):
The Shadow Menu enables the user to place a shadow behind a PIP.
The following functions are provided:
• Enables or disables the PIP’s shadow.
• H Size (%): Adjusts the shadow’s horizontal size
as a percentage of the PIP’s size.
• V Size (%): Adjusts the shadow’s vertical size as a
percentage of the PIP’s size.
• H Pos(pixel): Adjusts the shadow’s horizontal
position in pixels.
• V Pos(pixel): Adjusts the shadow’s vertical
position in pixels.
• Opacity: Adjusts transparency, from 0
(transparent) to 1024 (opaque).
• Edge Width: Adjusts the width of shadow creating
a halo type of an effect.
• Color Selection: Adjusts the shadow’s color with
the help of the slider, or with the color wheel.

202 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 EM GUI orientation

Layer type = Key; Mode = Luma

A Luma (Luminance) Key is one in which the hole-
cutting information is derived from the luminance
(brightness) level of the key source.
Source on the Key Bus can be selected as the “cut.”
You can select Self or Matte, Preset Bus or Split for
the “fill” source.
Clip: Adjust the threshold of the video that “cuts” into
the background. A hole is cut into the background
anywhere that foreground luminance is greater than
the clip level.
• Range: 0.00 to 1.00, in .01 increments
• Default: 50.00
Gain: Adjust the sensitivity of the key, enabling you to
change the sharpness of the keyed image. Gain only
affects the edge of the key hole, as set by the clip.
• Range: 0.00 to 1.00, in .01 increments
• Default: 1.0
Opacity: Adjusts the opacity of the keyed image, from
fully opaque to fully transparent.
• Range: 0.00 to 100.00, in .01 increments
• Default: 100.00
Reset: Press to return all clip, gain and opacity
settings to their default values.

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 203

 EM GUI orientation

Layer type = Key; Mode = Chroma

A Chroma (Chrominance) Key is one in which the
hole-cutting information is derived from a color in the
key source.
After selecting a Hue color to key out, it may be
necessary to make additional adjustments to improve
the look of the overall compositing effect.
Chroma Clip: This is an angle, centered around the
Hue color. Any color inside this angle is fully keyed
out.
• Range: 0 to 100
• Default: 10
Ramp: This is an angle, also centered around the
Hue color. It must be equal to or larger than the
Chroma Clip angle. Inside the Chroma Ramp angle,
the colors keyed out ramp linearly the closer the
foreground color approaches the Chroma Clip angle.
Outside the Chroma Ramp angle, the foreground
colors are not suppressed.
• Range:0 to 100
• Default: 90
Opacity: This allows the key source to become
increasingly transparent with respect to the
background source.
• Range: 0 to 100
• Default: 100
Hue: This field selects the color to be removed or
keyed out of the input. While this can be manually
adjusted, the "PICK HUE" feature also changes this
number.
• Range: 0 to 100
• Default: 0
Spill: Spill removes unwanted “key” color, which is
generally a result of reflection from the (green or blue
screen) background, on the foreground object.
• Range: 0 to 100
• Default: 0
Shadow: This allows shadows to be preserved or
removed in the foreground image (opposite of
Highlight).
• Range: 0 to 100
• Default: 0
Highlight: This allows highlights to be preserved or
removed in the foreground image (opposite of
Shadow).
• Range: 0 to 100
• Default: 0
Saturation Clip: This defines the threshold along the
Saturation axis where keying begins.
Below the clip threshold, the colors are not keyed out.
Above the clip threshold, the colors follow the results
of Chroma Clip and Gain, but they depend on the
Saturation Gain setting as this creates a linear key
color strength ramp in the key area.

204 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 EM GUI orientation

• Range: 0 to 100
• Default: 5
Saturation Gain: This defines the transition along the
saturation axis between keying off and keying on.
• Range: 0 to 100
• Default: 5
Reset:Press to return all clip, gain and opacity
settings to their default values.

Pick Hue
The Pick Hue button allows the user to pick and apply a selected hue from any single Layer.
1. Click on the Pick Hue button.
Clicking on the Pick Hue button for a Layer places a crosshair on the Layer in Preview in the Programming
Diagram area.

Image 6-86: The Pick Hue button

2. Move the crosshair to the desired hue.

The user can move the crosshair using either the cursor or the X and Y edit boxes.

Image 6-87: Crosshairs

3. Complete the operation by clicking on the Apply Hue X/Y button, or cancel the operation by clicking on the
Cancel Pick Hue button.

Image 6-88: Apply Hue or Cancel

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 205

 EM GUI orientation

Layer adjustment panel > Layer Window adjustment

The following PIP Adjustment Menu functions are
provided: (All figures are in pixels)
• H Size — adjusts the PIP’s horizontal size.
• V Size — adjusts the PIP’s vertical size.
• H Position — indicates the PIP’s position, relative
to the horizontal center of the screen (00), as
measured from the exact center of the PIP. Thus,
the value -34 is 34 pixels to the left of center.
• V Position — indicates the PIP’s position, relative
to the vertical center of the screen (00), as
measured from the exact center of the PIP. Thus,
the value 70 is 70 pixels above center.
• Mask: The Mask Panel enables you to mask
(crop) the top, bottom, left, and right edges of the
PIP or key.
• Reset All : Press to return all numbers to their
default values.

206 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 EM GUI orientation

Layer adjustment panel > Layer Effects adjustment

• RGB Contrast and Brightness settings are
adjustable within a range of 0% to 200%. The
default setting for all of these properties is 100%.
• Gamma is adjustable within a range of 0.3 to 3.28.
The default setting is 1.0.
• Hue is adjustable within a range of -180 to +180
degrees. The default setting is 0 degrees.
• Gamma is adjustable within a range of 0.3 to 3.28.
The default setting is 1.0.
• Saturation is adjustable within a range of 0% to
200%. The default setting is 0%.
• Monochrome: Toggle this button to turn the source
video’s chroma component on and off. When off,
the image is completely monochrome;
• Invert: Toggle this button to turn the color “invert”
function on and off. When on, all image colors are
inverted.
• Reset All: Returns all values to their default
settings.
• Strobe: Toggles the strobe function on and off.
When On, adjust the strobe Rate interval (in
frames) to set the duration that the source is
frozen until the next grab.
• Flip: Flips the image within the PIP:
- Off: The image is displayed in its original
orientation.
- H: to flip the image horizontally, along the Y
axis.
- V: Flips the image vertically, along the X axis.
- H/V: Flip the image both horizontally and
vertically, along the X and Y axes.
• Freeze: Enables or disables the freeze action.
Note that almost all color correction effects (except
“invert”) work on a keyframe by keyframe basis. This
enables you to morph effects from keyframe to
Keyframe.

6.26 Programming Menu > Adjustment area > Dest

Group configuration
General
In the Layer menu, users can manage the destination groups and update their attributes.

Dest Group configuration menu description

The destination group configuration menu is accessed by clicking on the Dest Group tab.

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 207

 EM GUI orientation

This menu provides:

• A numbered list of the available Destination
Groups.
• A Save Group button to save new Destination
Groups.
When a Super Destination is saved as a part of a
Destination Group, all Screen Destinations that are
assigned to that Super Destination become part of
the Destination Group.
• An Overwrite Group button to overwrite the data
in the selected Group.
• A Delete Group(s) button to delete one or more
Groups.
• A Delete Destination(s) button to delete individual
Destinations.
• An Enable Reorder button to enable the
reordering of Destination Groups in the list.
• A Lock All button to lock all the Destination
Groups in the list.
• An Unlock All button to unlock all the Destination
Groups in the list.
• Creation Options to use while creating
Destination Groups.
- Off: No creation options are chosen. (This is
the default option.)
- AutoLock: All Destination Groups created with
the AutoLock option On are created in the
locked state.
- Rename: All Destination Groups created with
the Rename option On are created with the
group name highlighted, so that the Group may
be immediately renamed.
- Rename-Lock: This is a combination of the
Rename and AutoLock options. All Destination
Groups created with the Rename-Lock option
On are created with the group name
highlighted, so that the Group may be
immediately renamed, and they are created in
the locked state.
• An Apply Selected button to recall the selected
group.

Save Group
1. Go to the Programming Diagram area and select the Destinations that you want to put in a Destination Group.
2. Go to the Adjustment area and click the Save Group button.
The Destinations in a Destination Group are shown in Image 6-89.

208 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 EM GUI orientation

Image 6-89: Destinations in a Dest Group

Overwrite Group
This Overwrite Group button is enabled if a Destination Group is selected. Pressing this button overwrites the
Group data in the selected Destination Group, but the name of the Group is not updated.
1. Select the Destination Group to be overwritten.
2. Go to the System Diagram area, and select the Destinations with which you want to overwrite the existing
Group data.
3. Click on the Overwrite Group Overwrite Group button.

Delete Group(s)
Selecting the Delete Group(s) button places an x next to the name of each Group in the Group Name list.
1. Select the Delete Group(s) button.
2. Select the x next to the name of each Group in the Group Name list that you wish to delete.
3. Click on the red Delete Selected button.

Delete Destination(s)
Selecting the Delete Destination(s) button places an x next to the name of each Destination in the Group
Name list.
1. Select the Delete Destination(s) button.
2. Select the x next to the name of each Destination in the Group Name list that you wish to delete.
3. Click on the red Delete Selected button.

Enable Reorder
This button enables the reordering of the Destination Groups in the list.
1. Select the Enable Reorder button.
The text of the button changes to “Disable Reorder.”
2. Drag and drop any Destination Group to the place where you want to move it in the list.
3. Click on the Disable Reorder button after all the reordering is done.

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 209

 EM GUI orientation

Apply Selected
1. Select the Group to be recalled from the Group Name list.
2. Click the Apply Selected button to recall the group.
The user can also recall a Dest Group by dragging and dropping it into the Workspace/Programming Diagram
area.
The Resources area of the Controller Menu has a Groups tab. Groups can be dragged and dropped from the
Resources area to the System Diagram area and then be recalled from the controller.

Image 6-90: Destination Groups on the Controller menu

Note: In the Programming menu, selecting a Destination Group deselects any previously selected
destinations or groups. Holding the Ctrl key and selecting a Destination Group adds the new group to
any previously selected destinations or groups. On the EC-200 Controller, pressing a Destination
Group button deselects any previously selected destinations or groups. Holding the Barco Eye key
and pressing a Destination Group button adds the new group to any previously selected destinations
or groups.

6.27 Programming Menu > Adjustment area >

Background configuration
General
In the Layer menu, users can also manage the backgrounds. Two background channels are provided per
destination (BG A and BG B), each of which appears at the system’s lowest priority — visually in back or
underneath all other layers.

Layer/Background configuration menu description

Background adjustments are done in the Layer configuration menu. Layer configuration menu is accessed by
clicking on the Layer tab.

210 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 EM GUI orientation

Image 6-91

How to access to the Background adjustments

Adjustments to Backgrounds are performed in the “Adjust” panel:
1. Select the background from the list in the layer panel
or
Select the background from the preview windows.
The layer is selected.

Image 6-92

The background button will have a blue highlight when selected.

2. Click on the Adjust tab that is on the top of the adjustment area.
The background adjustment panel is displayed.

Background adjustment panel description

Background can either be an input, still or matte.
Background input adjustment:

Background matte adjustment:

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 211

 EM GUI orientation

The Standard color wheel selection is available for the

Background Matte too
• Background color can be adjusted by updating the
Red / Green / Blue slider or edit box. The selected
color is shown in the Current Color row.
• The square buttons on the bottom of Current
Color are quick shortcuts to primary colors. Click
on any one of them to select that color for the
Background.
• The Color wheel is another way to specify the
color. The user can press and hold the mouse
when the mouse is on the color wheel.
• Learn: The “Learn” button in the bottom is a way
to store custom colors to be used for later. The
way to use this area is to:
1. Pick a color to save, using color wheel or the
R/G/B adjustments.
2. Click Learn button.
3. Click any one of the buttons on the right.
4. The color that was picked is now stored in this
button.

6.28 Programming Menu > Adjustment area > User

Keys configuration
General
The User Key feature enables you to select all (or a portion) of the current layer’s attributes (such as border
color, size, effects, etc.), and store them on a User Key.
These attributes can then be applied to any active layer on Preview via the Apply Selected button or via Drag
and Drop.

212 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 EM GUI orientation

User Keys configuration menu description

This menu provides:
• A numbered list of the available User Keys.
• A button to Save the attributes of a Layer as a new
User Key.
• A button to Overwrite the Layer data in the
selected User Key.
• A button to Delete one or more User keys.
• A button to Lock All the User Keys in the list.
• A button to Unlock All the User Keys in the list.
• Several attributes that can be enabled for use
during Save operation.
- Type: type of Layer—PIP or Key
- Trans: type of transition
- Effects: color and effects
- Border: On / Off and its parameters
- Shadow: On / Off and its parameters
- Key: Key parameters separated from Layer
type
- Pos: Position of Layer
- Size: Size of Layer
- Source: actual size of the Source inside the
PIP, as opposed to the Source file
- Mask: Masking parameters
- Keyframe: If checked, information for both
Keyframes in the Layer is stored. If unchecked,
information from only the active Keyframe in
the Layer is stored.
• A search edit box for searching User Keys by
number and a search edit box for searching User
Keys by name.

Save to new User key

1. Select the layer whose parameters you want to store.
2. Using the menu, enable or disable the specific parameters that you wish to store (e.g., Type, Trans,
Effects, Key etc.). You can also enable all parameters using the ALL button.
3. Select the “Save to new User Key” button.
4. The User Key appears in the list.
5. Repeat from step 1 to store additional User Keys.

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 213

 EM GUI orientation

Overwrite User key

This button is enabled if a layer and a user key is selected. Pressing this button overwrites the layer data in the
selected user key but the name of the user key is not updated. The attributes saved are based on the selection
of the Enables boxes. If no boxes are checked, no user key is created.

Delete User Key(s)

Allows for multiple deletes of User keys.
1. Click the Delete UserKey(s) button.
2. Select the User Key to be deleted by clicking the X next to the lock for that User Key.

Image 6-93: Select a User Key

Note: If a User Key is locked, it cannot be deleted.

3. Select Delete Selected to delete only the selected User Key(s), or select Select All then select Delete
Selected to delete all User Keys.

Image 6-94: Delete Selected User Keys

User key list

Lists alphabetically all User Keys.

Search edit box

Search User keys by name. A list of User Keys including the selection appears instead of the full list.

Search Number (# icon)

Entering a number between 1 and 999 will searches for, selects, and shows that number User Key.

Apply Selected
The selected User Key is applied to the selected layer(s) on Preview and on Program if “Modify on Program is
enabled”.

Renaming User Keys

Change the name of a User Key by double-left-clicking on the name itself. The list is not reordered based on
the new name.

Renumbering User Keys

Edit the number of a User Key by double-left-clicking on the number. The list is reordered based on the new
number.

214 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 EM GUI orientation

6.29 Programming Menu > Adjustment area >

Presets configuration
General
The Preset is a register that enables you to store destination setups, “looks,” to memory, and to recall them.

Presets configuration menu description

This menu provides:
• A numbered list of the available Presets.
• Buttons to select the complete or relative saving of
Presets.
• A Save from PVW button to create a new Preset
from selected Destination(s) in Preview.
• An Overwrite from PVW button to overwrite the
preset data in the selected Preset from selected
Destination(s) in Preview.
• A Save from PGM button to create new Preset
from the selected Destination(s) in Program.
• An Overwrite from PGM button to overwrite the
preset data in the selected Preset from selected
Destination(s) in Program.
• A Delete Preset(s) button to enter a multiple
delete of Presets.
• An Enable Reorder button to enable the
reordering of Presets in the list.
• A Lock All button to lock all the Presets in the list.
• An Unlock All button to unlock all the Presets in
the list.
• A couple of search edit boxes to search Presets.
• Three buttons to manage Preset recall actions.

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 215

 EM GUI orientation

Complete vs Relative
The “Complete” and “Relative” radio buttons do not affect the recall process; they are used only during the
save process.
• To save a “Complete” preset, make sure the “Complete” radio button is selected, arm the Destinations to
be part of the Preset and press the “Save from PVW” or “Save from PGM” button. A “Complete” Preset is
marked with a “C” in the Presets list.
• To save a “Relative” preset, make sure the “Relative” radio button is selected, arm the Destinations to be
part of the Preset, hide/show the Background/Layers in the destinations and then press the “Save from
PVW” or “Save from PGM” button. A “Relative” Preset is marked with an “R” in the Presets list.
When a “Complete“ Preset is recalled, all Layers of the chosen Destinations are affected. When a “Relative”
Preset is recalled, normal layers are affected, but hidden Layers are not affected.
To hide a Layer, select the Layer in the Programming Diagram area of the Workspace, then select Hide in the
System Wide function are of the workspace. See Image 6-95.

Image 6-95: Hiding a Layer

A Layer can also be hidden using the Hide icon in the Programming > Adjust > Layer configuration menu. See
“Programming Menu > Adjustment area > Layer configuration”, page 199.
A hidden Layer shows a “hidden” symbol in the lower right-hand corner of the Layer. See Image 6-96.

Image 6-96: Hidden Layer with “hidden” symbol

Save From PVW

Saves the current look on Preview into a new Preset. Only Destinations that are active or selected will be
saved. For example: There are 3 Destinations. User enables Dest1 and Dest 3 and presses “Save to new
Preset.” Only Dest1 and Dest3 looks are stored. Dest 2 is not part of this Preset.

Save From PGM

Saves the current look on PROGRAM into a new Preset. Only Destinations that are active or selected will be
saved. For example: There are 3 Destinations. User enables Dest1 and Dest 3 and presses “Save to new
Preset.” Only Dest1 and Dest3 looks are stored. Dest 2is not part of this Preset.

Overwrite From PVW

This button allows the override of a selected Preset from the Preview, if the destination is active. The name of
the preset is not updated.

Overwrite From PGM

This button allows the override of a selected Preset from the Program, if the destination is active. The name of
the preset is not updated.

216 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 EM GUI orientation

Delete Preset(s)
By pressing this button, the delete “x” marks will appear next to all presets. Select the presets you like to
delete and then press the red “Delete Selected” button.

Search edit box

Search Presets by characters in names. A list of the preset with be singled out. List restores to normal once
search box is cleared.

Search Number (# icon)

Search Preset by number, User types the number of the preset wanted and this preset will be instantly
selected ready for recall.

Recall buttons
They are not enabled unless a Preset is selected from the list.
1. Recall Previous button: Recalls the Previous preset. Not active is the Preset1 is selected.
2. Recall Selected button: Recalls the currently selected Preset.
3. Recall Next: Recalls the next preset. Not active the last preset in the list is selected.

Preset To PVW / Preset To PGM

Pressing this button toggles between recalling Presets to Preview (see Image 6-97) or directly to Program
(see Image 6-98). The functions of recall buttons are the same in either case, but Presets recalled to Program
automatically transition to Program as soon as they are ready to go. This also applies to dragged and dropped
presets.

Image 6-97: Preset to PVW Image 6-98: Preset to PGM

6.30 Programming Menu > Adjustment area >

Source adjustment
General
The Source adjustments are shown on the Adjust panel when a layer with a valid Source is selected. The
Source adjustment controls does not appear when you select the Source by itself. Also note that the
adjustments made here are made on the layer’s copy of the Source, not the actual Source itself. The actual
Source is updated only when the “Save Source” is pressed.

Description
When a layer with a valid Source is selected, 2 adjustment tabs are shown. It defaults to showing the layer
adjustments. But the user can click on the Source adjustment tab to see the adjustments mentioned in this
section.
Two Tabs for Source adjustment:
• Main adjustment : Size, position, Aspect ratio, and Bind to User Key.
• Color adjustment: Contrast, Brightness, Gamma, Hue and Saturation

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 217

 EM GUI orientation

Main adjustment
The following Source Adjustment Menu functions are p
figures are in pixels)
• H Size: adjusts the source’s horizontal size.
• V Size: adjusts the source’s vertical size.
• H Position: adjusts the source’s horizontal position.
• V Position adjusts the source’s vertical position.
• Save Source would save the Source information fro
selected layer to the actual Source
Note that the “Custom aspect ratio” is disabled unless
Layer Aspect Ratio” is set to Custom.

218 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 EM GUI orientation

Color adjustment
• RGB Contrast and Brightness settings are
adjustable within a range of 0% to 200%. The
default setting for all of these properties is 100%.
• Gamma is adjustable within a range of 0.3 to 3.28.
The default setting is 1.0.
• Hue is adjustable within a range of -180 to +180
degrees. The default setting is 0 degrees.
• Saturation is adjustable within a range of 0% to
200%. The default setting is 0%.
• Reset All: Returns all values to their default
settings.
• Save Source would save the Source information
from the selected layer to the actual Source.

6.31 Programming Menu > Adjustment area >

Global Transition Rate/Trans/Cut
General
At the bottom of the adjustment panel, is the transition rate and type buttons. These actions are executed for
the selected Destinations.

Description
These controls are disabled if no Destination is selected.

Image 6-99

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 219

 EM GUI orientation

All Trans button

This button transitions the Preview into Program according to the transition rate. The transition Rate is
transition rate in frames of the native rate.
Four transition types are available: Linear, S-Curve, Logarithmic and Exponential.

Image 6-100

CUT button
Pressing the CUT button immediately presents the Preview to the Program.

6.32 Cue Menu

General
The Cue menu is the module used to create Cues and to add Presets, User Keys, and UI functions such as
Recall, All Trans, and Cut to those Cues. The Cue menu also allows the user to play, pause, or stop a Cue.

Description
The Cue menu has four main areas, each of which contains information or controls.

Image 6-101: Cue menu

1. Menu navigation bar—The menu navigation bar allows the user to choose from among the available
menus: Configuration, Programming, Cue, Multiviewer, Controller, or Settings.
2. Network resource area—The network resource area contains tabs for the Dest Groups, Custom (UI
functions), Devices, Presets, and User Keys available for Cues.
3. System modifier area—The system modifier area allows the user to create different Cues of Actions and
to assign names wait times commands, and parameters to the Actions in each Cue.
4. Adjustment area—The adjustment area allows the user to add, delete, lock, unlock, and rename Cues.
The adjustment area also allows the user to play, pause, or stop a Cue.
/ (Play / Pause) and (Stop) buttons.
5. Cue icon—Selecting the Cue icon in the menu navigation bar selects the Cue Menu.

220 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 EM GUI orientation

6. Dest Groups tab—The Dest Groups tab lists the Destination Groups available to the Cue Menu.
7. Custom tab—The Custom tab lists the UI functions (All Trans, Cut, Pause, etc.) available to the Cue
Menu.
8. Devices tab—The Devices tab lists the Devices available to the Cue Menu.
9. Presets tab—The Presets tab lists the Presets available to the Cue Menu.
10. Status—The Status LED indicates the status of the cues in a cue list.
• Green means that the cue is active, that is the Cue is currently playing or paused.
• Yellow means that the cue is ready to play.
• Gray (off) means that the cue has finished.
11. # (Syntax number)—Actions can be added or deleted, but they cannot be re-ordered.
12. Name—Actions can be given meaningful names.
13. Wait Time—The wait time before an Action in a Cue takes place can be adjusted; the default wait time is
half of the system’s native rate (29 Hz).
14. Commands—Commands can be Presets or Custom (UI Functions).
15. Params—The parameters are Next, Pause, and Delay.

6.33 Cue Menu > Adjustment area

General
The Adjustment area is used to add and delete Cues.

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 221

 EM GUI orientation

Cue Menu > Adjustment area

This menu provides:
• An Add Cue button to save new Cues.
• A Delete Cue(s) button to delete one or more
Cues.
• An Enable Reorder button to enable the
reordering of Cues in the list.
• A Lock All button to lock all the Cues in the list.
• An Unlock All button to unlock all the Cues in the
list.
• A list of Cues.
Each Cue in the list has a number, a name, and
an icon that shows if the Cue is locked or
unlocked.
• A Play/Pause button.
The system displays the Play button ( ) before
a selected Cue is played and when a selected
Cue has been paused.
The system displays the Pause button ( )
when a selected Cue is playing.
• A Stop button.

Once a Cue has been created in the adjustment area, it can be modified in the system modification area.
Cues can be selected and played, paused, or stopped from the adjustment area of the Cue menu.
Once a cue is active (playing or paused) selecting another cue from the Cue list in the Adjustment pane
cancels the first cue and readies the second cue.

6.34 Cue Menu > System modifier area

General
The System modifier area is used to add actions to a Cue or to delete actions from a Cue.

222 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 EM GUI orientation

Image 6-102: Cue menu, system modifier area

The system modification area of the Cue menu provides:

• An Add Action button to add actions to a Cue.
• A Delete Action(s) button to delete one or more actions from a Cue.
• A list of actions.
Each action in the action list has a column for Status, # (number), Name, Wait Time, Commands, and
Params.
- Status—The Status LED indicates the status of the cues in a cue list.
◦ Green means that the cue is active, that is the Cue is currently playing or paused.
◦ Yellow means that the cue is ready to play.
◦ Gray (off) means that the cue has finished.
- # (Syntax number)—Actions can be added or deleted, but they cannot be re-ordered.
- Name—Actions can be given meaningful names.
- Wait Time—The wait time before an Action in a Cue takes place can be adjusted; the default wait time
is half of the system’s native rate (Hz).
- Commands—Commands can be Presets or Custom (UI Functions).
- Params—Next, Pause, and Delay.

How to modify a Cue

Once a Cue has been selected from the adjustment area, a user can modify it by adding actions (up to a
maximum of 120 actions per Cue) and adding a command to each action.

A Cue cannot be modified while it is playing.

1. Select a Cue from the adjustment area.

2. Click on the Add Action button to add up to 120 actions to the Cue.
3. Drag and drop Dest Groups, Custom items (UI functions), Devices, or Presets to the Commands column of
the Action List.
The wait time before an Action in a Cue takes place defaults to half of the system’s native rate (29 Hz). The
wait time can be adjusted.
4. Select the Param (parameter) for each Command.
• Next (default)
• Pause
Once an Action pauses, the user must click on the “Play” button in the adjustment area to proceed to
the next Action.

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 223

 EM GUI orientation

• Delay
The time of the Delay parameter defaults to half of the system’s native rate (29 Hz). The Delay time can
be adjusted.

How to play a Cue from the Cue Menu

To play a Cue from the Cue Menu, go to the adjustment area and click on the Play button.

How to play a Cue from the Programming Menu

A Cue tab has been added to the Adjustment area of the Programming Menu. Once Cues have been created
on the Cue Menu, you can Play, Pause, and Stop them from the adjustment area of the Programming Menu.
To play a Cue from the Programming Menu, go to the Cue tab in the adjustment area and click on the Play
button.

Image 6-103: Cue tab on the Programming Menu

1 Programming Menu icon (in the Menu navigation bar and in the title bar)
2 Cue tab in the adjustment area
3 Active cue on the cue tab of the adjustment area
The green LED indicates that the cue is active.
4 “Play/Pause” and “Stop” buttons

6.35 Cue Menu > Network resource area

General
The network resource area displays the Dest Groups, Custom items, Devices, and Presets that can be
dragged and dropped into the Commands column of a Cue action.

224 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 EM GUI orientation

Cue Menu > Network resource area

This menu provides:
• A list of all the Dest Groups available for Cue
actions.
• A list of all the Custom items (UI functions)
available for Cue actions.
• A list of all the Devices available for Cue actions.
• A list of all the Presets available for Cue actions.

6.36 Multiviewer (MVR) Menu

General
The last card slot on an Event Master processor—for example, Slot #14 on an E2, or Slot #9 on an S3–4K—
may be either a normal Output slot or a dedicated Multiviewer. (See the description of the Setup tab in
“Configuration Menu > Adjustment > Unit Configuration”, page 111 for instructions on how select this slot as
either an Output slot or a Multiviewer slot.)
A Multiviewer enables multiple sources (inputs, Backgrounds, outputs) to be displayed on one or two
monitors. Screen Destinations (Program and Preview) can be used up to two times in any Multiviewer Output.
The position of the window for each copy can be different, but the size of the window for each copy is always
the same." Multiviewer Menu is the module used to setup the Multiviewer outputs.

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 225

 EM GUI orientation

Description
This menu is accessible by clicking the Multiviewer icon in the menu bar on the left side of the UI.
The three drop-down menus in the title bar select the system, unit or layout displayed in the multiviewer. For
release one, only one system and one unit are supported.
The Multiviewer page is divided in four parts.

Image 6-104

1 Resources area Lists the resources available to be displayed in

the Multiviewer: Inputs, Backgrounds and
Program/Preview Destination Outputs.
2 Multiviewer Layout area The two multiviewer outputs are composed,
viewed and managed individually or as a group.
3 Modifier area Alignment adjustments and controls to manage
the multiviewer outputs
4 Adjustment area Color and sizing adjustments for the windows in
each PIP.

The following sections describe each part of the Multiviewer page in detail:
• “Multiviewer Menu > Resource area”, page 226
• “Multiviewer Menu > Multiviewer Layout area”, page 227
• “Multiviewer Menu > Modifier area”, page 229
• “Multiviewer Menu > Adjustment area”, page 229

6.37 Multiviewer Menu > Resource area

General
This part of the Multiviewer Menu provides a list of all the resources that are available to be displayed in the
Multiviewer.

226 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 EM GUI orientation

Description

Image 6-105

There are 3 tabs in this section:

• Input: Lists the inputs as defined in the System Configuration menu.
• Background: Lists the backgrounds as defined in the System Configuration menu.
• Destination: Lists the destinations as defined in the System Configuration menu. AUX Preview is not a
valid Multiviewer source.

How to add a resource to the Multiviewer

Resources are placed in the Multiviewer layout area by dragging them as it is done with the sources in the
programming menu. When a resource is dropped in the Multiviewer a window appears in that location. A
window cannot overlap another window, so if the resource is dropped at a location of another window the new
resource will be ignored.

Image 6-106

Screen Destinations (Program and Preview) can be used up to two times in any Multiviewer Output.
The position of the window for each copy can be different, but the size of the window for each copy
is always be the same."

If inputs, backgrounds or destinations are deleted after they are placed in the MVR, they will also
automatically deleted from the MVR.

6.38 Multiviewer Menu > Multiviewer Layout area

General
This part of the Multiviewer Menu allows a user to add and position sources in Multiviewer outputs.

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 227

 EM GUI orientation

Description
The tabs on the top of the layout panel area allow the user to view the two outputs together or individually.

Image 6-107

Users can zoom in / out each output individually, in from 25% to 150%, in 25% increments.

Image 6-108

Multiviewer windows, also called Image windows, are composed from inputs, backgrounds and destination
sources. There are 3 elements that make up a multiviewer image window: Content area, border and UMD
(Under-Screen-Display).

Image 6-109

Content area
The default content display area has 16:9 aspect ratio. If the source dragged to this area has different aspect
ratio, it will be adjusted horizontally to fit the space.
If the output format of a source is changed after it is placed in the MVR, the change will not follow in the MVR
window. The window will need to be resized manually in the adjustment panel.
UMD
The text tracks the name of the source in the display area. If the resource is renamed, the UMD will also
change to the new name. The UMD can be edited in the adjustment panel.
One line of text is provided. The UMD area provides for 16 characters. If the text is too long it will be
terminated with “…”.
The background color is adjustable; the default color is gray. The UMD color will go red in case sync is lost.
Border
The border width is fixed at 5 pixels. Border color is adjustable with the default color blue. The border will go
red in case sync is lost.

228 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 EM GUI orientation

6.39 Multiviewer Menu > Modifier area

General
This area is specifically for window adjustments on Multiviewer outputs.

Description
The area is broken up into several sub areas. The left side is for alignment and position of the window. The
right is for misc. controls.

Window Alignment controls

The multiviewer alignment icons are similar to the icons in the Programming alignment panel. For more
details, please refer to the chapter “Programming Menu > Layer Modifier area”, page 195.

Image 6-110

Miscellaneous Control

Image 6-111

Clear
Removes the selected window from the multiviewer window.
Auto Layout Input
Clears the multiviewer display and places all selected sources and the background from the list in the
multiviewer display in the following arrangement.

Image 6-112

Select All / Unselect All

Selects or unselects all the windows from the multiviewer display while Multiple Select is On
Multiple select
Button used to enable or disable multiple selection.

6.40 Multiviewer Menu > Adjustment area

General
Situated on the right hand side of the screen is the Adjustment area. In this area the user can configure the
color and sizing of each multiviewer windows.

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 229

 EM GUI orientation

Description
There are several tabs in this area:
• Output colors: Provides 2 tabs (one per multiviewer output) where the user can modify the color attributes
of each output.
• Window adjustment: Provides sizing and positioning adjustments for the selected window.
The following sections describe each tab of this area in detail:
• “Multiviewer Menu > Adjustment area > Output Color”, page 230
• “Multiviewer Menu > Adjustment area > Window adjustment”, page 231

6.41 Multiviewer Menu > Adjustment area > Output

Color
General
In this section, the user can modify the color attributes (window borders, window UMD, output background) of
each multiviewer output.

Description
Each output has its own color adjustments. There are 2 buttons to select the output window that the color
adjustments are applied.
There are 3 tabs inside the color panel:
• Border: Adjusts the Window border color.
• UMD Background: Adjust the image window’s UMD background color.
• Output Background: Adjust the display background color.
The color controls under the 3 tabs are identical and operate similar as the color adjustments in other menus.

230 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 EM GUI orientation

• The selected color is shown in the Current Color

bar. The color can also be stored by clicking in one
of the square boxes at the bottom of the menu next
to the Learn button. These boxes are quick
shortcuts to select that color.
• Another way to specify a color is to click on the
Color wheel. The slider values will change
accordingly as the mouse moves around the color
wheel.
• Learn: Provides a method to store custom colors.
To learn a new color:
1. Pick a color to save by using color wheel or by
adjusting the R/G/B.
2. Click Learn button.
3. Click any one of the five boxes on the right.
4. The color that was picked is now stored in
selected box.

6.42 Multiviewer Menu > Adjustment area >

Window adjustment
General
In this section, the user can resize and position the selected window. A multiple window selection is available.

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 231

 EM GUI orientation

Description
The following functions are provided:
• H Size(pixel): Adjusts the window’s horizontal size
in pixels.
• V Size(pixel): Adjusts the window’s vertical size in
pixels.
• H Pos(pixel): Adjusts the window’s horizontal
position in pixels.
• V Pos(pixel): Adjusts the window’s vertical position
in pixels.
• Automatic preset: The eight buttons at the bottom
are shortcuts to different sizes depending on how
many of these windows can fit horizontally.
Vertically the window is adjusted to match the
aspect ratio.
For example:
- Size 1: The window is adjusted to fit the full
horizontal space.
- Size 2: The window is adjusted to half the
horizontal space.
- ...
- Size 8: The window is adjusted to an eighth of
the horizontal space.
• Reset button would reset the UMD text to the
current name of the Source.

6.43 Controller Menu

General
Event Master processors and devices can be supported by Event Controllers, hardware consoles specifically
designed to facilitate and accelerate the operations during the show. Controller Menu is the module used to
setup the selected console.

Description

Image 6-113

232 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 EM GUI orientation

This menu is accessible by clicking the Controller icon in the menu bar on the left side of the UI.
The Controller setup page is divided in two parts. One list of available resources (right side of the page) and
one virtual representation of the selected controller.
The user can assign resources from the list onto controller buttons via drag and drop, or remove incorrect
mapping.
Refer to the chapter “Assigning resources to the desk ”, page 341 for more information about the Controller
Menu setup page.

6.44 Settings Menu

General
The Settings menu provides access to the Event Master series processor web app that is built into the unit.
The app provides users with diagnostic reports, includes an FAQ section and contact information and supports
system backup / restore and new firmware installation.

Description

This menu is accessible by clicking the System Settings icon on the menu bar on the left side of the UI. If
there are no System / VPs connected in the system, this button is disabled.

Image 6-114: Settings Menu

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 233

 EM GUI orientation

1 Resources area The Resources area contains the Options,

Controller, and Devices tabs.
• The Controller tab shows EC-50 / EC-200
settings and is applicable only when an EC-
50 / EC-200 controller is connected on the
network.
• The Devices tabs shows what Barco devices
(such as projectors) are detected on the
network.
• The Option tab allows the user to choose
settings concerning the Event Master Toolset
Software.
Please see the sections below dedicated to
these options.
2 Status Show status:
• Online: the VP is online and the web
application can be reached.
• Web application error: the VP is online but
the web application cannot be displayed.
• Offline (in red text): the VP is offline.
3 Refresh Web app area button Similar to web browser, pressing this button will
trigger an attempt to refresh / reconnect to the
web interface of the selected VP.
4 System select combo box Informs the users which System is currently
being selected. If there is more than 1 System
defined in the UI, this combo box can be used to
select between the different Systems.
5 Device select combo box Informs the user which Device is currently being
selected in the selected system.
6 Web app area Main work area where the different menus are
displayed.

Description of the Options tab of the Resources area

• Language: This parameter allows the user to choose the language of the GUI. Note: The only language
available in version 1.5 is English.
• Version Number: version number of the Event Master Toolset (read only).
• Build Version: build version of the version of Event Master (read only).
• Event Master Toolset UI Reset(s)—Factory (Full): A Factory (Full) reset deletes all information and returns
the UI to factory settings.
• Layer position Center of destination, coordinate for PIP’s positioning PIP: allows the user to choose the
default layer position.
- If selected the position X=0 and Y=0 will be in the center of the destination and Pixel 0 will be in the
center of the PIP.
- If unselected the pixel X=0 and Y=0 will be on top left of the destination and Pixel 0 will be on top left of
the PIP.
• Preset recall will not force conflict resolution: When this box is checked, conflict resolutions are not forced
when recalling a Preset. A pop-up window appears, requiring user confirmation. The user’s choices are:
- Resolve–All Trans
- Resolve–Cut
- Resolve–Wait
- Cancel
• Auto Trans/Cut will not force conflict resolution: When this box is checked, conflict resolutions are not
forced when either the All Trans button or the Cut button is activated.
• Virtual Keyboard Disabled button: This button enables or disables the virtual keyboard.
• Keyboard Shortcuts enabled/disabled button: This button enables or disables keyboard shortcuts.

234 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 EM GUI orientation

• Keyboard shortcuts list: The following keyboard shortcuts are available in the Event Master Toolset
software.

Image 6-115: Keyboard shortcuts

It’s possible to change any shortcut key:

1. Double click on the shortcut name (e.g. Multiple Select).
A popup appears near the shortcut name.

Image 6-116

2. Press any key on the keyboard.

This key will affect to the selected shortcut.

Description of the Controller tab of the Resources area

The Controller tab shows EC-50 and EC-200 settings and is applicable only when an EC-50 or an EC-200
controller is connected to the system. The Controller tab has three subtabs: Software, User Pref, and
Diagnostic.
Software subtab
This panel displays the serial number and the
software version for each detected controller.
When the Controller > Software subtab is selected in
the Resources area, the Web App area shows the EC-
200 web app. The user can upgrade the EC-200
software through the EC-200 web app.

Controller tab: Software subtab

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 235

 EM GUI orientation

User Pref subtab

This panel displays the user-defined preferences for
each detected controller. The user can also adjust the
preferences in this panel.
• Touch Screen Contrast: Change the contrast of
the touch screen displays. Range is 0–100.
• Touch Screen Backlight: Change backlight
brightness of the touch screen displays. Range is
0–100.
• LED Brightness: Change the brightness of the
LEDs under the buttons. Range is 0–6000.
• Script Light Brightness: Change the brightness
of the LED script lights. Range is 0–16000.
• Work Light Brightness: Change the brightness of
the white LEDs on the front bottom of the
controller. Range is 0–16000.
• Rear Light Brightness: Change the brightness of
the red LEDs on the rear top of the controller.
Range is 0–16000.
• LCD Brightness: Change the LCD display
brightness. Range is 0–7.

Controller tab: User Pref subtab

236 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 EM GUI orientation

Diagnostic subtab
This panel displays test controls for each detected
controller.
• LED Test:
- Test Off: LEDs are returned to normal behavior.
- All Blue/Red: Turns on all blue and red LEDs;
other LEDs are turned off.
- All Green: Turns on all green LEDs; other LEDs
are turned off.
• LCD Pixel Test:
- Test Off: LCD text is returned to normal
behavior.
- All: All LCD displays are filled (all 256 bits are
enabled).
• LCD Backlight Test:
- Test Off: LCD colors are returned to normal
behavior.
- Red: Only LCD red color is turned on.
- Green: Only LCD green color is turned on.
- Blue: Only LCD blue color is turned on.
- All: LCD red, green, and blue colors are all
turned on.
Controller tab: Diagnostic subtab • Button Test:
- Checkbox checked: The test is on.
When the test is on, do not trigger the behavior
of the button. For example, if a button is
mapped to a Preset, do not recall that Preset.
- Button Scan Code: Pressing a button on the
controller shows the button number returned by
the API (in place of the “NA”).
• T-Bar Test:
- Checkbox checked: The test is on.
- T-Bar Value: Moving the T-Bar shows the
number returned by the API as the T-Bar
changes positions.
• Adjustment Wheel Test:
- Checkbox checked: The test is on.
- When the test is on, rotating the wheel shows
the number returned by the API.

Description of the Devices tab of the Resources area

The Devices tab lists devices, such as projectors, that are connected to the system. Devices such as other
processors (E2, S3–4K, EX, etc.) are Discovered on the Configuration menu Discovered list.

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 237

 EM GUI orientation

Image 6-117: Devices tab

Dragging and dropping any discovered device from the Resources area to the Web App area hosts the device
(for example, an ImagePro II projector) in the Web App area.

Image 6-118: Devices list

6.45 Settings Menu > Web App area

General
Main work area of the Setting Menu, where the user has access to a set of functions directly provided by the
Event Master series processor.
All of the functions described in this section can also be performed by launching the web app
directly from the browser outside of the GUI. You need to type the unit’s IP address into your
browser’s address bar and the Web app will appear in the browser.

238 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 EM GUI orientation

Description
There are several tabs in this area:
• Dashboard: The four submenus in the Dashboard window provide access to card diagnostics software.
• Tools: This menu allows users to Download software and perform Backup and Restore operations.
• Help: This menu contains a list of frequently asked questions to help you implement your system.
• Contact us: Display information to Barco tech support.
• Follow us: Display links to obtain more information about image processing and Barco.
The following sections describe each tab of this area in detail:
• “Settings Menu > Web App area > Dashboard”, page 239
• “Settings Menu > Web App area > Tools”, page 243
• “Settings Menu > Web App area > Help”, page 247
• “Settings Menu > Web App area > Contact us”, page 248
• “Settings Menu > Web App area > Follow us”, page 249

6.46 Settings Menu > Web App area > Dashboard

General
The four submenus in the Dashboard window provide access to card diagnostics software:
• Inputs
• Outputs
• Expansion
• Other
The user can perform the diagnostic of each card separately, or run a full diagnostic of all unit cards.

CAUTION: Running diagnostics will disrupt output videos. Diagnostics should only be run with no
inputs or outputs connected. Do not run diagnostics during live production.

Inputs
The Inputs menu presents a list of the input cards installed in the system. The status column indicates
whether any errors have been detected. Detailed diagnostics tests for each card are performed by selecting
the diagnostics button under the action column.

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 239

 EM GUI orientation

Image 6-119: Dashboard Input

Outputs
This menu presents a list of the output cards installed in the system. The status column indicates whether any
errors have been detected. Detailed diagnostics tests for each card are performed by selecting the diagnostics
button under the action column.

240 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 EM GUI orientation

Image 6-120: Dashboard Output

Expansion
This menu presents diagnostics for the Expansion card. The status column indicates whether any errors have
been detected. Detailed diagnostics tests for each card are performed by selecting the diagnostics button
under the action column.

Image 6-121: Dashboard Expansion

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 241

 EM GUI orientation

Other
This menu presents diagnostics for the Motherboard and internal VPU cards. The status column indicates
whether any errors have been detected. Detailed diagnostics tests for each card are performed by selecting
the diagnostics button under the action column.

Note that the Motherboard diagnostics test also provides status information for the power supplies.

Image 6-122: Dashboard Other

242 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 EM GUI orientation

Diagnostics
Running diagnostics will disrupt output videos. Diagnostics should only be run with no inputs or
outputs connected. Do not run diagnostics during live production.

Select the Run Diagnostic button for any slot, and the unit generates a detailed report with a Pass or Fail
indication.

Image 6-123: Sample E2 diagnostic report.

FPGA temperatures may reach as high as 85ºC under normal operating conditions. Temperatures
above 85ºC may affect processing performance.

6.47 Settings Menu > Web App area > Tools

General
This menu allows users to Download software update and perform backup or restore the system settings.

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 243

 EM GUI orientation

Description

Image 6-124

There are two submenus in this menu:

• Manage Software: From this menu the user can select, download and install a new software version from
the Barco Server.
• Backup & Restore: From this menu the user can backup or restore the system settings.
The following sections describe each submenu in detail:
• “Settings Menu > Web App area > Tools > Manage Software”, page 244
• “Settings Menu > Web App area > Tools > Backup & Restore”, page 246

6.48 Settings Menu > Web App area > Tools >
Manage Software
General
When you select the “Manage Software”, two tabs are presented. The “Software Install” tab and the
“Releases” tab.
Although the examples in this section show the E2 processor, the instructions apply to all
processors and to the EC-200 controller.

Releases
From this menu you can select and download a new file from the Barco Server. A dialog box allows you to
select the location on your computer where the file will be stored.

Image 6-125

244 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 EM GUI orientation

Software Install
How to upgrade your system:
1. Outside of the GUI open a new window and navigate to the folder containing the file you want to use to
upgrade your system with.
2. Select the file and “drag and drop” it on top of the green button. The file is compressed and it has tar.gz
extension.

Image 6-126

3. Click on the blue “Upload” button. This action will copy the file from the computer into the Event Master series
processor.
4. A green bar appears indicating the progress of the upload process.
5. While the unit updates its software the following message appears:
The system will now restart. Please wait...

Note: The upload process takes several minutes.

6. When the upload is complete, a window appears instructing you to restart the unit.

Image 6-127

7. While the system reboots and installs the new software, the web app displays a message indicating that it
can’t communicate with the unit. This is normal and no action is required on your part.

Image 6-128

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 245

 EM GUI orientation

6.49 Settings Menu > Web App area > Tools >
Backup & Restore
General
In this menu the user can store presets, user keys and other system settings on the computer. The menu also
allows the user to restore a previously stored system file.

Image 6-129

How to backup presets, user keys and system settings

1. Click on the Backup button.
A dialog box opens up.

246 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 EM GUI orientation

Image 6-130

2. Choose the folder location where you want to store the backed up file.
3. Click on Select Folder.
The Dialog box will close and a new window appears displaying the location and name of the stored
compressed file.

Image 6-131

4. Click on OK.

How to restore presets, user keys and system settings

The following procedure allows the user to restore a backed up file into a Event Master series processor:
1. Open an explorer window and navigate to the location where the backed up file is located.
2. Drag and drop the file on the green restore button.
A progress bar and a blue Upload button appear.
3. Click on the Upload button
The progress bar indicates the status of the upload procedure.
4. When the upload is complete a new window appears requesting you to restart the system.
5. While the system reboots and restore parameters, the web app displays a message indicating that it can’t
communicate with the unit. This is normal and no action is required on your part.

6.50 Settings Menu > Web App area > Help

General
This menu contains a list of frequently asked questions (FAQ) to help you implement your system. This list is
sorted by category.

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 247

 EM GUI orientation

Image 6-132

6.51 Settings Menu > Web App area > Contact us

General
Displays contact information for the Barco tech support.

248 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 EM GUI orientation

Image 6-133

6.52 Settings Menu > Web App area > Follow us

General
Displays links to Barco's and the Image Processing group's social media sites.

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 249

 EM GUI orientation

Image 6-134

250 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 System Setup 7
About this chapter
This chapter outlines procedures for setting up and configuring Event Master series processors.

CAUTION: Before starting to set up your Event Master series processor, please ensure that you are
familiar with front panel menus and Event Master Toolset Software.

Overview
• Setup Prerequisites
• System setup sequence
• Power up and Status check
• Return to factory default
• Communication setup
• Restoring the system
• User preference setup
• Saving the setup
• Backing up the system
• Configuration Menu > Initial Setup
• Configuration Menu > Add Background(s)
• Configuration Menu > Add Inputs
• Configuration Menu > Add Outputs
• Configuration Menu > Add Screen Destinations & Layers
• Configuration Menu > Layer optimization
• Configuration Menu > Add Aux Destinations
• Configuration Menu > Add MVR Outputs
• Programming Menu > Capture Stillstore from Inputs & Backgrounds
• Programming Menu > Select Thumbnails for Backgrounds
• Programming Menu > Select Thumbnails for Inputs
• Programming Menu > Create Sources from Inputs
• Programming Menu > Drop backgrounds into Screen Destinations
• Programming Menu > Drop Sources, Layers into Screen Destinations & Sources into layers
• Programming Menu > Drop Inputs to Aux Destinations
• Programming Menu > Presets And User Keys
• Programming Menu > Destination Transition
• Multiviewer Menu > Drop Inputs, Backgrounds and Destinations

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 251

 System Setup

7.1 Setup Prerequisites

Prerequisites
Before starting to set up your Event Master series processor, please review the following prerequisites:
• Ensure that you are familiar with the Event Master devices, including system control means and features.
For details, please refer to Chapter “General”, page 25.
• Ensure that you are familiar with front panel menus of the Event Master processors. For details on all
menus, please refer to chapter“Front Panel Menu orientation”, page 79
• Ensure that you are familiar with front panel menus and Event Master Toolset Software. For details on
Event Master Toolset Software, please refer to chapter“EM GUI orientation”, page 97
• Ensure that the unit is physically secured on a rack or is placed on a flat surface with a stable support. If
the unit is installed on a rack, it is mandatory that the rear brackets are also installed. For details, please
refer to chapter “Rack-Mount Procedure”, page 47.
• Ensure that all hardware is properly installed, and that all sources, displays and peripherals are properly
connected. For details concerning Event Master series processor connectors, please refer to the unit rear
panel description in the chapter “Rear panel”, page 53.
• Connect the AC power to the unit. If power redundancy is desired, connect power to both power plugs.
• Make sure that the Event Master series processor is connected to the Ethernet local network in order to
communicate with the PC where the control software is installed.

7.2 System setup sequence

Set up from A to Z
This section provides a top level view of the entire Event Master series processor setup procedure, plus links
to each individual sequence.

For the optimum Event Master series processor setup, it is recommended that you follow all
procedures in the order outlined below.

Set up from A to Z
1. Power up and Status check. For more information see section “Power up and Status check”, page 253.
2. Return to factory default. For more information see section“Return to factory default”, page 254.
3. Communication setup allows setup to the Ethernet settings. For more information see
section“Communication setup”, page 254.
4. Restoring the system procedure restores the system to a previously saved configuration from a USB drive.
For more information see section “Restoring the system”, page 255.
5. User preference setup is used to set a variety of important user preferences. For more information see
section “User preference setup”, page 256.
6. Saving the setup procedure saves all system setup parameters. For more information see section“Saving the
setup”, page 256.
7. Backing up the system procedure backs up your system configuration to a USB drive. For more information
see section“Backing up the system”, page 257.
8. Configuring Menu > Initial Setup. For more information see section “Configuration Menu > Initial Setup ”,
page 257.
9. Configuring Menu > Add Background(s). For more information see section “Configuration Menu > Add
Background(s)”, page 258.
10. Configuring Menu > Add Inputs. For more information see section “Configuration Menu > Add Inputs”, page
259.
11. Configuring Menu > Add Outputs. For more information see section “Configuration Menu > Add Outputs”,
page 260.

252 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 System Setup

12. Configuring Menu > Add Screen Destinations & Layers. For more information see section “Configuration
Menu > Add Screen Destinations & Layers”, page 263.
13. Configuration Menu > Layer optimization. For more information see section “Configuration Menu > Layer
optimization”, page 266.
14. Configuring Menu > Add Aux Destinations. For more information see section “Configuration Menu > Add
Aux Destinations”, page 267.
15. Configuring Menu > Add MVR Outputs. For more information see section “Configuration Menu > Add MVR
Outputs”, page 269.
16. Programming Menu > Capture Stillstore from Inputs & Backgrounds. For more information see section
“Programming Menu > Capture Stillstore from Inputs & Backgrounds”, page 270.
17. Programming Menu > Select Thumbnails for Backgrounds. For more information see section
“Programming Menu > Select Thumbnails for Backgrounds”, page 271.
18. Programming Menu > Select Thumbnails for Inputs. For more information see section “Programming
Menu > Select Thumbnails for Inputs”, page 271.
19. Programming Menu > Create Sources from Inputs. For more information see section “Programming Menu
> Create Sources from Inputs”, page 272.
20. Programming Menu > Drop backgrounds into Screen Destinations. For more information see section
“Programming Menu > Drop backgrounds into Screen Destinations”, page 273.
21. Programming Menu > Drop Layers into Screen Destinations & Sources into layers. For more information
see section “Programming Menu > Drop Sources, Layers into Screen Destinations & Sources into layers”,
page 273.
22. Programming Menu > Drop Inputs to Aux Destinations. For more information see section “Programming
Menu > Drop Inputs to Aux Destinations”, page 275.
23. Programming Menu > Presets And User Keys. For more information see section “Programming Menu >
Presets And User Keys”, page 276.
24. Programming Menu > Destination Transition. For more information see section “Programming Menu >
Destination Transition”, page 277.
25. Multiviewer Menu > Drop Inputs, Backgrounds and Destinations. For more information see section
“Multiviewer Menu > Drop Inputs, Backgrounds and Destinations ”, page 277.

7.3 Power up and Status check

General
Use the following steps to power up your Event Master series processor and check system status.

Prerequisite
• Ensure that your system is properly installed and cabled.
• Ensure that you are familiar with the System Menu. For details on all menus, please refer to chapter “Front
Panel Menu orientation”, page 79.

Power up system and check system status

1. Turn on the unit and wait while it initializes. During the initialization process the front panel displays: “Program
Loading Please Wait”.
The Status Menu is automatically displayed after initialization is completed.
2. Power up all peripherals, such as display devices (projectors, monitors) and sources.
3. Turn on the PC and run the Event Master Toolset Software.
The system configuration page is the first page that appears when the Event Master Toolset Software is
launched.

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 253

 System Setup

4. On the Status Menu:

• System1 is the default value displayed as System Name if this is the first start of the unit. This name can
be changed in the configuration page of the GUI.
• Ensure the Event Master series processor is connected on the local network. If there is no internet
connection, or if a DHCP server has not been found, the IP address is 000.000.000.000. In this case, re-
check all Ethernet connections. After checking connections, if devices still report “Not Connected,” use the
procedure “Communication setup”, page 254.

7.4 Return to factory default

General
Prior to performing any setup procedures, it is recommended that you perform a factory reset — in order to
reset all input, output and source mappings to their default values.
Particularly for customers in the events and rental marketplace, this procedure guarantees that any previous
input setups and memory registers (e. g., those that may have been programmed by other users) are
completely cleared from system memory.
If you are continuing an event (for example, day two of a three-day event), you do not need to
perform a factory reset. However, if you do elect to perform a factory reset, ensure that you have
backed up your system. for details, please refer to the procedure “Backing up the system”, page
257.

Prerequisite
• Ensure that you are familiar with the Reset Menu. For details on all menus, please refer to chapter
“Restoring Factory Default Settings”, page 95.

Restoring factory settings

To restore all default settings to the Event Master series processor, use the following procedure:
1. Select Factory Reset from the Setup Menu.
The Factory Reset Menu appears.
2. Select Factory Reset to reset the entire system to its factory default values. Remember that all data will be
lost.
or
Select Factory Reset, Save IP to reset the entire system to its factory default values, but retains the IP
address of the unit.
A prompt appears, asking if you want to clear all configurations.
3. Press SEL.
The system turns off, then it reboots.

7.5 Communication setup

General
In this procedure, you will set up communication between the Event Master series processor and the local
network.

Prerequisite
• Ensure that you are familiar with the Ethernet Menu. For details on this menu, please refer to chapter
“System menu > Ethernet”, page 89.

254 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 System Setup

Static IP or DHCP?
Use one of the following procedure to:
• turn on the DHCP feature and query the DHCP server to obtain a valid IP address. A DHCP server must be
available on the local network.
• or turn off the DHCP feature and set a static IP address for the Event Master series processor, along with a
subnet mask and gateway.
Define the Ethernet settings to remotely access is mandatory to control the Event Master series
processor via the Event Master Toolset Software or via a web interface. Please contact the
manager of the local network (LAN) to know how configuring your device.

Query the DHCP server

1. Select Ethernet from the System Menu.
The Ethernet Menu appears.
2. Turn On the DHCP value.
The Event Master series processor automatically queries the DHCP server for a valid IP address. If the Event
Master series processor receives an IP address, that address is displayed in the Ethernet submenu.

It can take several seconds to obtain an address from the server. During this time, the SEL button
remains lit.

Setting a static IP Address

1. Select Ethernet from the System Menu.
The Ethernet Menu appears.
2. Turn Off the DHCP value.
3. Select Set Static IP from the Ethernet Menu.
The Set Static IP Menu appears.
4. Select and set successively the SUB(net), GW and IP fields.

Note: You must change the SUB parameter before editing either of the other parameters.

7.6 Restoring the system

This step in the Event Master series processor setup procedure is optional. If there is not backup
available or if you decide to configure your unit from scratch, please move to the next step to
continue the procedure.

General
In this procedure, you will restore your system configuration from a USB drive — provided that you previously
backed up your system to a USB drive.

Prerequisite
• Ensure that you are familiar with the USB device (Backup/Restore) Menu. For details on this menu,
please refer to chapter “System menu > USB device (Backup/Restore)”, page 86.

Restore a system configuration file

Use the following steps to restore your system from the USB Drive:
1. Insert a formatted flash drive in the unit’s front-panel USB port.

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 255

 System Setup

2. From the System menu, scroll to the USB Backup/Restore submenu. Select Restore Config.
The USB Restore Config submenu appears.
3. Press SEL and scroll through the list of configuration files. When you locate the file you want, press SEL
again.
A message confirms the restore operation and instructs you to reboot the Event Master series processor.

You must reboot the system to use the restored configuration file.

At the conclusion of this procedure, your system is completely set up — exactly the way that you left
it when you performed a complete system “backup.” No further setup operations are required.

7.7 User preference setup

General
This procedure enables you to set a variety of important user preferences and options.

Prerequisite
• Ensure that you are familiar with the Black Invalid menu. For details on this menu, please refer to chapter
“System menu > Black Invalid”, page 85.
• Ensure that you are familiar with the VFD brightness menu. For details on this menu, please refer to
chapter “System menu > VFD brightness (display brightness)”, page 90.

Set a variety of important user preferences

Use the following steps to set user preferences:
1. Select System from the Setup menu.
2. Select Black Invalid from the System menu to set Black on Invalid Video on or off.
3. Select VFD brightness from the System menu to adjust the intensity of the front panel vacuum fluorescent
display (VFD) screen, from 1 (dim) to 6 (bright).

7.8 Saving the setup

General
In this procedure, you will save all system setup parameters to non-volatile memory.

Prerequisite
• Ensure that you are familiar with the Save All function. For details on this menu, please refer to chapter
“Save All”, page 96.

Save all system setup parameters

Use the following steps to save all system setup parameters:
1. Select Save All from the Setup menu.
2. Wait a few seconds. When the parameters are saved you are returned to the Setup menu.

256 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 System Setup

7.9 Backing up the system

General
In this procedure, you will back up your system configuration to a USB drive.

Prerequisite
• Ensure that you are familiar with the USB device (Backup/Restore) Menu. For details on this menu,
please refer to chapter “System menu > USB device (Backup/Restore)”, page 86.

Back up a system configuration file

Use the following steps to back up your system to a USB Drive:
1. Insert a formatted flash drive in the unit’s front-panel USB port.
2. From the System menu, scroll to the USB Backup/Restore submenu. Select Backup Config.
The USB Backup Config submenu appears. The navigation cursor appears at the default name for the first
backup file.
3. If you wish to change the default name of the backup configuration, press SEL. Use the ADJUST knob to
change the name, as described in section “Using menu system”, page 81. Press SEL again when you
complete the name change.
4. Scroll to Backup Config and press SEL.
A confirmation message appears when the backup is complete.

7.10 Configuration Menu > Initial Setup

General
In this procedure, you will run the Event Master Toolset Software (EMTS), verify communication between
theEvent Master series processor (EMP) and the program to the local network and perform basic setup.

Prerequisite
• Ensure that you are familiar with the Configuration Menu. For details on this menu, please refer to
chapter “Configuration Menu”, page 103

Setup
1. Connect the PC running the EMTS to the same local network switch that the EMP is connected to. Run the
EMTS and the software should connect to EMP automatically. The unit is listed in the System configuration
page under the Discovered tab with the button on turning yellow.
2. Drag and drop the EMP from the device area into the middle diagram area.
3. If multiple units are connected to the PC, the yellow LEDs next to the system will turn green. You can assign a
unique name to each unit. Confirm that you are connected to the right unit by clicking the arrow in front of EMP
to reveal the unit’s IP address. Verify that this address is the same as the address listed on the unit’s front
panel on the top status menu.
Note: If the unit doesn’t connect automatically to the PC, you can type the PC’s IP address in the field
under “Manual Connect”. A reason for this can be the PC´s firewall settings. Be sure to allow full
communication for EMTS and EMP.

4. (Optional) Select the EMP´s native vertical refresh rate from the “Native Rate:” drop-down menu. Default
value is 59.94Hz.
5. (Optional) Select the EMP´s Scaler capacity from the “Scaler Mode:” drop-down menu. Possible are 2K / DL
and 4K setting the maximum scaling capacity for the Layer. Default value is 2K (HD).
6. (Optional) Select the EMP´s Genlock mode from “Genlock” drop-down menu. Default value is OFF.

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 257

 System Setup

7.11 Configuration Menu > Add Background(s)

General
In this procedure, you will assign Backgrounds from the input connector(s).

Prerequisite
• Ensure that you are familiar with the Configuration Menu. For details on this menu, please refer to
chapter “Configuration Menu”, page 103

If more than one background is utilized, repeat the below steps until all backgrounds are added and
adjusted.

Add Background
1. Click on the Background tab to select the input that will be assigned as a background.
2. Click on the +Add Background blue button to enter the Add mode.
3. Click on the connector that the background signal is connected to define it as a background. If the background
spans into multiple connectors, click on all connector before you proceed. All connectors can be used as
backgrounds, connector type and capacity needs to match. DVI and HDMI can be mixed.
4. Click on the “Done Adding” button to exit the Add mode.

(Optional) Edit the Name

1. Double click on default name in the Name list to edit the name.
2. When the area turns blue, click the eraser icon to clear the field.
3. Type a new name.

(Optional) Adjust Background Parameters

Click on the Adjust tab that is located on the top. From this menu you can adjust:
1. Select Format value, color space and connector type. Default value is 1920x1080p @ 59.94.
2. Select the background orientation, vertical or horizontal.
3. Select EDID format (for DVI, HDMI and DisplayPort inputs). Select EDID from the drop-down list, then select
frame rate from the drop-down list and finally select Apply.
4. Apply specific EDID parameters based on a standard EDID. VESA calculator needs to be used.
5. If several connectors should have the same EDID, check the Apply to all Backgrounds checkbox before Apply
and Save.
6. Select HDCP mode (for DVI, HDMI and DisplayPort inputs).
7. Select color space, capacity and type (for SDI inputs).
8. Perform color adjustments.
9. Read all timing parameters associated with the selected format.
10. Add information like Passwords for connected computers or Phone numbers to a Specialist.

(Optional) Delete Backgrounds

1. Click on the blue button Delete Backgrounds.
2. From the Name list click on the “x” space next to the Background(s) you wish to delete. Or click on connectors.
3. Hit the red button Delete Background(s) button. All of the selected Background will be removed from the list.

258 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 System Setup

7.12 Configuration Menu > Add Inputs

General
In this procedure, you will add Inputs to the system. The system must have inputs added in order for them to
be available.

Prerequisite
• Ensure that you are familiar with the Configuration Menu. For details on this menu, please refer to
chapter “Configuration Menu”, page 103

If more than one Input is utilized, repeat the below steps until all Inputs are added and adjusted.

Connector Capacity
Each connector has a capacity setting that assigns internal resources to the connector. Likewise does it also
free up resources for the other connectors. If two Dual Link Connectors is expected on any of the HDMI/DP
cards, two other connectors needs to be set to “NONE”.
If a connector is to be used to accommodate a 4K signal all other connectors on each card needs to be set to
“NONE”.

(Optional) Auto create all Inputs

If the Auto create Inputs is pressed, then the software will add all unassigned inputs to the input list and
number them sequentially.
This button is a shortcut for systems utilizing a large number of inputs.

(Optional) Auto create all live Inputs

If the Auto create all Inputs is pressed, then the software will add all unassigned inputs with input signal
detected (yellow) to the input list and number them sequentially.
This button is a shortcut for systems utilizing a large number of inputs.

Add Input
This is where you add specific input requirements in order to allow Dual Link inputs of 3840x1080, UHD and
4K.
1. Click on the Input tab to select the inputs that will be defined.
2. Click on the +Add Input blue button to enter the Add mode.
3. Click on the connector that the input signal is connected to define it as an input. Up to 4 connectors can be
added into a Connector Group with a maximum resolution of 4K.
4. Click on the Done Adding button to exit the Add mode.

(Optional) Adjust Input Parameters

Click on the Adjust tab that is located on the top. From this menu you can adjust:
1. Select Format value, color space and connector type. Default value is 1920x1080p @ 59.94.
2. Set Connector mapping, Horizontal is Default.
3. Select EDID format (for DVI, HDMI and DisplayPort inputs). Select EDID from the drop-down list, then select
frame rate from the drop-down list and finally select Apply.
4. Apply specific EDID parameters based on a standard EDID. VESA calculator needs to be used.
5. If several connectors should have the same EDID, check the Apply to all Backgrounds checkbox before Apply
and Save.
6. Select HDCP mode (for DVI, HDMI and DisplayPort inputs).

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 259

 System Setup

7. Select color space, capacity and type (for SDI inputs).

8. Perform color adjustments.
9. Read all timing parameters associated with the selected format.

(Optional) Delete Inputs

1. Click on the blue button Delete Input(s).
2. From the Name list click on the “x” space next to the Input(s) you wish to delete. Or select connectors.
3. Hit the red button Delete Input(s) button. All of the selected Inputs will be removed from the list.

(Optional) Edit the Name

1. Double click on default name in the Name list to edit the name.
2. When the area turns blue, click the eraser icon to clear the field.
3. Type a new name.
Note: It is recommended to name inputs based on the actual connection scenario instead of the
connected devices function. This is due to several layers of naming that can be done in the system to
simplify understanding during operation.

7.13 Configuration Menu > Add Outputs

General
In this procedure, you will add Outputs to the system .

Prerequisite
• Ensure that you are familiar with the Configuration Menu. For details on this menu, please refer to
chapter “Configuration Menu”, page 103

If more than one Output is utilized, repeat the below steps until all inputs are added and adjusted.

Connector Capacity
Each connector has a capacity setting that assigns internal resources to the connector. Likewise does it also
free up resources for the other connectors. If two Dual Link Connectors is expected on any of the HDMI / DVI
cards, two other connectors needs to be set to “NONE”.
If a connector is to be used to accommodate a 4K signal all other connectors on each card needs to be set to
“NONE”.
SDI Output can only output UHD/4K over a Quad connection.

(Optional) Auto create Outputs

If the Auto create Outputs is pressed, then the software will add all unassigned outputs to the output list and
number them sequentially.
This button is a shortcut for systems utilizing a large number of outputs.

(Optional) Edit the Name

Once all connectors are added they appear in a list directly under the Output Tab. It is recommended to name
outputs based on the actual connection scenario instead of the connected devices function. This is due to
several layers of naming that can be done in the system to simplify understanding during operation.
1. Double click on default name in the Name list to edit the name.
2. When the area turns blue, click the eraser icon to clear the field.

260 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 System Setup

3. Type a new name.

Add Output
This is where you add specific output requirements in order to allow Dual Link inputs of 3840x1080, UHD and
4K
1. Click on the Output tab to select the outputs that will be defined.
2. Click on the +Add Output blue button to enter the Add mode.
3. Click on the connector that the display device is connected to add it as an output. 2 or 4 connectors can be
added into a Connector Group with a max resolution of 4K. It is recommended to Group Connectors in this
step for UHD / 4K Displaydevices.
Only the two top connectors have highspeed link capability allowing over 2K resolutions.
4. Click on the Done Adding button to exit the Add mode.

(Optional) Delete Outputs

1. Click on the blue button Delete Output(s).
2. From the Name list click on the “x” space next to the Output(s) you wish to delete. Or select the connector.
3. Hit the red button Delete Output(s) button. All of the selected Outputs will be removed from the list.

(Optional) Adjust Output Parameters

Click on the Adjust tab that is located on the top. The output adjustment panel is divided in three sections
(Main, Timing, Connector). In the Adjustment panel you can:
1. [Main tab] Edit the name.
2. [Main tab] Select Format value and Frame Rate.
3. [Main tab] Enable Test Patterns with raster box and enable diagonal motion.
4. [Main tab] Define the Area of interest (AOI).

Image 7-1: Adjust MVR panel—Main

5. [Timing tab] Read all timing parameters associated with the selected format and make adjustments.

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 261

 System Setup

Image 7-2: Adjust MVR panel—Timing

6. [Connector tab] Select SDI type and Sync standards.

7. [Connector tab] Select Color space and Sample bit depth available as reported from the EDID of the Device.
8. [Connector tab] Change Connector capacity as long as the connector is not included in a Destination.
9. [Connector tab] Select HDCP Mode On or Off.
The default for HDMI outputs is Off. To turn On the HDCP Mode, click on the empty checkbox. When the
checkbox displays a check mark, HDCP Mode is On. HDCP Mode is not applicable to SDI outputs.

262 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 System Setup

Image 7-3: Adjust MVR panel—Connector

7.14 Configuration Menu > Add Screen

Destinations & Layers
General
In this procedure, you will Add Screen Destinations from the defined outputs.

Prerequisite
• Ensure that you are familiar with the Configuration Menu. For details on this menu, please refer to
chapter “Configuration Menu”, page 103

If more than one Destination is utilized, repeat the below steps until all Destinations are added.

Add Screen Destinations

1. Click on the Destination tab to define destinations for the defined outputs.
2. From the diagram area click on the output that you want to be part of the destination. If no connector is
selected the first available connector will be selected.
3. Click on the +Add Screen Destination blue button to assign the output to the screen destination.
4. When the destination is created a box appears next to the unit diagram.
5. If there is more than one output part of the destination, for a widescreen for instance, drag and drop these
outputs into the destination box. You will observe that the destination size automatically updates as new
outputs are added to the destination.

An EMP allows only a certain mix of Screen (Program) Destinations and AUX Destinations. Each
card can support up to four (4) Screen Destinations (Program Outputs), or up to four (4) AUX
outputs, or two (2) AUX and two (2) Screen Outputs. All Outputs can be AUX Destinations, and all
Outputs can be assigned to Screen Destinations. Screen Destination sizes are determined by the
available amount of pixel canvas, not by the number of Outputs assigned to a Screen Destination.

Add Layers to Destinations

Click on the Adjust tab that is located on the top.
1. Under the Assign sub-menu click on the +Assign Layer to Destination blue button.
2. Click on this button as many times is required to add the layers you are assigning to the destination. Observe
the number of layers indicated in the Layer box is incremented every time the add button is pressed. See also
“Configuration Menu > Layer optimization”, page 266.

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 263

 System Setup

3. If you need to delete layers, click on the Blue button Delete layers.

(Optional) Edit the Name

1. Double click on “Destination1” in the Name list to edit the name.
2. When the area turns blue, click the eraser icon to clear the field.
3. Type a new name and hit enter when done.

(Optional) Adjust Destination Parameters

Click on the “Adjust” tab that is located on the top. In this Tab there are three sub tabs: Assign, Output and
Wide (See below).

(Optional) Adjust Destination Parameters part 1 > Assign Tab

From this menu you can:
1. Edit the name.
2. Change the Destination from Screen to Aux.
3. Set the dimensions if more than one connector.
4. Use the Auto Configure Output Format function that reads the EDID of the connected device and will produce
a signal like that if still within the rules of VESA timings.
5. Delete outputs.
6. Assign or Delete Layers.

(Optional) Adjust Destination Parameters part 2 > Output Tab

From this menu you can:
1. See the output canvas (raster) size.
2. See in what order and place the outputs populate the Destination.
3. Select outputs for manipulation.
4. Choose more actions in sub tabs:

• Position:
- Enable Test Patterns with raster box and enable diagonal motion
- Define the Area of interest (AOI).

• Color:
- Perform color adjustments.

• Timing:
- Read the timing parameters associated with the selected format.

• Connector Settings:
- Select SDI type and SMPTE standards.

264 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 System Setup

(Optional) Adjust Destination Parameters part 3 > Wide Tab

From this menu you choose between the two sub tabs:
• Datadouble,
where you can adjust data Doubling parameters based on the selection done in the window below.

Image 7-4

• Feathering,
where you can:
- adjust feathering parameters based on the selection in the window below.
- turn Feather on or off per selection.

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 265

 System Setup

Image 7-5

(Optional) Delete Destinations

1. Click on the blue button Delete Destination(s).
2. From the Name list click on the “x” space next to the output(s) you wish to delete.
3. Hit the red button Delete Destination(s) button. All of the selected Destination(s) will be removed from the list.

7.15 Configuration Menu > Layer optimization

General
In this procedure, the usage of Layers inside the EMP will be elaborated.

Prerequisite
• Ensure that you are familiar with the Configuration Menu. For details on this menu, please refer to
chapter “Configuration Menu”, page 103, as well as previous chapter.

Layers in an Event Master Processor

In the system there are banks of Video Processing Units, VPS´s. These VPS´s service the total output raster
with layer resources. So 1, 4 or 8 outputs have the same number of layers to use as PIPs as the Mixing
Background Layer is on top of this.
The VPU ´s have a bandwidth setting that allow for a certain size of Resolution to enter the VPU and get
scaled. Currently we have SL / DL and 4K as settings allowing for mx 2048 x 1200 / 2560 x 1600 / 4096 x 2400
respectively.
The higher the resolution, the higher the bandwidth of the input and output of the scaler, or as we call it,
number of Links. (This can be found in the Aux Scaling settings too, where the highest setting is 8L, allowing
for 8 Links of 2K resolution).

266 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 System Setup

Here is an important difference from other systems, an EMP only scales the number of available layers based
on the inputs size, not the output size as long we are inside a maximum of a 4K or 10MP output. Once passed
the 10MP (MegaPixel), resources have to be added.
The S3-4K has only one bank of VPU´s with 4 x 2K capable layers, is within 10MP and have none of the below
described behavior.

Layer Optimization
E2 has several Banks of VPU`s and has up to 16 x 2K capable layers available for Destinations. The layers
can be assigned freely between the created Destinations.
However there is a few rules that came with freeing up the banks to allow “up to 16 layers” since the 1.5
software:
• Up to 4 outputs can use 16 mixing layers
• Up to 2 x 4 outputs can use 8 mixing layers EACH
We do this in order to allow as many layers to available to set ups and to be as flexible in use as the
infrastructure allow.

7.16 Configuration Menu > Add Aux Destinations

General
In this procedure, you will Add Aux Destinations from the defined outputs.

Prerequisite
• Ensure that you are familiar with the Configuration Menu. For details on this menu, please refer to
chapter “Configuration Menu”, page 103

If more than one Aux Destination is utilized, repeat the below steps until all Destinations are added.

Add Aux Destinations

1. Click on the Destination tab to define destinations for the defined outputs.
2. From the diagram area click on the output that you want to be part of the destination.
3. Click on the +Add Aux Destination blue button to assign the output to the Aux destination.
4. When the destination is created a box appears next to the E2 diagram.

(Optional) Edit the Name

1. Double click on “Destination1” in the Name list to edit the name.
2. When the area turns blue, click the eraser icon to clear the field.
3. Type a new name and hit enter when done.

(Optional) Adjust Destination Parameters

Click on the “Adjust” tab that is located on the top. In this Tab there are three sub tabs: Assign, Output and
Wide (See below).

(Optional) Adjust Destination Parameters part 1 > Assign Tab

From this menu you can:
1. Edit the name.
2. Change the Destination from Screen to Aux.
3. Set the dimensions if more than one connector.

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 267

 System Setup

4. Delete outputs.
5. Select the Auxiliary Scaling Capacity:

Aux Capacity defines how much resolution, or actually LINKs of data can be inserted into the scaler. Standard
setting is DL and refer to Dual Link as in connector capacity while 4K is the same as 4Links it also refer to the
total of the 4K resolution that can be entered. 8L refer to 8 Links of 2K data.
Each of the settings will allow for different size input / still and destination sources from the Input Resource tab
covered in the Programming Section below.
DL = Max 2560 x 1600 or 4095 x 1200
4K = Max 4096 x 2400 or 8192 x 1200
8L = Max 8192 x 2400 or 16384 x 1200

(Optional) Adjust Destination Parameters part 2 > Output Tab

From this menu you can:
1. See the output canvas (raster) size if more than one connector in the connector group used for the Aux
2. Choose more actions in sub tabs:

• Position:
- Enable Test Patterns with raster box and enable diagonal motion
- Define the Area of interest (AOI).

• Color:
- Perform color adjustments.

• Timing:
- Read the timing parameters associated with the selected format. Once a connector is in a connector
group, its Timing Parameters cannot be changed in the Destination

• Connector Settings:
- Select SDI type and SMPTE standards.
- Adjust the Connector Mapping from Horizontal to Vertical or Grid. For outputs bigger than 4K a X by X
dialog will be introduced

(Optional) Adjust Destination Parameters part 3 > Wide Tab

From this menu you choose between the two sub tabs:
• Datadouble,
where you can adjust data Doubling parameters.
• Feathering,

268 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 System Setup

where you can:

- adjust feathering parameters.
- turn Feather on or off per selection.

(Optional) Delete Destinations

1. Click on the blue button Delete Destination(s).
2. From the Name list click on the “x” space next to the output(s) you wish to delete. Or select the box to the right
of the EMP representation in the workspace.
3. Hit the red button Delete Destination(s) button. All of the selected Destination(s) will be removed from the list.

7.17 Configuration Menu > Add MVR Outputs

General
In this procedure, you will add MVR Outputs to the system.

Prerequisite
• Ensure that you are familiar with the Configuration Menu. For details on this menu, please refer to
chapter “Configuration Menu”, page 103

Add MVR Output

1. Click on the MVR tab to select the outputs that will be defined.

Auto create MVR Outputs

Auto create MVR Outputs is pressed to create the two available MWR outputs.

The MVROut1 and 2 have a Unit ID, which is the same as the actual unit, it is there to allow
selection in linked scenarios.

(Optional) Edit the Name

1. Double click on default name in the Name list to edit the name.
2. When the area turns blue, click the eraser icon to clear the field.
3. Type a new name and hit enter when done.

(Optional) Adjust Output Parameters

Click on the Adjust tab that is located on the top. The output adjustment panel is divided in three sections
(Main, Timing, Connector). In the Adjustment panel you can:
1. [Main tab] Auto Configure Output Format function is not available for MVR at this time.
2. [Main tab] Edit the name.
3. [Main tab] Select Format value and Frame Rate.
4. [Main tab] Enable Test Patterns with raster box and enable diagonal motion.
5. [Timing tab] Read all timing parameters associated with the selected format and make adjustments.
Adjustments are limited to the formats that can be pre-selected.
6. [Connector tab] Select HDMI Sync standards.
7. [Connector tab] Select Color space and Sample bit depth available as reported from the EDID of the Device.
8. [Connector tab] Select HDCP Mode for Multiviewer outputs.
The default for HDCP Mode is Off. To turn On the HDCP Mode, click on the empty HDCP Mode checkbox.
When the checkbox displays a check mark, HDCP Mode is On. HDCP Mode is not applicable to SDI outputs.

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 269

 System Setup

Image 7-6: Adjust tab: Connector Settings subtab

Only a few formats are available for the MVR Outputs as it is not a Program Output

Only Destinations with the same frame rate will be possible to add to the MVR output. More details
on this topic in the Help File in your Event Master Processor.

(Optional) Delete Outputs

1. Click on the blue button Delete MVR Output(s).
2. From the Name list click on the “x” space next to the Output(s) you wish to delete.
3. Hit the red button Delete Output(s) button. All of the selected Outputs will be removed from the list.

7.18 Programming Menu > Capture Stillstore from

Inputs & Backgrounds
General
In this procedure, you will capture the inputs or background inputs as a Stillstored image.

Prerequisite
• Ensure that you are familiar with the Programming Menu. For details on this menu, please refer to
chapter “Programming Menu”, page 178.
Captured Stills are used as thumbnails in general in the interface once they are used in a layer or destination.

Capture Stillstore (Stills)

1. Click on the Background or input tab on the top of the left hand side.
2. Click on the Camera icon, the icon changed to a crossed over version and the input is captured into memory.

270 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 System Setup

Image 7-7

3. The Still Store is now available in the Stills tab of the Input Resource tab.

Capacities and limitations

As a reference 100 still stores of 2K resolution can be stored, if the size of the still is bigger, the memory
allocation increases allowing for less number of stills. Image can be imported as described in the Operation
Section below.
Still Stores can be used in Backgrounds and Layers, but will need to be added from the right section in the
Input Resource tab.

7.19 Programming Menu > Select Thumbnails for

Backgrounds
General
In this procedure, you will add select thumbnails for the Background Sources.

Prerequisite
• Ensure that you are familiar with the Programming Menu. For details on this menu, please refer to
chapter “Programming Menu”, page 178.

(Optional) Update thumbnails from the PC memory

1. Click on the Background tab on the top of the left hand side.
2. Click on the thumbnail icon.

Image 7-8

3. Click in the black box next to input name.

4. Navigate the computers file system to find and select the desired thumbnail to be used Select Thumbnails
from the PC memory.

Characteristics and limitations

Images need to be JPG, PNG, BMP or GIF format.

7.20 Programming Menu > Select Thumbnails for

Inputs
General
In this procedure, you will add select thumbnails for the Input sources.

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 271

 System Setup

Prerequisite
• Ensure that you are familiar with the Programming Menu. For details on this menu, please refer to
chapter “Programming Menu”, page 178.

(Optional) Update thumbnails from the PC memory

1. Click on the Input tab on the top of the left hand side.
2. Click on the thumbnail icon.

Image 7-9

3. Click in the black box next to input name.

4. Navigate the computers file system to find and select the desired thumbnail to be used Select Thumbnails
from the PC memory.

Characteristics and limitations

Images need to be JPG, PNG, BMP or GIF format.

7.21 Programming Menu > Create Sources from

Inputs
General
In this procedure, you will create source files from the Input sources original source file.

Prerequisite
• Ensure that you are familiar with the Programming Menu. For details on this menu, please refer to
chapter “Programming Menu”, page 178.

When an Input is created, the software copies the Input to a source. More sources can be created
by following the steps below.

(Optional) Create additional sources

1. Click on the “Input” tab on the top of the left hand side.
2. Click on the List icon.

Image 7-10

3. Click on the arrow next the Input name.

4. To copy the raw original source file click on the PLUS in the Input.
5. To copy the source click on the copy icon. This creates a copy of the Source including changes made and
saved.

Image 7-11

272 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 System Setup

(Optional) Rename the Source name

1. Click on the “Input” tab on the top of the left hand side.
2. Click on the List icon.
3. Click on the arrow next the Input name.
4. Double-Click on the Source name that you wish to rename.
5. Type the new name in the blue box.

7.22 Programming Menu > Drop backgrounds into

Screen Destinations
General
In this procedure, you will drop backgrounds into Screen Destinations.

Prerequisite
• Ensure that you are familiar with the Programming Menu. For details on this menu, please refer to
chapter “Programming Menu”, page 178.

Drop Backgrounds
1. Click on the “Background” tab on the top of the left hand side.
2. Click on either the thumbnail or list icon.

Image 7-12

3. Click in the thumbnail area, even if it is black, or the listed name and drop it into the destination.

7.23 Programming Menu > Drop Sources, Layers

into Screen Destinations & Sources into layers
General
In this procedure, you will drop sources and Layers into Screen Destinations & Sources into layers.

Prerequisite
• Ensure that you are familiar with the Programming Menu. For details on this menu, please refer to
chapter “Programming Menu”, page 178.

Drop Sources into Screen Destinations

1. From the top of the Resource Pane to the left select INPUT. Choose from the available Source types:
1. Input
2. Stills
3. Destination
2. Drag and drop any of the available resources into a Destination.
When dragging and dropping a PNG with a transparency:
1. Drag the PNG to a Layer in a Destination.
2. Select the "Both" option in the Cut + Fill prompt.

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 273

 System Setup

The system detects the transparency as the "Cut" signal and the non-transparent portion of the image as
the "Fill" input.

Input Sources work only with Layers and Auxes, and Background Sources work only for
Backgrounds.

Advanced Layer management in Screen Destinations

1. From the top of the layout area click on the screen destination that you wish to add layers into.
2. On the right hand side click on the Layers tab.
3. Click on the arrow next to the Destination name to reveal all the layers and background that were assigned to
the destination.
4. Drag Layer1 into the preview screen. A black square box will appear.
5. Select the layer (black box) and then click on the Adjust tab on the top.
6. Select the “Window Adjustment” Icon and then unlock the aspect ratio lock by clicking in the lock icon.
7. Adjust the sizing parameters according to the size and position you want the layer to assume.

As the layer menu allow to hide and show the layer representation in the workspace it is an effective
way to select layers if they are hidden or outside of the workspace.

(Optional) Adjust Layer Parameters

With a Layer Selected click on the Adjust tab that is located on the top. All layer related adjustments can be
reached here.
1. Select the layers type, PIP (Standard) or KEY
2. Add Keyframes (See below).
3. Set the transition rate for the layer. 30 is standard and is in frames based on the Native Frame rate.

(Optional) Adjust Layer Parameters > Main submenu

With the Layer Main submenu you can:
1. Set border to any of the available versions, including Off.
2. Manipulate the border Width and Color.
3. Enable the Shadow and adjust its Sizing and Color parameters.

(Optional) Adjust Layer Parameters > Window Adjustment submenu

With the Window Adjustment submenu you can:
1. Adjust the size of the layer either with direct numerical entry, slider or + and – actions
2. Adjust Mask of the layer. This has in the past been called crop.

(Optional) Adjust Layer Parameters > Layer Effects submenu

With the Layer Effects submenu you can:
1. Activate and Adjust Strobe effect for the layer.
2. Activate and Adjust Flip effect for the layer.
3. Activate Freeze effect for the layer. This also have a shortcut in the bottom of the workspace.
4. Activate and Adjust Color Effects for the layer.
5. Activate Monochrome effect for the layer.
6. Activate Invert effect for the layer.

274 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 System Setup

If the Layers are supposed to toggle between Preview and Program, click the Toggle button in the
top of the Destinations Preview.

A source can be dropped into the Program of an Aux if the Program is Un-Locked. Un-lock the
Program by clicking on the small white lock in the bottom of the Destination.

(Optional) Key Frames

Click on the Adjust tab that is located on the top.
1. Select the layer you want to create the Key Frame.
2. Place the layer at the initial position and size.
3. Click the Blue “Add KF” button to create a new keyframe.
4. Move the layer at the end position and size.

Now the END state is saved only. The layer can move between the two states by clicking on the
green arrows. To execute the effect you now select the button ARM in the bottom of the workspace.

Keyframe will move the layer from the layers current position in Program to the Keyframed END
position. This allows re-using keyframe moves and other effects from ANY Preset as long as they
are on the right layer.

Now you are ready to execute the presets and transition on the desired preview look into Program.
Remember to select the corresponding destinations when you use the Trans All button.

7.24 Programming Menu > Drop Inputs to Aux

Destinations
General
In this procedure, you will drop Inputs into Aux Destinations.

Prerequisite
• Ensure that you are familiar with the Programming Menu. For details on this menu, please refer to
chapter “Programming Menu”, page 178.

Drop Layers into Screen Destinations

1. Make sure the Aux Destination is visible in the workspace by selecting the proper layout or view.
2. On the left hand side click on the Inputs tab.
3. Drag any Input Source into the preview screen of the Aux destination.

(Optional) Additional Adjustments

1. If the Aux is supposed to toggle between Preview and Program, click the Toggle button in the top of the
Destinations Preview
2. A source can be dropped into the Program of an Aux if the Program is Un-Locked. Un-lock the Program by
clicking on the small white lock in the bottom of the Destination.

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 275

 System Setup

7.25 Programming Menu > Presets And User Keys

General
In this procedure, you will drop sources and Layers into Screen Destinations & Sources into layers.

Prerequisite
• Ensure that you are familiar with the Programming Menu. For details on this menu, please refer to
chapter “Programming Menu”, page 178.

(Optional) User Keys

Click on the Adjust tab that is located on the top.
1. Click on the User Keys tab.
2. To create a user key, first select the layer parameters you wish to save to a user key: Type, transition, Effects,
Border, Shadow, Key, Position, Size, Source and Mask. All or None can be selected with the checkbox.
3. Click on the Save to new user Key button.
4. If desired, click on the User Key name to edit the name.
5. If desired click on the Number to edit the number. It can be any number with XXX format up to 300.
6. You can override the same user key by clicking on the name box and then select the Overwrite User Key
Button.
7. All of the User Keys are sequentially numbered. A specific preset can be found by typing the number in the
first gray box next to “#”. Immediately the respective preset will be highlighted and ready for further actions.
8. The box with the magnifying lens icon allows for a text string search. For example by typing “4by3”, it will
return all User Keys with the “4by3” part of its name.
9. User Keys can be applied to layers in a drag and drop fashion.
10. If there are several layers selected they can all get the same User Key applied by using the Apply Selected
(User Key) Button in the bottom of the List.

(Optional) Presets tab

Click on the Adjust tab that is located on the top.
1. Click on the Presets tab.
Before creating a Preset…
1. Select the desired creation option from the Creation Option drop-down list.
2. Show or hide Layers or Backgrounds as desired for Relative Presets.
2. To create a new preset first click on the Save From PVW button or Save From PGM button. It will save the
selected Destinations Preview set up or Program Respectively.
3. If desired, click on the Preset name to edit the name.
4. You can overwrite the same Preset by clicking on the name box and then select the Overwrite From PVW or
Overwrite From PGM button. It will save the selected Destinations Preview set up or Program Respectively.
5. Any Preset can be deleted by first clicking on the Delete Preset(s) blue button.
Then select the Presets desired to be deleted and click on the red Delete Selected.
6. Presets can be re-ordered via the Enable Reorder button who opens the List for Drag and Drop re-order.
7. You can execute presets and navigate through the stored presets by clicking one of the three buttons at the
bottom in this section:
Recall Previous, Recall Current and Recall Next.

276 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 System Setup

8. If the presets should go live directly on re-call the Preset To PVW button in the bottom can be clicked and
turned into Red Preset To PGM thus altering the functionality of the re-call.
9. All of the presets are sequentially numbered. A specific preset can be found by typing the number in the first
black box next to “#”. Immediately the respective preset will be highlighted.
10. The box with the magnifying lens icon allows for a text string search. For example by typing “Cam”, it will
return all presets with the “Cam” part of its name.
11. Presets can be locked from accidental deletion by activating the small blue lock to the right in the name area of
each preset.
12. Any preset can be re-numbered in the format of XXX.XX but a maximum of 1000 presets is still only possible.
13. Presets can be applied to Preview in a drag and drop fashion.

7.26 Programming Menu > Destination Transition

General
Any selection of Destinations or Destination Groups can be transitioned. It is done by selecting the
Destinations name tab in the top of the Preview area of the workspace. This selection is also recorded into
Presets and recalled with them.

Procedure
1. Select the Preview destination screen to transition to program.
2. By clicking the All Trans or Cut button all of the selected Preview screens will be transitioned to Program.
3. You can select background to be transitioned to program by clicking on the background button next to the
Screen name in the preview area.
4. The Destination transition resolve can follow different curves in order to better match camera brightness or
after preference. Default is S-Curve.
5. Time of the Transition is set in frames of the Native Frame rate and is recorded in Presets.

Time Per Destination CAN be set, but only one at the time.

7.27 Multiviewer Menu > Drop Inputs, Backgrounds

and Destinations
Make sure that you have assigned connectors to MVR outputs before you proceed.

General
In this procedure, you will setup the Multiviewer outputs to the MVR monitors..

Prerequisite
• Ensure that you are familiar with the Multiviewer Menu. For details on this menu, please refer to chapter
“Multiviewer (MVR) Menu”, page 225.

Drop Inputs, Backgrounds and Destinations into Multiviewer windows

We will setup the top window to display all the inputs and the bottom window to display the Program and
preview screens.
1. Click on the Multiviewer icon on the left hand side of the screen.

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 277

 System Setup

2. Click on the top tab that is labeled “Source” and drag the desired sources to view into the multiviewer window .
3. Click on the top tab that is labeled “Background” and drag the desired backgrounds to the multiviewer window.
4. Click on the top tab that is labeled “Destination” and drag the desired Destination to the multiviewer window.

(Optional) Color Adjustments

Click on the Adjust tab that is located on the top.
1. For each or multiple multiviewer windows you can perform color adjustments for the borders, UMD and
multiviewer background .

(Optional) Auto Layout Input

Click on the Adjust tab that is located on the top.
1. Alternatively, to selecting sources individually to drag them into the multiviewer window, drop all of the sources
simultaneously. Click on the Auto Layout Input button that is located at the bottom of the display area. All of
the sources will appear lined up at the top of the window.

(Optional) Source Preview

Click on the Adjust tab that is located on the top.
1. Select the layer you want to preview full screen.
2. Click on the Source preview button at the bottom menu area.

278 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 Updating firmware 8
About this chapter
This chapter provides a detailed procedure for upgrading Event Master series processor software (firmware).
The Event Master series processor provides two options for upgrading firmware via the front panel menu:
• Using the USB port on the front panel.
• Using the Web Upgrade.
A third solution is available to upgrading the Event Master series processor with the built-in web
interface. For details on the upgrade procedure via the Setting Menu in the Event Master Toolset
Software (EM GUI), please refer to chapter “Settings Menu > Web App area > Tools > Manage
Software”, page 244

In the event the Event Master series processor gets into a state in which it constantly reboots after a
software upgrade, press and hold the SEL and ESC keys simultaneously until the front panel shows
the choice of performing a factory reset or continuing. Performing a factory reset will allow the Event
Master series processor to boot normally.

Overview
• Upgrading firmware using the USB port
• Upgrading firmware using the web Upgrade

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 279

 Updating firmware

8.1 Upgrading firmware using the USB port

Necessary tools
USB drive (Not supplied by Barco) formatted in FAT32.

How to upgrading firmware

1. Ensure that your flash drive is formatted to use the FAT32 file system. If necessary, reformat the drive as
described in the following section “Formatting the flash drive”.
2. Prepare the flash drive with the upgrade file as describe below in the section “Preparing the flash drive with
the upgrade file”
Note: Upgrading software with the USB port requires the “em_update_vp.xx.xx.tar.gz” file to be within
a directory named EM (or E2).

3. When the drive is ready, refer to the chapter “Performing the firmware upgrade using the USB” describe below
for the upgrade procedure.

CAUTION: Reformatting the flash drive erases existing data. To avoid losing data, download to a
computer or a secure site any files you wish to keep, then format the drive.

Formatting the flash drive

1. Insert the flash drive into a Windows PC or laptop’s USB port.
2. Select a Windows Explorer or a panel allowing an overview on the disk drives and the hardware connected to
your computer (e.g. Start > Computer on Windows 7 or Start > My Computer on Windows XP).
3. On this view, right-click the drive that represents the flash drive.
4. Select Format from the menu that appears.
The Format Disk screen appears.

Image 8-1: Format Disk screen

5. Select FAT32 as the file system, and Quick Format under Format Options, as shown above in the Format
Disk screen illustration.
6. Click Start.
A message appears, warning that data will be erased during the formatting process.
7. Click OK to continue.

280 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 Updating firmware

A confirmation message appears after a few seconds. The flash drive is now ready to use

Upgrading software with the USB port requires the “em_update_vp.xx.xx.tar.gz” file to be within a
directory named EM (or E2).

Preparing the flash drive with the upgrade file.

1. Download the software upgrade for free from Barco’s website (URL: http://www.barco.com). Click on
myBarco and login to get access to secured information. Registration is necessary.
Note: If you are not yet registered, click on New to myBarco and follow the instructions. With the
created login and password, it is possible to login where you can download the Event Master series
processor software. It is not necessary to install any other software.

2. Unzip directly the software upgrade downloaded from the Barco website to the USB drive. This operation
automatically creates a directory named EM (or E2) with the upgrade file inside (em_update_vp.xx.xx.tar.gz).

Performing the firmware upgrade using the USB

1. Insert the flash drive into the unit’s USB port.
2. Select Firmware Upgrade from the Setup Menu. The Firmware Upgrade submenu appears.

Image 8-2

3. Select USB Code Upgrade. The menu shown in the following illustration appears.

Image 8-3

4. Scroll to the file you want to use, and press SEL.

5. Scroll to Upgrade and press SEL again.
A progress message appears.
6. When the file is loaded, the unit powers down and reboots.

CAUTION: Do not remove the flash drive or power down the Event Master series processor until
the firmware file is uploaded.

8.2 Upgrading firmware using the web Upgrade

The upgrade operation begins with a step of validation to check if a new version is available.

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 281

 Updating firmware

How to upgrading firmware

1. Verify that the Event Master series processor has internet access. Contact your system administrator if
necessary.
2. Select Setup > Firmware Upgrade > Web Upgrade. The submenu shown in the following illustration
appears.

Image 8-4: Web Firmware Upgrade Submenu

3. Select Check.
A message informs you if a new firmware version is available.

Image 8-5: Firmware Version-Upgrade Message

or
If during the “Check” process new firmware is NOT detected, the following message will show:

Image 8-6: No Firmware Available Message

4. Press SEL to start the upgrade. A message will inform the user to “Please wait...”

Image 8-7: Upgrade Wait Message

5. After the upgrade is finished, the unit will automatically reboot.

Image 8-8: Resetting Message

282 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 Updating firmware

If you are not connected to the internet, a message prompts you to check the connection.

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 283

 Updating firmware

284 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 General operation
example 9
About this chapter
The application below is presented to demonstrate the basic E2 operation. The example provides the user a
step-by-step setup and operation instructions in order to meet some specific event requirements.

Overview
• Event requirements
• Preliminary
• Control Software Operation
• Configuration Menu
• Programming Menu
• Multiviewer (MVR) Menu

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 285

 General operation example

9.1 Event requirements

Description
Inputs for the event are provided from a Windows PC, two AJA KiPROs file recorders, an Apple Macbook and
two video cameras.
Several outputs are required as follows:
• Two program outputs for the projectors dedicated to the Main screen. Two PIPs are displayed that are
equal in size and are side-by-side. Two looks are desired:
- One look displays the two video clips simultaneously from the KiPROs.
- The other look shows the PowerPoint and the stage camera.
- Background will be provided from a PC dual-head card.
• Single Screen Site Screen: Displays the videos from two KiPROS and two cameras. The images are
always full screen and transition on screen at 0.5 sec.
• A DSM monitor is required for camera adjustments.
• Two 2 monitors for multi-viewing.

Image 9-1

9.2 Preliminary
Application Diagram

Image 9-2

286 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 General operation example

wiring
Connect the input and output devices to the E2 as follows:
Signal Type Device Name Content Connector Type Slot-Connectors
Input CAM1 Audience camera 3G-SDI 4-1
Input CAM2 Stage Camera 3G-SDI 4–3
Input PC Background DVI 6–1
Input PC Background DVI 6–2
Input KiPRO1 Video Clip1 HDMI 8–3
Input KiPRO2 Video Clip2 HDMI 9–3
Input MacPRO Power Point DisplayPort 10–1

Output (AUX) DSM DSM for cameras HDMI 11–1

Output Proj-L Projector Left Screen SDI 13–1
Output Proj-R1 Projector Right Screen 1 SDI 13–3
Output Proj-R2 Projector Right Screen 2 SDI 13–4

Multiviewer MVR1 Program/ Preview Monitor HDMI 14–1

Multiviewer MVR1 Input Sources Monitor HDMI 14–3

Image 9-3

9.3 Control Software Operation

Overview
In this section we will use the control software (Event Master Toolset Software) to setup the E2 and create
presets and user keys to be used during the event. We will follow the steps sequentially outlined in diagram
bellow.

Workflow Diagram
This diagram shows all the steps necessary to setup the system.

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 287

 General operation example

Image 9-4

Set up from A to Z
As outlined in the previous chapter the control software is divided in 3 parts:
1. Configuration Menu. In this section users define the system components like inputs, backgrounds, outputs
and destinations. See the detailed procedure in section“Configuration Menu”, page 289.
2. Programming Menu. In this page users create sources from inputs, drop layers and backgrounds into
screens and create User keys and presets. See the detailed procedure in section “Programming Menu”, page
294.
3. Multiviewer (MVR) Menu is the module used to setup the Multiviewer outputs (on one or two monitors). See
the detailed procedure in section “Multiviewer (MVR) Menu”, page 305.

288 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 General operation example

9.4 Configuration Menu

Overview
Here, we define E2 components by adding inputs, backgrounds, outputs and destinations.

C1: Initial Setup

1. When you connect to an actual unit, instead of working offline, the software should connect automatically. The
unit is listed in the System configuration page under the “Discovered” tab with the button on turning green.
2. Drop the E2 from the device area into the middle diagram area.
3. If multiple units are connected to the PC, the green LEDs next to the system name will turn green. You can
assign a unique name to each unit. In this application we will connect to only one unit and assign the name
“Godzilla” to it. For online operations, you can confirm that you are connected to the right unit by clicking the
arrow in front of E2 to reveal the unit’s IP address. Verify that this address is the same as the address listed on
the unit’s front panel on the top status menu

Image 9-5

Note: If the unit doesn’t connect automatically to the PC, you can type the PC’s IP address in the field
under “Manual Connect”.

4. For this application we will leave the default setting for Native rate: 59.94, Mode: 2K and Genlock: OFF.

C2: Add Background

1. Click on the “Background” tab to select the input that will be assigned as a background.
2. Click on the +Add Background blue button to enter the Add mode.
3. Click on the top DVI connector of slot 6 to select the input to define as background.
4. Click on the bottom DVI connector of slot 6 to select the input to define as background. We need to do this
twice because the background comes from a dual-head DVI card.
5. Click on the Done Adding button to exit the Add mode.
6. Double click on Background1 in the Name list to edit the name.
7. When the area turns blue, click the eraser icon to clear the field.
8. Type a new name, “PC-Background”. Hit enter when done.

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 289

 General operation example

Image 9-6

In this application only one background is required, but in applications where more than one
background is required, repeat steps 2 thru 6 until done.

C3: Add Input

1. Click on the Input tab to select the inputs that will be defined.
2. Click on the +Add Input blue button to enter the Add mode.
3. Click on the first SDI connector of slot 4 to defined as the camera 1 input.
4. Click on the Done Adding button to exit the Add mode.
5. Double click on Input1 in the Name list to edit the name.
6. When the area turns blue, click the eraser icon to clear the field.
7. Type a new name: “CAM1-Stage”. Hit enter when done.
8. Repeat steps 2 thru 6 until done. Enter the names as shown in the image below.

Image 9-7

C4: Add Output

1. Click on the Output tab to select the outputs that will be defined.
2. Click on the +Add Output blue button to enter the Add mode.
3. Click on the first HDMI connector of slot 11.

290 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 General operation example

4. Click on the Done Adding button to exit the Add mode.

5. Double click on Output1 in the Name list to edit the name.
6. When the area turns blue, click the eraser icon to clear the field and type a new name, “DSM”. Hit enter when
done.
7. Repeat steps 2 thru 6 until done to add the rest of the output connectors with the following names:
• Site projector (SDI, Slot 13–1)
• Main-Left Projector (SDI, Slot 13–3)
• Main-Right Projector (SDI, Slot 13–4)
When you are done the menu should look like this:

Image 9-8

Note: The “N/A” at this end refers to the destinations that will be added next.

C5 – Part1: Add Site Screen Destinations

In this section we will create the Site Screen Destination and assign two layers.
1. Click on the Destination tab to define destinations for the created outputs.
2. From the diagram area click on the first BNC of slot 13 that is the Site Projector output connector. The BNC
will be highlighted.
3. Click on the +Add Screen Destination blue button to assign the output for the screen destination.
4. When the destination is created a box appears next to the E2 diagram.
5. Double click on the Destination1 area in the Name list to edit the name.
6. When the area turns blue, click the eraser icon to clear the field and type a new name, “Site Screen”.
7. Click on the top at the Adjust:Site Screen tab and in the Assign menu under the Output section click on the
+Assign Layer to Destination blue button to assign a layer to the destination .
8. In the layout area “1 layer” will appear in the green area of the box.
9. Repeat the previous step to add one more layer.

C5 – Part2: Add Main Screen Destinations

In this section we will create the Main Screen Destinations and assign 3 layers.

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 291

 General operation example

1. To create the Main Screen destination, please repeat steps 2 thru 6 of the previous stage (C5–Part1) by first
clicking on the “Main-Left Projector” BNC.
2. Rename the destination to “Main Screen”.
3. After the destination is created, click on the “Main-Right Projector” BNC and drag it into the “Main Screen”
destination box. The Screen size will immediately change to 3840x1080.
4. Repeat the same steps as above to add layer to the destination but click the add button 3-times to add 3
layers.

C5 – Part3: adjust the projector overlap in Main Screen destinations

In this section we will adjust the projector overlap area for the Main screen.
1. Under the Wide menu in the small diagram area shows the destination, click on the line between the two sites.
The line turns blue.
2. Click on the Data Double button and enter “100” for the H overlap value. Note: We will leave the feathering to
the default value of 2.2.

Image 9-9

292 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 General operation example

C6: Add Aux Destinations

1. From the diagram area click on the DSM output. The connector will be highlighted.
2. Click on the +Add Aux Destination blue button to assign the DSM output to an Aux destination.
3. When the Aux destination is created a box appears next to the E2 diagram.
4. Double click on the Destination1 area in the Name list to edit the name.
5. When the area turns blue, click the eraser icon to clear the field.
6. Type a new name, “DSM”. Hit enter when done.

Image 9-10

C7: Add MVR Output

1. Click on the MVR tab to select the MVR outputs that will be defined.
2. Click on the +Add MVR Output blue button to enter the Add mode.
3. Click on the first HDMI connector of slot 14 .
4. Click on the Done Adding button to exit the Add mode.
5. Double click on MVROut1 in the Name list to edit the name.
6. When the area turns blue, click the eraser icon to clear the field and type a new name, “Sources”. Hit enter
when done.
7. Click on the third HDMI connector of slot 14 .
8. Click on the Done Adding button to exit the Add mode.
9. Double click on MVROut2 in the Name list to edit the name.
10. When the area turns blue, click the eraser icon to clear the field and type a new name, “Program/Preview”. Hit
enter when done.
At this stage the layout section of the GUI should look like this:

Image 9-11

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 293

 General operation example

9.5 Programming Menu

Overview
The programing Menu is accessed by clicking on the Programming icon on the left hand side of the screen.
The area in the middle will display a composite of the two screen destinations and the Aux destination created
in the previous section.
We will assign layers and backgrounds into the screens, adjust sizing and positioning parameters, and finally,
drop sources into the layers.

Image 9-12

P1: You can skip this step if you don’t want thumbnail images to represent the background. In this
case, the background in the destinations area will be black and noted only by the assigned name.

P1: Select thumbnails for Background.

1. From the left hand side, click on the Background tab.
2. In the Background menu, click on the Background tab.
3. Click on the thumbnail button.

294 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 General operation example

Image 9-13

4. Now, you can navigate the computer to select the desirable pic by clicking in the black square.
5. After a pic is selected, the image will fill the black square as shown below.

Image 9-14

P2: You can skip this step if you don’t want thumbnail images to represent the inputs/sources. In this
case, the layers in the destinations area will be black and noted only by the assigned name.

P2: Select thumbnails for Inputs

1. From the left hand side, click on the Input tab.
2. In the Input menu, click on the Inputs tab
3. Click on the thumbnail button.
4. Click in the black box and navigate the computer to find and select the desired pic.
5. After a pic is selected, the image will fill the black square.
6. Repeat this sequence until a pic is selected for each input.
7. When these steps are completed, the section will appear as follows.

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 295

 General operation example

Image 9-15

P3: Created Additional Sources from Inputs

As noted previously, a source is generated automatically for each input. For this application, only
one source will be used for each input, so no additional sources need to be created. Therefore, in
this example this step will be skipped.

P4: Drop Backgrounds into Screen Destinations

1. On top click on the Main Screen tab to only view the Main Screen.
2. Select the Background tab from the top left side and drop it into the preview layer.

296 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 General operation example

Image 9-16

P5: Drop Layers into Screen Destinations & Sources into layers
In this step we will add layers into each Destination, assign sources to layers and adjust their size and position
parameters.

Part1: Site Screen

1. On top, click on the Site Screen tab to only view the Site Screen.
2. On the right hand side of the screen click on the Layers tab and then click on the arrow next to the Destination
name to reveal all the layers and background that were assigned to the destination.
3. Drag Layer1 into the preview screen. A white square box will appear.

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 297

 General operation example

Image 9-17

4. Select the layer (white box) and then click on the Adjust tab on the top.
5. Select the Window Adjustment Icon and then unlock the aspect ratio lock by clicking in the lock icon.

298 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 General operation example

Image 9-18

6. Adjust the sizing parameters as follows:

1. H Size: 1920
2. V size: 1080
3. H Pos: 0
4. V Pos: 0
7. From the left hand side, click on the Input tab.
8. Click the source under CAM1 and drop it into the layer.

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 299

 General operation example

Image 9-19

9. Transition the layer to program.

10. Drop the source for CAM 2 to the preview layer.

300 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 General operation example

Image 9-20

Part2: Main Screen

1. On top click on the Main Screen tab to only view the Main Screen.
2. Under the Layers tab, click on the arrow next to “Main Screen”.
3. Drag Layer1 and Layers 2 anywhere into the preview screen. Two white square boxes will appear.

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 301

 General operation example

Image 9-21

4. Click on the Adjust tab on the top and select the “Window Adjustment” Icon.
5. Unlock the aspect ratio lock by clicking in the lock icon.
6. Click each layer separately and adjust their sizing parameters as follows. Note: You need to unlock the aspect
ratio for each layer.
Layer1
1. H Size: 1720
2. V size: 970
3. H Pos: 100
4. V Pos: 50
Layer2
1. H Size: 1720
2. V size: 970
3. H Pos: 1920
4. V Pos: 50
7. Click the sources under KiPRO1 and Mac-Power Point and drop them into the perspective layers.
8. Select both layers on the Preview.
9. Transition the layers to program.
10. Drop the KiPRO2 source to the layer on the left.

302 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 General operation example

Image 9-22

P6: Drop Sources into Aux Screens (DMS Output)

1. On top click on the DSM tab.
2. Drag the CAM 1 input1 into the preview screen.

Image 9-23

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 303

 General operation example

P7: In this application we will not save any user keys. All layers attributes will be saved.

P7: Create user Keys and Presets

1. Select the Site screen destination and the layer in preview.
2. Under the Preset tab click in the “Save to new Preset” button.
3. Edit the name to reflect the source that is on Preview.
4. Repeat the previous steps to save 3 more presets, so we have a preset for both video clips and both cameras.

Image 9-24

5. Select the Main screen and select the sources into the two PIPs are the event requirements described in the
introduction of the application note.
6. Save each look into a preset and give it an appropriate name.
Now you are ready to execute the presets and transition on the desire preview look into Program. Remember
to select the corresponding destinations when you use the Trans All button.

304 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 General operation example

Image 9-25

9.6 Multiviewer (MVR) Menu

Make sure that you have assigned connectors to MVR outputs as outlined in section C7 before you
proceed.

Overview
Click on the Multiviewer icon on the left hand side of the screen to reach the Multiviewer Menu, the module
used to setup the Multiviewer outputs to the MRV monitors. You should see two screens since two Multiviewer
outputs were declared.
We will setup the top window to display all the inputs and the bottom window to display the Program and
preview screens.

Setup the “Sources” window

1. Click on the top tab that is labeled “MVROut1”.
2. Click on the Auto Layout Input button that is located at the bottom of the display area. All of the sources will
appear lined up at the top of the window.
3. Click on the Background tab and the top of the right hand side.
4. Drag the PC-Background into the Window area.

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 305

 General operation example

Image 9-26

5. Resize and arrange the PIPs to fill the screen.

Image 9-27

Setup the “Program/Preview” window

1. Click on the top tab that is labeled “MVROut2”.
2. Click on the Destination tab and the top of the right hand side.
3. Drag the Program and Previews under the Site and Main Screens into the window area.
4. Resize and arrange the PIPs so they appear as follows:

306 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 General operation example

Image 9-28

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 307

 General operation example

308 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 Controller
Orientation 10
About this chapter
This chapter provides a detailed description of the Event Master controllers.

Overview
• General description
• EC-30 front panel overview
• EC-30 backside overview
• EC-50 front panel overview
• EC-50 backside overview
• EC-200/EC-210 front panel overview
• EC-200/EC-210 backside overview
• Use of color
• Touch screen
• Destinations buttons
• Layer buttons
• Assign buttons with contextual displays
• T-Bar
• Transition buttons
• Future Expansion Button Group (EC-200/EC-210 only)
• Direct Selection Button Group and Barco Eye Button (EC-200/EC-210 only)
• System Function Button Group (EC-200/EC-210 only)
• Syntax Entry Button Group (EC-200/EC-210 only)
• Contextual Display Button Group (EC-200/EC-210 only)
• Num Pad Button Group (EC-200/EC-210 only)
• Live Function Button Group (EC-200/EC-210 only)
• Trackball (EC-200/EC-210 only)
• Rotary Encoders (EC-200/EC-210 only)
• Panel Lock button (EC-200/EC-210 only)
• Save Button (EC-200/EC-210 only)

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 309

 Controller Orientation

10.1 General description

General
Event Master controllers are dedicated hardware consoles specifically designed to support the Event Master
series processors, devices, and systems created from several of them. They run the Event Master Toolset
Software (EMTS) and the EC-200 on an industrial operating system with optimized hardware. They include
tactile operation style with buttons and touch screen displays, allowing for easy and direct control of the Event
Master series processors..
There are three models of Event Master controller:
• EC-30 (compact controller).
• EC-50 (small controller).
• EC-200/EC-210 (large controller).
The EC-30 is the most compact version of the EC-series Event Master controllers. As an extension of the
EMTS, the EC-30 provides essential selections for sources, presets, layers, and destinations. The EC-30
connects as a USB peripheral to an existing Event Master control computer.
The EC-50 is a wing concept, or an accessory to the EC-200/EC-210, and it needs either a host computer
running the EMTS or an EC-200/EC-210 controller for full function. The button layout of the EC-50 is identical
to the layout found on the left-hand side of the EC-200/EC-210, and the buttons have the same functions as
the buttons on an EC-200/EC-210.
The Event Master EC-200/EC-210 controller is a dedicated hardware console specifically designed to support
Event Master series processors and devices. It runs the EMTS. It can stand alone, or it can support additional
external Event Master compatible devices over network and USB.

Main components overview

Image 10-1: Controller main components overview

EC-200/EC-210 large EC-30 compact controller

EC-50 small controller
controller
1 2x work lights (flexible 1x work light (flexible support) NA
support)
2 2x Touch screens 1x Touch screen NA
3 Back light on front face Back light on front face NA
4 User assignable presentation User assignable presentation User assignable presentation
buttons buttons buttons
5 T-bar T-bar T-bar
6 Trackball and ring NA NA

310 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 Controller Orientation

EC-200/EC-210 large EC-30 compact controller

EC-50 small controller
controller
7 Function buttons and numpad NA NA
8 Wheel (rotary encoders) NA NA
layout

EC-200/EC-210 General description

The Event Master EC-200/EC-210 controller is dedicated computing hardware. Its front has a keyboard area
and two touchscreens, and the back has connectors. It runs its software, the Event Master Toolset, on an
industrial Linux operating system.
Tactile operation with buttons and touch screen displays allow for easy and direct control of the Event Master
series processors.

EC-50 General description

The small form factor of the EC-50 is equally at home next to an EC-200/EC-210 or as part of a Event Master
Toolset Win PC or MAC OSX System.
It provides a traditional T-Bar and button interface for the Destination, layer and preset functions of the
EventMaster Toolset.
It uses the same high quality controls as found in the EC-200/EC-210 console, ensuring responsive and
reliable operation.
A 15.6 inch widescreen with 10 point multi touch is integrated in the wing allowing you to connect a screen
output from your host system.
One LED desk light is supplied, fully dimmable and software controllable. The other light intensities are also
adjustable via the EMTS Settings Menu page.
A 15.6 inch HD widescreen with 10 point multi touch is integrated in the wing allowing you to connect a screen
output from your host system.

EC-30 General description

The compact EC-30 is a USB peripheral added to an Event Master control computer. It provides essential
selections for sources, presets, layers, and destinations.

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 311

 Controller Orientation

10.2 EC-30 front panel overview

Overview

Image 10-2: EC-30 front panel overview

1 T-bar
2 User-assignable contextual display buttons
3 Cut and All Trans buttons
4 12 Destination buttons and a contextual
display showing page of Destinations
5 Layer buttons and a contextual display
showing page of Layers
6 Assign buttons in two identical rows that can
host multiple selections and a contextual
display showing page of the Assign button
row

312 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 Controller Orientation

10.3 EC-30 backside overview

Overview

Image 10-3: EC-30 backside overview

1 DC power
2 USB B to Host
3 Strain-relief tabs
4 25W, 12V power supply

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 313

 Controller Orientation

10.4 EC-50 front panel overview

Overview

Image 10-4: EC-50 front panel overview

1 T-bar
2 Work light (flexible support)
3 Touch screen
4 12 Destination buttons and a contextual
display showing page of Destinations
5 Layer buttons and a contextual display
showing page of Layers
6 Assign Buttons in three identical rows that
can host multiple selections and a contextual
display showing page of the Assign button
row
7 Cut and All Trans buttons
8 User-assignable contextual display buttons

314 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 Controller Orientation

10.5 EC-50 backside overview

Overview

Image 10-5

1 Power switch
2 Power connector
3 USB B connector for connection to Host
system
4 2x USB A Connectors for USB peripherals,
such as mouse and keyboard
5 DVI Input connector for a standard DVI or
VGA video signal
6 Optional accessory location for future
expansions
7 Kensington Lock attachment point
8 Red effects light (located behind rear vent
holes)

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 315

 Controller Orientation

10.6 EC-200/EC-210 front panel overview

Overview

Image 10-6

1 T-bar 11 Direct selection button group

2 Work light (flexible support) 12 Syntax entry button group
3 Touch screen 13 Numpad
4 12 Destination buttons and a contextual 14 Contextual display button group
display showing page of Destinations
5 Layer buttons and a contextual display 15 Live function button group
showing page of Layers
6 Assign buttons in three identical rows that 16 Arrow button group
can host multiple selections and a contextual
display showing page of the Assign button
row
7 User-assignable contextual display buttons 17 Trackball with 4 modifier buttons
8 Cut and All Trans buttons 18 T-bar with Disable button, All Trans, and
Barco Eye function button
9 System function button group 19 On-screen keyboard button, console lock
button, Save All button
10 Future expansion button group* 20 Rotary encoders, referred to as wheels, with
modifier buttons
* On the EC-210 the future expansion button group features the “Play/Pause” and “Stop” CUE buttons.

316 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 Controller Orientation

10.7 EC-200/EC-210 backside overview

Overview

Image 10-7: EC-200 backside overview

1 Power switch 6 2x Ethernet RJ45 network connectors

2 Power connector 7 4x USB A connectors for USB peripherals, such
3 PSU fan outlet, not to be blocked as mouse and keyboard
4 Kensington Lock attachment point 8 Rear I/O plate
5 2x DVI Output connector for a standard HD DVI 9 Red effects light (located behind rear vent holes)
signal

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 317

 Controller Orientation

EC-210 Overview

Image 10-8: EC-210 backside overview

1 Power switch 6 HDMI output connector

2 Power connector 7 2x Ethernet RJ45 network connectors
3 PSU fan outlet, not to be blocked 8 4x USB A connectors for USB peripherals, such
4 Kensington Lock attachment point as mouse and keyboard
5 HDMI input connector 9 Rear I/O plate
10 Red effects light (located behind rear vent holes)

10.8 Use of color

General
The unit has several colored buttons and led indications which support the user by indicating selections and
possible actions.

Button color
• Blue buttons indicate the Freeze function.
• Green buttons indicate a layer selection or an action to a layer selection.
• Red buttons always indicate Transitions.
• Yellow indicate save functionality.
• Black is neutral.

Led Color in buttons

• Blue indicates selected in destination buttons.
• Green indicates that the layer on preview is selected (Normal).
• Green can also indicate that the buttons function has an opposite function or other mode.
• Red indicates that the layer on program is selected (Live or Unlocked Program).
• Red can also indicate that the buttons function is selected / active, like T-Bar Disable.

318 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 Controller Orientation

Image 10-9

1 Button
2 LED

Backlight color for display

Applies to an entire row of displays.

• Source = Yellow backlight.

• User Key = Magenta backlight.
• Background Source = Green backlight.
• Preset = White backlight.

A Red backlight is reserved for LOS (Loss Of Signal).

10.9 Touch screen

General
The touchscreen is a 10 point multi touch HD (1920x1080) screen. It offers direct interaction with the Toolsets
UI. Most notably the console setup page that works both as the assign page and a “virtual controller” allowing
for button interaction.

10.10 Destinations buttons

Overview

Image 10-10

1 12 destinations buttons. 4 Arrow buttons (up and down).

2 Blue LED. 5 Names of destinations written in the bottom of
3 Contextual Display (show the range of buttons — the screen.
e.g. 1–12).

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 319

 Controller Orientation

Description
The 12 destinations buttons have several pages which allows an operator to define custom orders and layouts
of mapped Destinations.
The name of the destination is written in the bottom of the console menu page. It can be shown or hidden on
preference.
The Contextual Display above button 12 will show the range of buttons 1 – 12, 13 – 24 etc. Use the Arrow (up
and down) to change the range.
LED color under the Destinations buttons are BLUE. This indicates the Destination is selected when lit.

10.11 Layer buttons

Overview

Image 10-11

1 Background button + 8 Layer buttons. 4 Arrow buttons (up and down).

2 LED (Red or Green). 5 Layer Operator buttons.
3 Contextual Display (show the range of buttons —
e.g. 1–8).

Description
There are 9 Layer buttons with as many pages as supported by the system. The red or green LEDs under
these buttons indicate the selection of layers. The first button is ALWAYS background layer and therefore
marked BG.
LED color under Layer buttons are RED and GREEN:
LED color Description
Red Selected on PGM
Green Selected on PVW

Button 2 – 9 is marked 1/8 on top and 9/16 on the bottom of the button.
The contextual Display above the button marked 8/16 will show the range of buttons 1 – 8, 9 – 16 etc. Use the
Arrow (up and down) to change the range.
Layer Operator Buttons
The six larger buttons to the left of the Layer buttons are Layer Executor buttons mapped to the corresponding
functions in the EMTS. These are further explained below in chapter “Controller Operation”, page 343.

320 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 Controller Orientation

10.12 Assign buttons with contextual displays

Overview

Image 10-12

1 LED (Red or Green). 4 Three rows of 2 Arrow buttons (up and down).
2 Three rows of 12 Assign buttons 5 Three displays
3 Three rows of 12 displays 6 Three type buttons

Description
The three rows of 12 buttons, each with a dedicated display can be assigned with several types of functions
including memories, Source Files, Presets and UseKeys.
Each row also has an Up and Down arrow buttons which are used to switch between pages per row.
An additional button to the right of the arrow buttons on that row is called BUTTON TYPE. It has a display
above it. The button toggles between assign types with multicolor indication of selected assign button type.
LEDs under the Assign buttons are RED and GREEN:
LED color Description
Red for On PGM
Green for On PVW

Backlight color assign per function (for an entire row) :

Function Color
Source Yellow backlight
User Key Magenta backlight
Background Source Green backlight
Preset White backlight
Cue Cyan backlight
Command List Blue backlight

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 321

 Controller Orientation

10.13 T-Bar
EC-50 Overview

Image 10-13

1 T-Bar
R Right Side of the Controller

EC-200/EC-210 Overview

Image 10-14

1 T-Bar
2 T-Bar disable button
R Right Side of the Controller

Description
A traditional manual transition T-bar is included in the consoles. It is placed on the far right side of the console
for convenience.
The EC-200/EC-210 has a T-Bar disable button above to the left. The button has a red led indication who
stays lit when the T-Bar is disabled.
The T-Bar will transition from 0 to 100% of the transition for Destinations and will cut Auxiliary at 50%.
In the event of a unknown state a up or down motion of the T-Bar will re-align the T-Bar to 0%. If the unknown
state was between 0 and 100% the T-Bar will continue and push the transition thru to 100%.

322 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 Controller Orientation

10.14 Transition buttons

EC-50 Overview

Image 10-15

1 All Trans
2 Cut
R Right Side of the Controller

EC-200/EC-210 Overview

Image 10-16

1 All Trans
2 Cut
R Right Side of the Controller

Description
Depending the controller type, two or three buttons are provided for transitional triggering:
Type of transition EC-50 EC-200/EC-210
All Trans 1 button 2 buttons
Cut 1 button 1 button

All Trans
Preview transitions to Program according at the rate indicated in the rate box following the s-curve pattern.
The layer on Program does NOT fade in preview at the same time. The layer on Program appears in Preview
when the transition is completed.
Cut
Instantly transitions the Preview to Program.

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 323

 Controller Orientation

10.15 Future Expansion Button Group (EC-200/EC-

210 only)
Overview
This group of buttons is present only on the large controllers (EC-200 and EC-210).

Image 10-17

1 Future Expansion Button Group

R Right Side of the Controller

Description
This group of buttons holds a promise for future functions. On the EC-210, this group contains the “Play/
Pause” and “Stop” CUE buttons.

Image 10-18: “Play/Pause” and “Stop” CUE buttons

With the release of software version 6.2, Play/Pause and Stop button functionality has been added to the EC-
200. To add the Play/Pause and Stop buttons to an EC-200, use the Key Cap Set EC-210 Upgrade Kit (P/N:
90405353).

10.16 Direct Selection Button Group and Barco Eye

Button (EC-200/EC-210 only)
Overview
These buttons are present only on the large controllers (EC-200 and EC-210).

324 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 Controller Orientation

Image 10-19

1 Selection Button Group

2 Barco Eye button (2x)
R Right Side of the Controller

Description

Image 10-20

Button Name Description

1 All Dest Selects all Destinations for further actions or with Press and Hold have
extended function.
2 All Layer Selects all Layers in selected Destination(s) for further actions or with
Press and Hold have extended function.
3 Clear The CLEAR button has the same function as the Clear GUI Button.
Extended functionality is reached with Press and Hold for various Buttons.
4 Barco Eye Modifier Button, like Windows/CTRL/Fn button on a keyboard. Further
described in functionality around other buttons.
Note: A second Barco Eye Button, who has the same function as its twin,
is situated to the right on the console.
5 PVW Trans The PVW Trans button has the same function as the PVW Trans GUI
Button.
6 Capture Still The Capture Still Button is used in Syntax entry to record and restore Still
Stores from the Inputs.

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 325

 Controller Orientation

10.17 System Function Button Group (EC-200/EC-

210 only)
Overview
These buttons are present only on the large controllers (EC-200 and EC-210).

Image 10-21

1 System function Button Group

R Right Side of the Controller

Description

Image 10-22

Button Name Description

1 HELP Err This button has currently no function.
2 Layout The Layout Function Button allows for recording and recalling layouts
where applicable like Multi-viewer, Assign Buttons and Programmer
screen & Preset screen. In the future other features will benefit from this
function.
3 Screens This is the function to select the windows of the GUI currently in the
displays of the controller. 2 internal and 2 external are possible.
4 Save PVW Latches and lights a RED led and activates a Store/Record Mode with
(Save Preview) applicable functions from Preview. The Save PVW of the GUI will be RED
as long this mode is active.
5 Save PGM Latches and activates a Store/Record Mode with applicable functions from
(Save Program) Preview. The Save PGM of the GUI will be RED as long this mode is
active.
6 Adjust Pressing the Adjust Button opens the Adjust tab.

326 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 Controller Orientation

10.18 Syntax Entry Button Group (EC-200/EC-210

only)
Overview
These buttons are present only on the large controllers (EC-200 and EC-210).

Image 10-23

1 Syntax entry Button Group

R Right Side of the Controller

Description

Image 10-24

These buttons are used in the programming syntax introduced with EC-200. A programming syntax will be
necessary in order to effectively program the Event Master System once its full size becomes available.
When each group of resources can be several hundred, direct select buttons seize to be effective. The syntax
allow direct access with a few keystrokes.
Each button is further explained in the chapter “Controller Operation”, page 343,

10.19 Contextual Display Button Group (EC-200/

EC-210 only)
Overview
These buttons are present only on the large controllers (EC-200 and EC-210).

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 327

 Controller Orientation

Image 10-25

1 Contextual Display Button Group

R Right Side of the Controller

Description

Image 10-26

1 Display
2 Button
These 12 Displays with its adjoining button allow different function based on the current programming need or
“contextually mapped functions” and are called Contextual Display Buttons.
The Mapping of these are closely described in “Controller Operation”, page 343

10.20 Num Pad Button Group (EC-200/EC-210 only)

Overview
These buttons are present only on the large controllers (EC-200 and EC-210).

328 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 Controller Orientation

Image 10-27

1 Num Pad Button Group

R Right Side of the Controller

Description

Image 10-28

The almost standard layout Numpad buttons resemble a standard numpad from a keyboard or other device.
With its specifically added, Copy, Thru, Page Up and Page Down It is central for the Syntax Entry
Programming introduced in EC-200.
The Numpad is used in conjunction with its own buttons or other buttons on the EC-200/EC-210. Its use is
covered in “Controller Operation”, page 343.

10.21 Live Function Button Group (EC-200/EC-210

only)
Overview
These buttons are present only on the large controllers (EC-200 and EC-210).

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 329

 Controller Orientation

Image 10-29

1 Live Function Button Group

R Right Side of the Controller

Description

Image 10-30

Button Name Description

1 Modify PGM The Red Button Modify PGM toggles on and off the possibility to modify a
(Modify Program) destination in the Program Part of the GUI. The LED is steady lit with red
when active.
2 Live The Red Button Live toggles on and off the Live function like it was in
Encore TM. The LED is steady lit with red when active.

The functionality of each of these buttons is more closely described in “Controller Operation”, page 343.

10.22 Trackball (EC-200/EC-210 only)

Overview
This assembly is present only on the large controllers (EC-200 and EC-210).

330 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 Controller Orientation

Image 10-31

1 Trackball B2 TR (Top Right) Button

2 Ring B3 BL (Bottom Left) Button
B1 TL (Top Left ) Button B4 BR ( Bottom Right) Button

Description
This is a ergonomic control device used with thumb, finger or palm of your hand to move the cursor like with a
mouse. Interaction with other parts of the interface is also possible.
Additional functionality of the Trackball and its modifiers is described in Chapter “Controller Operation”, page
343.

10.23 Rotary Encoders (EC-200/EC-210 only)

Overview

Image 10-32

1 Rotary encoders
2 Modifier buttons
R Right Side of the Controller

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 331

 Controller Orientation

Description
The 5 rotary encoders to the top left are referred to as wheels or modifier wheels. Wheels are named from left
to right WH1 – WH5. They have one modifier button each.
These encoders are present only on the large controller.

10.24 Panel Lock button (EC-200/EC-210 only)

Overview

Image 10-33

1 Lock Panel Button

R Right Side of the Controller

Description
Pressing the Panel Lock button will Lock the consoles buttons and touchscreens from entry. To unlock use
code 4096 via numpad or Keyboard.
This button is present only on the large controller.

10.25 Save Button (EC-200/EC-210 only)

Overview

Image 10-34

1 Save Button
R Right Side of the Controller

332 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 Controller Orientation

Description
This button replicates the Save icon click in EMTS (Event Master Tool Set).
This button is present only on the large controller.

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 333

 Controller Orientation

334 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 Controller
Configuration 11
About this chapter
This chapter provides a detailed description of how to connect and configure the EC-30, EC-50, and EC-200
and EC-210 controllers.

Overview
• General
• EC-30 controller connection
• EC-50 controller connection
• EC-200/EC-210 controller connection
• Touchscreen calibration
• Lights
• Assigning resources to the desk
The EC-200/EC-210 is a stand-alone controller that supplies full control over Events Master series
devices. Once the software in charge of this functionality is completely developed, the EC-200/EC-
210 will allow connection to up to two EC-50 wings.

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 335

 Controller Configuration

11.1 General
Overview
The EC-200/EC-210 is a stand-alone controller that supplies full control over Events Master series devices. In
the future, once the software in charge of this functionality is completely developed, the EC-200/EC-210 will
allow connection to up to two EC-50 wings.
The EC-50 is a wing-concept in the sense that it needs a host computer to work. Host computers specs should
follow the outline for the Event Master Toolset “Preferred” spec.
The EC-30 is a compact version of the EC-series Event Master controller that is added to an existing Event
Master control computer as a USB peripheral. The EC-30 provides essential selections for sources, presets,
layers, and destinations.

11.2 EC-30 controller connection

Prerequisites
Event Master Toolset revision 4.2 or higher must be installed on the Host computer prior to the connection of
the EC-30.
Verify that the Host computer is equipped with the latest software version available on the Barco
web site (URL:https://www.barco.com/). Refer to the chapters “Download of Event Master Toolset
Software”, page 99 and “Software installation”, page 100 for more information on the software
downloading and how install it on the Host computer.

Connection diagram

Image 11-1: EC-30 connections

Description
1. Connect the Host computer to the USB B connector on the EC-30. Necessary cables are provided in a new
system. In the case that the original cables are missing, simply use standard computer cabling to make
these connections.
2. Connect AC power to the power supply, and connect the power supply to DC power on the rear panel of
the unit.
Running the power-supply cable through one of the strain-relief tabs on the rear of the unit can help to
keep the cable from pulling out of the DC power connector. Loosen the screw on a relief tab; run the
power-supply cable through the tab; tighten the screw.
You can consume extra cable length, if necessary, by passing the cable through both tabs.

336 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 Controller Configuration

3. Power up the EC-30 control panel, Host computer, and peripherals.

During the Event Master Toolset installation you are asked to add a driver, be sure to answer yes to
this question in order to use the EC-30 with your host computer. If the driver is not installed the EC-
30 will not work.

11.3 EC-50 controller connection

Prerequisites
Event Master Toolset revision 2.0 or higher must be installed on the Host computer prior to the connection of
the EC-50.
Verify that the Host computer is equipped with the latest software version available on the Barco
web site (URL:https://www.barco.com/). Refer to the chapters “Download of Event Master Toolset
Software”, page 99 and “Software installation”, page 100 for more information on the software
downloading and how install it on the Host computer.

Connection diagram

Image 11-2: EC-50 connections

Description
Connect the external screen and USB communication from the host computer to the DVI and USB B
connector on the EC-50.
Plug the cord to the power outlet.
Necessary cables are provided in a new system. In the case that the original cables are missing, simply use
standard computer cabling to make these connections.

11.4 EC-200/EC-210 controller connection

Prerequisites
EC-200 is delivered with Event Master Toolset revision 3.0 or higher. EC-210 is delivered with Event Master
Toolset revision 6.0 or higher.
Verify that the EC-200/EC-210 is equipped with the latest software version available on the Barco
web site (URL:https://www.barco.com/). Refer to the chapters “Download of Event Master Toolset
Software”, page 99 and “Software installation”, page 100 for more information on the software
downloading and how to install it on the controller.

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 337

 Controller Configuration

Connection diagrams

Image 11-3: EC-200 connections

Image 11-4: EC-210 connections

Description
Connect the network outlet 1 to your Event Master Device Network for static IP address and outlet 2 for a
DHCP assigned IP address. Plug the cord to the power outlet. Necessary cables (except a network cable) are
provided in a new system. In the case that the original cables are missing, simply use standard computer
cabling to make these connections.
The 4 USB connectors in the back can be used for keyboard and mouse and other supported USB devices.
The USB connector in the middle of the top of the console is on delivery fitted with a USB memory.

11.5 Touchscreen calibration

General
This feature depends on the controller type:
EC-50
The EC-50 need a host computer. Calibration of the touchscreen could be necessary when your touch screen
responds inaccurate or erratic.
EC-200/EC-210
The EC-200/EC-210 has 2 integrated capacitive touchscreens who do not need calibration. If they don’t
behave properly there can be dirt between the surface of the screen and the cover.

338 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 Controller Configuration

EC-50 Touchscreen calibration

Image 11-5

The operating system on the host computer provides this capability as it would for any standard touchscreen.
Refer to the OS manual for the correct procedure.

11.6 Lights
EC-50 Overview

Image 11-6

1 Work Light
2 White Light
3 Red Backlight

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 339

 Controller Configuration

EC-200/EC-210 Overview

Image 11-7

1 2 x Work Light
2 White Light
3 Red Backlight

Description
Work Light
EC-50 and EC-200/EC-210 controllers are respectively supplied with one and two flexible scriptlight
connections equipped with LED light. Light can be adjusted for brightness in the Events Master Toolset
Settings menu page in the tab User Prefs, only available when hardware is connected.
White light
White light under the hand rest is for reading show scripts. Light can be turned on and off in the Events Master
Toolset Settings menu page in the tab User Prefs, only available when hardware is connected.
Red backlight
The Red backlight indicate that the power is on an is a design element. Light can be turned on and off in the
Events Master Toolset Settings menu page in the tab User Prefs, only available when hardware is connected.

340 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 Controller Configuration

11.7 Assigning resources to the desk

Overview

Image 11-8

In the Event Master Toolset, click on the icon to open the controller menu setup page.

Image 11-9

1 Resources
2 Virtual console
3 Console Representation Selection
4 Delete Mapping button

How to Assign resources

Drag and drop the resources from the right side onto the buttons corresponding to the ones on the console.

How to remove incorrect mapping

In the case a wrong mapping is done, a Delete Mapping button in the lower part of the resource pane is
available. When this button is clicked on it will turn in red. Now select the button with the incorrect mapping.

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 341

 Controller Configuration

How to use the Console Representation Selection

There are four tabs with a bullet indication, Green means available and Red unavailable. The Virtual console
is always available for use in Event Master Toolset. When a EC-50 is connected or if a EC-200/EC-210 is used
the first tab is also available.
The assigned resources are separate from each tab. However the assignment is transparent from the Virtual
Console to the connected EC-50 or the left Side of the EC-200/EC-210. Once the Tab representing the EC-50
or EC-200/EC-210 is selected and more mapping is done, it will differ from each other.
This allow to use the resource assignment page as a second tactical input.

342 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 Controller Operation 12
About this chapter
This chapter describes the proper usage of the EC-30, EC-50, and EC-200/EC-210 controllers. The left-hand
side of the EC-200/EC-210 and the EC-50 are identical in operation.

Overview
• General Overview
• EC-200/EC-210 Firmware Upgrade
• How to power down the EC-200/EC-210
• How to reboot the EC-200/EC-210 CPU
• How to select destinations
• How to use the Layer buttons
• What are Layer executers?
• How to use assign buttons
• How to use the page arrow buttons
• How to use transition buttons
• How to use the T-bar
• How to use the Contextual Display Buttons
• EC-200/EC-210 Philosophy
• Function Button For Syntax
• Additional direct access and functionality

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 343

 Controller Operation

12.1 General Overview

Overview
The layout of the keyboard of the EC-30, the EC-50, and the left-hand side of the EC-200/EC-210 is designed
to give direct access to memories and selections in a live situation.
Programming, Playback, and Edit of any given event is greatly sped up, enhancing the abilities of an operator
to react quickly to any given situation.

Image 12-1: Event Master controllers

12.2 EC-200/EC-210 Firmware Upgrade

General
The EC-200/EC-210 controller firmware can be updated through the Web App in the Settings Menu >
Controller > Software tab. Please refer to “Settings Menu > Web App area > Tools > Manage Software”, page
244 for instructions on how to perform a firmware upgrade through the Web interface.
For more information on upgrading the EC-200/EC-210 firmware, see “InfoT-1322: Upgrading the Firmware
and Operating System on the EC-200 Controller” on the Technical Downloads tab of the EC-200 Large event
controller web page (URL:
https://www. barco. com/en/Products/Image-processing/Presentation-switchers/Large-event-controller. aspx#!
downloads).

12.3 How to power down the EC-200/EC-210

General
Because repeated hard power cycling over time may lead to corruption of the solid-state drive (SSD), all
versions of the EC-200/EC-210 Event Master Toolset, version 4.0.29026 or higher, have a power-off soft
button on the touchscreen.

Description
The power-off soft button is above the save button on the Menu navigation bar. See Image 12-2 for the
location of the power-off soft button.

344 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 Controller Operation

Image 12-2: Soft-Off button on the EC-200/EC-210 GUI

To shut down the EC-200/EC-210 console …

1. Click on the power-off soft button in the Menu navigation bar.

2. Select PowerOff in the confirmation window.
How to power down the EC-210
The EC-210 may also be powered down by use of the power button to the right of the right-hand
touchscreen.

The user must power cycle the main (hardware) switch to power on the console. There is no soft PowerOn
button.
For more information on the power-off soft button and SSD recovery, see “InfoT-1325: SSD Recovery on the
EC-200 Controller” on the Technical Downloads tab of the EC-200 Large event controller web page (URL:
https://www. barco. com/en/Products/Image-processing/Presentation-switchers/Large-event-controller. aspx#!
downloads).

12.4 How to reboot the EC-200/EC-210 CPU

General
Press simultaneously and hold the Capture Still button, the Barco Eye button, and the top, left button in the
Future Expansion Button Group to reboot the EC-200/EC-210 CPU. These buttons are circled in Image 12-3.

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 345

 Controller Operation

Image 12-3: EC-200/EC-210 CPU-reboot key combination

12.5 How to select destinations

General
Once the row of Destination buttons have been mapped they can be used to select or deselect them.
A range of actions can be performed with this selection:
• Transition via Cut or All-Trans.
• Included in the record of a Preset;
• Prepare the destination for Layer manipulation.
• Change time of the destinations Transition. Note: time is assigned to each destination individually.
In general it can be said that the selected Destination via the console have the same actions available as in
the Event Master Toolset, just in a more hands-on direct way.

12.6 How to use the Layer buttons

General
Similar to the Destination Buttons the Layer buttons create a selection for further actions.
Buttons are as standard in the same select mode as the destinations, latch on, latch off. Other modes will be
available.
A range of actions can be performed with this selection:
• Assign a Source file via the Assign buttons in Source mode.
• Layer Transition or Cut via the Red Layer Executors to the right of the Layer button row.
• Freeze via the Blue Layer Executors to the right of the Layer button row.
• Arm via the Green Layer Executors to the right of the Layer button row.
• Match Program via the Green Layer Executors to the right of the Layer button row.
In general it can be said that a layer selection via the console have the same actions available as in the Event
Master Toolset, just in a more hands-on direct way.
If a layer is not on preview or program, pressing the button will turn the layer on in preview and select it for
modification.
Once on PVW only the clear button in the GUI or on the right side of the controller will remove the layer from
PVW.

346 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 Controller Operation

12.7 What are Layer executers?

General
These are the buttons to the right of the Layer Buttons, the function of them is described in context above and
in detail below.
Freeze PGM
Button Freezes program of selected Layer(s) of the selected destination(s), blue LED when active.
Press again to release freeze.
Freeze PVW
Button freezes preview of selected Layer(s) of the selected destination, blue LED when active.
Press again to release freeze.
Arm
Button arms effects on selected layers in all selected destinations.
Indication of armed FX on PGM, red LED.
Indication of armed FX on PVW, green LED.
Match
Match the selected layer in Preview to its corresponding layer in Program.
Button matches the function of Match Program in the GUI.
Blinks red when pressed.
Can be used across multiple layers and destinations.
Layer Trans
Transitions Selected Layers into Program, based on # of frames set for the layer in the GUI.
Button matches the function of Trans in the GUI below the workspace.
Layer Cut
Cut selected layer into Program.
Button matches the function of CUT in the GUI below the workspace.

12.8 How to use assign buttons

General
The Assign buttons are three rows of the same, allowing for quick recall of a memory or resource.
Each row can be selected independently to several memory types.
Currently available assignment are:
Source (Yellow)
Recalls the mapped Source file into the Layer Selection.
User Key (Magenta)
Recalls the mapped User Key to the selected layer.
Preset (White)
Recalls the mapped Preset to the whole Preview.
Cues (Cyan)
Recalls the mapped CUE for “Play/Pause” and “Stop” actions.
BG Source (Green)
Recalls the mapped BG to the selected Destination.

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 347

 Controller Operation

If LIVE mode is activated the above actions happen to the Program instead of the Preview.

12.9 How to use the page arrow buttons

General
Each row of Assign buttons has a display that shows the active page and in addition up and down arrow
buttons that are used to change pages.
Up and down increase or decrease the page number.
In the case of many pages there are two fast jump button combinations. For quicker access to bigger jumps in
the pages, the following button combinations are available.
1. Press and hold the UP button and then press a button on the assign row. Button 1 jumps to page 10,
button 8 to page 80, and so forth for all of the buttons.
2. Press and hold the DOWN button and then press a button on the assign row. Button 1 jumps to page 1,
button 12 to page 12, and so forth for all of the buttons.
A quick return to page 1 is also possible by holding the Barco Eye and tapping the Arrow Down.*
(*) This functionality is not available on the EC-50.

12.10 How to use transition buttons

General
Three types of transitional triggering are available:
All-trans
All-trans (Transitions All) is the way to start a timed transition of Destinations. It transitions the set up pre-view
into program.
In the case a transition is not completed it can be reversed.
A manually started transition can be finished with an All-Trans command and an All-Trans command can be
finished with the T-bar.

Only selected destinations are affected. Unselected destinations are not affected by the transition.

Cut
Cut perform the same action as the All-Trans but with zero time.
Layer Trans
Layer Trans transitions the selected layer in any Destination, whether it is selected or not. This button is
placed on the side of the Layer bus to the left of the console. It can also be found in the GUI, below the
workspace.

12.11 How to use the T-bar

General
The T-bar is the way to manually transition Destinations. It works both ways to transition the set up pre-view
into program. In the case a transition is not completed it can be reversed. A manually started transition can be
finished with an All-Trans command.
Only selected destinations will be concerned by the T-bar use. The non selected destinations are
not affected by the transition.

348 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 Controller Operation

12.12 How to use the Contextual Display Buttons

General
The 4 contextual display buttons to the right of the Assign Buttons are used for several tasks and can be
mapped for different functions in the Console Menu page.

12.13 EC-200/EC-210 Philosophy

General
The EC-200/EC-210 introduces a new way of programming a Video controller in parallel with a more
traditional way. In order to understand what is possible a small session on philosophy is in order.

About the EC-200/EC-210 programming

The use of a control system is typically divided in the following major tasks:
1. Configuration and Setup of Unit and System.
This part is not, in general, covered on the controller surface. The System Configuration tab can be opened on
the screen in the controller for the buttons, but entry and settings is limited to touch screen and mouse/
trackball interaction.
2. Programming creation/edit.
• Creation is when information is added into the system
• Edit is when information is edited in memories to then be saved back
3. Execution playback/live control-edit.
• Playback is when memories and cues are recalled to be executed
• Live control is when memories are recalled and overridden or added to with direct interaction, either in
Preview (normal) or direct on program if LIVE is selected.

Programming will typically happen on the right side of the desk, and Execution will still be possible
to the left, like selecting Layers and sources and record presets. User is of course free to mix these
concepts after own preferences.

A word about the hardware

There are two main parts in the EC-200/EC-210 controller. The Left side is dedicated to the industry’s
feedback on many buttons and Encore like presentation switching. The Right side is inspired by some of the
ideas from the lighting industry, which has a much longer tradition of managing large numbers of instruments.
We will need this in order to effectively use our E2 and its family members, including other devices like
projectors and playback devices.

General guide lines

Selection
By using the Num pad of the console we will allow for the selection of several parts of the system and once
selected allow them to be manipulated (apply an action via function buttons).
The primary group of Function Buttons are located just above the Num Pad.

Image 12-4

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 349

 Controller Operation

The following buttons are available:

Button Description
Dest Destination refer to the most downstream location in the chain, usually a screen.
Layer Layer refers to a layer that can hold live video.
Source Source refer to an image source such as a Sourcefile, Still store and more.
Device Device refers to devices in an Event Master System.
Preset Preset refers to Presets stored in Event Master Toolset.
User Key User Keys are building blocks of settings for the Layers.
Time Time refers to the timing parameter of the selected Top Functions.
Cue Cue refers to Cues stored in Event Master Toolset.

With these function buttons a syntax can be applied to make a selection that is then used for further action.
By example, a selection can be made like:
DEST 1 ENTER This syntax will Select the Destination 1,
just like clicking on the Tab in the
destination.
Further there are modifiers to the syntax:
DEST 1 + 3 ENTER This syntax will select Destination 1 and 3.

Or:
DEST 1 Thru 3 This syntax will select Destinations 1 thru
ENTER 3.

You can probably see how efficient this is when you have lots of destinations.
Your modifiers are:
– , +, Thru to add or subtract from the selected function.

There are several examples below in this manual to understand how this can work in favor of the
user.

Numbering
Destination, Layer, Source, Cue, Preset, and Userkey all have a number and a name that are independent
from each other. The Default name include the number, but does not need to remain in order to recall over
syntax.
There are further functions that can be controlled with syntax like screens, layouts and such. This is further
described below.
There are also a range of combined button presses that is meant to speed up the programming and control.
Contextual Buttons

Image 12-5

The 12 Contextual Buttons to the left of the numpad are used to add situational functionality to the syntax.
Certain button presses change the naming of the displays and the functions of the buttons. They are referred
to as CD1 thru 12 per row from the top left.

350 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 Controller Operation

General rules
Note that all possible syntax is not supported.
A few general rules:
• Any Syntax entry must end with ENTER.
• Any Syntax is max 3 Functions deep before ENTER.
• In the case of unsupported syntax it will just not work or register.

The Syntax Feedback line in the Controller Menu Page is a huge help to understand what is
supported and not.

12.14 Function Button For Syntax

Destination

Image 12-6

Destination refers to the most downstream location in the chain, usually a screen. See the earlier Chapters for
the definition of Destination.
When DEST is pressed it lights its blue LED and opens the syntax entry for numbers and modifiers as per
above.
The contextual Buttons to the right of the numpad also light up and is populated with functionality that can be
used in the syntax. These are:
Contextual Display Description
Button
CD1 AUX • DEST + AUX # ENTER select the Aux #, just as clicking it in the GUI.
• DEST + AUX 1 + 2 + 5 ENTER will select Aux 1, 2, and 5.
• DEST + AUX - 2 ENTER will unselect Aux 2, but 1 and 5 stays selected
• DEST + AUX CLEAR will unselect all Aux Destinations
CD2 BG Input 0 is Matte and maps the WH1 Red, WH2 Green, WH 3 Blue
CD3 Group • DEST + Group # ENTER arms the Destinations in that particular group,
just like clicking it in the GUI.
• DEST + Group 1 + 3 + 5 ENTER arms Destination Groups 1, 3, and 5.
• DEST + Group − 3 ENTER disarms Destinations in Group 3 while
leaving destinations in Groups 1 and 5 armed.
CD4 Super Dest • DEST + Super Dest # ENTER arms that particular Super Destination
(including the destinations that compose it).
• DEST + Super Dest 1 + 2 + 4 ENTER arms Super Destinations 1, 2,
and 4.
• DEST + Super Dest -2 ENTER disarms Super Destination 2 while
leaving Super Destinations 1 and 4 still armed.
CD5 Empty
CD6 Empty
CD7 BG Toggle Activate Toggle mode on selected destinations BG on/off .
CD8 Trans Curve will toggle between Linear / S-curve / Log / Exp.
CD9 Empty
CD10 Empty
CD11 Freeze PGM Freezes Program in selected Destinations including Sources and
Backgrounds.
CD12 Empty

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 351

 Controller Operation

Layer

Image 12-7

Layer refers to a layer that can hold live video. See the earlier Chapters for the definition of Layer.
When Layer is pressed it lights its blue LED and opens the syntax entry for numbers and modifiers as per
below:
• LAYER # ENTER will select LAYER #, just as clicking it in the GUI.
• LAYER 1 + 3 + 5 ENTER will select LAYER 1, 3 and 5 just as clicking it in the GUI with Multiple Select on.
• LAYER – 3 ENTER deselects LAYER 3, while LAYERS 1 and 5 stay selected.
• LAYER CLEAR deselects all layers.
The contextual Buttons to the right of the numpad also light up and are populated with functionality that can be
used in the syntax. These are:
Contextual Display Description
Button
CD1 PIP Selects selected Layer as PIP, indicates that by color Green backlight.
CD2 KEY Selects selected Layer as KEY, indicates that by color Red backlight.
CD3 Super Layer • LAYER + Super Layer # ENTER selects Super Layer #, just as in the
GUI.
• LAYER + Super Layer 1 + 4 + 6 ENTER selects Super Layers 1, 4, and
6, just like clicking on them in the GUI with Multiple Select turned on.
• LAYER + Super Layer –1 ENTER deselects Super Layer 1 and Super
Layers 4 and 6 stay selected.
• LAYER + Super Layer + CLEAR clears all selected Super Layers from
their respective Destinations.
CD4 Layer Main Thumbnail like GUI “Sprocket”.
Selected layer Adjustment area is indicated by light blue backlight.
Selects and open the Layer Main area:

CD5 Layer Window Thumbnail like GUI “Box”

Selected layer Adjustment area is indicated by light blue backlight
Selects and open the Window Adjustment area:

CD6 Layer Effects Thumbnail like GUI “Brush”

Selected layer Adjustment area is indicated by light blue backlight
Selects and open the Layer Effects area:

352 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 Controller Operation

Contextual Display Description

Button

CD7 Empty Empty

CD8 Border ON/OFF Toggles Border setting of selected layer ON vs OFF.
CD9 Shadow ON/OFF Toggles Shadow setting of selected layer ON vs OFF.
CD10 Reset Same as Reset in GUI
CD11 Full H Same as in GUI
CD12 Full V Same as in GUI

PAGE 2 via PG Down (Page 1 via PG Up respectively) :

Contextual Display Description
Button
CD1 Add Keyframe Adds Keyframe to selected Layers.
CD2 Delete Keyframe Deletes Keyframe of selected Layers.

Layer functions are mapped as below:

WH 1 H Pos
WH 2 V Pos
WH 3 Layer size (Keep AR whether unlocked or not.)

Arrow Buttons

Image 12-8

The standard function is moving a layer just as in EMTS now.

When the Barco Eye Button is pressed and held the arrow buttons will allow for Z-Order alignment, selected
layers will move one Z-order up or down according to the arrow indication- Left arrow is top most Z-order Right
arrow is bottom most Z-order.

Source

Image 12-9

Source refer to an source of image or video such as a Source file, Still store and Destination. See the earlier
Chapters for the definition of Source.
When Source is pressed it lights its blue LED and opens the syntax entry for numbers and modifiers as per
above and in detail below:
• SOURCE # ENTER will add Source file # to the selected layer or add a layer, just as dragging it in the GUI.
• SOURCE 1 THRU 4 ENTER will add Source file 1 to the Z-order first selected layer and continue to add
source files 2 – 4 to Z-order layers 2 – 4 or add as many layers needed until no layers are available.

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 353

 Controller Operation

• SOURCE 1 + 5 + 88 ENTER will add Source file 1 to the Z-order first selected layer and continue to add
source files 5 and 88 to Z-order layers 2 – 3 or add as many layers needed until no layers are available.
Note: SOURCE syntax support the . (dot) as indicating a source file like 88.5

For live input sources, Source is the actual source file, not the input in number.

The contextual Buttons to the right of the numpad also light up and is populated with functionality that can be
used in the syntax. These are:
Contextual Display Description
Button
CD1 RESET Size Once pressed Resets the Sizing Adjustments of the source in the selected
Layer, just as clicking the Blue Reset icon button in the GUI.
If multiple layer are selected, no source files sizing is Reset.

CD2 Create Source Creates new source file just like the plus button in the GUI
(file)
CD3 SAVE Source Saves the source file
CD4 Source Adjust Opens the Adjust of the selected source on the Sprocket page.
CD5 Color Adjust Opens the Adjust of the Color correction of the selected source on the
Brush page
CD6 Empty
CD7 Freeze Input Will freeze the INPUT of the selected source file. If the selected source IS
frozen it will be un-frozen.
CD8 Bind Binds Source file to User key per syntax.
SOURCE # (is source file) BIND # (is user key number) ENTER
CD9 Empty
CD10 Empty
CD11 Empty
CD12 Empty

Wheels for Source Adjust (Sprocket)

WH1 Source H Size (AR lock must be unlocked to adjust seaparately from
Source V Size)
WH2 Source V Size (AR lock must be unlocked to adjust seaparately from
Source H Size)
WH3 Source H Pos
WH4 Source V Pos
WH5 Source Aspect Ratio (Selects from drop down list)

Wheels for Color Adjust (Brush)

WH1 Contrast Overall
WH2 Brightness Overall
WH3 Gamma
WH4 Hue
WH5 Saturation

354 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 Controller Operation

Device

Image 12-10

Device refers to devices in an Event Master System.

User Key

Image 12-11

User Keys are building blocks of settings for the Layers. See the earlier Chapters for the definition of user
Keys.
When User Key is pressed it lights its blue LED and opens the syntax entry for Record and Recall of user
keys.
Recording of a Preset is done in conjunction with the Save PVW and Save PGM Buttons like below:
• USERKEY # ENTER will recall userkey # to all selected layers.
• USERKEY 5 + 11 + 7 ENTER will add userkey 5 to the Z-order first selected layer and continue to add
userkey 11 and 7 to Z-order layers 2 – 3
To record userkeys you can only have one Destination and one Layer selected. Recording a userkey is done
via the below syntax:

Image 12-12

• SAVE PVW USERKEY # ENTER will save the currently selected layer properties in Preview into the selected
number. If the number exists we overwrite.
• SAVE PGM USERKEY # ENTER will save the currently selected layer properties in Program into the selected
number. If the number exists we overwrite.
• USERKEY ENTER saves next available userkey.
The contextual Buttons to the right of the numpad also light up and is populated with functionality that can be
used in the syntax. These are:
CD1 -10 is the Enables and toggles on off
CD12 is All / None as toggle function

Enables of the User Keys are described in an earlier chapter.

Preset

Image 12-13

Preset refers to Presets stored in Event Master Toolset. See the earlier Chapters for the definition of Presets.
When Pre-set is pressed it lights its blue LED and opens the syntax entry for Record and Recall of user keys.

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 355

 Controller Operation

Recording of a Preset is done in conjunction with the Save PVW and Save PGM Buttons like below:
• PRESET # ENTER will recall preset #
• PRESET 5 + 11 + 7 ENTER recall these presets in order, 5 being recalled first in a stack on fashion,
information is added but not replaced.
Recording a preset is done via the below syntax:
• SAVE PVW PRESET # ENTER will save the currently selected destination/s into the selected number. If the
number exist we overwrite.
• PRESET ENTER without a # saves next available preset.
The contextual Buttons to the right of the numpad also light up and is populated with functionality that can be
used in the syntax. These are:
Contextual Display Description
Button
CD1 Lock / Unlock Locks and unlocks the Selected Preset
CD2 Renumber Renumber the Selected preset

Example:
• PRESET 45 Renumber 55 ENTER will renumber Preset 45 to 55.
Special Function with Modifiers with Preset recall and Record:
• + numpad will increase selection by one.
• - numpad will decrease selection by one.

Cue

Image 12-14

Cue refers to Cues stored in Event Master Toolset.

Time

Image 12-15

Time refers to the timing parameter of the selected Top Functions. This button will allow entering time for
different functions.
Destination has Transition Time, Layer has Layer Transition Time.
Syntax for TIME is:
• DEST # TIME # ENTER will set the Transition time of 60 to Destinations # but not select Destination #
further actions.
• DEST 1 + 5 TIME 60 ENTER will set the Transition time of 60 to Destinations 1 and 5 but not select
Destination 1 and 5 for further actions.
• LAYER 1 + 4 TIME 120 ENTER will set the Layer Transition time of 120 to Layer 1 and 4 but not select
Layer 1 and 4 for further actions.

356 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 Controller Operation

12.15 Additional direct access and functionality

HELP Err

Image 12-16

The HELP / Err button opens a FAQ.

Layout

Image 12-17

The Layout function button allows for selection and recall of layouts where applicable.
Multi-viewer, Assign Buttons and Programmer screen & Preset screens are currently implemented.
To select a Layout use syntax like:
• LAYOUT 1 ENTER will recall Layout 1.
The same number of layouts is available as in the GUI. Layout changes also act as they do in the GUI.
When a layout is selected changes are stored for that layout in real time, automatically.
Pressing Layout button will populate the Smart Displays with:
Contextual Display Description
Button
CD1 MVR LAYOUT MVR (CD1) 1 or 2 or 3 or 4 ENTER will recall Layout 1 – 4
respectively into the Multi-viewer
CD2 Programing LAYOUT Programmer (CD 2) 1 or 2 or 3 or 4 ENTER will recall Layout 1
– 4 respectively into the Programming Window
CD3 Assign Buttons LAYOUT Assign (CD 3) 1 or 2 or 3 or 4 ENTER will Recall Layout 1 – 4
respectively into the Assign Buttons.

Screens

Image 12-18

The Screens button is used to select the windows of the GUI currently in the displays of the controller. There
is 2 internal standard and 2 external possible.
Screens are named 1 – 4, 1 to the left and 2 to the right with the output 3 and 4 in the back.
When the Screens button is pressed, the contextual displays will be populated with:
Contextual Display Description
Button
CD1 Config 1 Applies the Config Page to the left screen of the console
CD2 Program 1 Applies the programming page to the right screen of the console
CD3 MVR 1 Applies the MVR Setup page to the Left screen of the console
CD4 Config 2 Applies the Config Page to the right screen of the console
CD5 Program 2 Applies the programming page to the right screen of the console
CD6 MVR 2 Applies the MVR Setup page to the Left screen of the console

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 357

 Controller Operation

Contextual Display Description

Button
CD7 Console 1 Applies the Console Setup page to the Left screen of the console
CD8 Web 1 Applies the Web preset page to the Left screen of the console
CD9 Blank
CD10 Console 2 Applies the Console Setup page to the Left screen of the console
CD11 Web 2 Applies the Web preset page to the Left screen of the console
CD12 Dest Show/Hide Reveals or hides the Destination banner in the Left screen

Save PVW (Save Preview)

Image 12-19

Once pressed this button latches the function “Save from PVW Mode” and lights its GREEN led. This allow
storing 1 or several Templates / Presets or Cue´s after the syntax from Preview.

When the LED is RED, it indicates that the Save PGM button turned the EC-200/EC-210 in “Save
PGM Mode”.

Example of use:
• PRESET # ENTER → Preset # is stored from Preview as new preset.
• PRESET # ENTER → Preset # is overwritten from Preview if it exists.
• PRESET ENTER → Next free preset number is created from Program.
If either Save PVW or Save PGM is latched and the other is pressed it cancels the previous latch.
The GUI Button Save PVW will turn red to indicate the latched record state.

Save PGM (Save Program)

Image 12-20

Once pressed this button latches the function “Save from PGM Mode”. This allows storing 1 or several
Templates / Presets or Cue´s after the syntax from Preview.

As the Button does not have a LED internally it will light up the LED of the Save PVW button in Red.

Example of use:
• PRESET 5 ENTER → Preset 5 is stored from Program as new preset.
• PRESET 5 ENTER → Preset 5 is overwritten from Program if it exists;
• PRESET ENTER → Next free preset number is created from Program.
If either Save PGM or Save PVW is latched and the other is pressed it cancels the previous latch.
As the Button for Save PGM does not have an internal LED the GUI also must indicate that the button is
latched. The GUI Button Save PGM will turn red to indicate the latched record state.

358 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 Controller Operation

Adjust

Image 12-21

The Adjust button provides a shortcut to and open the Adjust tab of the Selected function.

If nothing is selected that has information that goes in the Adjust tab, it will still open and be empty.

All Dest

Image 12-22

All Dest provides a shortcut to selects all Destinations for further actions. And with Press and Hold have
extended function.
A Single press selects all destinations.
When pressed and held and then button CLEAR is tapped, All Destinations are un-selected.
When pressed and held and then button BARCO EYE is tapped, the selection is inverted.

All Layer

Image 12-23

All Layer provides a shortcut to selects all Layers of selected destinations for further actions. And with Press
and Hold have extended function.
A Single press selects all Layers.
When pressed and held and then button CLEAR is tapped, All Layers of selected Destinations are un-
selected.
When pressed and held and then button BARCO EYE is tapped, the selection is inverted.

Clear

Image 12-24

The Clear button has many functions and clearing selections and operands are often used in programming.
Most of the CLEAR functionality has been included with each button and is not repeated here. The simplest
function of CLEAR is:
• Clears the current selection of the latest selected DEST / LAYER / SOURCE / DEVICE to unselected.
After that it becomes more of a modifier with other buttons.

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 359

 Controller Operation

PVW Trans

Image 12-25

Currently selected layers in Preview will preview its effect (move) without showing on program.

Capture Still

Image 12-26

With the Capture Still Button a Still Store can be captured via syntax. The Source File numbers input will
capture.
Syntax:
• SOURCE # Capture Still

As a Direct select function it does not require ENTER in the end

Barco Eye

Image 12-27

The Barco Eye button works as a Modifier Button, like Windows/CTRL/Fn button on a keyboard. This is
further described in functionality around other buttons.

Mod PGM (Modify Program) [Red button cap]

Image 12-28

Pressing button Unlocks Selected Destinations Program for Edit just as clicking the small lock in Program.
Red LED indicates active.

Live [Red button cap]

Image 12-29

The Live button latches and Red LED indicates active.

When the live function is active the Assign Key Source BUS or the Syntax actions regarding LAYERS/
SOURCE/PRESET/USER KEY are applied in the PROGRAM as opposed to the normal PREVIEW BUS.
LAYER

360 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 Controller Operation

Layer Selection is made on PROGRAM.

SOURCE
Actions on layer SOURCE ONLY are executed on Program.
PRESET
Presets recalled with syntax and Assign Button are applied in Preview and transition direct to Program.
USER KEY
Userkeys recalled with syntax and Assign Button are applied direct in Program.

T-Bar Disable

Image 12-30

This button allows disables the T-Bar.

Red steady light when active.

All Trans [Red button cap]

Image 12-31

Same function as the All Trans on the Left side.

Save All [Yellow button cap]

Image 12-32

To save the show into the current state the user presses this button. It is the same as the Disk button in GUI.
Confirmation is given in the bottom signal bar in red Save Done.

Panel lock

Image 12-33

By pressing the Panel Lock button the user lock´s out the Panel and Touch Screens from input with Request
for password to unlock.
Proceed like below:
• Press Panel Lock button.
• Once Locked all input from screens or panel result in a request for Password, 4 numbers from numpad +
enter to unlock.

Standard Password to override all is 4096.

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 361

 Controller Operation

Keyboard

Image 12-34

Pressing this button enables or disables the On Screen Keyboard. This setting is found in the Settings Menu
Page.

362 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 Preventive
maintenance
actions 13
Overview
• E2 maintenance actions
• S3 maintenance actions
• EX maintenance actions
• EC-30 maintenance actions
• EC-50 maintenance actions
• EC-200/EC-210 maintenance actions

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 363

 Preventive maintenance actions

13.1 E2 maintenance actions

MAINTENANCE TYPE A (perform every month)
The monthly maintenance actions, listed below, may be performed by the user in accordance with
the procedures described in the E2 Maintenance chapter.

No. Maintenance action Remarks

1 Clean the EMI filter. The EMI filter may be removed,
but if it is left in the E2 processor,
it should be cleaned monthly.
Note: If a show has fog machines
and the E2 processor has an EMI
filter, cleaning the EMI filter is
required after every show.

MAINTENANCE TYPE C (perform every year)

The yearly maintenance actions, listed below, may be performed by the user in accordance with the
procedures described in the E2 Maintenance chapter.

No. Maintenance action Remarks

1 Check battery valid date. If the date is older than 4 years,
replace battery as a preventative
measure.
See Image 14-51 for the location
of the system battery.
Note: When a new battery is
installed, the user needs to place
a sticker with the date on the
inside of the metal plate (Bottom
Panel) that indicates when the
battery was last replaced. The
absence of sticker means the
battery has never been replaced.
In this case the S/N sticker can
be used for the reference date.

13.2 S3 maintenance actions

MAINTENANCE TYPE C (perform every year)
The yearly maintenance actions, listed below, may be performed by the user in accordance with the
procedures described in the S3 Maintenance chapter.

364 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 Preventive maintenance actions

No. Maintenance action Remarks

1 Check battery valid date. If the date is older than 4 years,
replace battery as a preventative
measure.
See Image 15-75 for the location
of the system battery.
Note: When a new battery is
installed, the user need to place a
sticker with the date on the
motherboard mount that indicates
when the battery was last
replaced. The absence of sticker
means the battery has never
been replaced. In this case the S/
N sticker can be used for the
reference date.

13.3 EX maintenance actions

MAINTENANCE TYPE C (perform every year)
The yearly maintenance actions, listed below, may be performed by the user in accordance with the
procedures described in the EX Maintenance chapter.

No. Maintenance action Remarks

1 Check battery valid date. If the date is older than 4 years,
replace battery as a preventative
measure.
See Image 16-15 for the location
of the system battery.
Note: When a new battery is
installed, the user needs to place
a sticker with the date on the
motherboard mount that indicates
when the battery was last
replaced. The absence of sticker
means the battery has never
been replaced. In this case the S/
N sticker can be used for the
reference date.

13.4 EC-30 maintenance actions

No preventive action is needed on this device.

13.5 EC-50 maintenance actions

No preventive action is needed on this device.

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 365

 Preventive maintenance actions

13.6 EC-200/EC-210 maintenance actions

MAINTENANCE TYPE C (perform every year)
The yearly maintenance actions, listed below, may be performed by the user in accordance with the
procedures described in the EC-200/EC-210 Maintenance chapter*.

No. Maintenance action Remarks

1 Check battery valid date. If the date is older than 4 years,
replace battery as a preventative
measure.
Note: When a new battery is
installed, the user need to place a
sticker with the date in the unit
(on the rear of the chassis, near
the Motherboard) that indicates
when the battery was last
replaced. The absence of sticker
means the battery has never
been replaced. In this case the S/
N sticker can be used for the
reference date.
2 Remove dust accumulation Remove dust accumulation from
the CPU fan on the motherboard
with a few short bursts of
compressed air.

366 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 E2 Maintenance 14
About this chapter
This chapter describes how to service the E2 by replacing individual components.

Simple servicing
E2 is based on a modular design that ensures easy serviceability. Users can swap most of the E2 components
in the case of damage, without shipping the unit to a Barco service center.

Methodology
Most procedures in these chapters include multiple steps to gain access to the parts requiring service. A
workflow flow chart is provided next indicating all of the procedures and their relationships. Please refer to the
chart to familiarize yourself with the sequence of procedures.

ESD recommendations
The following precautions must be taken:
• Perform the Service procedures only at approved anti-static work station equipped with anti- static mat.
• At all times use a conductive wrist strap attached to a solid earth ground.
• Always discharge yourself by touching a grounded bare metal surface before coming in contact with ESD
sensitive electronic.
WARNING: Always switch power off and unplug the cords from the device before performing any
maintenance operations described in this chapter.

WARNING: The device can be damaged by electrostatic discharge (ESD). When handling the
device and any of its components, caution must be taken so that damage does not occur. Damage
due to inappropriate handling is not covered by the warranty.

Overview
• E2 unit Overview
• Process Overview
• Spare Parts Serviceable by All Users
• Rear I/O and Link Cards
• Rear I/O, VPU and Link card Heatsink Fan
• Tri-Combo Input and Tri-Combo Output Card Disassembly and Assembly
• Front Cover Assembly
• Front Brackets
• 3RU Fan Tray

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 367

 E2 Maintenance

• 1RU Fan Tray

• VPU Card(s)
• Front Panel Knob
• Front Panel Mount
• Front Panel Board
• VFD Display Assembly
• VFD Display Filter
• Bottom Panel
• Solid-State Memory
• System Battery
• CPU Module
• Power Supply
• System-Power Board
• Genlock Assembly
• USB Cable
• USB Extension Cable
• VFD Cable
• Keyboard Cable
• Genlock Cable
• Ethernet Cable
• 3RU Fan Cable
• 1RU Fan Cable
• Rear Rack Ears
• Front Rack-Ears
• Top Cover
• Top Card Guide
• Motherboard Fan

368 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 E2 Maintenance

14.1 E2 unit Overview

Orientation and main components

Image 14-1

T Top 6 Mother Board

F Front 7 Top Cover
1 Front Panel Knob 8 Front Brackets
2 VFD Display 9 EMI Filter
3 Front Cover Assembly 10 1RU Fan Tray
4 Rack Ears 11 3RU Fan Tray
5 VPU cards 12 Chassis

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 369

 E2 Maintenance

14.2 Process Overview

Flow chart

Image 14-2

370 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 E2 Maintenance

The EMI filter is no longer needed, and it can be removed.

14.3 Spare Parts Serviceable by All Users

E2 Spare Parts list
P/N Description Comments
R767241K * VFD Display assembly
R767246K * VFD Filter
R767260K * Front Panel board
R767261K System Power board
R767263K * Heatsink fan One for each Input, Output, Link and VPU card
R767264K * CPU module
R767265K * Motherboard Heatsink &
Fan kit
R767267K * Power supply(PS) One PS only. System accepts two Power supplies
R767268K Front Rack ears Includes hardware for both sides
R767269K Cable Kit set Kit Contains:
• 1x VFD-to-System board cable
• 2x Fan tray-to-System board cables
• 1x Genlock-to-System flat cable
• 1x Front Panel Keyboard-to-System flat cable
• 1x RJ45-to-System CAT5 Ethernet cable
• 1x USB-to-System 5-pin cable
R767270K 1RU fan tray The fans are not available separately
R767271K 3RU fan tray The fans are not available separately — will be replaced by
(Obsolete) R767280
R767273K * Rear Rack ears (Connector Includes hardware for both sides
protector)
R767275K * Solid-State Memory
R767280K * 3RU fan tray The fans are not available separately — will replace
R767271K
V327007 * System Battery
R9004740 * DVI Input Board
R9004741 * SDI Output Board
R9004742 * SDI Input Board
R9004743 * HDMI Output Board
R9004744 * DP/HDMI Input Board
R9004745 * DVI Output Board Not available in release 1
R9004746 * Link Card Board
R9004747 VPU Board Internal board
R9004748 Genlock Board
R9004750 * Link/CXP Cable
R9004765 * Quad DP 1.2 Output Board
R9004785 * Tri-Combo Input Board
R9004786 * Tri-Combo Output Board
R9004791 * Quad HDMI Input Board
R9004792 * Quad HDMI 2.0 Output
Board
R9004793 * Quad DP 1.2 Input Board

(*) common between E2 and S3.

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 371

 E2 Maintenance

14.4 Rear I/O and Link Cards

Flow chart

Image 14-3

Overview

Image 14-4

1 Chassis
2 I/O and Link Cards

Concerned parts
R9004740 DVI Input
R9004741 SDI Output
R9004742 SDI Input
R9004743 HDMI Output
R9004744 DP/HDMI Input
R9004745 DVI Output
R9004746 Link Card
R9004765 Quad DP 1.2 Output
Board
R9004785 Tri-Combo Input
R9004786 Tri-Combo Output
R9004791 Quad HDMI Input Board
R9004792 Quad HDMI 2.0 Output
Board
R9004793 Quad DP 1.2 Input Board

Necessary tools
Phillips Screwdriver #2.

372 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 E2 Maintenance

How to remove a card

1. Locate the card you wish to replace.
Note: There are 14 card slots. The first slot on the left is slot 1 and the last slot on the most right
position is 14.

2. Loosen and unscrew the top and bottom thumbscrews that are holding the card to the chassis.
3. Gently pull the card out of its slot.
Tip: You may need to wobble it a little bit up or down to loosen it from the card guides as you are
pulling out.

Image 14-5

How to install a card

To install a card follow the same procedure in the reverse order.

Apply a little pressure on the card until it is fully inserted in the back plane connector.

14.5 Rear I/O, VPU and Link card Heatsink Fan

Flow chart

Image 14-6

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 373

 E2 Maintenance

Overview

Image 14-7

1 I/O board
2 Heatsink Fan
3 Pins

Concerned parts
R767263K Heatsink Fan

Necessary tools
• 1 x Phillips Screwdriver #2.
• Small fine nose pliers.

How to remove the Rear I/O, VPU and Link card Heatsink Fan
1. After you remove the card from the chassis, unplug the heatsink fan power wire from the PCB connector.
2. Locate the two pins that are located on opposite corners of the Heatsink and secure the fan on to the board.
3. Turn the board over and with small fine nose pliers while bringing together the two sides of the pin push it
through the hole.
4. After both pins are pushed through the holes, you can remove the heatsink from the card.

How to install the Rear I/O, VPU and Link card Heatsink Fan
1. Remove the heatsink with the fan from the package.
2. Remove the plastic cover from the bottom of the fan to expose the adhesive material.
3. Align the holes in the board with the pins of the Heatsink.
4. Press firmly the heatsink to the devices below.
5. Plug the heatsink fan power wire to the PCB connector.

374 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 E2 Maintenance

14.6 Tri-Combo Input and Tri-Combo Output Card

Disassembly and Assembly
Flow chart

Image 14-8: TCI and TCO cards

Concerned parts
R9004785 Tri-Combo Input
R9004786 Tri-Combo Output
R767263K Fansink kit

Required tools
Phillips screwdriver PH2

How to disassemble a Tri-Combo Input (TCI) or a Tri-Combo Output (TCO) card

The procedure for disassembling a TCI card is the same as that for disassembling a TCO card. The images
accompanying these procedures show the TCI card, but the procedures apply to both cards.
1. Cut the zip tie that secures the fan cable, and remove the fan cable.

Image 14-9: Screws, standoff, washers, and nuts

1 PCBA (on mounting bracket)

2 Screws
3 Standoff
4 BNC washers and nuts
2. Remove the six screws that secure the PCBA to the mounting bracket.

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 375

 E2 Maintenance

3. Remove the BNC nuts and washers.

4. Loosen and remove the standoff.

Image 14-10: PCBA and mounting bracket

1 PCBA (with mezzanine and fansink installed)

2 Mounting bracket
5. Remove the PCBA from the sheet metal bracket.

Image 14-11: Mezzanine removal

1 PCBA (with fansink installed)

2 Mezzanine
3 Mezzanine BNC connectors
4 Mainboard BNC connectors
6. Remove the mezzanine.
7. Remove the fansink (heatsink fan), if necessary.

376 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 E2 Maintenance

Turn over the PCBA and push the fansink pins. (The fansink pins will not come free of the fansink.)

Image 14-12: TCI card fansink pin locations

1 Fansink pins

CAUTION: Do not reuse a fansink, once it has been removed from the mainboard (PCBA). The
thermal compound will no longer be properly located, and the compression of the pins during
removal will prevent them from fastening properly to the motherboard. Use the fansink replacement
kit R767263K.

How to assemble a Tri-Combo Input (TCI) or a Tri-Combo Output (TCO) card

The procedure for assembling a TCI card is the same as that for assembling a TCO card. The images
accompanying these procedures show the TCI card, but the procedures apply to both cards.
1. Install the fansink (heatsink fan) on the main board (PCBA), if the fansink is not already present.
1. Align the fansink pins with the holes on the PCBA.
2. Seat the pins so that they are flush with the top of the fansink.
3. Install the fan connector (not shown) to the connector on the PCBA.
4. Turn the card over and spread the fansink pins—using a small, flat-bladed screwdriver—to ensure that the
fansink stays attached to the card.

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 377

 E2 Maintenance

Image 14-13: Fansink installation

1 PCBA
2 Fansink (heatsink fan)
3 Fansink pins
4 Pin holes

Image 14-14: Mezzanine installation

1 PCBA (with fansink installed)

2 Mezzanine
3 Mezzanine BNC connectors
4 Mainboard BNC connectors
2. Place kapton tape on the rear portion of the mainboard BNC connectors.
(Kapton tape is not needed on the mezzanine BNC connectors.)
3. Install the mezzanine on the PCBA.

378 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 E2 Maintenance

On the TCI card, make sure that the LED's length is a maximum of 1.2 mm below the bottom surface of the
PCBA.

Image 14-15: PCBA and mounting bracket

1 PCBA (with mezzanine and fansink installed)

2 Mounting bracket
4. Place the PCBA on the sheet metal bracket, aligning the screw holes of the PCBA with the screw holes of the
bracket.

Image 14-16: Screws, standoff, washers, and nuts

1 PCBA (on mounting bracket)

2 Screws
3 Standoff
4 BNC washers and nuts

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 379

 E2 Maintenance

5. Install the six screws, but leave them loose.

6. Install the standoff through the front plate of the bracket.
7. Install the BNC washers and nuts.
8. Tighten the standoff to 5 in-lbs.
9. Tighten the BNC nuts to 12 in-lbs.
10. Tighten the six screws to 5 in-lbs.
11. Install the zip-tie mount and the zip tie.
12. Secure the fan cable with the zip tie.

14.7 Front Cover Assembly

Flow chart

Image 14-17

Overview

Image 14-18

1 Front Cover Assembly 4 1RU Fan Tray

2 Front Brackets 5 3RU Fan Tray
3 EMI Filter 6 VPU Cards
The EMI filter is no longer needed, and it can be removed. If the EMI filter is left in place, it requires
servicing. See “E2 maintenance actions”, page 364.

Necessary tools
1 x Screwdriver HEX 0.05" 7.05" (Provide by Barco in the original package).

380 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 E2 Maintenance

Image 14-19

How to remove the Front Cover Assembly

1. Use the Hex screwdriver to remove the 4 screws (Hex 6-32x.25) that attach the front cover to the brackets
located behind it.

Note: the standoffs go through the holes in sheet metal to properly align the front enclosure.

Image 14-20

2. Pull out the Front cover and lay it flat in front of the unit.
At this point there are still 3 cables connecting the Front cover to the unit.

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 381

 E2 Maintenance

Image 14-21

1 Front Panel Connector

2 VFD Connector
3 USB Connector
3. Pull the latches away from connectors and gently pull the flat Front Panel away.
4. Remove cables as outlined in the related procedures (VFD, USB and Front Panel connectors).

How to install the Front Cover Assembly

To install the Front Cover Assembly follow the same procedure in the reverse order.

14.8 Front Brackets

Flow chart

Image 14-22

Necessary tools
None.

382 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 E2 Maintenance

How to remove the Front Brackets

1. Remove the two front brackets by lifting them up and then pulling them inwards and then out.

Image 14-23

How to install the Front Brackets

To install the front Brackets follow the same procedure in the reverse order.

14.9 3RU Fan Tray

Flow chart

Image 14-24

Concerned parts
R767271K 3RU Fan Tray

Necessary tools
1 x Phillips Screwdriver #2 (optional).

How to remove the 3RU Fan Tray

1. Loosen and unscrew the 4 thumbscrews holding the 3RU fan tray to the chassis.

Note: You may need a screwdriver if the thumbscrews are very tight.

2. Pull the tray out.

Note: You need to tilt the tray and maneuver it to go around the dimples located on the side of the
chassis.

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 383

 E2 Maintenance

Image 14-25

How to install the 3RU Fan Tray

Follow the same procedure in the reverse order and in addition perform the following:
1. Ensure that the bottom slots at the bottom of the tray align with the pins located on the bracket in the chassis.
2. Make sure that the connector located at the back of the tray is aligned to the connector located on the bracket
behind it.
3. Push so that the two connectors mate.

14.10 1RU Fan Tray

Flow chart

Image 14-26

Concerned parts
R767270K 1RU Fan Tray

Necessary tools
1 x Phillips Screwdriver #2 (optional).

How to remove the 1RU Fan Tray

1. Loosen and unscrew the 2 thumbscrews holding the 1RU fan tray to the chassis.

Note: You may need a screwdriver if the thumbscrews are very tight.

384 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 E2 Maintenance

Image 14-27

2. Pull the tray out.

Note: You might need to tilt the tray and maneuver it to go around the dimples located on the side of
the chassis.

Image 14-28

Caution: Before you completely remove it from the unit carefully push the USB and Front panel cables
through the grommet located on the left hand side.

How to install the 1RU Fan Tray

Follow the same procedure in the reverse order and in addition perform the following:
1. Pass the USB and VFD cable through the grommet.

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 385

 E2 Maintenance

Image 14-29

2. Make sure that the front panel flat cable goes through the slot located on the right hand side.
3. Line up the connector behind the fan tray and the connector on the bracket behind it and push so the two
connectors mate.

14.11 VPU Card(s)

Flow chart

Image 14-30

Overview

Image 14-31

1 Chassis
2 VPU cards

Concerned parts
R9004747 VPU Card

Necessary tools
1 x Phillips Screwdriver #2 (optional).

386 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 E2 Maintenance

How to remove a VPU Card

1. Locate the VPU you need to replace.
Note: There are 9 VPU slots. The first slot on the left is slot 15 and the last slot on the most right
position is 23.

2. Loosen and unscrew the thumbscrew that is holding VPU card to the chassis.
3. Pull the VPU out of its slot.

Image 14-32

How to install a VPU Card

To install a VPU Card follow the same procedure in the reverse order.

14.12 Front Panel Knob

Flow chart

Image 14-33

Before you proceed removing the Front panel knob you need to remove the Front Cover Assembly
as outlined in the related procedure.

Necessary tools
• Knob removal tool provided by Barco

Image 14-34

• Flat head screwdriver or a tool with a sharp edge

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 387

 E2 Maintenance

How to remove the Front Panel Knob

1. Remove the knob cover with a flat screw driver or a sharp object to expose the inside of the knob.

Image 14-35

2. Use the knob removal tool provided by Barco to take out the knob. Align the notches on the tool with the
grooves in the knob as indicated below.
Note: If the tool is not available use fine point needle nose pliers to squeeze at knob between the two
grooves while pulling it out.

Image 14-36

How to install the Front Panel Knob

To install the Front Panel Knob follow the same procedure in the reverse order.

14.13 Front Panel Mount

Flow chart

Image 14-37

Necessary tools
1 x Phillips Screwdriver #2

388 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 E2 Maintenance

How to remove the Front Panel Mount

1. Turn the Front Cover over and remove the four screws (4-40X.25) that secure the control panel mount to the
front panel.

Image 14-38

How to install the Front Panel Mount

To install the Front Panel Mount follow the same procedure in the reverse order.

14.14 Front Panel Board

Flow chart

Image 14-39

Concerned parts
R767260K Front Panel Board

Necessary tools
1 x Phillips Screwdriver #2

How to remove the Front Panel Board

1. Remove the two screws ( 4-40X.25) that secure the PCB to the front mount.

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 389

 E2 Maintenance

Image 14-40

2. Move the PCB to the right and then out to release it from the mount.

Image 14-41

How to install the Front Panel Board

To install the Front Panel Board follow the same procedure in the reverse order.

390 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 E2 Maintenance

14.15 VFD Display Assembly

Flow chart

Image 14-42

Before you proceed removing the VFD Display mount you need to remove the Front Cover
Assembly as outlined in the related procedure

Concerned parts
R767241K VFD Display Assembly

Necessary tools
1 x Phillips Screwdriver #2

How to remove the VFD Display Assembly

1. Turn the Front Cover over and remove the four screws (4-40X.25) that secure the VFD display assembly to
the front panel mount.

Image 14-43

How to install the VFD Display Assembly

To install the VFD Display Assembly follow the same procedure in the reverse order.

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 391

 E2 Maintenance

14.16 VFD Display Filter

Flow chart

Image 14-44

Concerned parts
R767246K VFD Display Filter

Necessary tools
None.

How to remove the VFD Display Filter

1. From the front of the unit push hard on the filter until it detaches from the unit.

Image 14-45

2. Use alcohol to clean the adhesive residue that held the filter to the metal plate.

How to install the VFD Display Filter

1. Remove the protective film from the front of the filter and release the liner from the tape.
2. Press firmly the filter into the metal plate.

14.17 Bottom Panel

Necessary tools
1 x Phillips Screwdriver #2

How to remove the Bottom Panel

1. Turn the unit over to remove the bottom panel. The bottom panel is composed of two pieces.
2. Remove the 4 black round-head screws (4-40x1/4) that attach the panels to the side of the unit.
3. Remove the 6 screws that hold the two sides together.

392 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 E2 Maintenance

4. Remove the rest of the screws from the perimeter of the panel as shown below.
5. Push on the edge of the piece that is in the middle of the chassis until it's loosened and release from the unit.
Carefully remove this piece from the unit.
6. Remove the other piece.

Image 14-46

How to install the Bottom Panel

To install the Bottom Panel follow the same procedure in the reverse order.

14.18 Solid-State Memory

Flow chart

Image 14-47

Before you proceed removing the Solid State Memory you need to remove the Bottom Panel as
outlined in the related procedure.

The solid-state memory can also be replaced after the System Power board is removed from the
unit.

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 393

 E2 Maintenance

Overview

Image 14-48

1 System Power board

2 Solid State Memory card
3 Socket

Concerned parts
R767275K Solid State Memory

Necessary tools
1 x Phillips Screwdriver #2

How to remove the Solid State Memory

1. Remove the 2 screws that hold the memory card.
2. Carefully remove the memory card from the socket.

Image 14-49

How to install the Solid State Memory

To install the Solid State Memory follow the same procedure in the reverse order.

394 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 E2 Maintenance

14.19 System Battery

Flow chart

Image 14-50

Before you proceed removing the System Battery you need to remove the Bottom Panel as outlined
in the related procedure.

The System Battery can also be replaced after the System Power board is removed from the unit.

Concerned parts
V327007 Battery

Necessary tools
None.

How to remove the System battery

1. Carefully remove the battery from its socket.

Image 14-51

How to install the System battery

To install the System battery follow the same procedure in the reverse order.

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 395

 E2 Maintenance

When a new battery is installed, the user need to place a sticker on the inside of the metal plate
(Bottom Panel) that indicates when the battery was last replaced. The absence of sticker means the
battery has never been replaced. In this case the S/N sticker can be used for the reference date.

Image 14-52

14.20 CPU Module

Flow chart

Image 14-53

Before you proceed removing the CPU module you need to remove the Bottom Panel as outlined in
the related procedure.

Overview

Image 14-54

1 Chassis 4 System Card.

2 CPU Module 5 Bottom Panel Part 2
3 Bottom Panel Part 1

Concerned parts
R767264K CPU module

396 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 E2 Maintenance

Necessary tools
1 x Phillips Screwdriver #2

How to remove the CPU module

1. Remove the five screws that attach CPU module to the system card.
2. Carefully remove the CPU module by lifting it up.

Image 14-55

How to install the CPU module

To install the CPU module follow the same procedure in the reverse order.

14.21 Power Supply

Concerned parts
R767267K Power Supply

Necessary tools
None.

How remove Power Supply

1. Push the latch towards the right.

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 397

 E2 Maintenance

Image 14-56

2. Pull the Power supply out of its slot by pulling on the handle.

How to install Power Supply

1. Insert the Power Supply into the slot.

Note: The card edge should be at the top of the power supply as shown in the drawing.

398 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 E2 Maintenance

2. Push the power supply completely inside the slot. Apply a little pressure by using the handle until the power
supply is fully inserted.

14.22 System-Power Board

Flow chart

Image 14-57

Before you proceed removing the System-Power board you need to remove the Power Supplies,
Bottom Panel and the CPU board. Follow the instructions provided in these sections.

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 399

 E2 Maintenance

Overview

Image 14-58

1 Chassis
2 System-Power Board
3 Bottom Panel part 1
4 Bottom Panel part 2

Concerned parts
R767261K System-Power Board

Necessary tools
• 1 x Phillips Screwdriver #2
• Hex Screwdriver

How to remove the System-Power board

1. Unplug the USB, VFD, 3RU and 1RU cables that are plugged on the top side of the board and are visible
when the bottom panel is removed. Refer to the drawing below (top side) to locate the cables.
2. With the Hex Screwdriver, remove the 5 standoffs (m 2,5 H6 Stainless Steel) which attach the CPU module to
the motherboard.

400 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 E2 Maintenance

Image 14-59

3. Remove the 15 screws (6-32x.31 Stainless Steel) that attach the System Power Board to the Mother board.
4. Carefully lift the board up and remove the card from the System. Don't pull the board too far because there are
still 3 cables attached to the card.
Note: Interposer card(s) may come out. In this case, re-install the boards into the motherboard slots
unit.

5. Turn the board over and unplug the Genlock, Ethernet cable and Front panel keyboard cable. Refer to the
drawing below (Bottom side) to locate the cables.

After the system card is removed, you can also replace the System battery or the Solid-State
memory. These items can be serviced without removing the System-Power board as described in
other sections of this chapter.

How to install the System-Power Board

To install the System-Power Board follow the same procedure in the reverse order.

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 401

 E2 Maintenance

Top side

Image 14-60

1 USB connector 3 3RU connector

2 VFD connector 4 1RU connector

402 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 E2 Maintenance

Bottom side

Image 14-61

1 Keyboard connector 3 Ethernet connector

2 Genlock connector

14.23 Genlock Assembly

Flow chart

Image 14-62

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 403

 E2 Maintenance

Overview

Image 14-63

1 Chassis
2 Genlock Assembly

Concerned parts
R9004748 Genlock Assembly

Necessary tools
1 x Phillips Screwdriver #2

How to remove the Genlock Assembly

1. Remove the seven flat head screws (4-40 X .25) that attach the Genlock assembly to the rear side of the
chassis.
2. Remove the ten pan head screws (4-40 X .25) that attach the Genlock assembly to the rear of the chassis.

404 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 E2 Maintenance

Image 14-64

3. Gently pull the Genlock assembly away from the unit . Don't pull the assembly too far back because there are
still 2 cables attached.

Note: At this point there are still 2 cables connecting the Genlock Assembly to the unit.

4. Unlatch the VFD ribbon cable from the connector and pull it up and away from the Genlock board.

Note: This cable connects the Genlock board to the System-Power board.

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 405

 E2 Maintenance

Image 14-65

5. Unlatch the Ethernet cable from the connector and pull back and away from the Genlock board.

Note: This cable connects the Genlock board to the System-Power board.

How to install the Genlock Assembly

To install the Genlock Assembly follow the same procedure in the reverse order.

14.24 USB Cable

Flow chart

Image 14-66

The USB cable is connected to the USB extension cable (the cable that is connected to the System-
Power board). This procedure provides instructions how to disconnect it from both sides of the
cable.

Concerned parts
R767269K Cable Kit Set

Necessary tools
• 1 x Phillips Screwdriver #2
• Hex Screwdriver
• Nut socket.

How to remove the USB cable

1. Completely detach and pull the Front Cover assembly away from the unit (refer to the related procedure).
2. Disconnect the USB cable from the USB Extension cable (the other side of the cable is connected to the
System-Power board).
3. Disconnect the VFD and Front Keyboard Panel cables from the VFD assembly and Front panel boards.

406 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 E2 Maintenance

4. Place the Front panel enclosure face down on a flat area.

5. Use the nut socket to remove the 16 nuts (6-32) that attach the first plate to the assembly.
6. Remove and put aside the 16 spacers situated under the plate you just removed.

Image 14-67

7. Remove the plate that has been exposed after the nuts are removed.
8. Remove the three screws that hold the USB cable into the metal plate.

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 407

 E2 Maintenance

Image 14-68

9. Remove the USB cable.

How to install the USB cable

To install the USB cable follow the same procedure in the reverse order.

14.25 USB Extension Cable

Flow chart

Image 14-69

The USB Extension cable connects the USB cable to the System Power board. This procedure
provides instructions on how to disconnect the cable on both sides.

Concerned parts
R767269K Cable Kit Set

Necessary tools
1 x Phillips Screwdriver #2

How to remove the USB Extension cable

1. Partially remove the front panel assembly and pull it away to expose the cables behind it (refer to the related
procedure).
2. Disconnect the USB Extension cable from the USB cable.
3. Gently push the cable through the grommet located in the 1RU tray.

408 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 E2 Maintenance

Image 14-70

4. Turn the unit upside down and remove the bottom panel (Follow the instructions provided in the bottom panel
removal section).
5. Locate the USB Extension cable that is plugged on the System-Power board.

Image 14-71

6. Unplug the USB Extension cable by gently pushing it out.

7. Pull the cable out of the unit.

How to install the USB Extension cable

To install the USB Extension cable follow the same procedure in the reverse order.

14.26 VFD Cable

Flow chart

Image 14-72

The flat ribbon VFD cable connects the VFD assembly to the System Power board. This procedure
provides instructions on how to disconnect the cable on both sides.

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 409

 E2 Maintenance

Concerned parts
R767269K Cable Kit Set

Necessary tools
• 1 x Phillips Screwdriver #2
• Hex Screwdriver

How to remove the VFD Cable

1. Partially remove the front panel assembly and pull it away to expose the cables behind it (refer to the related
procedure).
2. Push out the side latches on VFD connector to release the VFD cable.

Image 14-73

3. Gently push the cable through the grommet located in the 1RU tray.

410 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 E2 Maintenance

Image 14-74

4. Turn the unit upside down and remove the bottom panel (Follow the instructions provided in the bottom panel
removal section).
5. Locate the VFD cable that is plugged on the System-Power board.

Image 14-75

6. Pull the cable out of the unit .

How to install the VFD Cable

To install the VFD Cable follow the same procedure in the reverse order.

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 411

 E2 Maintenance

14.27 Keyboard Cable

Flow chart

Image 14-76

The flat ribbon keyboard cable connects the Front panel board to the System-Power board. This
procedure provides instructions on how to disconnect the cable on both sides.

Concerned parts
R767269K Cable Kit Set

Necessary tools
• 1 x Phillips Screwdriver #2
• Hex Screwdriver

How to remove the Keyboard cable

1. Follow the steps detailed in other procedures to remove the Front Cover Assembly, Front brackets, EMI filter*,
3RU Fan Tray and 1RU Fan Tray. Make sure that the Keyboard Cable is disconnected from the Front Panel
board.
Note: The EMI filter is no longer needed, and it can be removed. If the EMI filter is left in place, it
requires servicing. See “E2 maintenance actions”, page 364.

2. Remove the Power supplies from the unit.

3. Turn the unit upside down and follow the steps detailed in other procedures to remove the Bottom Panel and
the CPU module from the System-Power board.
4. Remove the USB, VFD, 3RU and 1RU cables that are connected to the System-Power board.
5. Remove the screws that attach the System-Power Board to the standoffs.
6. Lift the System Power Board from the standoffs and flip it over, but don’t extend it too much.
7. Locate the keyboard connector and push the latches out to release the cable.

412 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 E2 Maintenance

Image 14-77

8. Carefully remove the cable from the unit.

How to install the Keyboard Cable

To install the Keyboard Cable follow the same procedure in the reverse order.

There is a key on the connector to prevent incorrect insertion of the cable.

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 413

 E2 Maintenance

14.28 Genlock Cable

Flow chart

Image 14-78

The flat ribbon Genlock cable connects the Genlock Assembly to the System-Power board. This
procedure provides instructions on how to disconnect the cable on both sides.

Make sure the latches are fully engaged to prevent the cable from coming loose.

Concerned parts
R767269K Cable Kit Set

Necessary tools
• 1 x Phillips Screwdriver #2
• Hex Screwdriver

How to remove the Genlock cable

1. Remove the Genlock Assembly and disconnect the Genlock cable from the board. Follow the instructions as
provided in the previous section.
2. Turn the unit upside down and follow the steps detailed in other procedures to remove the Bottom Panel and
the CPU module from the System-Power board.
3. Remove the USB, VFD, 3RU and 1RU cables that are connected to the System-Power board.
4. Remove the screws that attach the System-Power Board to the standoffs.
5. Lift the System Power Board from the standoffs and flip it over, but don’t extend it too much.
6. Unplug the side of the Genlock cable that is plugged into the System Power board.

414 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 E2 Maintenance

Image 14-79

7. Remove the cable from the unit.

How to install the Genlock Cable

To install the Genlock Cable follow the same procedure in the reverse order.

There is a key on the connector to prevent incorrect insertion of the cable.

Make sure the latches are fully engaged to prevent the cable from coming loose.

14.29 Ethernet Cable

Flow chart

Image 14-80

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 415

 E2 Maintenance

The Ethernet cable connects the Genlock board to the System Power board. This procedure
provides instructions on how to remove the cable from both sides.

Concerned parts
R767269K Cable Kit Set

Necessary tools
1 x Phillips Screwdriver #2

How to remove the Ethernet cable

1. Follow the steps detailed in other procedures to remove Ethernet cable from the Genlock assembly.
2. Turn the unit upside down and follow the steps detailed in other procedures to remove the Bottom Panel and
the CPU module from the System-Power board.
3. Remove the USB, VFD, 3RU and 1RU cables that are connected to the System-Power board.
4. Remove the screws that attach the System-Power Board to the standoffs.
5. Lift the System Power Board from the standoffs and flip it over, but don’t extend it too much.
6. Locate the Ethernet connector and push the locking clip on the Ethernet cable so it can be released from the
socket.

Image 14-81

7. Carefully remove the cable from the unit.

How to install the Ethernet Cable

To install the Ethernet Cable follow the same procedure in the reverse order.

14.30 3RU Fan Cable

Flow chart

Image 14-82

416 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 E2 Maintenance

The 3RU cable assembly provides power to the 3RU fans from the System-Power board.

One side of the cable is attached to a metal bracket that is accessible after the 3RU fan tray is
removed. The other side of the cable assembly connects to the System-Power board and is
accessible when the bottom panel is removed

Concerned parts
R767269K Cable Kit Set

Necessary tools
• 1 x Phillips Screwdriver #2
• Hex Screwdriver

How to remove the 3RU Fan cable

1. Make sure the unit is placed in the upright position and the 3RU fan tray is removed
2. Locate the 3RU cable connector that is exposed after the 3RU fan tray is removed. The connector is attached
on a metal bracket that is vertically mounted in the chassis.

Image 14-83

3. Locate the snap lock on the top of the connector and push it back to release the connector from the bracket.

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 417

 E2 Maintenance

Image 14-84

4. Push the connector up until the slots in the metal bracket align with the flanges on the connectors.

Image 14-85

5. Gently pull the 3RU cable assembly away from the bracket.

Image 14-86

6. Turn the unit upside-down and remove the bottom panel.

7. Locate the 3RU cable that is plugged on the System-Power board.

418 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 E2 Maintenance

Image 14-87

8. Remove the 3RU cable by gently pushing it out.

How to install the 3RU Fan Cable

To install the 3RU Fan Cable follow the same procedure in the reverse order.

14.31 1RU Fan Cable

Flow chart

Image 14-88

The 1RU cable assembly provides power to the 1RU fans from the System-Power board.

One side of the cable is attached to a metal bracket that is accessible after the 3RU and the 1RU
fan trays are removed. The other side of the cable assembly connects to the System-Power board
and is accessible when the bottom panel is removed.

Concerned parts
R767269K Cable Kit Set

Necessary tools
• 1 x Phillips Screwdriver #2
• Hex Screwdriver

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 419

 E2 Maintenance

How to remove the 1RU Fan cable

1. Make sure the unit is placed in the upright position and the 3RU and 1RU fan trays are removed.
2. Locate the 1RU cable connector that is exposed after the 1RU fan tray is removed. The connector is attached
on a metal bracket that is horizontally mounted in the chassis.

Image 14-89

3. Locate the snap lock on the connector and push it back to release the connector from the bracket.

Image 14-90

4. Push the connector to the left until the slots in the metal bracket align with the flanges on the connectors.

420 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 E2 Maintenance

Image 14-91

5. Gently pull the cable away from the bracket.

Image 14-92

6. Turn the unit upside-down and remove the bottom panel.

7. Locate the 1RU cable that is plugged on the System-Power board.

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 421

 E2 Maintenance

Image 14-93

8. Remove the 1RU cable by gently pushing it out.

How to install the 1RU Fan Cable

To install the 1RU Fan Cable follow the same procedure in the reverse order.

14.32 Rear Rack Ears

Concerned parts
R767273K Connector protector

Necessary tools
1 x Phillips Screwdriver #2

How to remove Rear Rack-Ears

1. Remove the eight pan head screws (8-32x.31), four from each side, to detach the rear rack ears and
connector protectors from the unit.
Note: If the rear rack ears have been removed, do not re-install the 8-32x.31 screws. Without the rack
ears in place, the screws may damage the multiviewer card.

Note: You don’t need to remove the rear rack ears to access any other part of the unit.

422 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 E2 Maintenance

Image 14-94

How to install Rear Rack-Ears

To install the Rear Rack-Ears follow the same procedure in the reverse order.

When shipping an E2 in a Barco-supplied case, make sure that the rear connector protectors are
installed to prevent damage.

14.33 Front Rack-Ears

Flow chart

Image 14-95

Concerned parts
R767268K Rack Ears kit

Necessary tools
1 x Phillips Screwdriver #2

How to remove Side Rack-Ears

1. Loosening and removing the eight (four on each side) pan head screws that secure the brackets to the chassis
sides.

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 423

 E2 Maintenance

Image 14-96

2. Remove the Rack-Mount Brackets from the Chassis.

How to install Side Rack-Ears

To install the Side Rack-Ears follow the same procedure in the reverse order.

14.34 Top Cover

Flow chart

Image 14-97

Necessary tools
1 x Phillips Screwdriver #2

How to remove Top Cover

1. Remove the 12 screws from the two sides (6 in each side, 4-40x0.25) that are located towards the top side of
the unit.
2. Remove the two (2) screws (4-40x0.25) located closer to the rear end of the unit. These are flat head screws.
3. Remove the 8 screws (6-32x0.25) located on the top at the back of the chassis.
4. Remove the cover by gently pulling it away from the E2

424 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 E2 Maintenance

Image 14-98

How to install Top Cover

To install the Top Cover follow the same procedure in the reverse order.

14.35 Top Card Guide

Flow chart

Image 14-99

Necessary tools
1 x Phillips Screwdriver #2

How to remove Top Card Guide

1. Remove the 18 screws from the two sides (8 in each side, 6-32x0.25) that are located towards the bottom of
the unit.
2. Remove the card guide cover by gently pulling it away from the E2.

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 425

 E2 Maintenance

Image 14-100

How to install Top Card Guide

To install the Top Card Guide follow the same procedure in the reverse order.

When installing the guide make sure you have 2 cards from the rear and two cards from the front
(VPUs) installed before tightening the screws.

Use Loctite 242 to the screws before installing.

14.36 Motherboard Fan

Flow chart

Image 14-101

426 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 E2 Maintenance

Overview

Image 14-102

1 Motherboard
2 Fan
3 Heatsink
4 Fan power cable

Concerned parts
R767265K Motherboard Heatsink &
Fan kit

Necessary tools
1 x Phillips Screwdriver #2

How to remove Motherboard Fan

1. Remove the cable that provides power to the heatsink fan.
2. Lift the two handles to release the fan from the heatsink.

Image 14-103

3. Lift the fan away from the heatsink.

How to install Motherboard Fan

1. Remove the fan from the Heatsink/Fan spare kit.
2. Using the clips install the fan on the top of the heatsink that is on the motherboard.
3. Connect the fan power cable to header xxx located on the motherboard.

Disregard the heatsink from the spare kit.

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 427

 E2 Maintenance

428 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 S3 Maintenance 15
About this chapter
This chapter describes how to service a S3 series Event Master Processor by replacing individual
components.

Simple servicing
S3 series devices are based on a modular design that ensures easy serviceability. Users can swap most of
the S3 components in the case of damage, without shipping the unit to a Barco service center.

Methodology
Most procedures in these chapters include multiple steps to gain access to the parts requiring service. A
workflow flow chart is provided next indicating all of the procedures and their relationships. Please refer to the
chart to familiarize yourself with the sequence of procedures.

ESD recommendations
The following precautions must be taken:
• Perform the Service procedures only at approved anti-static work station equipped with anti- static mat.
• At all times use a conductive wrist strap attached to a solid earth ground.
• Always discharge yourself by touching a grounded bare metal surface before coming in contact with ESD
sensitive electronic.
WARNING: Always switch power off and unplug the cords from the device before performing any
maintenance operations described in this chapter.

WARNING: The device can be damaged by electrostatic discharge (ESD). When handling the
device and any of its components, caution must be taken so that damage does not occur. Damage
due to inappropriate handling is not covered by the warranty.

Overview
• S3 unit Overview
• Process Overview
• Spare Parts Serviceable by All Users
• Rear I/O, Link and VPU Cards
• Rear I/O, VPU and Link card Heatsink Fan
• Tri-Combo Input and Tri-Combo Output Card Disassembly and Assembly
• Front Cover Assembly
• Front Brackets

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 429

 S3 Maintenance

• 3RU Fan Tray

• Front Panel Knob
• Front Panel Mount
• Front Panel Board
• VFD Display Assembly
• VFD Display Filter
• USB Cable
• USB Extension Cable
• Power Supply
• Genlock Assembly
• Rear Rack Ears
• Front Rack-Ears
• Top Cover
• Top Card Guide
• Motherboard Fan
• Power Interposer Assembly
• Power Supply Guide
• Side support plate
• Link Card Interposer
• CPU Module
• Solid-State Memory
• System Battery
• VFD Cable
• Keyboard Cable
• 3RU Fan Cable
• Ethernet Cable
• Genlock Cable

430 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 S3 Maintenance

15.1 S3 unit Overview

Orientation and main components

Image 15-1

T Top 6 3RU Fan Tray

F Front 7 Rack Ears
1 On/Off 8 Chassis
2 Front Panel Knob 9 Motherboard
3 VFD Display 10 Top Cover
4 Front Cover Assembly 11 Power Interposer Assembly
5 Front Brackets

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 431

 S3 Maintenance

15.2 Process Overview

Flow chart

Image 15-2

432 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 S3 Maintenance

15.3 Spare Parts Serviceable by All Users

S3 Spare Parts list
P/N Description Comments
R767241K * VFD Display assembly
R767246K * VFD Filter
R767260K * Front Panel board
R767263K * Heatsink fan One for each Input, Output, Link and VPU card
R767264K * CPU module
R767265K * Motherboard Heatsink &
Fan kit
R767267K * Power supply(PS) One PS only. System accepts two Power supplies
R767275K * Solid-State Memory
R767278K MOTHERBOARD S3
R767279K POWER INTERPOSER S3
R767280K * 3RU fan tray The fans are not available separately — will replace
R767271K
R767281K FRONT RACK EARS S3 Includes hardware for both sides
R767282K REAR CONNECTOR
PROTECTOR S3
R767283K S3 Cable Kit Kit contains:
• 1x USB Extension cable
• 1x Fan Tray-to-Motherboard cable
• 1x RJ45-to-Motherboard CAT5 Ethernet cable
• 1x Front Panel Keyboard-to-Motherboard flat cable
• 1x Genlock-to-Motherboard flat cable
• 1x VFD-to-Motherboard cable
V327007 * System Battery
R9004740 * DVI Input Board
R9004741 * SDI Output Board
R9004742 * SDI Input Board
R9004743 * HDMI Output Board
R9004744 * DP/HDMI Input Board
R9004745 * DVI Output Board
R9004746 * Link Card Board
R9004750 * Link/CXP Cable
R9004758 VPU CARD S3
R9004759 GENLOCK S3
R9004760 GENLOCK/S3D S3
R9004765* Quad DP 1.2 Output Board
R9004785 * Tri-Combo Input Board
R9004786 * Tri-Combo Output Board
R9004791* Quad HDMI Input Board
R9004792* Quad HDMI 2.0 Output
Board
R9004793* Quad DP 1.2 Input Board

(*) common between E2 and S3.

Optional CXP Cables

P/N Description Comments
R9004753 CXP Fiber Cable 1x 30M Fiber cable
R9004754 CXP Fiber Cable 1x 100M Fiber cable
R9004761 CXP Cable 1x 3M cable

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 433

 S3 Maintenance

R9004762 CXP Cable 1x 5M cable

R9004763 CXP Cable 2x 3M cables
R9004764 CXP Cable 2x 5M cables

15.4 Rear I/O, Link and VPU Cards

Flow chart

Image 15-3

Overview

Image 15-4

1 Chassis
2 I/O, Link and VPU cards

Concerned parts
R9004740 DVI Input
R9004741 SDI Output
R9004742 SDI Input
R9004743 HDMI Output
R9004744 DP/HDMI Input
R9004745 DVI Output
R9004746 Link Card
R9004758 VPU card S3
R9004765 Quad DP 1.2 Output
Board
R9004785 Tri-Combo Input
R9004786 Tri-Combo Output
R9004791 Quad HDMI Input Board

434 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 S3 Maintenance

R9004792 Quad HDMI 2.0 Output

Board
R9004793 Quad DP 1.2 Input Board

Necessary tools
Phillips Screwdriver #2.

How to remove a card

1. Locate the card you wish to replace.
Note: There are 9 card slots. The first slot on the left is slot 1 and the last slot on the most right
position is 9.

2. Loosen and unscrew the top and bottom thumbscrews that are holding the card to the chassis.
3. Gently pull the card out of its slot.
Tip: You may need to wobble it a little bit up or down to loosen it from the card guides as you are
pulling out.

Image 15-5

How to install a card

To install a card follow the same procedure in the reverse order.

Apply a little pressure on the card until it is fully inserted in the back plane connector.

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 435

 S3 Maintenance

15.5 Rear I/O, VPU and Link card Heatsink Fan

Flow chart

Image 15-6

Overview

Image 15-7

1 I/O board
2 Heatsink Fan
3 Pins

Concerned parts
R767263K Heatsink Fan

Necessary tools
• 1 x Phillips Screwdriver #2.
• Small fine nose pliers.

How to remove the Rear I/O, VPU and Link card Heatsink Fan
1. After you remove the card from the chassis, unplug the heatsink fan power wire from the PCB connector.
2. Locate the two pins that are located on opposite corners of the Heatsink and secure the fan on to the board.
3. Turn the board over and with small fine nose pliers while bringing together the two sides of the pin push it
through the hole.
4. After both pins are pushed through the holes, you can remove the heatsink from the card.

436 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 S3 Maintenance

How to install the Rear I/O, VPU and Link card Heatsink Fan
1. Remove the heatsink with the fan from the package.
2. Remove the plastic cover from the bottom of the fan to expose the adhesive material.
3. Align the holes in the board with the pins of the Heatsink.
4. Press firmly the heatsink to the devices below.
5. Plug the heatsink fan power wire to the PCB connector.

15.6 Tri-Combo Input and Tri-Combo Output Card

Disassembly and Assembly
TCI and TCO card disassembly and assembly
See “Tri-Combo Input and Tri-Combo Output Card Disassembly and Assembly”, page 375 for details.

15.7 Front Cover Assembly

Flow chart

Image 15-8

Overview

Image 15-9

1 Front Cover Assembly

2 Front Brackets
3 3RUFanTray
4 Event Master Unit

Necessary tools
1 x Screwdriver HEX 0.05" 7.05" (Provide by Barco in the original package).

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 437

 S3 Maintenance

Image 15-10

How to remove the Front Cover Assembly

1. Use the Hex screwdriver to remove the 4 screws (Hex 6-32x.25) that attach the front cover to the brackets
located behind it.

Note: the standoffs go through the holes in sheet metal to properly align the front enclosure.

Image 15-11

2. Pull out the Front cover and lay it flat in front of the unit.
At this point there are still 3 cables connecting the Front cover to the unit.

438 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 S3 Maintenance

Image 15-12

1 Front Panel Connector

2 VFD Connector
3 USB Connector
3. Pull the latches away from connectors and gently pull the flat Front Panel away.
4. Remove cables as outlined in the related procedures (VFD, USB and Front Panel connectors).

How to install the Front Cover Assembly

To install the Front Cover Assembly follow the same procedure in the reverse order.

15.8 Front Brackets

Flow chart

Image 15-13

Necessary tools
None.

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 439

 S3 Maintenance

How to remove the Front Brackets

1. Remove the two front brackets by lifting them up and then pulling them inwards and then out.

Image 15-14

How to install the Front Brackets

To install the front Brackets follow the same procedure in the reverse order.

15.9 3RU Fan Tray

Flow chart

Image 15-15

Concerned parts
R767280K 3RU Fan Tray

Necessary tools
1 x Phillips Screwdriver #2 (optional).

How to remove the 3RU Fan Tray

1. Loosen and unscrew the 4 thumbscrews holding the 3RU fan tray to the chassis.

Note: You may need a screwdriver if the thumbscrews are very tight.

2. Pull the tray out.

Note: You need to tilt the tray and maneuver it to go around the dimples located on the side of the
chassis.

440 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 S3 Maintenance

Image 15-16

Caution: Before you completely remove it from the unit carefully push the USB and Front panel cables
through the grommet located between the two fans at left hand side.

How to install the 3RU Fan Tray

Follow the same procedure in the reverse order and in addition perform the following:
1. Pass the USB and VFD cable through the grommet.
2. Make sure that the front panel flat cable (keyboard cable) goes through the slot located on the bottom side.

Image 15-17

3. Line up the connector behind the fan tray and the connector on the motherboard behind it and push so the two
connectors mate.

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 441

 S3 Maintenance

15.10 Front Panel Knob

Flow chart

Image 15-18

Before you proceed removing the Front panel knob you need to remove the Front Cover Assembly
as outlined in the related procedure.

Necessary tools
• Knob removal tool provided by Barco

Image 15-19

• Flat head screwdriver or a tool with a sharp edge

How to remove the Front Panel Knob

1. Remove the knob cover with a flat screw driver or a sharp object to expose the inside of the knob.

Image 15-20

2. Use the knob removal tool provided by Barco to take out the knob. Align the notches on the tool with the
grooves in the knob as indicated below.
Note: If the tool is not available use fine point needle nose pliers to squeeze at knob between the two
grooves while pulling it out.

442 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 S3 Maintenance

Image 15-21

How to install the Front Panel Knob

To install the Front Panel Knob follow the same procedure in the reverse order.

15.11 Front Panel Mount

Flow chart

Image 15-22

Necessary tools
1 x Phillips Screwdriver #2

How to remove the Front Panel Mount

1. Turn the Front Cover over and remove the four screws (4-40X.25) that secure the control panel mount to the
front panel.

Image 15-23

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 443

 S3 Maintenance

How to install the Front Panel Mount

To install the Front Panel Mount follow the same procedure in the reverse order.

15.12 Front Panel Board

Flow chart

Image 15-24

Concerned parts
R767260K Front Panel Board

Necessary tools
1 x Phillips Screwdriver #2

How to remove the Front Panel Board

1. Remove the two screws ( 4-40X.25) that secure the PCB to the front mount.

Image 15-25

2. Move the PCB to the right and then out to release it from the mount.

444 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 S3 Maintenance

Image 15-26

How to install the Front Panel Board

To install the Front Panel Board follow the same procedure in the reverse order.

15.13 VFD Display Assembly

Flow chart

Image 15-27

Before you proceed removing the VFD Display mount you need to remove the Front Cover
Assembly as outlined in the related procedure

Concerned parts
R767241K VFD Display Assembly

Necessary tools
1 x Phillips Screwdriver #2

How to remove the VFD Display Assembly

1. Turn the Front Cover over and remove the four screws (4-40X.25) that secure the VFD display assembly to
the front panel mount.

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 445

 S3 Maintenance

Image 15-28

How to install the VFD Display Assembly

To install the VFD Display Assembly follow the same procedure in the reverse order.

15.14 VFD Display Filter

Flow chart

Image 15-29

Concerned parts
R767246K VFD Display Filter

Necessary tools
None.

How to remove the VFD Display Filter

1. From the front of the unit push hard on the filter until it detaches from the unit.

446 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 S3 Maintenance

Image 15-30

2. Use alcohol to clean the adhesive residue that held the filter to the metal plate.

How to install the VFD Display Filter

1. Remove the protective film from the front of the filter and release the liner from the tape.
2. Press firmly the filter into the metal plate.

15.15 USB Cable

Flow chart

Image 15-31

The USB cable is connected to the USB extension cable (the cable that is connected to the
Motherboard). This procedure provides instructions how to disconnect it from both sides of the
cable.

Concerned parts
R767283K Cable Kit Set

Necessary tools
• 1 x Phillips Screwdriver #2
• Hex Screwdriver
• Nut socket.

How to remove the USB cable

1. Completely detach and pull the Front Cover assembly away from the unit (refer to the related procedure).
2. Disconnect the USB cable from the USB Extension cable (the other side of the cable is connected to the
Motherboard).
3. Disconnect the VFD and Front Keyboard Panel cables from the VFD assembly and Front panel boards.
4. Place the Front panel enclosure face down on a flat area.
5. Use the nut socket to remove the 16 nuts (6-32) that attach the first plate to the assembly.

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 447

 S3 Maintenance

6. Remove and put aside the 16 spacers situated under the plate you just removed.

Image 15-32

7. Remove the plate that has been exposed after the nuts are removed.
8. Remove the three screws that hold the USB cable into the metal plate.

448 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 S3 Maintenance

Image 15-33

9. Remove the USB cable.

How to install the USB cable

To install the USB cable follow the same procedure in the reverse order.

15.16 USB Extension Cable

Flow chart

Image 15-34

The USB Extension cable connects the USB cable to the Motherboard. This procedure provides
instructions on how to disconnect the cable on both sides.

Overview

Image 15-35: USB Ext Cable connected to the Motherboard

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 449

 S3 Maintenance

Image 15-36: USB Ext Cable connected to the USB Cable behind the front panel

1 USB Ext Cable

2 USB Cable

Concerned parts
R767283K Cable Kit Set

Necessary tools
1 x Phillips Screwdriver #2 (to remove the front panel assembly)

How to remove the USB Extension cable

1. Partially remove the front panel assembly and pull it away to expose the cables behind it (refer to the related
procedure).
2. Disconnect the USB Extension cable from the USB cable.
3. Gently push the cable through the grommet located in the 3RU Fan tray.

Image 15-37

450 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 S3 Maintenance

4. Remove the 3RU Fan tray in order to access the motherboard (refer to the related procedure).
5. Locate the USB Extension cable that is plugged on the Motherboard.

Image 15-38

6. Unplug the USB Extension cable by gently pushing it out.

7. Pull the cable out of the unit.

How to install the USB Extension cable

To install the USB Extension cable follow the same procedure in the reverse order.

15.17 Power Supply

Concerned parts
R767267K Power Supply

Necessary tools
None.

How remove Power Supply

1. Push the latch towards the left.

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 451

 S3 Maintenance

Image 15-39

2. Pull the Power supply out of its slot by pulling on the handle.

How to install Power Supply

1. Insert the Power Supply into the slot.
Note: The card connector (back edge) should be at the bottom of the power supply as shown in the
drawing.

2. Push the power supply completely inside the slot. Apply a little pressure by using the handle until the power
supply is fully inserted.

15.18 Genlock Assembly

Flow chart

Image 15-40

452 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 S3 Maintenance

Overview

Image 15-41

1 Chassis
2 Genlock Assembly

Concerned parts
R9004760 GENLOCK/S3D S3

Necessary tools
1 x Phillips Screwdriver #2

How to remove the Genlock Assembly

1. Remove the six pan head screws (4-40 X .25) that attach the Genlock assembly to the rear of the chassis.

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 453

 S3 Maintenance

Image 15-42

2. Gently pull the Genlock assembly away from the unit . Don't pull the assembly too far back because there are
still 2 cables attached.

Note: At this point there are still 2 cables connecting the Genlock Assembly to the unit.

3. Unlatch the Genlock ribbon cable from the connector and pull it up and away from the Genlock board.

Note: This cable connects the Genlock board to the Motherboard.

Image 15-43

4. Unlatch the Ethernet cable from the connector and pull back and away from the Genlock board.

454 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 S3 Maintenance

Note: This cable connects the Genlock board to the Motherboard.

How to install the Genlock Assembly

To install the Genlock Assembly follow the same procedure in the reverse order.

15.19 Rear Rack Ears

Concerned parts
R767282K Rear Connector protector

Necessary tools
1 x Phillips Screwdriver #2

How to remove Rear Rack-Ears

1. Remove the eight pan head screws (8-32x.31), four from each side, to detach the rear rack ears and
connector protectors from the unit.

Note: You don’t need to remove the rear rack ears to access any other part of the unit.

Image 15-44

How to install Rear Rack-Ears

To install the Rear Rack-Ears follow the same procedure in the reverse order.

15.20 Front Rack-Ears

Flow chart

Image 15-45

Concerned parts
R767281K FRONT RACK EARS S3

Necessary tools
1 x Phillips Screwdriver #2

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 455

 S3 Maintenance

How to remove Side Rack-Ears

1. Loosening and removing the six (three on each side) pan head screws that secure the Rack Ears to the
chassis sides.

Image 15-46

2. Remove the Rack Ears from the Chassis.

Note: If the front face and the front brackets were not removed before this step, the entire of these
elements will be automatically detached from the chassis when you remove the Front Rack Ears. The
front brackets are fixed on the Front Rack Ears, not on the chassis.

How to install Side Rack-Ears

To install the Side Rack-Ears follow the same procedure in the reverse order.

15.21 Top Cover

Flow chart

Image 15-47

Necessary tools
1 x Phillips Screwdriver #2

How to remove Top Cover

1. Remove the 12 screws from the two sides (6 in each side, 4-40x0.25) that are located towards the top side of
the unit.

456 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 S3 Maintenance

Image 15-48

2. Remove the 5 screws (6-32x0.25) located on the top at the back of the chassis.
3. Remove the cover by gently pulling it away from the unit.

How to install Top Cover

To install the Top Cover follow the same procedure in the reverse order.

15.22 Top Card Guide

Flow chart

Image 15-49

Necessary tools
1 x Phillips Screwdriver #2

How to remove Top Card Guide

1. Remove the 12 screws from the two sides (6 in each side, 6-32x0.25) that are located towards the bottom of
the unit.

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 457

 S3 Maintenance

Image 15-50

2. Remove the card guide cover by gently pulling it away from the unit.

How to install Top Card Guide

To install the Top Card Guide follow the same procedure in the reverse order.

When installing the guide make sure you have 2 cards from the rear installed before tightening the
screws.

Use Loctite 242 to the screws before installing.

15.23 Motherboard Fan

Flow chart

Image 15-51

458 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 S3 Maintenance

Overview

Image 15-52

1 Motherboard
2 Fan
3 Heatsink
4 Fan power cable

Concerned parts
R767265K Motherboard Heatsink &
Fan kit

Necessary tools
1 x Phillips Screwdriver #2

How to remove Motherboard Fan

1. Remove the cable that provides power to the heatsink fan.
2. Lift the two handles to release the fan from the heatsink.

Image 15-53

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 459

 S3 Maintenance

3. Lift the fan away from the heatsink.

How to install Motherboard Fan

1. Remove the fan from the Heatsink/Fan spare kit.
2. Using the clips install the fan on the top of the heatsink that is on the motherboard.
3. Connect the fan power cable to header xxx located on the motherboard.

Disregard the heatsink from the spare kit.

15.24 Power Interposer Assembly

Flow chart

Image 15-54

Overview

Image 15-55

1 Power Interposer
2 Power supply guide
3 Side Support Plate

Concerned parts
R767279K POWER INTERPOSER
ASSEMBLY

460 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 S3 Maintenance

Necessary tools
1 x Phillips Screwdriver #2

How to remove Power Interposer Assembly

1. Remove the pan head screw (4-40x0.25 — black) that attach the Power Interposer Assembly to the side of the
chassis.
2. Remove the pan head screw (4-40x0.25 — Stainless steel) that attach the Power Interposer Assembly to the
side of the side support plate.
3. Gently pull the Power Interposer Assembly away from the unit.

Image 15-56

How to install Power Interposer Assembly

1. Install the Power Interposer Assembly and guide onto keyhole features in the sheet metal.
Note: Push the Power Interposer Assembly completely inside the connector onto the motherboard.
Apply a little pressure until it is fully inserted.

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 461

 S3 Maintenance

Image 15-57

2. Install the two screws.

15.25 Power Supply Guide

Flow chart

Image 15-58

Actually to remove the power supply guide, you must move the entire motherboard mount forward.
The reason for this is there is not enough space to get the power supply guide out without moving
everything towards the front of the chassis.

462 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 S3 Maintenance

Overview

Image 15-59

1 Power Interposer
2 Power supply guide
3 Side Support Plate
4 Motherboard Mount

Necessary tools
1 x Phillips Screwdriver #2

To remove the power supply guide, the entire Motherboard Mount must be move forward.

How to remove Power Supply Guide

1. Turn the unit over to remove the nine flat head screws (4-40x0.25 — black) that attach the Motherboard Mount
to the bottom of the chassis.

Image 15-60

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 463

 S3 Maintenance

2. Remove the five pan head screws (4-40x0.25 — black) that attach the Power supply guide to the side of the
chassis.
3. Remove the twelve flat head screws (6-32x0.25 — black) that attach the Motherboard Mount to the side of the
chassis.
4. Remove the five flat head screws (4-40x0.25 — black) that attach the Motherboard Mount to the side of the
chassis.

Image 15-61

5. Remove the three pan head screws (4-40x0.25 — Stainless steel) that attach the Power Supply Guide to the
side of the side support plate.

Image 15-62

464 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 S3 Maintenance

6. Move the entire motherboard mount forward

7. Gently pull the Power Supply Guide away from the unit.

How to install Power Supply Guide

To install the Power Supply Guide follow the same procedure in the reverse order.

There are slots cut into the bottom which will make installation of the guide much easier. See detail
on the previous drawing.

15.26 Side support plate

Flow chart

Image 15-63

Overview

Image 15-64

1 Power Interposer
2 Power supply guide
3 Side Support Plate

Necessary tools
1 x Phillips Screwdriver #2

How to remove Side Support Plate

1. Remove the two pan head SEMS screws (6-32x0.25 — Stainless steel) that attach the Side Support Plate to
the Motherboard Mount.
2. Remove the three pan head SEMS screws (4-40x0.25 — Stainless steel) that attach the Side Support Plate to
the Motherboard Mount.
3. Move forward the Side Support Plate (this item is align with the Motherboard Mount via key holes), and gently
pull the Side Support Plate away from the unit.

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 465

 S3 Maintenance

Image 15-65

Note: It could be necessary to release the cable tie that maintain the fan power cable in place.

How to install Side Support Plate

To install the Side Support Plate follow the same procedure in the reverse order.

There are key holes cut into the bottom of the Side Support Plate which will make installation much
easier. See detail on the previous drawing.

15.27 Link Card Interposer

Flow chart

Image 15-66

466 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 S3 Maintenance

Overview

Image 15-67

1 Link Card Interposer

Necessary tools
none

How to remove Link Card Interposer

1. Remove the Link Card Interposer from the unit.
Note: The screws that fix the Link Card Interposer were already removed during the Side Support
Plate removing stage.

How to install Link Card Interposer

1. Install the Link Card Interposer into the unit.

Note: The Link Card Interposer will be fixed during the Side Support Plate fixing stage.

15.28 CPU Module

Flow chart

Image 15-68

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 467

 S3 Maintenance

Overview

Image 15-69

1 CPU module
2 Motherboard

Concerned parts
R767264K CPU module

Necessary tools
1 x Phillips Screwdriver #2

How to remove CPU Module

1. Remove the five screws that attach CPU module to the system card.
2. Carefully remove the CPU module by lifting it up.

Image 15-70

468 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 S3 Maintenance

How to install the CPU module

To install the CPU module follow the same procedure in the reverse order.

Install the CPU Module by rocking left and right while applying pressure on the connectors.

15.29 Solid-State Memory

Flow chart

Image 15-71

Overview

Image 15-72

1 Solid State Memory card

2 MotherBoard

Concerned parts
R767275K Solid State Memory

Necessary tools
1 x Phillips Screwdriver #2

How to remove the Solid State Memory

1. Remove the 2 screws that hold the memory card.
2. Carefully remove the memory card from the socket.

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 469

 S3 Maintenance

Image 15-73

How to install the Solid State Memory

To install the Solid State Memory follow the same procedure in the reverse order.

15.30 System Battery

Flow chart

Image 15-74

Overview

Image 15-75

470 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 S3 Maintenance

Concerned parts
V327007 Battery

Necessary tools
None.

How to remove the System battery

1. Carefully remove the battery from its socket.

How to install the System battery

To install the System battery follow the same procedure in the reverse order.
When a new battery is installed, the user need to place a sticker on the motherboard mount that
indicates when the battery was last replaced. The absence of sticker means the battery has never
been replaced. In this case the S/N sticker can be used for the reference date.

Image 15-76: e.g. E2 S/N sticker — Manufacturing date

15.31 VFD Cable

Flow chart

Image 15-77

The flat ribbon VFD cable connects the VFD assembly (front face) to the Motherboard.

One end of the flat ribbon VFD cable is clamped between the Motherboard and the Motherboard
mount. Remove this cable requires to separate these parts.

Concerned parts
R767283K S3 Cable Kit Set

Necessary tools
• 1 x Phillips Screwdriver #2
• Hex Screwdriver

How to remove the VFD Cable

1. Remove the front panel assembly and pull it away to expose the cables behind it (refer to the related
procedure).

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 471

 S3 Maintenance

2. Push out the side latches on VFD connector to release the VFD cable.

Image 15-78

3. Remove the front bracket and the 3RU Fan tray in order to access inside of the unit (refer to the related
procedures).
4. Gently push the cable through the grommet located in the 3RU Fan tray.

Image 15-79

Note: From this step, only the other end of the VFD cable stays connected to the motherboard.
Unfortunately it is necessary to remove the motherboard from the motherboard mount to unplug it.
(refer to the “Process Overview”, page 432).

472 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 S3 Maintenance

5. Remove the following parts to access the motherboard :

• Rear cards (VPU, Link, I/O)
• CPU module.
• Link card interposer.
Note: Refer to the related procedures to remove these parts. Remove these parts requires removing
lot of parts from the unit (Power supply, Power interposer, Power supply guide, Side Support Plate ...)

Note: It is not necessary to remove the solid state memory, the system battery and the other cables to
give access to the motherboard fixing screws.

6. Remove the Motherboard from the Motherboard mount.

1. Remove the three m/f standoffs (4-40 X 3/16” .25” ) that attach the Motherboard to the Motherboard mount.
2. Remove the five m/f standoffs (m2.5 X 8mm) that attach the Motherboard to the Motherboard mount.
3. Remove the sixteen long pan head SEMS screws (4-40x.31” — SEMS refers to an integrate lock washer)
that attach the Motherboard to the Motherboard mount.

Image 15-80

7. Locate the VFD cable that is plugged on the Motherboard.

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 473

 S3 Maintenance

Image 15-81

8. Unplug the VFD cable.

9. Pull the cable out of the unit .

How to install the VFD Cable

To install the VFD Cable follow the same procedure in the reverse order.

15.32 Keyboard Cable

Flow chart

Image 15-82

The flat ribbon keyboard cable connects the Front panel board to the Motherboard. This procedure
provides instructions on how to disconnect the cable on both sides.

474 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 S3 Maintenance

Overview

Image 15-83

1 Keyboard cable
2 Front face

Concerned parts
R767283K S3 Cable Kit Set

Necessary tools
• 1 x Phillips Screwdriver #2
• Hex Screwdriver

How to remove the Keyboard cable

1. In order to access the motherboard, follow the steps detailed in the other procedures to remove the Front
Cover Assembly, Front brackets and 3RU Fan Tray. Make sure that the Keyboard Cable is disconnected from
the Front Panel board.
2. Locate the keyboard connector and push the latches out to release the cable.

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 475

 S3 Maintenance

Image 15-84

3. Pull the cable out of the unit .

How to install the Keyboard Cable

To install the Keyboard Cable follow the same procedure in the reverse order.

There is a key on the connector to prevent incorrect insertion of the cable.

During assembly, make sure that the keyboard cable goes through the slot located on the bottom
side of the 3RU Fan tray.

Image 15-85

476 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 S3 Maintenance

15.33 3RU Fan Cable

Flow chart

Image 15-86

The 3RU cable assembly provides power to the 3RU fans from the Motherboard.

One side of the cable is attached to a metal bracket that is accessible after the 3RU fan tray is
removed. The other side of the cable assembly connects to the Motherboard.

Overview

Image 15-87

1 3RU Fan cable

2 3RU Fan connector
3 Motherboard

Concerned parts
R767283K S3 Cable Kit Set

Necessary tools
• 1 x Phillips Screwdriver #2
• Hex Screwdriver

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 477

 S3 Maintenance

How to remove the 3RU Fan cable

1. In order to access the motherboard, follow the steps detailed in the other procedures to remove the Front
Cover Assembly, Front brackets and 3RU Fan Tray.
2. Locate the 3RU cable connector that is exposed after the 3RU fan tray is removed. The connector is attached
on a metal bracket that is vertically mounted in the chassis.

Image 15-88

3. Locate the snap lock on the top of the connector and push it back to release the connector from the bracket.

Image 15-89

4. Push the connector up until the slots in the metal bracket align with the flanges on the connectors.

478 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 S3 Maintenance

Image 15-90

5. Gently pull the 3RU cable assembly away from the bracket.

Image 15-91

6. Locate the 3RU cable that is plugged on the Motherboard.

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 479

 S3 Maintenance

Image 15-92

7. Remove the 3RU cable by gently pushing it out.

Note: It could be necessary to release the cable tie that maintain the cable in place on the side
Support Plate.

How to install the 3RU Fan Cable

To install the 3RU Fan Cable follow the same procedure in the reverse order.

15.34 Ethernet Cable

Flow chart

Image 15-93

The Ethernet cable connects the Genlock board to the Motherboard. This procedure provides
instructions on how to remove the cable from both sides.

This procedure requires to remove the Power supply Guide to unplug the cable from the
motherboard.

480 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 S3 Maintenance

Overview

Image 15-94

1 Genlock card
2 Genlock cable
3 Chassis
4 Ethernet cable

Concerned parts
R767283K S3 Cable Kit Set

Necessary tools
1 x Phillips Screwdriver #2

How to remove the Ethernet cable

1. Remove the Genlock assembly and pull it away to expose the cables behind it (refer to the related procedure).
2. Locate the Ethernet connector on the Genlock assembly and push the locking clip on the Ethernet cable so it
can be released from the socket.

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 481

 S3 Maintenance

Image 15-95

Note: From this step, only the other end of the Ethernet cable stays connected to the motherboard.
Unfortunately it is necessary to remove the Power supply Guide to unplug it. (refer to the “Process
Overview”, page 432).

3. Follow the steps detailed in other procedures to remove Power supply Guide.
4. Locate the Ethernet cable that is plugged on the Motherboard and push the locking clip on the Ethernet cable
so it can be released from the socket.

Image 15-96

5. Pull the cable out of the unit .

How to install the Ethernet Cable

To install the Ethernet Cable follow the same procedure in the reverse order.

482 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 S3 Maintenance

15.35 Genlock Cable

Flow chart

Image 15-97

The Genlock cable connects the Genlock board to the Motherboard. This procedure provides
instructions on how to remove the cable from both sides.

One end of the Genlock cable is clamped between the Motherboard and the Motherboard mount.
Remove this cable requires to separate these parts.

Overview

Image 15-98

1 Genlock card
2 Genlock cable
3 Chassis
4 Ethernet cable

Concerned parts
R767283K S3 Cable Kit Set

Necessary tools
1 x Phillips Screwdriver #2

How to remove the Ethernet cable

1. Remove the Genlock assembly and pull it away to expose the cables behind it (refer to the related procedure).

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 483

 S3 Maintenance

2. Locate the Genlock connector on the Genlock assembly and unlatch the ribbon cable from the connector and
pull it up and away from the Genlock board.

Image 15-99

Note: From this step, only the other end of the Genlock cable stays connected to the motherboard.
Unfortunately it is necessary to remove the motherboard from the motherboard mount to unplug it.
(refer to the “Process Overview”, page 432).

3. Remove the following parts to access the motherboard :

• Rear cards (VPU, Link, I/O)
• CPU module.
• Link card interposer.
Note: Refer to the related procedures to remove these parts. Remove these parts requires removing
lot of parts from the unit (Power supply, Power interposer, Power supply guide, Side Support Plate ...)

Note: It is not necessary to remove the solid state memory, the system battery and the other cables to
give access to the motherboard fixing screws.

4. Remove the Motherboard from the Motherboard mount.

1. Remove the three m/f standoffs (4-40 X 3/16” .25” ) that attach the Motherboard to the Motherboard mount.
2. Remove the five m/f standoffs (m2.5 X 8mm) that attach the Motherboard to the Motherboard mount.
3. Remove the sixteen long pan head SEMS screws (4-40x.31” — SEMS refers to an integrate lock washer)
that attach the Motherboard to the Motherboard mount.

484 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 S3 Maintenance

Image 15-100

5. Locate the Genlock cable that is plugged on the Motherboard.

Image 15-101

6. Unplug the Genlock cable.

7. Pull the cable out of the unit .

How to install the Ethernet Cable

To install the Ethernet Cable follow the same procedure in the reverse order.

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 485

 S3 Maintenance

486 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 EX Maintenance 16
About this chapter
This chapter describes how to service the EX expansion box by replacing individual components.

Simple servicing
The EX expansion box is based on a modular design that ensures easy serviceability. Users can swap most of
the EX components in the case of damage, without shipping the unit to a Barco service center.

Methodology
Most procedures in these chapters include multiple steps to gain access to the parts requiring service. A
workflow flow chart is provided indicating all of the procedures and their relationships. Please refer to the chart
to familiarize yourself with the sequence of procedures.

ESD recommendations
The following precautions must be taken:
• Perform the service procedures only at approved anti-static work station equipped with anti- static mat.
• At all times use a conductive wrist strap attached to a solid earth ground.
• Always discharge yourself by touching a grounded bare metal surface before coming in contact with ESD
sensitive electronic.
WARNING: Always switch power off and unplug the cords from the device before performing any
maintenance operations described in this chapter.

WARNING: The device can be damaged by electrostatic discharge (ESD). When handling the
device and any of its components, caution must be taken so that damage does not occur. Damage
due to inappropriate handling is not covered by the warranty.

Overview
• EX unit Overview
• Process Overview
• Spare Parts Serviceable by All Users
• Event Master Cards
• Tri-Combo Input and Tri-Combo Output Card Disassembly and Assembly
• Top Cover
• Power Supply
• CPU Module
• System Battery

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 487

 EX Maintenance

• Motherboard
• Motherboard Fansink

488 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 EX Maintenance

16.1 EX unit Overview

Orientation and main components

Image 16-1: Orientation and main components

T Top 5 Chassis
F Front 6 Motherboard Fan
1 Top Cover 7 Power Supply
2 Event Master Cards 8 CPU Module
3 Interposers 9 System Battery
4 Front Panel 10 Motherboard

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 489

 EX Maintenance

16.2 Process Overview

Flow chart

Image 16-2: EX service process overview flowchart

16.3 Spare Parts Serviceable by All Users

EX Spare Parts List
P/N Description Comments
R767210K Power Supply, 132W, 12V
Output
R767263K Kit, Fansink E2 Used on EX motherboard
R767287K Kit, Motherboard EX
R767288K Kit, CPU Programmed ASM
EX
R767292K Kit, Front Bezel EX
R9004740 EM DVI Input Board
R9004741 EM SDI Output Board
R9004742 EM SDI Input Board
R9004743 EM HDMI Output Board

490 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 EX Maintenance

P/N Description Comments

R9004744 EM HDMI-DP Input Board
R9004745 EM DVI Output Board
R9004758 S3 VPU Board
R9004765 Quad DP 1.2 Output Board
R9004785 Tri-Combo Input Board
R9004786 Tri-Combo Output Board
R9004791 Quad HDMI Input Board
R9004792 Quad HDMI 2.0 Output
Board
R9004793 Quad DP 1.2 Input Board
R9871179 Rear rackmount support kit
V327007 System Battery

16.4 Event Master Cards

Flow chart

Image 16-3: Event Master cards

Overview

Image 16-4: EX chassis: Event Master card location

1 Card slot #1
2 Card slot #2
3 Card thumbscrews

Concerned parts
Spare Part Kit Description
R9004740 DVI Input
R9004741 SDI Output
R9004742 SDI Input
R9004743 HDMI Output

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 491

 EX Maintenance

Spare Part Kit Description

R9004744 DP/HDMI Input
R9004745 DVI Output
R9004758 VPU card
R9004765 Quad DP 1.2 Output Board
R9004785 Tri-Combo Input
R9004786 Tri-Combo Output
R9004791 Quad HDMI Input
R9004792 Quad HDMI 2.0 Output
R9004793 Quad DP 1.2 Input

Necessary tools
None.

How to remove a card

1. Locate the card that you wish to replace.
2. Loosen the left and right thumbscrews that hold the card in the chassis.
3. Grasp the thumbscrews, and gently pull the card out of the slot.

You may need to wobble the card a bit to loosen it from the mating connector as you pull it out.

Image 16-5: EX chassis: with Event Master cards removed

1 Card from slot #1

2 Card from slot #2
3 Card thumbscrews

How to install a card

To install an Event Master input or output card, follow the steps of the removal procedure in reverse order.

492 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 EX Maintenance

Apply a little pressure on the card, until it is fully inserted in the back plane connector. At this point
the sheet metal of the card should contact the sheet metal of the chassis.

16.5 Tri-Combo Input and Tri-Combo Output Card

Disassembly and Assembly
TCI and TCO card disassembly and assembly
See “Tri-Combo Input and Tri-Combo Output Card Disassembly and Assembly”, page 375 for details.

16.6 Top Cover

Flow chart

Image 16-6: Top cover

Overview

Image 16-7: Removal of EX top cover

1 Flat Head, 82° UC, 4-40 Screws 4 Tamper-evident label

2 Pan Head, 6-32 Screws 5 Chassis
3 Top cover

Concerned parts
Part Number Description
02-1502002-90 EX Chassis
09-1502016-90 EX Chassis Cover

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 493

 EX Maintenance

Part Number Description

13-9850011-00 Tamper-evident Label
13-0280606-90 Flat Head, 82° UC, 4-40 Screw
13-0210808-90 Pan Head, 6-32 Screw

Necessary tools
• 1x Phillips Screwdriver #1
• 1x Phillips Screwdriver #2

How to remove the top cover

1. Remove the seven flat head, 4-40 screws from the top of the unit.
The middle screw along the rear edge of the top cover is under the tamper-evident label. Removing the
screw may be easier, if you first remove the label.
2. Remove the six pan head, 6-32 screws from the sides of the unit.
3. Lift the top cover from the unit.

How to install the top cover

To install the top cover on the EX chassis, follow the steps of the removal procedure in reverse order.

Apply Loctite 242 (or equivalent) thread-locker to the screws that attach the top cover to the
chassis. Tighten the 4-40 flat-head screws to 5 in-lbs. Tighten the 6-32 pan-head screws to 8 in-lbs.

16.7 Power Supply

Flow chart

Image 16-8: Power supply

494 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 EX Maintenance

Overview

Image 16-9: Removal of power supply

1 AC Entry Cable Assembly

2 DC Power Cable Assembly
3 Power Supply
4 4-40 x25 SEMS Screws

Concerned parts
Part Number Description
14-9500030-90 132W, 12V Power Supply
20-1502050-90 DC Power Cable Assembly
20-1502051-90 AC Entry Cable Assembly
13-0080608-90 4-40 x25 SEMS Screws (x4)

Necessary tools
• 1x Phillips Screwdriver #1
• 1x Phillips Screwdriver #2

How to remove the power supply

1. Remove the top cover.
2. Disconnect the DC power cable from the rear of the power supply.
3. Disconnect the AC entry cable from the front of the power supply.
4. Remove the four 4-40 x25, SEMS screws that fasten the power supply to the chassis.
5. Remove the power supply from the chassis.

How to install the power supply

To install the power supply in the EX chassis, follow the steps of the removal procedure in reverse order.

Make sure that the three rubber bumpons are on the bottom of the power supply before installing
the power supply in the chassis. See Image 16-10.

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 495

 EX Maintenance

Image 16-10: Power supply bumpons

16.8 CPU Module

Flow chart

Image 16-11: CPU module

Overview

Image 16-12: CPU module components

1 CPU module
2 CPU module screws

496 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 EX Maintenance

Concerned parts
Part Number Description
B3248009D Motherboard fansink

Necessary tools
1x Phillips Screwdriver #1

How to remove the CPU module

1. Remove the top cover.
2. Remove the two screws from the side of the CPU module that is closest to the Event Master card slots.

Image 16-13

3. Lift the freed edge of the CPU module, and pull it gently from the CPU-module connector on the
motherboard.
4. Remove the CPU module from the chassis.

How to install the CPU module

To install the CPU module in the EX chassis, follow the steps of the removal procedure in reverse order.

16.9 System Battery

Flow chart

Image 16-14: System battery

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 497

 EX Maintenance

Overview

Image 16-15: System battery removal

1 System battery

Concerned parts
Part Number Description
V327007 System battery

Necessary tools
None.

How to remove the system battery

1. Remove the top cover
2. Lift the system battery from its cradle, and remove it from the chassis.

How to install the system battery

To install the system battery in the EX chassis, follow the steps of the removal procedure in reverse order.

The + sign, indicating the positive pole of the battery, should face up.

16.10 Motherboard
Flow chart

Image 16-16: Motherboard

Overview
Several items must be removed from the chassis, before the motherboard may be removed. These items fall
into two groups: rear-panel elements and chassis elements. Once these items have been removed, you may
remove the motherboard.

498 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 EX Maintenance

Concerned parts
Part Number Description
* Event Master Series card
13-6200003-90 BNC Hex Nuts (x2)
13-6200004-90 BNC Toothed Washers (x2)
13-6200013-90 BNC Insulating Bushing (x1)
B1959987 Slot #1 Edge-card Ribbon Cable
02-1502006-90 EX Interposer (Slot #1)
B1959986 Slot #2 Edge-card Ribbon Cable
20-1502050-90 DC Power Cable
02-1502020-90 Edge-card Guide
B1959991 USB Type B Cable
B1959992 DisplayPort Cable
03-1502005-90 EX Motherboard
B3248009D Fansink

* – Any Event Master series card fits Slot #1 and Slot #2.

Necessary tools
• 1x Phillips Screwdriver #1
• 1x Phillips Screwdriver #2

Rear-panel elements

Image 16-17: Motherboard removal – rear-panel elements

1 Genlock (BNC) connectors 5 Slot #1

2 BNC insulating bushing 6 Event Master series card
3 BNC toothed washers 7 Thumbscrews
4 BNC hex nuts
1. Remove the hex nuts and the toothed washers from both Genlock BNC connectors, and remove the
insulating bushing from the Genlock In BNC connector.
Note: Do not forget to install the insulating bushing on the Genlock In BNC connector during re-installation.

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 499

 EX Maintenance

2. Loosen the thumbscrews on the Event Master series card in Slot #1, and remove the card from the slot.

Chassis elements

Image 16-18: Motherboard removal – chassis elements

1 Slot #1 edge-card ribbon cable 6 RJ45 (Ethernet) connector

2 Slot #1 interposer 7 Genlock (BNC) connectors
3 Slot #2 edge-card ribbon cable 8 DisplayPort cable
4 DC power cable 9 Event Master series card guide
5 USB Type B cable
1. Remove the top cover.
2. Snip the zip ties on the rear USB cable and the DisplayPort connector cable.
CAUTION: Not snipping the zip ties around the cables to be moved or removed may result in damage to
the zip-tie mounts and the surfaces to which they are attached.
3. Disconnect the Slot #1 edge-card ribbon cable first from the motherboard, then from the Slot #1 interposer,
and remove the ribbon cable from the chassis.
4. Remove the two screws that fasten the Slot #1 interposer to the floor of the chassis, and remove the
interposer from the chassis.
These are located on the bottom of the chassis near the front and close to the center of the chassis when
looking from left to right.
5. Disconnect the Slot #2 edge-card ribbon cable first from the motherboard, then from the Slot #2 interposer,
and remove the ribbon cable from the chassis.
6. Disconnect the DC power cable from the motherboard.
7. Disconnect the rear USB Type B connector cable from the rear-panel USB header on the motherboard.
8. Remove the screws above and below the rear-panel USB Type B connector, and remove the connector
and its cable from the chassis.
9. Remove the two screws that fasten the RJ45 (Ethernet) mounting plate to the rear panel of the chassis.
These screws are below and to the left, and above and to the right of the RJ45 mounting plate. Do not
remove the screws on the mounting plate itself. The mounting plate should remain attached to the RJ45
connector on the motherboard.
10. Disconnect the DisplayPort cable from the motherboard.
11. Remove the two screws (just above the Genlock connectors) that fasten the DisplayPort cable to the rear
panel, and remove the DisplayPort cable from the chassis.

500 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 EX Maintenance

12. Remove the two screws that fasten the Slot #1 card guide to the motherboard, and remove the card guide
from the chassis.
13. Unscrew and remove the card-guide standoffs from the chassis.
These go through slots in the motherboard, but the motherboard cannot be removed without first removing
the standoffs.
The chassis elements are shown removed from the chassis in Image 16-19.

Image 16-19: Motherboard removal – chassis elements removed

1 Slot #1 edge-card ribbon cable 6 Card guide standoffs

2 Slot #1 interposer 7 USB Type B connector and cable
3 Slot #2 edge-card ribbon cable 8 Rear-panel USB header
4 DC power cable 9 RJ45 rear-panel mounting screws
5 Event Master series card guide 10 DisplayPort connector and cable

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 501

 EX Maintenance

The motherboard

Image 16-20: Motherboard removal –motherboard screws

1. Remove the 11 screws that fasten the motherboard to the chassis.

2. Lift the front end of the motherboard, and rotate the motherboard up.

Image 16-21: Motherboard removal – removing the motherboard

3. Remove the motherboard from the chassis.

Note: There is one BNC insulator on the Genlock input connector. Make sure you put this to the side, so
you can re-install it when re-installing the motherboard.

How to install the motherboard

To install the motherboard in the EX chassis, follow the steps of the removal procedure in reverse order.
1. Place the motherboard in the chassis.
2. Install the chassis elements.

502 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 EX Maintenance

3. Install the rear-panel elements.

Note: Do not forget to install the insulating bushing on the Genlock In BNC connector—both internal to the
chassis and external—before installing the toothed washers and hex nuts.

16.11 Motherboard Fansink

Flow chart

Image 16-22: Motherboard fansink

Overview
Because the fansink pins must be removed from the underside of the motherboard, the motherboard must be
removed from the chassis before the fansink can be removed or replaced.

Image 16-23: Motherboard fansink components

1 Motherboard—topside view
2 Motherboard—underside view
3 Motherboard fansink
4 Fansink pins

Concerned parts
Part Number Description
B3248009D Motherboard fansink
R767263K Fansink kit
02-1502005-90 EX motherboard

Necessary tools
None.

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 503

 EX Maintenance

How to remove the motherboard fansink

1. Remove the top cover.
2. Remove the EX motherboard.
3. Turn the motherboard underside up.
4. Push the fansink pins in, so that they pass through the motherboard but do not separate from the fansink.
5. Turn the motherboard topside up, and remove the motherboard fansink, together with the fansink pins.

Image 16-24: Removal of motherboard fan

1 Motherboard fansink and pins

2 Open fins on the fansink
3 Motherboard

How to install the motherboard fansink

CAUTION: Do not reuse a fansink, once it has been removed from the motherboard. The thermal compound
will no longer be properly located, and the compression of the pins during removal will prevent them from
fastening properly to the motherboard. Use the fansink replacement kit R767263K.
To install a replacement fansink on the EX motherboard, follow these steps.
1. Align the fansink pins over the pin holes in the motherboard.
2. Place the replacement fansink on the EX motherboard.
Note: The open fins on the fan sink should point toward the CPU section as shown.
3. Push the fansink pins in, so that the tops of the pins are flush with the top of the fansink.

504 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 EX Maintenance

Image 16-25: Motherboard fansink pins Image 16-26: Motherboard fansink installed

1 Fansink 1 Fansink
2 Fansink pins 2 Fansink pins
3 Motherboard 3 Motherboard

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 505

 EX Maintenance

506 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 EC-30 Maintenance 17
About this chapter
This chapter describes how to service the EC-30 controller.

Overview
• Servicing

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 507

 EC-30 Maintenance

17.1 Servicing
General
The EC-30 controller has no user-serviceable parts.

In the unlikely event your EC series controller requires service, please refer to the Return Material
Authorization section in this manual prior to sending the unit back to the Barco Service Department.

EC-30 Overview
Orientation and main components
Front:

Image 17-1: EC-30 controller (Front view)

1 Keyboard
2 T-bar
3 25W, 12V power supply brick
Rear:

Image 17-2: EC-30 controller (Rear view)

1 T-bar 4 DC power
2 Strain-relief tabs 5 25W, 12V power supply brick
3 USB B to Host

508 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 EC-50 Maintenance 18
About this chapter
This chapter describes how to service the EC-50 controller.

Overview
• Servicing

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 509

 EC-50 Maintenance

18.1 Servicing
General
Given the low failure rate experienced on this device, it is extremely rare to have to change parts on the EC-50
controller.
In the unlikely event your EC series controller requires service, please refer to the Return Material
Authorization section in this manual prior to sending the unit back to the Barco Service Department.

The only parts that the user may have to change by itself is the work light and power fuse. The work light is a
spare part provided by Barco (see spare parts list bellow). The fuse is not provided by Barco.

EC-50 Overview
Orientation and main components.
Front:

Image 18-1: EC-50 controller (Front view)

1 work light connector

2 Touch screen
3 Buttons of presentation the presentation video controller
4 T-bar
Rear:

510 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 EC-50 Maintenance

Image 18-2: EC-50 controller (Rear view)

1 Power switch
2 Power connector + fuse
3 work light connector
4 Communication connectors

EC-50 Spare Parts list

P/N Description Comments
R767327K KIT DESKLIGHT EC-50 1x work light (flexible support with XLR connection)

Fuse
Specifications:
Size 5x20mm
Amp Rating 5A
Voltage Rating 250V

Location:
The fuse compartment is located above the power supply connector.

Image 18-3

Spare fuse location:

A spare fuse is available in the fuse compartment.

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 511

 EC-50 Maintenance

Image 18-4

It is strongly recommended to quickly buy a new fuse when the spare fuse is used.

How to change power supply fuse:

1. Note the open slot under the fuse compartment.

Image 18-5

2. Use a small flat blade screwdriver to open the fuse compartment.

Image 18-6

3. Change the fuse. Fuse should be installed in the fuse holder as shown:

Image 18-7

4. Replace the fuse compartment in its location.

512 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 EC-200/EC-210
Maintenance 19
About this chapter
This chapter describes how to service the EC-200/EC-210 controller.

Overview
• Servicing

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 513

 EC-200/EC-210 Maintenance

19.1 Servicing
General
Given the low failure rate experienced on this device, it is extremely rare to have to change parts on the EC-
200/EC-210 controller.
In the unlikely event your EC series controller requires service, please refer to the Return Material
Authorization section in this manual prior to sending the unit back to the Barco Service Department.

The only part that the user may have to change by himself is the work light . The work light is a spare part
provided by Barco (see spare parts list below).

EC-200/EC-210 Overview
Orientation and main components.

The images in this chapter show the EC-200, but they apply, as well, to the EC-210. The EC-200
and EC-210 are basically the same product.

Front:

Image 19-1: EC-200/EC-210 controller (Front view)

1 Work lights 5 Rotary knobs

2 Touch screens 6 Function buttons, Top Functions and Numpad
3 T-bar 7 Buttons of presentation (Destinations, Layers,...)
4 Mouse + arrow buttons 8 Front LED Lights
Rear:

514 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 EC-200/EC-210 Maintenance

Image 19-2: EC-200/EC-210 controller (Rear view)

1 Work lights 4 Rear Fan (Located behind rear vent holes)

2 Power switch 5 Rear LED Lights (Located behind rear vent
3 Power connector holes)
6 Communication connectors

EC-200/EC-210 Spare Parts list

P/N Description Comments
R767327K KIT DESKLIGHT EC-50 1x work light (flexible support with XLR connection)

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 515

 EC-200/EC-210 Maintenance

516 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 Environmental
information 20
Overview
• Disposal information
• RoHS compliance
• Contact information

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 517

 Environmental information

20.1 Disposal information

Disposal Information
Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment

This symbol on the product indicates that, under the European Directive 2012/19/EU governing waste
from electrical and electronic equipment, this product must not be disposed of with other municipal waste.
Please dispose of your waste equipment by handing it over to a designated collection point for the recycling of
waste electrical and electronic equipment. To prevent possible harm to the environment or human health from
uncontrolled waste disposal, please separate these items from other types of waste and recycle them
responsibly to promote the sustainable reuse of material resources.
For more information about recycling of this product, please contact your local city office or your municipal
waste disposal service.
For details, please visit the Barco website at: http://www.barco.com/AboutBarco/weee

Disposal of batteries in the product

This product contains batteries covered by the Directive 2006/66/EC which must be collected and
disposed of separately from municipal waste.
If the battery contains more than the specified values of lead (Pb), mercury (Hg) or cadmium (Cd), these
chemical symbols will appear below the crossed-out wheeled bin symbol.
By participating in separate collection of batteries, you will help to ensure proper disposal and to prevent
potential negative effects on the environment and human health.

20.2 RoHS compliance

中国大 RoHS (Chinese Mainland RoHS)
根据中国大 《电器电子产品有害物 制使用 理办法》 也 为中国大 RoHS 以下 分列出了
Barco产品中可 包含的有毒和/或有害物 的名 和含 。中国大 RoHS指令包含在中国信息产业 MCV标
准 “电子信息产品中有毒物 的 求”中。
According to the “Management Methods for the Restriction of the Use of Hazardous Substances in Electrical
and Electronic Products” (Also called RoHS of Chinese Mainland), the table below lists the names and
contents of toxic and/or hazardous substances that Barco’s product may contain. The RoHS of Chinese
Mainland is included in the MCV standard of the Ministry of Information Industry of China, in the section “Limit
Requirements of toxic substances in Electronic Information Products”.

件 目(名 ) 有毒有害物 或元
Component Name Hazardous Substances or Elements

汞 多溴二
价 多溴
Pb Hg Cd Cr6+ PBB
PBDE
印制电 件 X O O O O O
Printed Circuit Assemblies
外接电( ) X O O O O O
External Cables
散热片(器) O O O O O O
Heatsinks
底架 O O O O O O

518 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 Environmental information

件 目(名 ) 有毒有害物 或元
Component Name Hazardous Substances or Elements

汞 多溴二
价 多溴
Pb Hg Cd Cr6+ PBB
PBDE
Chassis
电源供应器 X O O O O O
Power Supply Unit
扇 X O O O O O
Fan
电池( ) X O O O O O
Batteries
帽, (栓), 旋( ),垫圈, 固 O O O O O O
件
Nuts, bolts, screws, washers,
Fasteners
本 格依据SJ/T 11364的 定 制
This table is prepared in accordance with the provisions of SJ/T 11364.
O: 示 有毒有害物 在 件所有均 材料中的含 均在 GB/T 26572 标准 定的 求以下.
O: Indicates that this toxic or hazardous substance contained in all of the homogeneous materials for this
part is below the limit requirement in GB/T 26572.
X: 示 有毒有害物 少在 件的某一均 材料中的含 出 GB/T 26572 标准 定的 求.
X: Indicates that this toxic or hazardous substance contained in at least one of the homogeneous materials
used for this part is above the limit requirement in GB/T 26572.

在中国大 售的相应电子信息产品 EIP 必 照中国大 《电子电气产品有害物 制使用标

求》标准 上环保使用期 EFUP 标 。Barco产品所 用的EFUP标 参 实例 徽标内 的 号使
用于指定产品 基于中国大 的《电子信息产品环保使用期 则》标准。
All Electronic Information Products (EIP) that are sold within Chinese Mainland must comply with the “Marking
for the restriction of the use of hazardous substances in electrical and electronic product” of Chinese
Mainland, marked with the Environmental Friendly Use Period (EFUP) logo. The number inside the EFUP
logo that Barco uses (please refer to the photo) is based on the “General guidelines of environment-friendly
use period of electronic information products” of Chinese Mainland.

10
Turkey RoHS compliance

Türkiye Cumhuriyeti: AEEE Yönetmeliğine Uygundur.

[Republic of Turkey: In conformity with the WEEE Regulation]

20.3 Contact information

Sales and importers
To find your local Barco Sales representative or your local importer, contact Barco directly, or contact one of
Barco's regional offices via the contact information given on the Barco web site, www.barco.com.

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 519

 Environmental information

Factories
Barco Inc.
3000 Technology Road
Angleton, TX 77515
USA

Production date
The month and year of production is indicated on the product ID label on the product itself.

520 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 Specifications A
About this annex
This chapter gives an overview of the specifications of the Event Master devices.

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 521

 Specifications

A.1 Specifications of E2
E2 Specifications
Live effects canvas Up to 20 Megapixels PVW/PGM
40 Megapixels PGM only 80 Megapixels @30p and PGM only

Video inputs 28 inputs via 8 input cards (Event Master series cards)
• Up to 8 x 4K inputs - each input card supports up to 4K@60p
• 8 x SD/HD/3G SDI (6G ready)
• 8 x HDMI 1.4a (297 Mpix/sec max)
• 8 x DisplayPort 1.1 (330 Mpix/sec max)
• 4 x Dual Link DVI (330)
Video outputs 14 outputs via 4 output cards (Event Master series cards)
• Up to 3 x 4K outputs - each output card supports up to 4K@60 p
• 4 x SD/HD/3G SDI
• 8 x HDMI 1.4a (297 Mpix/sec max)
• 2 x HDMI 1.4a for Multiviewer (297 Mpix/sec max)

Genlock Analog reference input/loop on BNC connectors; bi-level and blackburst at

SD and tri-level at HD
S3D Sync: 4x input Din connector, 2x output Din connector
Program output Up to 16 program outputs configurable as single screens or tiled/blended
widescreens (preview and Multi-Viewer not available in all configurations) -
Configurable for up to 16X 2048X1200@60 or up to 4 x 4096x2400@60 -
Independent edge blending/feathering control for all four sides

Scaled Aux outputs User definable for up to 16 x 2048x1200@60 or up to 4 x 4K@60 All

outputs can be defined as Aux destinations for a total of 16 Aux outputs
Output color correction (preview and Multi-Viewer not available in all
configurations)

Mixers User definable for up to 16 x 2048x1200@60 or up to 4 x 4K@60 All

outputs can be defined as Aux destinations for a total of 16 Aux outputs
Output color correction (preview and Multi-Viewer not available in all
configurations)
Still stores Up to 100 HD or 25 UHD, depending on the import file size.
Layer effects • Borders (hard, soft, halo) and drop shadows
• Color effects
• Strobe, H&V flip
• Luma, chroma and Cut/Fill keys (not all modes support keying)
• PIP moves via Keyframes
Multiviewer • Flexible user-definable layouts
• Monitor all Inputs and Outputs, including Preview and Aux
• Two outputs
• Dedicated hardware same as E2 Event Master Processors
Expandability • Easily expandable for larger display applications via proprietary links
• Link units to increase available Inputs and Outputs for larger tiled/
blended widescreen applications
• Expansion via simple linking - up to 8 chassis
• E2 ships with the ability to link 8 chassis for expansion.
HDCP HDCP compliance determined by installed cards.
Control • Event Master screen management software for PC or MAC
• Event Master controllers
• WebUI

522 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 Specifications

• Ethernet RJ-45, 1000/100/10 Mbps autosense

Serviceability • Field-Serviceable I/O and processing cards (not hot-swappable)
• Hot-swappable dual-redundant power supplies
Noise Level Max 52.9 dB avg. Fans at 100%. Fan speed is software-managed based
on operating temperature. Reference ISO 7779
Dimensions • Height: 17.8 cm (7.0 in) - 4 RU rackmount
• Width: 43.2 cm (17 in) without chassis handles, 48.3 cm (19 in) with
chassis handles attached
• Depth: 56.9 cm (22.4 in) from front panel to rear panel, 62.2 cm (24.5
in) overall

Weight 31 kg / 68 lbs
Power • Input power: 100-240 VAC 50/60Hz 826W
• Ships with dual-redundant, hot-swappable power supplies
Warranty 3 years parts and labor
Environmental temperature 0-40° C / 32-104 F
Environmental humidity 0-95% non-condensing

A.2 Specifications of E2 Jr.

E2 Jr. Specifications
Genlock Analog reference input/loop on BNC connectors; bi-level and blackburst at
SD and tri-level at HD
S3D Sync: 4x input Din connector, 2x output Din connector
Program output 4 program outputs configurable as single screens or tiled/blended
widescreens
• Configurable from 4X 2048X1200@60 max to 1 x 4096x2400@60 max
• Independent edge blending/feathering control for all four sides
Scaled Aux outputs User definable from 4 x 2048x1200@60 to 1 x 4K@60
All outputs can be defined as Aux destinations for a total of 8 Aux outputs
Output color correction
Mixers • Native resolution background mixer per output screen
• Independent layer transitions or full Preview/Program transition
• Flexible layer allocation – up to 8 mixable or 16 single scalable PIP/key
layers assignable to Program output screens

Video inputs 16 inputs via 4 input cards (Event Master series cards)
• Up to 4 x 4K inputs - each input card supports up to 4K@60p
• 4 x SD/HD/3G SDI
• 6 x HDMI 1.4a (297 Mpix/sec max)
• 6 x DisplayPort 1.1 (330 Mpix/sec max)
Video outputs 10 outputs via 3 output cards (Event Master series cards)
• Up to 2 x 4K outputs - each output card supports up to 4K@60 p
• 4 x SD/HD/3G SDI
• 4 x HDMI 1.4a (297 Mpix/sec max)
• 2 x HDMI 1.4a for Multiviewer (297 Mpix/sec max)

Still stores Up to 100 HD stills available in background, Aux or PIP

Layer effects • Borders (hard, soft, halo) and drop shadows
• Color effects

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 523

 Specifications

• Strobe, H&V flip

• Luma key
• PIP moves via Keyframes
Multiviewer • Flexible user-definable layouts
• Monitor all Inputs and Outputs, including Preview and Aux
• Two outputs
• Dedicated hardware same E2 Event Master Processors
Expandability Linking is available as an upgrade option
HDCP HDCP compliant
Control • Event Master screen management software for PC or MAC
• Ethernet RJ-45, 1000/100/10 Mbps autosense
Serviceability • Field-serviceable I/O and processing cards (not hot-swappable)
• Hot-swappable dual-redundant power supplies
Dimensions • Height: 17.8 cm (7.0 in) - 4 RU rackmount
• Width: 43.2 cm (17 in) without chassis handles, 48.3 cm (19 in) with
chassis handles attached
• Depth: 56.9 cm (22.4 in) from front panel to rear panel, 62.2 cm (24.5
in) overall
Weight 27.8 kg / 61 lbs
Power • Input power: 100-240 VAC 50/60Hz 700W
• Dual-redundant, hot-swappable power supplies
Environmental temperature 0-40° C / 32-104 F
Environmental humidity 0-95% non-condensing

Warranty 3 years parts and labor

A.3 Specifications of S3–4K

S3–4K Specifications
Live effects canvas Up to 20 megapixels in PVW/PGM or 40 megapixels in PGM only mode
Video inputs • 12 HD inputs via 3 input cards (Event Master series cards)
• Up to 3 x 4K inputs
• each input card supports up to 4K@60p
• 4 x SD/HD/3G SDI
• 4 x HDMI 1.4a (297 Mpix/sec max)
• 4 x DisplayPort 1.1 (300 Mpix/sec max)
Video outputs • 12 HD outputs via 3 output cards (Event Master Series Cards)
• Up to 3x 4K outputs - each output card supports up to 4K@60 p
• 4 x SD/HD/3G SDI - 4x HDMI 1.4a (297 Mpix/sec max)
• 2 x HDMI 1.4a for Multiviewer (297 Mpix/sec max) 4X HDMI 1.4a when
used as standard output card
Genlock Analog reference input/loop on BNC connectors; bi-level and blackburst at
SD and tri-level at HD S3D
Sync: 4x input Din connector, 2x output Din connector
Program output - up to 12 outputs can be assigned to a variety of single, tiled, or blended
widescreen configurations (preview and Multi-Viewer not available in all
configurations). Configurable for up to 12x 2048X1200@60 or up to 3x
4096x2400@60 outputs supporting Aux or Program destinations

524 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 Specifications

- Independent edge blending/feathering control for all four sides.

Mixers • Native resolution background mixer per output screen
• Independent layer transitions or full Preview/Program transition
• Flexible layer allocation
• 4 mixable or 8 single scalable PIP/key layers assignable to any
Program output screen
Still stores Up to 100 HD or 25 UHD, depending on the import file size

Layer effects • Borders (hard, soft, halo) and drop shadows

• Color effects
• Strobe, H&V flip
• Luma, chroma and Cut/Fill keys (not all modes support keying)
• PIP moves via Keyframes

Multiviewer • Flexible user-definable layouts

• Monitor all Inputs and Outputs, including Preview and Aux
• Two outputs
• Dedicated hardware same as E2 Event Master Processor
Expandability • Easily expandable for larger display applications via proprietary links
• Link units to increase available Inputs and Outputs for larger tiled/
blended widescreen applications
• Expansion via simple linking - up to 8 chassis
HDCP HDCP compliannce determined by installed cards.
Serviceability • Field-serviceable I/O and processing cards (not hot-swappable)
• Hot swappable dual-redundant power supplies (optional)
Noise Level Max 51.3 dB avg. Fans at 100%. Fan speed is software-managed based
on operating temperature. Reference ISO 7779

Dimensions • Height: 13.26 cm / 5.22 inches

• 3 RU rack mount
• Width: 43.2 cm / 17 inches without chassis handles, 48.3 cm / 19
inches with chassis handles attached
• Depth: 54 cm / 21.33 inches overall
Weight 21.3 kg / 47 lbs

Power • Input power: 100-240 VAC 50/60Hz 826 Watt

• Ships with single power supply. Optional Dual-redundant, hot-
swappable power supplies available as upgrade.
Warranty 3 years parts and labor
Environmental temperature 0-40° C / 32-104 F
Environmental humidity 0-95% Non-condensing

A.4 Specifications of S3–4K Jr.

S3–4K Jr. Specifications
Live effects canvas 10 Megapixels PVW/PGM
20 Megapixels PGM only
Video inputs 8 HD inputs via 2 input cards (Event Master series cards)
• Up to 2 x 4K inputs - each input card supports up to 4K@60p
• 4 x SD/HD/3G SDI
• 2 x HDMI 1.4a (297 Mpix/sec max)

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 525

 Specifications

• 2 x DisplayPort 1.1 (330 Mpix/sec max)

Video outputs 8 HD outputs via 2 output cards (Event Master Series Cards) - Up to 1x 4K
outputs - each output card supports up to 4K@60 p - 4x HDMI 1.4a (297
Mpix/sec max) - 2 x HDMI 1.4a for Multiviewer (297 Mpix/sec max) 4X
HDMI 1.4a when used as standard output card
Genlock Analog reference input/loop on BNC connectors; bi-level and blackburst at
SD and tri-level at HD S3D Sync: 4x input Din connector, 2x output Din
connector
Program output 4 program outputs configurable as single screens or tiled/blended
widescreens
• Configurable from 4X 2048X1200@60 max to 1 x 4096x2400@60 max
• Independent edge blending/feathering control for all four sides

Scaled Aux outputs User-definable from 4 x 2048x1200@60 to 1 x 4K@ All outputs can be
defined as Aux destinations for a total of 8 Aux outputs Output color
correction
Mixers • Native resolution background mixer per output screen
• Independent layer transitions or full Preview/Program transition
• Flexible layer allocation – 2 mixable or 4 single scalable PIP/key layers
assignable to any Program output screen
Still stores Up to 100 HD or 25 UHD, depending on the import file size.

Layer effects • Borders (hard, soft, halo) and drop shadows

• Color effects
• Strobe, H&V flip
• Luma, chroma and Cut/Fill keys (not all modes support keying)
• PIP moves via Keyframes

Multiviewer • Flexible user-definable layouts

• Monitor all Inputs and Outputs, including Preview and Aux
• Two outputs
• Dedicated hardware same as E2 Event Master Processor
Expandability Linking is available as an upgrade option
HDCP HDCP compliance determined by installed cards

Control - Event Master screen management software for PC or Mac - Event Master
Controllers - WebUI - Ethernet RJ-45, 1000/100/10 Mbps autosense
Serviceability • Field-serviceable I/O and processing cards (not hot-swappable)
• Hot-swappable dual-redundant power supplies
Noise Level Max 51.3 dB avg. Fans at 100%. Fan speed is software-managed based
on operating temperature. Reference ISO 7779

Dimensions • Height: 13.26 cm (5.22 in) - 3 RU rack mount units

• Width: 43.2 cm (17 in) without chassis handles, 48.3 cm (19 in) with
chassis handles attached
• Depth: 54 cm (21.33 in) overall
Weight 21.3 kg / 47 lbs

Power • Input power: 100-240 VAC 50/60Hz 700W

• Ships with single power supply. Optional Dual-redundant, hot-
swappable power supplies available as upgrade.
Warranty 3 years parts and labor
Environmental temperature 0-40° C / 32-104 F
Environmental humidity 0-95% non-condensing

526 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 Specifications

A.5 Specifications of EX
Overview
Live effects canvas When linked to an E2 or S3 and VPU cards are installed, supports up 20
Megapixels PVW/PGM. Or 40 megapixels PGM only in addition to master
processor
Video inputs Two card slots which can be either input or output
• Up to 8 inputs using any of the Event Master input cards
• Inputs can be distributed to other processors via the link cable or to a
locally installed output card

Video outputs Two card slots which can be either input or output
• Up to 8 outputs using any of the Event Master output cards
• Sources for the outputs can be from remote systems via the link
connection or from a locally installed input card.
Genlock Analog reference input on BNC connectors; Blackburst and Bi-level at SD,
and Tri-level at HD
Reference output is provided by an internal sync generator capable of Bi-
level and Tri-level sync signals
Program output Up to 8 program outputs for destinations created in a linked E2 or S3-4K
processor.
Scaled Aux outputs User-definable up to 8 x 2048x1200@60 or 2 x 4K@60
Output color correction
Mixers When linked to an E2 or S3 and VPU cards are installed, supports up to 4
HD mixers, 8 HD pips, 1 4K mixer, or 2 4K pips
Still stores Up to 100 HD or 25 UHD, depending on the imported file size.
Layer effects Determined by Master processor
Multiviewer N/A
Expandability • Easily expandable for larger display applications via proprietary links
• Link units to increase available inputs and outputs for larger tiled/
blended widescreen applications
• Two Ex chassis can be linked for standalone operation
• S3-4K supports up to 4 Ex chassis linked (16 inputs and 16 outputs of
HD video)
• E2 supports up to 8 Ex chassis that are linked. (32 inputs and 32
outputs of HD video)

HDCP HDCP Compliannce determined by installed cards.

Control - Event Master screen management software for PC or MAC - Event
Master Controllers - WebUI - Ethernet RJ-45, 1000/100/10 Mbps
autosense
Serviceability Field-Serviceable I/O cards (not hot-swappable)
Noise Level 37 dBA Nominal / 45 dBA Max Fan speed is software managed based on
operating temperature. Reference ISO 7779
Dimensions Height : 1.72" (4.37 cm) 1 RU Rack mount Width: 19.06” (48.41 cm) Incl.
Rack mount Depth: 15.91” (40.41 cm)
Weight 12.2 lbs / 5.53 kg

Power Input power: 100-240 VAC 50/60Hz 125W

Warranty 3 years parts and labor

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 527

 Specifications

Environmental temperature 0-40° C / 32-104 F

Environmental humidity 0-95% non-condensing

A.6 Specifications of EC-30

Overview
Connectivity USB connection from Event Master Toolset host computer (OSX or
Windows 7 and higher)

Dimensions (HxWxD) 105.4 x 465.6 x 321 mm (4.15 x 18.33 x 12.63 inches)

Weight 3.18 kg (7 lbs)

A.7 Specifications of EC-50

Overview
Connectivity USB connection from Event Master Toolset, from a control computer
DVI input for touchscreen monitor
Dimensions (HxWxD) 244.34 x 511.56 x 610.05 mm / 9.62 x 20.14 x 24.02 inches
Weight 12.33 kg (27.2 lbs)

528 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 Specifications

A.8 Specifications of EC-200

Overview
Features • Robust Linux version of EventMaster Toolset - same user interface
used on Mac and PC
• Onboard PC running Linux to support a purpose-built version of Event
Master toolset, enabling stand-alone usage
• Full control over the EventMaster Series switchers
• Simultaneous connection of multiple controllers, GUI interfaces, and
processors supported on same network. (Redundant backups of
control)
• 2 internal 15.6-inch wide screen full HD (1,920x1,080) touchscreens
with 10 point multi touch
• 2 external monitors or touchscreens supported*
• High-resolution T-Bar for manual transitions
• 36 user-assignable buttons with customizable LCD labels
• Dedicated Background layer button
• 8 dedicated Layer selection buttons with multi-page functionality (shift
pages for destinations with 9 or more layers)
• 12 user-definable Destination buttons with multi-page functionality
(easily supports all the destinations available in future releases)
• Dedicated buttons for transition, live switching, modifying program,
transitions, etc.
• 5 rotary encoders with wheels for ergonomic pip control and rapid
placement of resources
• 12 LCD Contextual Display Buttons to support the Syntax Programmer
• Tri Axis backlit trackball (based on function), with a very smooth rotary
encoder for the third axis and 4 buttons for cursor and position control
• 2 separate gigabit Ethernet network interface connections, one for
Primary system control, and one for supplemental network control
(additional IP address range and mode)
• Internal Solid State Hard drive
• 5 USB ports for additional accessories such as external touchscreens,
mouse, keyboard, thumbdrive, etc.
• Script lights, feedback LEDs, and integrated work lights all dimmable
• Dust cover included
• Custom road case included
Connectivity • Controls multiple EventMaster Series systems, including E2 and S3-4K
• Allows for an external control system to interact over a separate
network interface
• Two additional DVI outputs for monitors to increase workspace, or add
on up to 2 EC-50 for ultimate expansion
• Auto-ranging mains input (90-250VAC)
• External pointing device and Keyboards supported over USB
Dimensions (HxWxD) 244.34 x 901.19 x 575.36 mm / 9.62 x 35.49 x 22.65 inches
Weight 20.41 kg (45 lbs)

Temperature 0-35° C / 32-95° F

Humidity 0-95% non-condensing
*Note The EC-200 DVI-D monitor connections do not support analog output.
Digital displays or digital to analog converters are required.

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 529

 Specifications

A.9 Specifications of EC-210

Overview
Features • Robust version of Event Master Toolset - same user interface used on
Mac and PC
• Onboard processing section that is purpose-built to run Event Master
toolset, enabling stand-alone usage. EC-210 processing section has
been upgraded; the EC-200 is upgradeable to the EC-210 processor.
(Users will experience faster performance with most tasks)
• Full control over the Event Master Series processors
• Simultaneous connection of multiple controllers, GUI interfaces, and
processors supported on same network. (Redundant backups of
control)
• 2 internal 15.6-inch wide screen full HD (1,920x1,080) touchscreens
with multi touch interface
• 1 external HDMI output supporting up to 2560x1080
• External input for the left side internal screen. External HDMI video
signals up to HD resolution. (Typical sources are Multi-viewer or Aux
output from Event Master)
• High-resolution T-Bar for manual transitions
• 36 user-assignable instant selection buttons with customizable LCD
labels and multiple pages of assignments. (3 buses assignable as
presets, cues, sources, backgrounds, or user keys)
• Dedicated Background layer button and 8 dedicated Layer selection
buttons with multi-page selection. (Change pages for destinations with
9 or more layers)
• Dedicated layer transition and function buttons.(Trans, Cut, Freeze,
etc.)
• 12 user-definable Destination buttons with multiple pages of
assignments (easily supports all the destinations available in future
releases)
• Dedicated buttons for transitioning all selected destinations, live
switching, modifying program, etc.
• Play/Pause and Stop button for Cues
• 5 rotary encoders with wheels for ergonomic pip control and rapid
placement of resources
• 12 LCD Contextual Display Buttons to support the Syntax Programmer
• Tri-Axis backlit trackball (based on function), with a very smooth rotary
encoder for the third axis and 4 buttons for cursor and position control
(future software release)
• Internal, board mounted M2 SSD
• 5 USB ports for additional accessories such as mouse, keyboard,
thumbdrive, etc.
• Script lights, feedback LEDs, and integrated work lights with user
controlled dimming.
• Power button for soft shutdown and restart of the system
• Back up and restore of system via USB or WebUI.
• Integrated WebUI for software upgrades.
• Dust cover included
• Custom road case included * Note: The EC-210 HDMI monitor
connections do not support analog output. Digital displays or active
digital to analog converters are required.
Connectivity • Controls multiple EventMaster Series systems, including E2, S3-4K,
and EX.
• Additional HDMI output to increase workspace.
• HDMI input for external video sources.
• Auto-ranging mains input (90-250VAC)
• External pointing device and Keyboards supported over USB

530 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 Specifications

• 2 separate gigabit Ethernet network interface connections, one for

Primary system control, and one for supplemental network (additional
IP address range and mode)

Dimensions 244.34 x 901.19 x 575.36 mm / 9.62 x 35.49 x 22.65 inches

Weight 20.41 kg (45 lbs)
Temperature 0-35° C / 32-95° F
Humidity 0-95% non-condensing

A.10 Specifications of standard connections

Standard connection specifications
DisplayPort (DP) • Per DP 1.1a specification
• On DP connector
• Formats up to 2,560 × 1,600 at 60 Hz and 3,840 × 1,200 at 60 Hz (30 bits)
• 4K/UHD supported:
- 3,840 × 2,160/23.98/24/25/29.97/30 via 1x DP, 2x DP (L and R half), or
4x DP (quadrants)
- 3,840 × 2,160/50/59.94/60 via 2x DP (L and R half) or 4x DP (quadrants)
- 4,096 × 2,160/23.98/24/25/29.97/30 via 1x DP, 2x DP (L and R half) or 4x
DP (quadrants)
- 4,096 × 2,160/50/59.94/60 via 2x DP (L and R half) or 4x DP (quadrants)
- 4,096 × 2,400/23.98/24/25/29.97/30/50/59.94/60 via 2x DP (L and R half)
or 4x DP (quadrants)
• EDID version 1.3 compatible
• HDCP version 1.4 compatible
DVI • Per DVI 1.0 specification
• DVI Digital video on DVI-I connector
• All single-link DVI formats up to 165 MHz
• All dual-link DVI formats up to 330 MHz
• Maximum H Active: 4,096; Maximum V Active: 3,072
• 4K/UHD Supported:
- 3,840 × 2,160/23.98/24/25/29.97/30 input via 1x DVI-DL, 2x DVI-SL (L
and R half) or 4x DVI-SL (quadrants)
- 3,840 × 2,160/50/59.94/60 input via 2x DVI-DL (L and R half) or 4x DVI-
SL (quadrants)
- 4,096 × 2,160/23.98/24/25/29.97/30 input via 2x DVI-SL (L and R half) or
4x DVI-SL (quadrants)
- 4,096 × 2,160/50/59.94/60 input via 2x DVI-DL (L and R half) or 4x DVI-
SL (quadrants)
- 4,096 × 2,400/23.98/24/25/29.97/30 input via 2x DVI-SL (L and R half) or
4x DVI-SL (quadrants)
- 4,096 × 2,400/50/59.94/60 input via 2x DVI-DL (L & R half) or 4x DVI-SL
(quadrants)
• EDID version 1.3 compatible
• HDCP version 1.4 compatible

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 531

 Specifications

HDMI • Per HDMI 1.4a specification

• On HDMI connector (Type A )
• Formats up to 2,560 × 1,600 at 60 Hz and 3,840 × 1,200 at 60 Hz (30 bits)
• 4K/UHD Supported:
- 3,840 × 2,160/23.98/24/25/29.97/30 input via 1x HDMI, 2x HDMI (L and R
half) or 4x HDMI (quadrants)
- 3,840 × 2,160/50/59.94/60 input via 2x HDMI (L and R half) or 4x HDMI
(quadrants)
- 4,096 × 2,160/23.98/24/25/29.97/30 input via 1x HDMI, 2x HDMI (L and R
half) or 4x HDMI (quadrants)
- 4,096 × 2,160/50/59.94/60 input via 2x HDMI (L and R half) or 4x HDMI
(quadrants)
• EDID version 1.3 compatible
• HDCP version 1.4 compatible
SDI • SD/HD/3G SDI (6G ready) on BNC connector
• Formats:
- SD Formats: SD-SDI per SMPTE 259M-C (NTSC/PAL resolution)
- HD Formats: HD-SDI per SMPTE 274M, 296M, 2048
- 3G Formats: 3G-SDI per SMPTE 424M, Barcolink
• 6G Ready (via future firmware upgrade)
• 4K/UHD Supported:
- 3,840 × 2,160/23.98/24/25/29.97/30 input via 4x HD-SDI (quadrants)
- 3,840 × 2,160/50/59.94/60 input via 4x 3G-SDI (quadrants)
- 4,096 × 2,160/23.98/24/25/29.97/30 input via 4x HD-SDI (quadrants)
- 4,096 × 2,160/50/59.94/60 input via 4x 3G-SDI (quadrants)

A.11 Standard connector pinouts

DisplayPort connector pinouts
The following figure illustrates the DisplayPort connector.

Image A-1: DisplayPort connector

The following table lists the DisplayPort connector pinouts.

DisplayPort connector

Pin Signal Pin Signal

1 ML_Lane 0 (p) 11 GND
2 GND 12 ML-Lane 3 (n)

3 ML_Lane 0 (n) 13 CONFIG1 (connected to Ground)

4 ML-Lane 1 (p) 14 Config2 (connected to Ground)

532 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 Specifications

DisplayPort connector

Pin Signal Pin Signal

5 GND 15 AUX CH (p)
6 ML_Lane 1 (n) 16 GND

7 ML-Lane 2 (p) 17 AUX CH (n)

8 GND 18 Hot Plug Detect
9 ML_Lane 2 (n) 19 Return (return for power)

10 ML_Lane 3 (p) 20 DP_PWR Power for connector (3.3 V, 500

mA)

DVI connector pinouts

The following figure illustrates the DVI connector.

Image A-2: DVI connector

The following tables lists DVI Connector pinouts. Please note:

• T.M.D.S = Transition Minimized Differential Signal
• DDC = Display Data Channel

DVI connector
Pin Signal
1 T.M.D.S. Data 2- 13 T.M.D.S. Data 3+
2 T.M.D.S. Data 2+ 14 +5V Power
3 T.M.D.S. Data 2/4 Shield 15 ground (for +5V)
4 T.M.D.S. Data 4- 16 Hot Plug Detect

5 T.M.D.S. Data 4+ 17 T.M.D.S. Data 0-

6 DDC Clock 18 T.M.D.S. Data 0+
7 DDC Data 19 T.M.D.S. Data 0/5 Shield
8 Analog Vertical Sync 20 T.M.D.S. Data 5-
9 T.M.D.S. Data 1- 21 T.M.D.S. Data 5+
10 T.M.D.S. Data 1+ 22 T.M.D.S. Clock Shield
11 T.M.D.S. Data 1/3 Shield 23 T.M.D.S. Clock +
12 T.M.D.S. Data 3- 24 T.M.D.S. Clock -

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 533

 Specifications

MicroCross Pins
Pin Signal Pin Signal
C1 Analog Red Video C4 Analog Horizontal Sync

C2 Analog Green Video C5 Analog Common Ground Return

C3 Analog Blue Video

Ethernet connector pinouts

The following figure illustrates the Ethernet connector.

Image A-3: Ethernet connector

The following table lists Ethernet connector pinouts.

10/100 Base-T — RJ45 port 1000 Base-T — RJ45 port

Pin Pair Color Description Description

1 3 white/green TXD+ TX0+
2 3 green TXD- TX0-
3 2 white/orange RXD+ RX0+

4 1 blue — TX1+
5 1 white/blue — TX1-
6 2 orange RXD- RX0-
7 4 white/brown — Rx1+
8 4 brown — RX1-

HDMIconnector pinouts
The following figure illustrates the HDMI connector.

Image A-4: HDMI connector

The following table lists HDMI connector pinouts.

HDMI connector
Pin Signal Pin Signal

1 TMDS Data2+ 11 TMDS Clock Shield

2 TMDS Data2 Shield 12 TMDS Clock-

534 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 Specifications

HDMI connector
Pin Signal Pin Signal
3 TMDS Data2- 13 CEC
4 TMDS Data1+ 14
5 TMDS Data1 Shield 15 SCL
6 TMDS Data1- 16 SDA
7 TMDS Data0+ 17 DDC/CEC/HEC Ground
8 TMDS Data0 Shield 18 +5 v Power (max 50 mA)
9 TMDS Data0- 19 Hot Plug Detect (All Versions) and HEC
Data+
10 TMDS Clock+

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 535

 Specifications

536 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 Remote Control
Protocol B
About this annex
This chapter lists and provides details for the Event Master series processor remote control commands.

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 537

 Remote Control Protocol

B.1 Event Master series processor ASCII remote

control
General
The user can remotely control the Event Master series processor via a telnet connection to the unit’s IP
address.

How to access the Event Master series processor remotely

To access the Event Master series processor remote commands, use the following procedure:
1. In a command prompt window, type a telnet command in the following format:
> telnet nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn 9878
where the n’s represent the unit IP address and 9878 is the port.
2. Press Enter
The command prompt appears.
3. At the command prompt, type a specific Event Master series processor remote control command and press
Enter.

ASCII remote commands

This section lists the Event Master series processor remote commands, sorted by name.

ATRN
• Description: Performs an Auto Transition on the currently active destinations. The currently selected Effect
type, rate and edge width will be used to transition preview to program.
• Command Format: ATRN <transTime>
• Parameters:
<transTime> (optional)
Used to specify a transition time (duration of the transition) in frames. Value ranges from 0 to 1999. A 0
specify a cut transition. Any non-zero value (within range) will override the transition time in the controller. If
this argument is not specified, the current transition time known by the controller will be used.
• Examples:
> ATRN 200
(Transition Preview to Program on currently active destinations in 200 frames)
> ATRN 0
(Transition Preview to Program immediately. This is a CUT.)
> ATRN
(Transition Preview to Program using the transition time set in the controller)
• Query Format: N/A
• Query Response: N/A

PRESET
• Description: Preset Settings. For parameter details, see below.
• Command Format: PRESET
• Parameters:
-s (save preset, 1-1000)
-r (recall preset, 1-1000)
-a (recall preset and auto transition, 1-1000)
• Examples:
> PRESET -s 1
(Save currently selected destinations to preset 1)
> PRESET -r 10
(Recall preset 10)
PRESET -a 10
(Recall preset 10 and auto transition)
• Query Format: N/A
• Query Response: N/A

538 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 Remote Control Protocol

B.2 Event Master series processor JSON RPC

remote control
General
JSON (JavaScript Object Notation) is a lightweight format that is used for interchanging data. It is based on a
subset of JavaScript language: the way objects are built in JavaScript.

Introduction to JSON
JSON is built on two structures:
• A collection of name/value pairs: In various languages, this is realized as an object, record, struct,
dictionary, hash table, keyed list, or associative array.
• An ordered list of values: In most languages, this is realized as an array, vector, list, or sequence.
Here is an example of JSON data:
{
"firstName": "John",
"lastName": "Smith",
"address": {
"streetAddress": "21 2nd Street",
"city": "New York",
"state": "NY",
"postalCode": 10021
},
"phoneNumbers": [
"212 555-1234",
"646 555-4567"
]
}

How JSON interacts with Event Master processors

JSON uses JSON RPC (REST based) to interact with the Event Master processors such as E2, S3–4K, and
EX. JSON-RPC is a remote procedure call protocol encoded in JSON.
JSON-RPC works by sending a request to a server implementing this protocol. The client in that case is
typically software intending to call a single method of a remote system. Multiple input parameters can be
passed to the remote method as an array or object, whereas the method itself can return multiple output data
as well.
There are JSON RPCs defined to perform tasks on the Event Master processor. User needs to send JSON
request through their application or open source application like Postman.
These applications should send request on IP where the Event Master processor is running and fixed port
9999 (Webserver of Event Master processor is running on port 9999).

Use JSON from the web application

To use the JSON APIs from the web application, select the Settings icon on the Menu navigation bar, and
select JSONRPC API from the web app dashboard.

Image B-1: Use JSON from the web application

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 539

 Remote Control Protocol

JSON APIs
Here are some of the JSON APIs defined for controlling the Event Master processor. If you have a master /
slave Event Master setup, JSON must be sent to the master unit. For all the requests, this section explains the
parameter passed or used in the RPC calls. If the params object is blank that means that API doesn’t require a
parameter.

Requests are case sensitive.

allTrans
• Definition:
- It executes the “allTrans” command.
• Request:
- params: {} - It doesn’t require any parameter.
• Response:
- response: null
- success: (0=success, anything else is an error)
• Example:
- {"params":{}, "method":"allTrans", "id":"1234", "jsonrpc":"2.0"}

cut
• Definition:
- It executes the “Cut” command.
• Request:
- params: {} - It doesn’t require any parameter.
• Response:
- response: null
- success: (0=success, anything else is an error)
• Example:
- {"params":{}, "method":"cut", "id":"1234", "jsonrpc":"2.0"}

resetFrameSettings
• Definition:
- Expose ALL reset types on Event Master processor with different options.
• Request:
- params: {"reset":x},
“x” can be 0 – 5
◦ 0: Soft reset.
◦ 1: Factory reset.
◦ 2: Factory reset (save IP).
◦ 3: Factory reset (save IP/EDID).
◦ 4: Factory reset (save VPID).
◦ 5: Power down.
• Response:
- response: null
- success: (0=success, anything else is an error)
• Example:
- {"params":{"reset": 0}, "method":"resetFrameSettings", "id":"1234",
"jsonrpc":"2.0"}

powerStatus
• Definition:
- This queries the power plug status of the Event Master processor. (There can be 1 or 2 power slots in
Event Master processor).
• Request:
- params: {} - It doesn’t require any parameter.

540 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 Remote Control Protocol

• Response:
- response: {FrameId1 :{ PwrStatus1, PwrStatus2},{FrameId2 :{ PwrStatus1,
PwrStatus2}
◦ PwrStatus1 gives the power status of the 1st slot in Event Master processor with frame id FrameId1,
FrameId2.
◦ PwrStatus2 gives the power status of the 2nd slot in Event Master processor with frame id
FrameId1, FrameId2.
◦ 0: Power supply module is not present.
◦ 1: Power supply module is present, but there is no power cable.
◦ 2: Power supply module is present, and the cable is plugged in, but there is no DC current.
◦ 3: Power supply module is present, and everything is OK.
- success: (0=success, anything else is an error)
• Example:
- {"params":{}, "method":"powerStatus", "id":"1234", "jsonrpc":"2.0"}

listPresets
• Definition:
- This queries the list of Presets on a particular destination or on the system.
• Request:
- params: {"ScreenDest":x , "AuxDest":x},
“x” can be:
◦ –2: Do not include any destinations of this type. (Has priority over particular id, if passed as a
parameter.)
◦ –1: Do not care (All presets). (Has priority over particular id, if passed as a parameter.)
◦ 0–999: want to see the presets with the destination this particular id in it or array of ids. Eg.
"ScreenDestination":[{"id": 2}, {"id": 3}]
• Response:
- response: Array of: [{"id": 0, "Name": "Preset3.00", "LockMode": 0, "presetSno":
3.00}, {"id": 1, "Name": "Preset4.00", "LockMode": 0, "presetSno": 4.00}]
◦ Response contains the array of presets. Above response contains id, name, lock mode preset serial
number of the all the presets.
- success: (0=success, anything else is an error)
• Example:
- {"params":{"ScreenDest": 0}, "method":"listPresets", "id":"1234",
"jsonrpc":"2.0"}

listDestinationsForPreset
• Definition:
- Lists the content of a Preset.
• Request:
- params: {"id":x },
“x” can be:
◦ –1: List all Presets.
◦ 0–999: list only that specific Preset.
• Response:
- response: Array of: [{"id": 0, "Name": "Preset3.00", "LockMode": 0, "presetSno":
3.00, "ScreenDest":[{"id": 0}, {"id": 3}],"AuxDest":[{"id": 0},
{"id": 1}]}]
◦ Response contains the array of Presets.
- success: (0=success, anything else is an error)
• Example:
- { "params":{"id": 0}, "method":"listDestinationsForPreset", "id":"1234",
"jsonrpc":"2.0"}

savePreset
• Definition:
- Creates a Preset on the Event Master processor.

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 541

 Remote Control Protocol

• Request:
- params: {"presetName": "NewPreset", "ScreenDestination":[{"id": 2}, {"id": 3}],
"AuxDestination":[{"id": 1}, {"id": 2}]}
◦ “presetName”—Name of the Preset to save.
◦ ScreenDestinations—ScreenDest id for the Preset to be created.
◦ AuxDestinations—AuxDest id for the Preset to be created.
◦ ScreenDestination, AuxDestinations are optional parameters. If user didn’t provide it, Preset will be
saved for selected destinations.
• Response:
- response: null
- success: (0=success, anything else is an error)
• Example:
- {"params": {"presetName": "NewPreset"}, "method":"savePreset", "id":"1234",
"jsonrpc":"2.0"}
- {"params": {"presetName": "NewPreset", "ScreenDestination":
{"id": 0},"AuxDestination":{"id": 0}}, "method":"savePreset", "id":"1234",
"jsonrpc":"2.0"}
Key points regarding Preset, which are same for rename, activate, and delete:
- “id”—id of the preset.
- “presetSno”—preset serial number. User can provide floating point number if required. Eg. "presetSno":
1.01, "presetSno": 1.00, "presetSno": 1, "presetSno": 1.1, "presetSno": 1.10.
Kindly note that 1.1 and 1.10 or 1.00 and 1 are same.
- “presetName”—Name of the preset.

renamePreset
• Definition:
- Rename a Preset on the Event Master processor. User can rename Preset with id, Preset serial
number, or Preset name.
- Send any one of the parameters to rename Preset.
• Request params:
- params: {"id": x, "newPresetName": "NewPresetName"}
- params: {"presetSno": x.y, "newPresetName": "NewPresetName"}
- params: {"presetName": "OldPresetName", "newPresetName": "NewPresetName"}
◦ “newPresetName”—New Preset name to set.
• Response:
- response: null
- success: (0=success, anything else is an error)
• Example:
- {"params": {"id": 0, "newPresetName": " newPresetName "},
"method":"renamePreset", "id":"1234", "jsonrpc":"2.0"}
- {"params": {"presetName": "NewPreset", "newPresetName": "NewPresetName"},
"method":"renamePreset", "id":"1234", "jsonrpc":"2.0"}
- {"params": {"presetSno": 1.00, "newPresetName": " newPresetName "},
"method":"renamePreset", "id":"1234", "jsonrpc":"2.0"}

activatePreset
• Definition:
- Recall a Preset on the Event Master processor. User can recall Preset with id, Preset serial number, or
Preset name.
- Send any one of the parameters to recall Preset.
• Request params:
- params: {"id": x, "type": x}
- params: {"presetSno": x.y, "type": x}
- params: {"presetName": "PresetName"}
◦ “type”—0 to recall in preview (default), 1 to recall in program.
This is not a mandatory parameter but should be given when the user wants to recall a Preset in
program.

542 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 Remote Control Protocol

• Response:
- response: null
- success: (0=success, anything else is an error)
• Example:
- {"params": {"id": 0, "type": 0}, "method":"activatePreset",
"id":"1234", "jsonrpc":"2.0"} //Recall in preview with id 0.
- {"params": {"presetName": "abc" }, "method":"activatePreset",
"id":"1234", "jsonrpc":"2.0"} //Recall in preview with preset name "abc".
- {"params": {"presetSno": 1.00, "type": 1}, "method":"activatePreset",
"id":"1234", "jsonrpc":"2.0"} //Recall in program with presetSno 1.

recallNextPreset
• Definition:
- Recall the next Preset on the Event Master processor.
No parameter is required.
- Make sure that the user has at least recalled one Preset. Web app recalls the next Preset from the last
Preset recalled.
• Request:
- params: {}
• Response:
- response: null
- success: (0=success, anything else is an error)
- An error is shown if there was no last recalled Preset or if there is no next Preset in the list.
• Example:
- {"params": {}, "method":"recallNextPreset", "id":"1234", "jsonrpc":"2.0"}

deletePreset
• Definition:
- Delete a Preset on the Event Master processor.
User can delete Preset with id, Preset serial number, or Preset name.
- Send any one of the parameters to delete Preset.
• Request:
- params: {"id": x}
- params: {"presetSno": x.y}
- params: {"presetName": "PresetName"}
• Response:
- response: null
- success: (0=success, anything else is an error)
• Example:
- {"params": {"id": 1}, "method":"deletePreset", "id":"1234", "jsonrpc":"2.0"}
- {"params": {"presetSno": 1.00}, "method":"deletePreset", "id":"1234",
"jsonrpc":"2.0"}
- {"params": {"presetName": "Preset 5.00"}, "method":"deletePreset",
"id":"1234", "jsonrpc":"2.0"}

listDestinations
• Definition:
- This API lists all the destinations with properties such as layers, outputs, id, size, and name.
• Request:
- params: {"type": x}
◦ 0—Show all the destinations.
0 is the default value for the type parameter.
◦ 1—Only screen destinations.
◦ 2—Only aux destinations.
• Response:
- response: Array of : {"ScreenDestination":[{"id": 0, "Name": "Dest1", "HSize": 3840,

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 543

 Remote Control Protocol

"VSize": 1080, "Layers": 1,"DestOutMapColl":[{"id": 0"DestOutMap":[{"id":

0, "Name": "Out1", "HPos": 0, "VPos": 0, "HSize": 1920, "VSize":1080,
"Freeze": 0},{"id": 1, "Name": "Out2", "HPos": 1920, "VPos": 0,
"HSize": 1920, "VSize":1080, "Freeze": 1}]}]}],"AuxDestination":
[{"id": 0, "AuxStreamMode": 4}, {"id": 1, "AuxStreamMode": 4}]}"
- success: (0=success, anything else is an error)
• Example:
- {"params": {"type": 0}, "method":"listDestinations", "id":"1234",
"jsonrpc":"2.0"}

listSources
• Definition:
- This API lists all the input sources with properties.
• Request:
- params: {"type": x}
◦ 0—Show all the input sources.
0 is the default value for the type parameter.
◦ 1—Only background sources.
• Response:
- response: Array of : {"id": 0, "Name": "InSource1", "HSize": 3840, "VSize": 1080,
"SrcType": 0, "InputCfgIndex": -1, "StillIndex": 0, "DestIndex": -1,
"UserKeyIndex": -1, "Mode3D": 0, "Freeze": 1, "Capacity": 2,
"InputCfgVideoStatus": 4}
◦ SrcType: 0 = Input, 1 = StillStore
◦ InputCfgVideoStatus: Input video status
◦ 0 = Invalid; there is sync, but cannot acquire / lock
◦ 1 = Valid; Video is OK
◦ 2 = MismatchFormat; Format mismatch between input cfg and connector(s)
◦ 3 = OutOfRange; connector capacity is too low to acquire format
◦ 4 = NoSync; no video
- success: (0=success, anything else is an error)
• Example:
- {"params": {"type": 0}, "method":"listSources", "id":"1234", "jsonrpc":"2.0"}

listContent
• Definition:
- This API shows the content of a screen destination.
• Request:
- params: {"id": x}
◦ “id”—Screen destination index.
• Response:
- response: { "id": 0, "Name": "ScreenDest1""BGLyr":[{"id": 0, "LastBGSourceIndex":
0, "BGShowMatte":0, "BGColor":[{"id":0, "Red":0, "Green":0, "Blue":0}]},
{"id": 1, "LastBGSourceIndex": 0, "BGShowMatte":0, "BGColor":[{"id":0,
"Red":0, "Green":0, "Blue":0}]}],(0 = PGM Background, 1 = PVW Background)
"Layers":[{"id": 0, "LastSrcIdx": 0, "HPos": 0, "VPos": 0, "HSize": 400,
"VSize": 300, "PvwMode": 0, "PgmMode": 0, "Freeze": 0, "FlexZOrder":
0,"LayerTrans":[{"id": 0, "TransTime": 30, "TransPos": 0}, {"id": 1,
"TransTime": 30, "TransPos": 0}] , "3D": "Yes", "Freeze": 0, "Capacity":
2}]}]}
◦ id—index of screen destination.
◦ Name—Name of ScreenDestination.
◦ BGLyr—Background layer index, Last source index of background.
“id”:0 affects the Background in Program. “id”:1 affects the Background in Preview.
◦ LastBGSoureIndex—This is –1 if no background is dropped, else this is index of last background
dropped on screen destination.
◦ BGShowMatte—This is if BG to be matte or not.
◦ BGColor—This is background color.
◦ Layers—Lists layers on screen destination with its properties.

544 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 Remote Control Protocol

◦ Transition—This property of screen destination contains the transition time (from time to move from
preview to program).
- success: (0=success, anything else is an error)
• Example:
- {"params": {"id": 0}, "method":"listContent", "id":"1234", "jsonrpc":"2.0"}

activateCue
• Definition:
- This API provides the option to play/pause/stop a cue.
- User can recall cue with id, serial number, or name.
• Request:
- params: {"id": 1, "type": x}, "method":"activateCue", "id":"1234",
"jsonrpc":"2.0"}
◦ id – Index of the cue
◦ type – (Default is play). x" can be : 0 — Play. 0 is the default value for the type parameter. 1 —
Pause, 2 – Stop
- params: {"cueName": "Cue1", "type": x}, "method":"activateCue", "id":"1234",
"jsonrpc":"2.0"}
- params: {"cueSerialNo": 1.00, "type": x}, "method":"activateCue", "id":"1234",
"jsonrpc":"2.0"}
• Response:
- response: null
- success: (0=success, anything else is an error)
• Example:
- {"params": {"id": 1}, "method":"activateCue", "id":"1234", "jsonrpc":"2.0"}
//Play – no parame or type 0
- {"params": {"type": 1}, "method":"activateCue", "id":"1234", "jsonrpc":"2.0"}
//Pause – type 1
- {"params": {"type": 2}, "method":"activateCue", "id":"1234", "jsonrpc":"2.0"}
//Stop – type 2
listCues
• Definition:
- This API lists all the cues.
• Request:
- params: {}, "method":"listCues", "id":"1234", "jsonrpc":"2.0"}
• Response:
- response: Array of cue objects.
- success: (0=success, anything else is an error)
• Example:
- {"params": {}, "method":"listCues", "id":"1234", "jsonrpc":"2.0"}
3dControl
• Definition:
- This API provides the option to modify 3d Controls.
• Request:
- params: {"id" : id, "type": x, "syncSource": y, "syncInvert": z}
◦ id – Index of the input config.
◦ type – "x" can be: 0 – Type Off. 0 is the default value for the type parameter. 1 – Type Sequentia.
◦ syncSource – "y" can be: 1 – mini-Din 1, 2 – mini-Din 2, 3 – mini-Din 3, 4 – mini-Din 4. Default value
is 1.
◦ syncInvert – "z" can be: 0 – Type Off. 0 is the default value for the syncInvert. 1 – Type Invert.
◦ To reset, do not provide any parameter except "id".
• Response:
- response: {"id": 0, "Name": "InSource1", "HSize": 3840, "VSize": 1080,
"Src-Type": 0, "InputCfgIndex": -1, "StillIndex": 0, "DestIndex": -1,
"UserKeyIndex": -1, "Mode3D": 0, "Freeze": 1, "Capacity": 2,
"InputCfgVideoStatus": 4}
- success: (0=success, anything else is an error)

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 545

 Remote Control Protocol

• Example:
- {"params": {"id": 1, "type": 0, "syncSource": 1, "syncInvert": 0},
"method":"3dControl", "id":"1234", "jsonrpc":"2.0"}

changeContent
• Definition:
- This API changes the content of a screen destination by putting background and layers in it.
• Request:
- params: {"id":0,"BGLyr":[{"id":0,"LastBGSourceIndex":0,"BGShowMatte":0,
"BGColor":[{"id":0,"Red":0,"Green":0,"Blue":0}]},{"id":1,
"LastBGSourceIndex":0,"BGShowMatte":0,"BGColor":
[{"id":0,"Red":0,"Green":0,"Blue":0}]}],"Layers":
[{"id":0,"LastSrcIdx":0,"Window":
{"HPos":0,"VPos":0,"HSize":400,"VSize":300},
"Source":{"HPos":0,"VPos":0,"HSize":1920,"VSize":1080}, "Mask":
{ "Left":0.01, "Right":10.1, "Top":0.0,"Bottom":0.0},"PvwMode":1,"PgmMode":0,
"Freeze":0,"PgmZOrder":0,"PvwZOrder":0}]}
◦ id—Screen destination index.
◦ BGLyr—Background layer index, Last source index of background.
“id”:0 affects the Background in Program. “id”:1 affects the Background in Preview.
◦ Layers—Layer information.
◦ Window—Layer window size.
◦ Source—Source info and size.
◦ Mask—Crop the visible part of the layer.
◦ PvwMode—Set 1 if you want the content in preview. (Default)
◦ PgmMode—Set 1 if you want the content in program.
• Response:
- response: null
- success: (0=success, anything else is an error)
• Example:
- {"params":{"id":0,"BGLyr":[{"id":0,"LastBGSourceIndex":0,"BGShowMatte":0,
"BGColor":[{"id":0,"Red":0,"Green":0,"Blue":0}]},{"id":1,
"LastBGSourceIndex":0,"BGShowMatte":0,"BGColor":[{"id":0,"Red":0,
"Green":0,"Blue":0}]}],"Layers":[{"id":0,"LastSrcIdx":0,
"Window":{"HPos":0,"VPos":0,"HSize":400,"VSize":300},
"Source":{"HPos":0,"VPos":0,"HSize":1920,"VSize":1080},
"Mask":{ "Left":0.01, "Right":10.1, "Top":0.0,"Bottom":0.0},
"PvwMode":1,"PgmMode":0,"Freeze":0,"PgmZOrder":0,"PvwZOrder":0}]},
"method":"changeContent", "id":"1234", "jsonrpc":"2.0"}.

freezeDestSource
• Definition:
- This API Freezes/Unfreezes the sources.
• Request:
- params: {"type": x, "id": y, "screengroup": z ,"mode": 0/1}
◦ type—type of source.
◦ 0—Input source.
◦ 1—Background source.
◦ 2—ScreenDestination.
◦ 3—AuxDestination.
◦ id—Index of the source.
- Screengroup—For future use. Always set to 0.
- Mode—0 : UnFreeze, 1 : Freeze.
• Response:
- response: null
- success: (0=success, anything else is an error)
• Example:
- {"params": {"type": 0, "id": 0, "screengroup": 0 ,"mode": 1},
"method":"freezeDestSource", "id":"1234", "jsonrpc":"2.0"}

546 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 Remote Control Protocol

listStill
• Definition:
- This API lists all the stills with properties such as id, Name, H/V size, LockMode, StillState, PngState,
File size.
• Request:
- params: {}
• Response:
- response: Array of : [{"id":0,"Name":"StillStore1",
"LockMode":0,"HSize":{"Min":0,"Max":99999,"$t":1920},"VSize":{"Min":0,
"Max":99999,"$t":1080},"StillState":{"Min":0,"Max":4,"$t":3},"PngState":
{"Min":0,"Max":2,"$t":0},"FileSize":{"Min":0,"Max":100000,"$t":9331.2}}]
◦ id—Index of still store.
◦ Name—Name of still store.
◦ LockMode—For future use. Always set to 0.
◦ H/V size—Horizontal and vertical size, Min, max and current value. It shows the current value.
◦ StillState—This tells user if the still is currently being captured or not, or if it is getting deleted.
◦ PngState—The “PNG” for stills are for the thumbnails we capture for the stills.
◦ FileSize—Size of the file created in KBs.
- success: (0=success, anything else is an error)
• Example:
- {"params": {}, "method":"listStill", "id":"1234", "jsonrpc":"2.0"}

deleteStill
• Definition:
- This API deletes a still.
• Request:
- params: {"id": x}
◦ id—Index of still.
• Response:
- response: null
- success: (0=success, anything else is an error)
• Example:
- {"params":{"id": 0}, "method":"deleteStill", "id":"1234", "jsonrpc":"2.0"}

takeStill
• Definition:
- This API creates/overwrites a still.
• Request:
- params: { "type": x, "id": y, "file": z}
◦ type—0 for input source, 1 for BG source.
◦ Id—Index of the source. If the source id of the destination is provided, no still is created and an error
is shown.
◦ File—still file id. If you pass “file” : 5, this creates StillStore6.
• Response:
- response: null
- success: (0=success, anything else is an error)
• Example:
- {"params":{"type":0 , "id": 1, "file": 5}, "method":"takeStill", "id":"1234",
"jsonrpc":"2.0"}
◦ This creates a still from input source id 1 as StillStore6.

getFrameSettings
• Definition:
- This API shows system information, including all the frames information.

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 547

 Remote Control Protocol

• Request:
- params: {}
• Response:
- {"System":{"id":0,"Name":"System1","FrameCollection":{"id":0,"Frame":
{"id":"00:0c:29:0e:86:d4","Name":"E2","Contact":"","Version":"4.2.30738",
"OSVersion":"NA","FrameType":0,"FrameTypeName":"E2","Enet":{"DhcpMode":0,
"DhcpModeName":"Static","IP":"10.98.0.165","StaticIP":"192.168.000.175",
"MacAddress":"00:0c:29:0e:86:d4","StaticMask":"255.255.255.000",
"StaticGateway":"192.168.000.001"},"SysCard":{"SlotState":2,
"CardStatusID":2,"CardStatusLabel":"Ready","CardTypeID":80,
"CardTypeLabel":"System","CardID":0},"Slot":[{"Card":{"CardStatusID":2,
"CardStatusLabel":"Ready","CardTypeID":70,"CardTypeLabel":"Expansion",
"CardID":"thisissometextforid0"}},{"Card":
{"CardStatusID":2,"CardStatusLabel":
"Ready","CardTypeID":70,"CardTypeLabel":"Expansion","CardID":
"thisissometextforid1"}},{"Card":{"CardStatusID":0,"CardStatusLabel":
"Not Installed","CardTypeID":255,"CardTypeLabel":"Unknown","CardID":
"Undefined"}},{"Card":{"CardStatusID":2,"CardStatusLabel":"Ready",
"CardTypeID":1,"CardTypeLabel":"SDI
Input","CardID":"thisissometextforid211"}},
{"Card":
{"CardStatusID":2,"CardStatusLabel":"Ready","CardTypeID":3,"CardID":
"thisissometextforid2"}},{"Card":
{"CardStatusID":2,"CardStatusLabel":"Ready",
"CardTypeID":0,"CardTypeLabel":"DVI
Input","CardID":"thisissometextforid4"}},
{"Card":{"CardStatusID":2,"CardStatusLabel":"Ready","CardTypeID":2,
"CardTypeLabel":"HDMI/DP Input","CardID":"thisissometextforid5"}},
{"Card":{"CardStatusID":2,"CardStatusLabel":"Ready","CardTypeID":2,
"CardTypeLabel":"HDMI/DP Input","CardID":"thisissometextforid7"}},
{"Card":{"CardStatusID":2,"CardStatusLabel":"Ready","CardTypeID":2,
"CardTypeLabel":"HDMI/DP Input","CardID":"thisissometextforid8"}},
{"Card":{"CardStatusID":2,"CardStatusLabel":"Ready","CardTypeID":2,
"CardTypeLabel":"HDMI/DP Input","CardID":"thisissometextforid9"}},
{"Card":{"CardStatusID":2,"CardStatusLabel":"Ready","CardTypeID":22,
"CardTypeLabel":"HDMI Output","CardID":"CardID3"}},{"Card":
{"CardStatusID":2,
"CardStatusLabel":"Ready","CardTypeID":22,"CardTypeLabel":"HDMI Output",
"CardID":"CardID4"}},{"Card":{"CardStatusID":2,"CardStatusLabel":"Ready",
"CardTypeID":21,"CardTypeLabel":"SDI Output","CardID":"CardID415"}},
{"Card":{"CardStatusID":2,"CardStatusLabel":"Ready","CardTypeID":40,
"CardTypeLabel":"MVR","CardID":"CardID15"}},{"Card":{"CardStatusID":2,
"CardStatusLabel":"Ready","CardTypeID":50,"CardTypeLabel":"VPU Scaler",
"CardID":"thisissometextforid501"}},{"Card":{"CardStatusID":2,
"CardStatusLabel":"Ready","CardTypeID":50,"CardTypeLabel":"VPU Scaler",
"CardID":"thisissometextforid502"}},{"Card":{"CardStatusID":2,
"CardStatusLabel":"Ready","CardTypeID":50,"CardTypeLabel":"VPU Scaler",
"CardID":"thisissometextforid503"}},{"Card":{"CardStatusID":2,
"CardStatusLabel":"Ready","CardTypeID":50,"CardTypeLabel":"VPU Scaler",
"CardID":"thisissometextforid504"}},{"Card":{"CardStatusID":0,
"CardStatusLabel":"Not Installed","CardTypeID":255,"CardTypeLabel":
"Unknown","CardID":"Undefined"}},{"Card":
{"CardStatusID":2,"CardStatusLabel":
"Ready","CardTypeID":50,"CardTypeLabel":"VPU Scaler","CardID":
"thisissometextforid505"}},{"Card":
{"CardStatusID":2,"CardStatusLabel":"Ready",
"CardTypeID":50,"CardTypeLabel":"VPU Scaler","CardID":
"thisissometextforid506"}},{"Card":
{"CardStatusID":2,"CardStatusLabel":"Ready",
"CardTypeID":50,"CardTypeLabel":"VPU Scaler","CardID":
"thisissometextforid507"}},{"Card":
{"CardStatusID":2,"CardStatusLabel":"Ready",
"CardTypeID":50,"CardTypeLabel":"VPU Scaler","CardID":
"thisissometextforid508"}}]}}}}}
◦ System—System name and index.

548 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 Remote Control Protocol

◦ FrameCollection—Collection of frames in a system containing frame information.

◦ Frame—Contains frame information.
◦ Id—Mac Id of the frame.
◦ Name—Name of the frame.
◦ Contact—Contact information.
◦ Version—Current version of the software installed on the frame.
◦ OSVersion—Current OS version installed on the frame.
◦ FrameType—0: E2, 1:S3, 2: Ex.
◦ FrameTypeName—Type of the frame: E2/S3/Ex.
◦ Enet—Ethernet settings.
◦ SysCard—System card information.
◦ Slot—List of Input/Output/Expansion card information.
- success: (0=success, anything else is an error)
• Example:
- {"params":{}, "method":"getFrameSettings", "id":"1234", "jsonrpc":"2.0"}

listAuxContent
• Definition:
- This API shows Aux destination information.
• Request:
- params: {"id" : x}
◦ id—Index of the Aux destination.
• Response:
- response: {"id":0,"Name":"AuxDest1","PvwLastSrcIndex":0,"PgmLastSrcIndex":0}
◦ id—Index of Aux destination.
◦ Name—Name of Aux destination.
◦ PvwLastSrcIndex—Input/Background source index in the preview area.
◦ PgmLastSrcIndex—Input/Background source index in the program area.
- success: (0=success, anything else is an error)
• Example:
- {"params": {"id": 0}, "method":"listAuxContent", "id":"1234", "jsonrpc":"2.0"}

changeAuxContent
• Definition:
- This API changes the source in the Aux destinations.
• Request:
- params: {"id":x , "Name": "AuxDest1" , "PvwLastSrcIndex": y , "PgmLastSrcIndex":
z}
◦ id—Index of the Aux destination.
◦ Name—Name of Aux destination. (Optional paramter)
◦ PvwLastSrcIndex—Input/Background source index to set in Aux destination in the preview area.
◦ PgmLastSrcIndex—Input/Background source index to set in Aux destination in the program area.
• Response:
- response: null
- success: (0=success, anything else is an error)
• Example:
- {"params": {"id":0 , "Name": "AuxDest1" , "PvwLastSrcIndex": 6 ,
"PgmLastSrcIndex": 1}, "method":"changeAuxContent", "id":"1234",
"jsonrpc":"2.0"}

Subscription and Un-Subscription

When a subscription is done from a JSON-based application, a notification is sent to the ip port where the
application is running when there is change for which the user has subscribed.
Actual notification is sent asynchronously as an HTTP Post, with the following structure: {result:
{method:
"notification",notificationType: "ScreenDestChanged",change: { add: [2],

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 549

 Remote Control Protocol

remove: [], update: [0, 1, 2] }}}.

The change field contains the XmlId(s) of the screens that were added/removed or updated.

All subscriptions are lost once the Event Master processor is restarted, and they must be
subscribed again if required.

subscribe
• Definition:
- User can use this API to subscribe to change events in the Event Master processor.
- Once subscribed, the API sends a notification in the form of an HTTP Post to the Url: http://hostname:
port/.
• Request:
- params: {"hostname": hostname, "port": port, "notification" : notificationType
[]}
◦ hostname—Hostname or IP Address to which the notifications are sent.
◦ port—TCP port to which the notification are posted.
◦ notificationTypes—an array of notifications to which a user wants to subscribe.
◦ ScreenDestChanged
◦ AUXDestChanged
◦ FrameChanged
◦ NativeRateChanged
◦ InputCfgChanged
◦ SourceChanged
◦ BGSourceChanged
◦ PresetChanged
◦ StillChanged
◦ OutputCfgChanged
• Response:
- response: {"method": "subscribe"}
- success: (0=success, anything else is an error)
• Example:
- {"params": {"hostname" : "192.168.247.131", "port": "3000", "notification" :
["ScreenDestChanged", "AUXDestChanged"]}, "method":"subscribe", "id":"1234",
"jsonrpc":"2.0"}

unsubscribe
• Definition:
- User can use this API to remove the subscription for the given hostname, port, and notificationType.
• Request:
- params: {"hostname": hostname, "port": port, "notification" : notificationType
[]}
◦ hostname—Hostname or IP Address from which the subscription is to be removed.
◦ port—TCP port.
◦ notificationTypes—an array of notifications to which a user wants to subscribe.
◦ ScreenDestChanged
◦ AUXDestChanged
◦ FrameChanged
◦ NativeRateChanged
◦ InputCfgChanged
◦ SourceChanged
◦ BGSourceChanged
◦ PresetChanged
◦ StillChanged
◦ OutputCfgChanged
• Response:
- response: {"method": "unsubscribe"}
- success: (0=success, anything else is an error)

550 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 Remote Control Protocol

• Example:
- {"params": {"hostname" : "192.168.247.131", "port": "3000", "notification" :
["ScreenDestChanged", "AUXDestChanged"]}, "method":"unsubscribe",
"id":"1234", "jsonrpc":"2.0"}

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 551

 Remote Control Protocol

552 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

Troubleshooting C

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 553

 Troubleshooting

C.1 Troubleshooting List

Problem solving
Problem Possible cause Remedy
Event Master unit doesn't start The Power supplies are not Make sure that at least one power
connected to a valid power source supply is connected to a valid
power source.
Make sure that the supplies are well
inserted in their slots. Remove the
power cord and apply a little
pressure by using the handle until
both supplies are fully inserted.
Corrupt configuration data is in the Press and hold the SEL and ESC
system. keys while applying power to the
unit. Release these keys when a
menu appears asking to Factory
Reset the unit. Perform the Factory
Reset and the unit will boot
normally.
One of the Power Supplies is not If the input AC power LED on the Check the AC power cable and
coming on Power supply is off, then the supply ensure that the unit is connected to
is not receiving a valid AC power a valid power source.
If the input AC power LED is green If the other Power supply is
but the output DC power LED is off functioning normally, swap it with
or if the status LED is amber, then the supply that doesn't work. If the
the supply is not producing valid DC problem follows the power supply,
output power then the you need to replace the
power supply. If the problem stays
with the slot, then the fault possibly
lies with the System Power card.
Contact your local Barco customer
service support for further
assistance.
All or most images are unstable or/ Temperature issue Operating ambient temperature
and noisy must be higher than 0°C (32°F)
and lower than 40°C (104°F) (lower
than 35° C (95° F) for EC-200/EC-
210).
Run the board diagnostics in order
to detect errors.
Leave sufficient front and rear
clearance to ensure that airflow
through the Event Master unit is not
restricted.
Clean the EMI filter, if an EMI filter
is present.
A specific image is unstable or/and Bad Input, output, VPU or Run the board diagnostics in order
noisy motherboard card to detect errors. If the board
diagnostics doesn’t detect any
errors proceed to the next step.
From the GUI change the output
card from which the image is
derived. If the problem persists,
then the issue is not with the output
card. Continue by switching the
input source to a different input
card. If the issue persists then the
issue is not with input card. If the
input and output cards have been
ruled out, then the issue is either
with a VPU card or with the
motherboard. In this case, contact

554 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 Troubleshooting

Problem Possible cause Remedy

your Barco customer service
support for further assistance.
The Event Master unit and the PC Cabling/network switch issue Check all of the Ethernet cables
running the GUI don’t communicate and verify that they are plugged in.
If you are using a network switch
verify that is on and is operating
properly.
Wrong IP address IP address is not within your LAN
range.
Conflict between network
addresses: Check if the Event
Master unit network address is not
already in use by another device on
the local network.
DHCP is not enabled.
When the PC running Event Master There is no DHCP server in this You need to disable the DHCP
Toolset Software is connected configuration option and enter a static network
directly with an Event Master unit, address compatible with the PC
the dynamic configuration (DHCP) running the Event Master control
doesn't work. software (range, Subnet mask,..).
Event Master unit constantly Invalid upgrade (deployment or Press and hold the SEL and ESC
reboots after a software upgrade defective installation) keys simultaneously until the front
panel shows the choice of
performing a factory reset or
continuing. Performing a factory
reset will allow the Event Master
unit to boot normally. If the problem
persists, contact you local Barco
customer service support for further
assistance.
Can't read or write to or from the Incorrect USB format or bad USB Ensure that your flash drive is
USB drive formatted to use the FAT32 file
system. If you can't access the USB
from a PC, then you have a faulty
USB drive.
The front panel display screen is display brightness Use the “VFD brightness” sub-
too dark menu in the System menu to adjust
the intensity of the front panel
vacuum fluorescent display (VFD)
screen.
The unit is not responding to any Front panel is locked To unlock the front panel, press and
front panel button presses. hold the SEL and ESC buttons
simultaneously for 3 seconds.
When the panel is unlocked, the
display screen displays the Status
menu.
After factory reset, the IP address is Wrong mode of the factory reset Use the “Factory Reset, Save IP”
lost command was used choice in the “factory reset” sub-
menu when you perform a factory
reset.
Unable to perform web upgrade Unable to perform web upgrade Make sure Event Master unit
connection with the LAN is
available.
Make sure there is an internet
access in the LAN

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 555

 Troubleshooting

556 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 Third Party Software
Acknowledgements D
About this annex
This chapter lists the third-party software components. The third-party software components are reusable
software components developed to be either freely distributed or sold by an entity other than the original
vendor of the development platform.

Overview
• Third Party Software list

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 557

 Third Party Software Acknowledgements

D.1 Third Party Software list

List and short description
The products and software applications described in this manual make use of one or more of the following
third party software items:
• Boost: Boost software is distributed under the Boost Software License, Version 1.0,
http://www.boost.org/LICENSE_1_0.txt
• Qt: The Qt GUI Toolkit is Copyright (C) 2015 Digia Plc and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
Contact: Digia Plc (http://www.qt.io/about-us/).
Qt is available under the LGPL version 2.1 (GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1).
• XFree86: is a trademark of The XFree86 Project, Inc.
• X11(TM) and X Window System(TM): is a trademark of The XFree86 Project, Inc.
• Xorg: Xorg is copyright software, provided under licenses that permit modification and redistribution in
source and binary form without fee. Xorg is copyright by numerous authors and contributors from around
the world. Licensing information can be found at http://www.x.org. Refer to the source code for specific
copyright notices.
• dfu-util: Licensed under the GNU General Public License, Version 2
http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/gpl-2.0.html
Source available from http://dfu-util.gnumonks.org/
• lib-usb-1.0.dll: Licensed under the GNU GPL Public License Version 2
A component of MinGW whose license can be found here: http://www.mingw.org/license
• LPCScrypt and image_manager executables: are copyright software, provided under license by NXP
SEMICONDUCTORS USA, INC. that permit redistribution in binary form without fee as part of supporting
software for products using devices manufactured by NXP.
The source code for the components of the Software and Separate Files are available from NXP and can
be obtained from http://www.lpcware.com/lpcxpresso/downloads/source.

558 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 Warranty E
About this annex
This chapter gives an overview of Warranty and conditions of RMA concerning the Event Master devices.

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 559

 Warranty

E.1 About Warranty and RMA

Warranty
All video products are designed and tested to the highest quality standards and are backed by a full 3-year
parts and labor warranty. Warranties are effective upon delivery date to customer and are non-transferable.
Barco warranties are only valid to the original purchaser/owner. Warranty related repairs include parts and
labor, but do not include faults resulting from user negligence, special modifications, lightning strikes, abuse
(drop/crush), and/or other unusual damages.
The customer shall pay shipping charges when unit is returned for repair. Barco will cover shipping charges for
return shipments to customers.

Return Material Authorization (RMA)

RMA Conditions are listed below:
1. Prior to returning any item, you must receive a Return Merchandise Authorization (RMA) number.
2. All RMA numbers must appear on their return-shipping label.
3. RMA numbers are valid for ten (10) days from issue date.
4. All shipping and insurance charges on all RMAs must be prepaid by the customer.

560 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 Index

A Adjust panel 144

Linking 160
About Network resource area 105
User Guide 14 System diagram area 106
About Event Master unit 13 System modifier area 109
About Setup menu 84 Configuration Menu (Example 1: Double
About Status menu 84 Screen Configuration) 289
About the System menu 85 Contact
About Warranty and RMA 560 Importer 519
Add Input 118 Sales 519
Add Output 128 Control overview 41
Adjustment area 110 Controller configuration
Adjustment area (Programming) 198 EC-30 controller connection 336
Application 1: Double Screen Configuration — Controller Configuration 335
Control Software Operation 287 Assigning resources to the desk 341
ASCII remote control EC-200/EC-210 controller connection 337
ASCII commands 538 EC-50 controller connection 337
Introduction 538 General 336
Auto add all inputs 117 Lights 339
Auto add live inputs 118 Touchscreen calibration 338
Auto add Outputs 128 Controller Menu 232
Auto create all inputs 117 Controller Operation 343
Auto create live inputs 118 Additional direct access and functionality 357
Auto create Outputs 128 EC-200/EC-210 Philosophy 349
Function Button For Syntax 351
General Overview 344
B How to select destinations 346
Background configuration How to use assign buttons 347
Configuration Menu (Adjustment area) 123 How to use the Contextual Display Buttons 349
Programming Menu (Adjustment area) 210 How to use the Layer buttons 346
Basic information 13 How to use the page arrow buttons 348
Black Invalid 85 How to use the T-bar 348
How to use transition buttons 348
What are Layer executers? 347
Controller orientation
C Assign buttons with contextual displays 321
Configuration Menu 103 Contextual Display Button Group (EC-200/EC-210
Adjustment only) 327
External Devices configuration 157 Description 310
Adjustment area 110 Destinations buttons 319
Adjustment area (Background Direct Selection Button Group and Barco Eye
Configuration) 123 Button (EC-200/EC-210 only) 324
Adjustment area (Destination Configuration) 132 EC-200/EC-210 backside overview
Adjustment area (Input Configuration) 113 EC-200 backside overview 317
Adjustment area (Output Configuration) 125 EC-210 backside overview 317
Adjustment area (Unit Configuration) 111 EC-200/EC–210 front panel 316
Destination configuration EC-30 backside 313

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 561

 Index

EC-30 front panel 312 Front Brackets 382

EC-50 backside 315 Front Cover Assembly 380
EC-50 front panel 314 Front Panel Board 389
Future Expansion Button Group (EC-200/EC-210 Front Panel Knob 387
only) 324 Front Panel Mount 388
Layer buttons 320 Front Rack-Ears 423, 455
Live Function Button Group (EC-200/EC-210 Genlock Assembly 403
only) 329 Genlock Cable 414
Num Pad Button Group (EC-200/EC-210 I/O and Link Cards 372
only) 328 Keyboard Cable 412
Panel Lock button (EC-200/EC-210 only) 332 Motherboard Fan 426
Rotary Encoders (EC-200/EC-210 only) 331 Power Supply 397
Save button (EC-200/EC-210 only) 332 Process Overview 370
Syntax Entry Button Group (EC-200/EC-210 Rear I/O, VPU and Link card Heatsink Fan 373
only) 327 Rear Rack Ears 422
System Function Button Group (EC-200/EC-210 Solid-State Memory 393
only) 326 Spare parts serviceable by all users 371
T-Bar 322 System Battery 395
Touch screen 319 System-Power Board 399
Trackball EC-200/EC-210 only) 330 Top Card Guide 425
Transition buttons 323 Top Cover 424
Use of color 318 Unit Overview 369
Controller Orientation 309 USB Cable 406
Controls 102 USB Extension Cable 408, 449
CPU Module 496 VFD Cable 409
Cue Menu VFD Display Assembly 391
Adjustment area 220–221 VFD Display Filter 392
How to modify a Cue 222 VPU Card(s) 386
How to play a Cue from the Cue Menu 222 EC-200/EC-210 CPU
How to play a Cue from the Programming Reboot 345
Menu 222 EC-200/EC-210 Maintenance 513
Network resource area 224 EC–30 Maintenance 507
System modifier area 220, 222 EC–50 Maintenance 509
EM GUI orientation 97
Environment conditions 43
D Environmental information 517
Disposal information 518
Dest Group configuration RoHS compliance 518
Programming Menu (Adjustment area) 207 Ethernet settings 89
Destination configuration Event Master Cards
Configuration Menu Input cards
Adjust panel 144 DP/HDMI Input card 491
Configuration Menu (Adjustment area) 132 DVI Input card 491
Destination groups SDI Input card 491
Programming Menu Output cards
Adjustment area (Dest Group DP Output card 491
configuration) 207 DVI Output card 491
Diagnostics 90 HDMI Output card 491
Diagram area (Programming) 192 SDI Output card 491
display brightness 90 VPU card 491
Download of Event Master Toolset Software 99 Event Master controllers features 36
Dual Link DVI Input Card 60 Event Master devices overview 26
Event Master series processors features 30
Event requirements 286
E EX Maintenance 487
E2 Maintenance 367 Process Overview 490
1RU Fan Cable 419 Spare parts serviceable by all users 490
1RU Fan Tray 384 Unit Overview 489
3RU Fan Cable 416 Expansion Link card 76
3RU Fan Tray 383 External devices Adjust tab
Bottom Panel 392 Add commands 157
CPU Module 396 Store commands 157
Ethernet Cable 415 Test commands 157
External devices tab 157

562 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 Index

F HDMI Output Card 70

HDMI/DisplayPort Input Card 62
Factories How to swap Z order 200
Production address 519
Firmware upgrade
EC-200/EC-210 I
Settings Menu 344
Web App 344 Important safety instructions 22
Firmware Upgrade 96 Initial inspection 43
Front panel 52 Input Configuration
Front Panel Menu orientation 79 Configuration Menu (Adjustment area) 113
Front Panel menu tree 80 Installation requirements 43
Function Button Introduction
Adjust 359 fonts 18
All Dest 359 pictures 18
All Layer 359 symbols 18
All Trans 361 User Guide 14
Barco Eye 360
Capture Still 360
Clear 359 J
Cue 356 JSON RPC remote control
Destination 351 API: Application Programming Interface 539
Device 355 Introduction 539
HELP Err 357 JSON RPC commands
Keyboard 362 Data interchange format 539
Layer 352 JSON: JavaScript Object Notation 539
Layout 357 RPC: Remote Procedure Call 539
Live 360
Modify PGM 360
Panel lock 361 L
Preset 355
PVW Trans 360 Layer configuration
Save All 361 Programming Menu (Adjustment area) 199
Save PGM 358 Layer Modifier area (Programming) 195
Screens 357 Layout area (Multiviewer Setup page) 227
Source 353 Linking
T-Bar Disable 361 Configuration Menu 160
Time 356 Lock front panel 94
User Key 355

M
G Maintenance
General E2 367
Control overview 25 EC-200/EC-210 513
Controller features 25 EC-30 507
Devices overview 25 EC-50 509
Initial inspection EX 487
Box content 25 S3 429
Installation requirements 25 Maintenance actions 363
Presentation system overview 25 E2 364
Processor features 25 EC-200/EC-210 366
Rack-mount procedure 25 EC-30 365
Terms and definitions 25 EC-50 365
General considerations 22 EX 365
General operation example 285 S3 364
General requirements 99 Mechanical check 47
Global Transition Rate/Trans/Cut Modifier area (Multiviewer Setup page) 229
Programming Menu (Adjustment area) 219 Motherboard Fansink 503
Motherboard removal
Chassis elements 498
H Rear-panel elements 498
Move 200
Hardware orientation 51 Multiviewer (MVR) Menu 225
Hazardous Chemicals 23

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 563

 Index

Multiviewer Menu R
Adjustment area 229
Adjustment area (Output Color) 230 Rack-Mount Procedure 47
Adjustment area (Window adjustment) 231 Rear panel 53
Layout area 227 Reboot
Modifier area 229 EC-200/EC-210 CPU 345
Resource area 226 Record of changes 14
Multiviewer Menu (Example 1: Double Screen Remote Control Protocol 537
Configuration) 305 Remove input 118
Multiviewer Output Color Remove output 128
Multiviewer Menu (Adjustment area) 230 Resource area (Multiviewer Setup page) 226
Multiviewer Setup page Resources area (Programming) 179
Multiviewer Menu (Adjustment area) 229 Restoring Factory Default Settings 95
Multiviewer Window adjustment
Multiviewer Menu (Adjustment area) 231
S
S3 Maintenance 429
N 3RU Fan Cable 477
Network resource area 105 3RU Fan Tray 440
Notice on safety 22 CPU Module 467
Ethernet Cable 480
Front Brackets 439
O Front Panel Board 444
Front Panel Mount 443
Output configuration Genlock Assembly 452
Configuration Menu (Adjustment area) 125 Genlock Cable 483
I/O, Link and VPU Cards 434
Keyboard Cable 474
P Link Card Interposer 466
Power Supply 494 Motherboard Fan 458
Power-up initialization 80 Power Interposer Assembly 460
Preliminary 286 Power Supply 451
Presentation System overview 42 Power Supply Guide 462
Presets configuration Process Overview 432
Programming Menu (Adjustment area) 215 Rear I/O, VPU and Link card Heatsink Fan 436–
Preventative 437
Maintenance actions 363 Side support plate 465
Programming Solid-State Memory 469
Programming Menu (Adjustment area) 198 Spare parts serviceable by all users 433
Programming Menu 178 System Battery 470
Adjustment area 198 Top Card Guide 457
Adjustment area (Background configuration) 210 Top Cover 456
Adjustment area (Dest Group configuration) 207 Unit Overview 431
Adjustment area (Global Transition Rate/Trans/ USB Cable 447
Cut) 219 VFD Cable 471
Adjustment area (Layer configuration) 199 VFD Display Assembly 445
Adjustment area (Presets configuration) 215 VFD Display Filter 446
Adjustment area (Source adjustment) 217 S3Maintenance
Adjustment area (User keys configuration) 212 Front Panel Knob 442
Diagram area 192 Rear Rack Ears 455
Layer Modifier area 195 Safety 21
Resources area 179 Hazardous Chemicals 23
Programming Menu (Example 1: Double Safety Data Sheet (SDS) 23
Screen Configuration) 294 Safety Data Sheet (SDS) 23
Save All 96
Screen layout presentation 100
Q SDI Input Card 58
SDI Output Card 72
Quad Channel DisplayPort 1.2 Input Card 63 Service
Quad Channel DisplayPort 1.2 Output Card 69 E2 367
Quad HDMI 2.0 input card 65 EC-200/EC-210 513
Quad HDMI 2.0 Output Card 71 EC-30 507
EC-50 509

564 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

 Index

EX 487 Create Sources from Inputs 272

S3 429 Destination Transition 277
Servicing 508, 510, 514 Drop backgrounds into Screen Destinations 273
Settings Menu 233 Drop Inputs to Aux Destinations 275
Web App area 238 Drop Sources, Layers into Screen Destinations &
Web App area (Contact us) 248 Sources into layers 273
Web App area (Dashboard) 239 Presets And User Keys 276
Web App area (Follow us) 249 Select Thumbnails for Backgrounds 271
Web App area (Help) 247 Select Thumbnails for Inputs 271
Web App area (Tools > Backup & Restore) 246 System Setup: Restoring the system 255
Web App area (Tools > Manage Software) 244 System Setup: Saving the setup 256
Web App area (Tools) 243 System Setup: Setup Prerequisites 252
Soft-Off button System Setup: setup sequence 252
EC-200/EC-210 GUI 344 System Setup: User preference 256
power down 344
power off 344
Software installation 100 T
Software version 43
Source adjustment Terms and definitions 38
Programming Menu (Adjustment area) 217 The 4K screen management system 19
Specifications 521 Third Party Software Acknowledgements 557
Specifications of E2 522 List and description 558
Specifications of E2 Jr. 523 Top Cover 493
Specifications of EC-200 529 Tri-Combo input card
Specifications of EC-210 530 Assembly 375, 437, 493
Specifications of EC-30 528 Disassembly 375, 437, 493
Specifications of EC-50 528 Tri-Combo Input Card 66
Specifications of EX 527 Tri-Combo output card
Specifications of S3–4K 524 Assembly 375, 437, 493
Specifications of S3–4K Jr. 525 Disassembly 375, 437, 493
Specifications of standard connections 531 Tri-Combo Output Card 73
Standard connection specifications 531 Troubleshooting 553
Standard connector pinouts 532 Troubleshooting List 554
Starting up 100
Symbols 18
System Battery 497 U
System menu Unit Configuration
Black Invalid 85 Configuration Menu (Adjustment area) 111
Diagnostics 90 Unlock front panel 94
Ethernet 89 Unpacking 44
Lock front panel 94 Updating firmware 279
USB Backup/Restore 86 Upgrading firmware using the USB port 280
VFD brightness 90 Upgrading firmware using the web Upgrade 281
System modifier area 109 USB device (Backup/Restore) 86
System Setup 251 User keys configuration
System Setup: Backing up the system 257 Programming Menu (Adjustment area) 212
System Setup: Communication setup 254 Using menu system 81
System Setup: Configuration Menu Using the Tech Support menu 94
Add Aux Destinations 267
Add Background(s) 258
Add Inputs 259 V
Add MVR Outputs 269
Add Outputs 260 VFD brightness 90
Add Screen Destinations & Layers 263 VPU Card 77
Initial Setup 257
Layer optimization 266
System Setup: Factory default 254 W
System Setup: Multiviewer Menu Warranty 559
Drop Inputs, Backgrounds and Destinations 277 Web App area
System Setup: Power up and Status check 253 Setting Menu > Contact us 248
System Setup: Programming Menu Setting Menu > Dashboard 239
Capture Stillstore from Inputs & Setting Menu > Follow us 249
Backgrounds 270 Setting Menu > Help 247

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 565

 Index

Setting Menu > Tools > Backup & Restore 246

Settings Menu 238
Web App area (Setting Menu > Tools >
Manage Software) 244
Web App area (Setting Menu > Tools) 243

566 R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices

R5905948 /11 Event Master Devices 567
R5905948 /11 | 2019-06-12

Barco Inc, Image Processing | 3078 Prospect Park Drive, Rancho Cordova, CA , 95670, USA
Registered office: Barco NV | President Kennedypark 35, 8500 Kortrijk, Belgium
www.barco.com